Back

Electronic Chart Display and

Information System (ECDIS)

FEA-2107/2107-BB/2807
 The paper used in this manual
is elemental chlorine free.

FURUNO Authorized Distributor/Dealer

9-52 Ashihara-cho,
Nishinomiya 662-8580, JAPAN

Telephone : 0798-65-2111
Fax : 0798-65-4200

All rights reserved. Printed in Japan FIRST EDITION : JUL. 2004

D1 : JAN. 29, 2007
Pub. No. OME-41220

( DAMI ) FEA-2107/BB/2807 *00014977413*

*00014977413*
*00014977413*
Important Notices
• This manual is intended for native speakers of English.

• No part of this manual may be copied or reproduced without written permission.

• If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.

• The contents of this manual and equipment specifications are subject to change without notice.

• The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual may not match the screens you see on your display.
The screen you see depends on your system configuration and equipment settings.

• Store this manual in a convenient place for future reference.

• FURUNO will assume no responsibility for the damage caused by improper use or modification of the
equipment (including software) by an unauthorized agent or a third party.

• Dispose of the equipment according to local regulations.

i
Safety Information

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD The PCI -951 board in the processor unit
Do not open the equipment. has a lithium battery. The battery should
only be replaced in the factory.
Only qualified personnel
should work inside the There battery may burst if it is the wrong
equipment. type.

Do not disassemble or modify the

equipment.

Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can

result. CAUTION
No one navigation device should ever be
Turn off the power immediately if water solely relied upon for the navigation of
leaks into the equipment or the equip- the vessel.
ment is emitting smoke or fire.
Always confirm position against all
Continued use of the equipment can cause available aids to navigation, for safety
fire or electrical shock. of vessel and crew.

Do not place liquid-filled containers on

the top of the equipment.

Fire or electrical shock can result if a liquid WARNING LABEL

spills into the equipment. A warning label is attached to the
processor unit. Do not remove the label.
Do not operate the equipment with wet If the label is missing or damaged,
hands. contact a FURUNO agent or dealer
about replacement.
Electrical shock can result.
WARNING Name: Warning Label (1)
To avoid electrical shock, do not Type: 86-003-1011-0
Do not allow rain or water splash to leak remove cover. No user-serviceable Code No.: 100-236-230
parts inside.
into the equipment.

Fire or electrical shock can results if water

leaks into the equipment.

ii
Table of Contents

Foreword................................................................................................................................. xv
Features .....................................................................................................................................................xv
Program Number........................................................................................................................................xv
1. Introduction.................................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1 Manual Contents ........................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 System Configuration.................................................................................................................... 1-2
1.2.1 Single workstation ............................................................................................................. 1-2
1.2.2 Multiple workstation configuration .................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 The Processor Unit ........................................................................................................................ 1-4
1.4 Turning the Power On/Off ............................................................................................................. 1-4
1.5 How to Find Version Number of ECDIS Software.......................................................................... 1-4
1.6 Diagnostics ................................................................................................................................... 1-4
2. Navigation Tasks .......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Voyage Planning............................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2.1 Route planning .................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.2.2 Route calculation ............................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.3 Chart planning ................................................................................................................... 2-2
2.2.4 User chart planning............................................................................................................ 2-3
2.3 Positioning.................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3.1 Direct positioning sensors .................................................................................................. 2-3
2.3.2 Dead reckoning equipment................................................................................................. 2-3
2.3.3 Manual correction.............................................................................................................. 2-4
2.4 Monitoring.................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.4.1 Display of electronic sea chart............................................................................................ 2-4
2.4.2 Alarms............................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.4.3 Man overboard .................................................................................................................. 2-5
2.4.4 Data logging ...................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.4.5 Data distribution ................................................................................................................ 2-5
3. ECDIS Display.............................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Electronic Chart Area .................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 Electronic charts in ECDIS ................................................................................................ 3-2
3.3 User Interface................................................................................................................................ 3-4
3.3.1 Color palettes for the user interface .................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.2 Sidebar on user interface .................................................................................................... 3-6
3.3.3 Activating dialog boxes on the display ..............................................................................3-10
3.4 Controlling Planning and Monitoring Modes on the ECDIS Display..............................................3-12
4. Control Units ................................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1 How the ECDIS is Controlled........................................................................................................ 4-1
4.2 Control Unit RCU-018 .................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.1 Keys in control unit RCU-018............................................................................................ 4-2
4.3 Control Unit RCU-015 .................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.3.1 Configuring hot keys F1-F4 ............................................................................................... 4-4
4.4 Mouse Operations ......................................................................................................................... 4-5
4.4.1 Parts of the mouse.............................................................................................................. 4-5
4.4.2 How to enter alphanumeric data ......................................................................................... 4-6
4.4.3 Using the thumbwheel ....................................................................................................... 4-8
4.4.4 Calling menus and functions by the mouse buttons ............................................................4-10
5. Standby Mode............................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Switching Standby Mode ON and OFF .......................................................................................... 5-1

iii
Table of Contents

6. Setup Before Departure ............................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Update Chart Material.................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Display and Approve Dates for S57 Charts and Manual Updates..................................................... 6-1
6.3 Creating or Updating User Chart .................................................................................................... 6-1
6.4 Creating or Updating Pilot Data ..................................................................................................... 6-1
6.5 Setting Chart Alarm Calculation..................................................................................................... 6-2
6.6 Creating or Updating a Route......................................................................................................... 6-2
6.6.1 Checking your route against chart alarms............................................................................ 6-2
6.6.2 Recalculating timetable and ETA values............................................................................. 6-3
6.7 Checking and Preparing Route to Monitor...................................................................................... 6-4
6.7.1 Choosing TO waypoint....................................................................................................... 6-5
6.7.2 Choosing final waypoint..................................................................................................... 6-5
6.7.3 Confirming checked conditions of the route plan ................................................................ 6-5
6.7.4 Using planned user chart .................................................................................................... 6-6
6.7.5 Using planned pilot data ..................................................................................................... 6-7
6.8 Verifying Configuration of Navigation Sensors............................................................................... 6-8
6.8.1 Verifying source of navigation sensors ............................................................................... 6-8
6.9 Resetting Distance and Trip Counters........................................................................................... 6-10
6.10 Verifying Datum .......................................................................................................................... 6-10
7. Conditions Required to Replace Paper Charts........................................................... 7-1
7.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 Detecting ENC Coverage in S57 Chart Display .............................................................................. 7-4
8. Vector Chart Material ................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 S57 Charts..................................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2.2 Chart legend of S57 chart ................................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.3 Permanent warnings of S57 charts ...................................................................................... 8-4
8.3 Loading S57 Charts ....................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.1 Flow chart for loading S57 charts into ECDIS..................................................................... 8-5
8.3.2 Loading S57 charts from a CD ROM, floppy disk or LAN .................................................. 8-7
8.3.3 Loading S57 charts which are not fully compliant with the IMO standards ....................... 8-16
8.4 S57 SENC Conversion Details ..................................................................................................... 8-17
8.4.1 Speeding up SENC conversion ......................................................................................... 8-17
8.4.2 Choosing automatic SENC conversion and display until date ............................................ 8-18
8.4.3 Viewing progress of SENC conversion ............................................................................. 8-19
8.4.4 Using the Failed SENC conversion window...................................................................... 8-20
8.4.5 Using SENC conversion history log.................................................................................. 8-21
8.4.6 Using SENC convert window to initiate SENC conversion ............................................... 8-23
8.5 Features of the Chart Menu.......................................................................................................... 8-24
8.5.1 Overview of the chart menu.............................................................................................. 8-24
8.5.2 Catalogue of S57 cells...................................................................................................... 8-26
8.5.3 Grouping S57 chart cells .................................................................................................. 8-28
8.5.4 Viewing status and setting viewing dates of S57 chart cells and their updates .................... 8-37
8.5.5 Removing an S57 chart cell from the system..................................................................... 8-38
8.6 S57 Chart Service from an RENC ................................................................................................ 8-39
8.6.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 8-39
8.6.2 Permits............................................................................................................................. 8-39
8.6.3 Product list....................................................................................................................... 8-39
8.6.4 Authentication.................................................................................................................. 8-39
8.6.5 Available service types..................................................................................................... 8-40
8.6.6 Subscription types ............................................................................................................ 8-40
8.7 Services Provided by an RENC.................................................................................................... 8-41
8.7.1 Viewing the coverage of an RENC service........................................................................ 8-41
8.7.2 Knowing up-to-date status of a chart from an RENC......................................................... 8-42
8.7.3 Knowing up-to-date status of an RENC product list .......................................................... 8-43
8.7.4 Managing permits from an RENC..................................................................................... 8-44
8.7.5 Managing public key from an RENC................................................................................ 8-45
8.8 CD ROM Service From an RENC................................................................................................ 8-47
8.8.1 Getting started with S57 charts using an RENC ................................................................ 8-47
8.8.2 Keeping S57 charts up to date using an RENC.................................................................. 8-48

iv
 Table of Contents

8.8.3 Enlarging chart coverage using an RENC..........................................................................8-49

8.8.4 Base CD ROM from an RENC..........................................................................................8-49
8.8.5 Update CD ROM from an RENC ......................................................................................8-53
8.8.6 Viewing coverage of a base or update CD ROM from an RENC........................................8-57
8.8.7 Loading an RENC-generated permit CD ROM or floppy disk............................................8-58
8.9 RENC Security System.................................................................................................................8-60
8.9.1 Standard messages in S57 chart load .................................................................................8-60
8.9.2 Additional messages in S57 chart load...............................................................................8-60
8.9.3 Standard messages in S57 SENC conversion .....................................................................8-62
8.9.4 Additional messages in S57 SENC conversion ..................................................................8-63
8.10 Vector Chart Display ....................................................................................................................8-64
8.10.1 Choosing vector chart material to use...............................................................................8-64
8.10.2 Choosing charts for viewing ............................................................................................8-64
8.10.3 Choosing a chart by its name on the display .....................................................................8-65
8.10.4 Controlling visible chart features .....................................................................................8-66
8.10.5 Display base ....................................................................................................................8-68
8.10.6 Controlling visible navigation features.............................................................................8-69
8.10.7 Storing and recalling chart display settings for visible chart and navigational features......8-73
8.10.8 Control of predefined IMO chart display settings .............................................................8-74
8.11 Sailing Directions, Tidal Tables, etc., Features of Vector Charts (S57) ...........................................8-75
8.12 Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of the Vector Chart ....................................................8-76
8.12.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................8-76
8.12.2 Approving and highlighting vector chart updates..............................................................8-76
8.12.3 Setting “display until” date ..............................................................................................8-77
8.12.4 Setting “approve until” date.............................................................................................8-77
8.12.5 About chart viewing date dependency of S57 standard .....................................................8-78
8.12.6 Other functions of chart viewing dates window ................................................................8-83
8.13 Symbology Used in Vector Charts.................................................................................................8-84
8.13.1 How to change presentation library used for vector chart features.....................................8-85
8.14 Requesting Information About Vector Chart Objects .....................................................................8-85
8.14.1 Setting visible vector chart features..................................................................................8-85
8.14.2 Choosing desired object from the list of found objects......................................................8-85
8.14.3 Viewing properties of a vector chart object ......................................................................8-87
8.14.4 About vector chart coding................................................................................................8-88
8.15 Other Features of Vector Charts ....................................................................................................8-94
8.15.1 Cell status .......................................................................................................................8-94
8.15.2 S57 cell details ................................................................................................................8-95
8.15.3 Using cell status window to initiate SENC conversion......................................................8-96
9. Raster Chart Material.................................................................................................. 9-1
9.1 ARCS Charts................................................................................................................................. 9-1
9.1.1 Chart legend of ARCS chart............................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 T&P notices, details and warnings of ARCS....................................................................... 9-2
9.2 Datum and ARCS Charts ............................................................................................................... 9-5
9.2.1 Difference between ARCS chart local datum and positions in WGS-84 datum .................... 9-5
9.2.2 Permanent messages of ARCS ..........................................................................................9-10
9.3 Chart Menu ..................................................................................................................................9-11
9.4 ARCS Subscriptions.....................................................................................................................9-12
9.4.1 ARCS Navigator...............................................................................................................9-12
9.4.2 ARCS Skipper ..................................................................................................................9-12
9.4.3 ARCS license information.................................................................................................9-12
9.4.4 Getting started with ARCS charts......................................................................................9-13
9.4.5 Loading chart permits for ARCS Navigator license............................................................9-14
9.4.6 Loading chart permits for ARCS Skipper license...............................................................9-15
9.4.7 Removing chart permits ....................................................................................................9-16
9.4.8 Loading a new ARCS chart into the system .......................................................................9-17
9.4.9 Updating ARCS charts......................................................................................................9-20
9.4.10 Viewing chart load and update history of ARCS ..............................................................9-23
9.4.11 Viewing update status of your ARCS charts.....................................................................9-24
9.4.12 ARCS catalogue ..............................................................................................................9-25
9.4.13 Grouping ARCS charts....................................................................................................9-27
9.4.14 Removing ARCS charts from the system .........................................................................9-30

v
Table of Contents

9.5 ARCS Chart Display.................................................................................................................... 9-32

9.5.1 Displaying ARCS chart material....................................................................................... 9-32
9.5.2 Choosing ARCS chart datum............................................................................................ 9-32
9.5.3 Viewing different ARCS charts ........................................................................................ 9-33
9.5.4 Choosing an ARCS chart by its number on display ........................................................... 9-35
9.5.5 Controlling visible ARCS chart features ........................................................................... 9-37
9.5.6 Display base..................................................................................................................... 9-39
9.5.7 Controlling visible navigation features.............................................................................. 9-42
9.5.8 Storing and recalling chart display settings for visible chart and navigational features ....... 9-46
10. Manual Updates ..........................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................. 10-1
10.2 Symbols to Use with Manual Updates .......................................................................................... 10-2
10.3 Displaying Manual Updates ......................................................................................................... 10-2
10.3.1 Controlling visibility of orange symbols from manual updates ......................................... 10-2
10.3.2 Controlling visibility of true symbols from manual updates ............................................. 10-3
10.4 Controlling Chart Viewing Dates of Manual Updates.................................................................... 10-3
10.4.1 Setting current date for viewing....................................................................................... 10-3
10.5 Using Manual Update Editor w/Orange Symbols.......................................................................... 10-4
10.5.1 Manual update planning.................................................................................................. 10-4
10.5.2 Inserting new orange symbols ......................................................................................... 10-5
10.5.3 Deleting orange symbols................................................................................................. 10-8
10.5.4 Editing position of orange symbols ................................................................................. 10-9
10.6 Using Manual Update Editor with True Symbols ........................................................................ 10-12
10.6.1 Manual update planning................................................................................................ 10-12
10.6.2 Deleting chart objects ................................................................................................... 10-13
10.6.3 Modifying chart objects ................................................................................................ 10-14
10.6.4 Inserting new chart objects............................................................................................ 10-15
10.6.5 Editing properties of manually updated chart objects ..................................................... 10-21
10.7 Checking Creation and Usage History of Manual Updates .......................................................... 10-24
11. Chart Alarms ..............................................................................................................11-1
11.1 General........................................................................................................................................ 11-1
11.2 Chart Alarms ............................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.2.1 Choosing safety contour.................................................................................................. 11-2
11.2.2 Choosing objects used in chart alarms ............................................................................. 11-3
11.2.3 Highlighting chart alarms................................................................................................ 11-5
11.3 Inserting User Chart Symbols, Lines and Areas in Chart Alarm..................................................... 11-6
11.4 Activating Own Ship Check......................................................................................................... 11-8
11.5 Route Planning .......................................................................................................................... 11-10
11.5.1 Finding chart alarms leg by leg ..................................................................................... 11-11
11.5.2 Finding chart alarms by category................................................................................... 11-12
11.6 Route Monitoring ...................................................................................................................... 11-13
11.7 Chart Alarm Using ARCS Charts ............................................................................................... 11-14
12. Navigation Tools .........................................................................................................12-1
12.1 Display Mode and Chart Orientation ............................................................................................ 12-1
12.1.1 Choosing desired display mode and chart orientation....................................................... 12-1
12.2 Navigation Marks ........................................................................................................................ 12-2
12.2.1 Shifting the EBL............................................................................................................. 12-3
12.2.2 Shifting the VRM ........................................................................................................... 12-3
12.2.3 Adjusting the parallel index lines .................................................................................... 12-3
12.2.4 Shifting the reference point ............................................................................................. 12-4
13. Route Planning............................................................................................................13-1
13.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.2 Main Menu for Route Planning .................................................................................................... 13-2
13.3 Choosing Datum.......................................................................................................................... 13-3
13.4 Creating a New Route .................................................................................................................. 13-4
13.4.1 Processing waypoints...................................................................................................... 13-5
13.4.2 Alarms page ................................................................................................................... 13-6
13.4.3 Using the check page ...................................................................................................... 13-6
13.4.4 Using the parameters page .............................................................................................. 13-7
13.4.5 Using the prepare page.................................................................................................... 13-7

vi
 Table of Contents

13.5 Modifying an Existing Route ........................................................................................................13-8

13.5.1 Parameters.......................................................................................................................13-8
13.5.2 Changing waypoint position ............................................................................................13-8
13.5.3 Changing other waypoint data........................................................................................13-10
13.5.4 Adding a new waypoint at the end of a route..................................................................13-11
13.5.5 Inserting a waypoint ......................................................................................................13-11
13.5.6 Deleting a waypoint.......................................................................................................13-12
13.5.7 Importing waypoint from other routes............................................................................13-12
13.5.8 Importing waypoint from external device (GP-80 or GP-90)...........................................13-13
13.5.9 Reversing sailing order of a route...................................................................................13-14
13.5.10 Geometry check of route................................................................................................13-14
13.6 Route Optimization ....................................................................................................................13-14
13.6.1 Available route optimization strategies...........................................................................13-14
13.6.2 Optimizing a route.........................................................................................................13-15
13.6.3 Planning a speed profile.................................................................................................13-15
13.7 WP Table Report ........................................................................................................................13-16
13.8 Full WP Report ..........................................................................................................................13-17
13.9 Passage Plan Report ...................................................................................................................13-18
14. Route Monitoring ....................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................14-1
14.2 Choosing Route to Monitor...........................................................................................................14-1
14.3 Choosing TO Waypoint ................................................................................................................14-2
14.4 Choosing Final Waypoint..............................................................................................................14-3
14.5 Viewing Waypoint Information.....................................................................................................14-3
14.6 Displaying a Route on the Electronic Chart Screen.......................................................................14-4
14.7 Route Assistant.............................................................................................................................14-5
14.8 Monitoring a Route ......................................................................................................................14-7
14.9 ETA (Estimated Time Of Arrival) .................................................................................................14-8
14.10 Route Monitoring Alarms ...........................................................................................................14-11
15. User Chart Control..................................................................................................... 15-1
15.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................15-1
15.1.1 Objects of user charts ......................................................................................................15-1
15.1.2 Modes of user charts........................................................................................................15-2
15.2 What is a User Chart Point and How is it Used? ............................................................................15-4
15.3 Choosing Datum ..........................................................................................................................15-6
15.4 Choosing User Chart to use in Monitoring Mode...........................................................................15-6
15.5 Choosing User Chart to use in Planning Mode ..............................................................................15-7
15.6 Creating a User Chart ...................................................................................................................15-8
15.6.1 Point page .......................................................................................................................15-9
15.6.2 Symbol page .................................................................................................................15-10
15.6.3 Line page ......................................................................................................................15-11
15.6.4 Tidal page .....................................................................................................................15-12
15.6.5 Area page......................................................................................................................15-13
15.6.6 Adding a new point, symbol, line or tidal to a user chart.................................................15-16
15.6.7 Changing other data of point, symbol, line or tidal .........................................................15-17
15.6.8 Deleting a point, symbol, line or tidal.............................................................................15-17
15.6.9 Importing points, symbols, lines or tidals from other user chart ......................................15-18
15.7 Joining Two or More User Charts ...............................................................................................15-18
15.8 Displaying User Charts on ECDIS display ..................................................................................15-19
15.9 Backing up User Charts to a Floppy Disk....................................................................................15-21
15.10 Restoring User Charts from a Floppy Disk..................................................................................15-21
15.11 Reports ......................................................................................................................................15-21
16. Pilot Data .................................................................................................................... 16-1
16.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................16-1
16.1.1 Pilot data modes ..............................................................................................................16-2
16.2 Using Pilot Data ...........................................................................................................................16-3
16.3 Choosing Pilot Data to use in Monitoring Mode............................................................................16-4
16.3.1 Monitor pilot data dialog box description .........................................................................16-5
16.4 Choosing Pilot Data to use in Planning Mode................................................................................16-6
16.4.1 Plan pilot data dialog box description...............................................................................16-7

vii
Table of Contents

16.5 Creating New Pilot Data .............................................................................................................. 16-8

16.5.1 Adding new pilot data record .......................................................................................... 16-8
16.5.2 Choosing pilot data record to modify............................................................................... 16-9
16.5.3 Changing pilot data record position ................................................................................. 16-9
16.5.4 Changing other data of pilot data record ........................................................................ 16-10
16.5.5 Deleting a pilot data record ........................................................................................... 16-10
16.5.6 Importing pilot data from other routes ........................................................................... 16-10
17. Backup Operations .....................................................................................................17-1
17.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................. 17-1
17.2 Choosing Appropriate File Category ............................................................................................ 17-2
17.3 Copying a File ............................................................................................................................. 17-2
17.4 Renaming a File........................................................................................................................... 17-2
17.5 Backing up a File to a Floppy Disk............................................................................................... 17-3
17.6 Restoring a File from a Floppy Disk............................................................................................. 17-3
17.7 Deleting a File ............................................................................................................................. 17-3
17.8 Moving a File to Planning or Navigation Station .......................................................................... 17-4
17.9 Reading a File from Planning or Navigation Station ..................................................................... 17-5
17.10 Loading User Chart and Route Files of Former Vector System Format.......................................... 17-5
17.11 Saving User Chart and Route Files in Former Vector System Format ............................................ 17-5
17.12 Saving a Route as an ASCII Text File........................................................................................... 17-6
17.13 Restoring a Route from an ASCII Text File .................................................................................. 17-6
17.14 Backing up Chart Material ........................................................................................................... 17-7
17.15 Restoring Chart Material.............................................................................................................. 17-8
18. Common Reference System (Multi-workstation mode) ............................................18-1
18.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................. 18-1
18.2 Controlling Common Reference System....................................................................................... 18-2
18.2.1 Shared alarm management .............................................................................................. 18-1
18.2.2 Harmonized databases on workstations............................................................................ 18-1
18.2.3 Shared user selections ..................................................................................................... 18-3
18.3 Usage Rights ............................................................................................................................... 18-3
18.3.1 Setting usage rights as “master” ...................................................................................... 18-3
18.3.2 Setting usage rights as “multi” or “slave” ........................................................................ 18-4
18.3.3 Setting usage rights as “plan”.......................................................................................... 18-5
18.4 Sensor Source for the System....................................................................................................... 18-6
18.5 Mode of Workstations.................................................................................................................. 18-7
18.5.1 Changing mode to single or multi workstation................................................................. 18-7
18.6 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................... 18-8
18.6.1 What to do if pending access server window remains on screen ....................................... 18-8
18.6.2 Access server log ............................................................................................................ 18-9
18.6.3 Human interface log...................................................................................................... 18-10
19. Navigation Sensors......................................................................................................19-1
19.1 Choosing Navigation Sensors....................................................................................................... 19-1
19.1.1 Sensors dialog box description ........................................................................................ 19-1
19.2 Source of Position........................................................................................................................ 19-6
19.3 Primary and Secondary Positions of Own Ship............................................................................. 19-7
19.4 Position Discrepancy Alarm......................................................................................................... 19-8
19.5 Source of SOG, COG, Speed, Heading, ROT, Drift and Docking Speed Components .................... 19-9
19.6 Dual Gyro Interface for DNV NAUT-AW .................................................................................. 19-13
19.6.1 Indication of gyro source............................................................................................... 19-14
19.6.2 Gyro-associated alarms ................................................................................................. 19-15
19.7 Filter Operation ......................................................................................................................... 19-16
19.7.1 Filter and automatic route steering................................................................................. 19-17
19.8 Position Alignment .................................................................................................................... 19-18
19.8.1 Position alignment by means of the ECDIS ................................................................... 19-18
19.8.2 Resetting position alignment ......................................................................................... 19-20
19.8.3 Position alignment by ARPA radar................................................................................ 19-20
19.9 Gyro Error Correction................................................................................................................ 19-21
19.9.1 Enabling gyro error correction....................................................................................... 19-22
19.10 Wind Sensor .............................................................................................................................. 19-23
19.10.1 Installation parameter for wind sensor ........................................................................... 19-24

viii
 Table of Contents

19.11 Depth Sensor..............................................................................................................................19-26

19.12 Sensor-related Alarms.................................................................................................................19-27
20. ARPA Target Functions............................................................................................. 20-1
20.1 ARPA Radar Targets.....................................................................................................................20-1
20.1.1 Dangerous ARPA radar targets ........................................................................................20-1
20.1.2 Lost ARPA radar targets..................................................................................................20-1
20.1.3 Displaying true or relative speed vectors ..........................................................................20-2
20.2 Displaying ARPA Target Data.......................................................................................................20-3
20.2.1 Viewing ARPA data of normal targets .............................................................................20-3
20.3 Source of ARPA Radar Targets .....................................................................................................20-4
20.3.1 ARPA-related alarms.......................................................................................................20-4
20.4 Displaying ARPA Target Past Positions.........................................................................................20-5
20.5 ARPA Target Recording Functions................................................................................................20-6
20.6 Using ARPA Targets for Chart Align.............................................................................................20-6
21. AIS Target Functions ................................................................................................. 21-1
21.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................21-1
21.2 Displaying AIS Targets.................................................................................................................21-2
21.2.1 Dangerous AIS targets.....................................................................................................21-3
21.2.2 Lost AIS targets...............................................................................................................21-3
21.2.3 Displaying true or relative speed vectors ..........................................................................21-3
21.2.4 Maximum number and range for displaying AIS targets on ECDIS ..................................21-4
21.2.5 Source of AIS target related alarms..................................................................................21-4
21.3 Displaying AIS Target Data ..........................................................................................................21-5
21.4 Displaying AIS Target Past Positions ............................................................................................21-7
21.4.1 Displaying name or call sign of AIS target .......................................................................21-8
21.5 Displaying AIS Interface Status ....................................................................................................21-9
21.6 AIS Safety Message ...................................................................................................................21-10
21.6.1 Introduction...................................................................................................................21-10
21.6.2 Creating a new safety message.......................................................................................21-11
21.6.3 Reading a received safety message.................................................................................21-12
21.6.4 Replying to a safety message .........................................................................................21-13
22. Radar Overlay ............................................................................................................ 22-1
22.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................22-1
22.2 Activating Radar Overlay on the ECDIS.......................................................................................22-2
22.3 Choosing Source of Radar Overlay...............................................................................................22-3
22.3.1 Radar overlay through LAN from FAR-2x07 radars.........................................................22-3
22.3.2 Radar overlay through radar overlay card inside ECDIS...................................................22-3
22.3.3 Radar overlay display modes ...........................................................................................22-4
22.4 Adjusting Radar Overlay (Radar Overlay dialog box) ...................................................................22-5
22.4.1 Radar overlay source .......................................................................................................22-5
22.4.2 Gain ................................................................................................................................22-5
22.4.3 Sea clutter .......................................................................................................................22-5
22.4.4 Rain clutter......................................................................................................................22-6
22.4.5 Controlling video processing ...........................................................................................22-6
22.4.6 Echo trail time and trail presentation mode.......................................................................22-7
22.4.7 Echo overload condition ..................................................................................................22-8
22.4.8 Transparency...................................................................................................................22-9
22.5 Adjusting Radar Overlay to Match Positions of Chart Features....................................................22-10
22.5.1 Error sources of radar echo image and chart display mismatch .......................................22-10
22.5.2 Error sources for radar echo image and ARPA target mismatch ......................................22-10
22.5.3 Compensating for bearing error......................................................................................22-11
22.5.4 Compensating for position error.....................................................................................22-11
22.6 Radar Overlay related Alarms.....................................................................................................22-12
23. Recording Functions .................................................................................................. 23-1
23.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................23-1
23.2 Events and Man Overboard Functions...........................................................................................23-1
23.3 Voyage Records............................................................................................................................23-2
23.3.1 Details log.......................................................................................................................23-2
23.3.2 Voyage log......................................................................................................................23-3
23.3.3 Danger target log.............................................................................................................23-6

ix
Table of Contents

23.3.4 Chart usage log............................................................................................................... 23-8

23.3.5 Printing details, voyage or danger targets log................................................................... 23-8
23.3.6 Making backup copy from details, voyage or danger targets log.................................... 23-10
23.3.7 Resetting (emptying) voyage and danger targets logs..................................................... 23-11
23.3.8 Making a user chart from a log (past track).................................................................... 23-11
23.3.9 Alarms log.................................................................................................................... 23-12
23.4 Distance and Trip Counters ........................................................................................................ 23-14
23.4.1 Resetting distance and trip counters............................................................................... 23-14
24. Datum ..........................................................................................................................24-1
24.1 General........................................................................................................................................ 24-1
24.2 Paper Charts ................................................................................................................................ 24-1
24.3 Electronic Sea Charts................................................................................................................... 24-1
24.4 Positioning Devices and Datum.................................................................................................... 24-1
24.5 ECDIS and Datum ....................................................................................................................... 24-2
24.6 ECDIS and User Chooseable Local Datum................................................................................... 24-2
25. Parameters Setup ........................................................................................................25-1
25.1 Parameters................................................................................................................................... 25-1
25.1.1 Parameter-related menus................................................................................................. 25-2
25.1.2 Accessing installation parameters.................................................................................... 25-3
25.1.3 Choosing datum.............................................................................................................. 25-3
25.1.4 Navigation parameters setting ......................................................................................... 25-4
25.1.5 Optimization parameters setting ...................................................................................... 25-7
26. Color Calibration ........................................................................................................26-1
26.1 Color Calibration Settings............................................................................................................ 26-1
26.1.1 Color test for ARCS charts.............................................................................................. 26-1
26.1.2 Color differentiation test for S57 charts ........................................................................... 26-2
26.1.3 Gray scale test ................................................................................................................ 26-3
27. Conning Display..........................................................................................................27-1
27.1 System Configuration .................................................................................................................. 27-1
27.2 Display Interpretation .................................................................................................................. 27-2
27.2.1 ROT window .................................................................................................................. 27-3
27.2.2 Heading window............................................................................................................. 27-3
27.2.3 Speed window ................................................................................................................ 27-3
27.2.4 Rudder window .............................................................................................................. 27-4
27.2.5 Position window ............................................................................................................. 27-4
27.2.6 Drift and radius window.................................................................................................. 27-4
27.2.7 Trackpilot window.......................................................................................................... 27-5
27.2.8 Route window................................................................................................................. 27-6
27.2.9 Weather and wind window.............................................................................................. 27-7
27.2.10 Depth window ................................................................................................................ 27-7
27.2.11 Combined wind, depth and destination window (for DNV specification).......................... 27-7
27.2.12 Fuel consumption window .............................................................................................. 27-8
27.2.13 Thruster window............................................................................................................. 27-8
27.2.14 Propellers window .......................................................................................................... 27-8
27.2.15 Azimuth propulsion window ........................................................................................... 27-9
27.2.16 Speedpilot window ....................................................................................................... 27-10
27.2.17 Message window .......................................................................................................... 27-10
27.2.18 Main engine start air pressure window........................................................................... 27-11
27.2.19 Alarm messages window............................................................................................... 27-11
27.2.20 Propulsion and thruster window (for DNV specification)............................................... 27-11
27.3 Modes for Conning Display ....................................................................................................... 27-12
27.3.1 Choosing mode for conning display .............................................................................. 27-12
27.3.2 Choosing background color of conning display.............................................................. 27-12
27.3.3 Changing color palette of conning display ..................................................................... 27-12
28. Trackpilot (FAP-2000+FEA-2x07) .............................................................................28-1
28.1 Introduction................................................................................................................................. 28-1
28.2 Steering Modes............................................................................................................................ 28-1
28.2.1 Hand steering.................................................................................................................. 28-2
28.2.2 Trackpilot steering.......................................................................................................... 28-2

x
 Table of Contents

28.2.3 Waypoint mode ...............................................................................................................28-2

28.2.4 Track mode .....................................................................................................................28-2
28.3 Trackpilot Control Panel...............................................................................................................28-3
28.4 Manual Steering ...........................................................................................................................28-5
28.4.1 Heading control...............................................................................................................28-5
28.4.2 Radius control .................................................................................................................28-5
28.4.3 Program heading change..................................................................................................28-5
28.4.4 Program track..................................................................................................................28-6
28.4.5 Summary of manual steering modes.................................................................................28-7
28.5 Automatic Route Steering.............................................................................................................28-8
28.5.1 “Goto waypoint” mode ....................................................................................................28-9
28.5.2 “Goto track” mode.........................................................................................................28-10
28.5.3 Summary of automatic route steering modes ..................................................................28-10
28.5.4 Preconditions for automatic route steering......................................................................28-11
28.5.5 How to activate automatic route steering........................................................................28-12
28.5.6 Arriving to a waypoint...................................................................................................28-14
28.5.7 Automatic route steering alarms.....................................................................................28-16
28.5.8 Collision avoidance manuever during automatic route steering.......................................28-18
28.5.9 Stopping or modifying pre-enabled route turn ................................................................28-18
28.5.10 Accuracy of automatic route steering .............................................................................28-19
28.6 Additional Information About Steering Modes ............................................................................28-20
28.7 Important Information About Steering Mode Changes.................................................................28-22
28.8 Expected Steering Performance Under Various Conditions..........................................................28-23
28.8.1 Expected steering performance for going ahead..............................................................28-23
28.8.2 Expected steering performance for turns ........................................................................28-26
28.9 Expected Steering Performance Under Critical Failure................................................................28-28
28.9.1 Lost heading from Trackpilot (ECDIS may also have lost heading) ................................28-28
28.9.2 Lost heading from ECDIS (Trackpilot still has heading).................................................28-28
28.9.3 Lost speed .....................................................................................................................28-29
28.9.4 Low speed.....................................................................................................................28-30
28.9.5 Lost SOG/COG reference ..............................................................................................28-31
28.9.6 Total lost position..........................................................................................................28-32
28.9.7 Lost differential position................................................................................................28-33
28.9.8 Lost differential position and position discrepancy .........................................................28-34
28.9.9 Lost communication between ECDIS and Trackpilot......................................................28-34
28.9.10 Lost communication between Trackpilot and ECDIS......................................................28-35
28.10 Other Operations with Trackpilot................................................................................................28-35
28.10.1 Speed used by Trackpilot...............................................................................................28-35
28.10.2 Control strategy used by Trackpilot................................................................................28-35
28.10.3 Load conditions used by Trackpilot................................................................................28-35
28.11 Description of Alarms Generated by Trackpilot...........................................................................28-36
28.11.1 Alarms ..........................................................................................................................28-36
28.11.2 Errors............................................................................................................................28-38
28.12 Using the Curved EBL ...............................................................................................................28-39
28.12.1 Structure of the curved EBL ..........................................................................................28-41
28.12.2 Use of curved EBL to design a new turn while ship is turning ........................................28-41
28.13 Using the Predictor.....................................................................................................................28-42
29. Steering with Yokogawa PT-500A............................................................................. 29-1
29.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................................29-1
29.2 Steering Control Unit....................................................................................................................29-1
29.3 Steering Modes of the System.......................................................................................................29-2
29.3.1 Hand steering (Mode selector: HAND) ............................................................................29-2
29.3.2 Autopilot steering (Mode selector: AUTO) ......................................................................29-2
29.3.3 Track mode automatic route steering (Mode selector: NAVI) ...........................................29-2
29.4 Automatic Route Steering.............................................................................................................29-3
29.4.1 Characteristics of automatic route steering .......................................................................29-4
29.4.2 Summary of route steering...............................................................................................29-4
29.4.3 Preconditions for route steering........................................................................................29-4
29.4.4 Activating route steering..................................................................................................29-5
29.4.5 Arrival to a waypoint.......................................................................................................29-6
29.4.6 Route steering alarms ......................................................................................................29-7
29.4.7 Collision avoidance maneuver during automatic route steering.........................................29-8

xi
Table of Contents

29.4.8 How to stop or modify already enabled route turn............................................................ 29-9

29.4.9 Notes .............................................................................................................................. 29-9
29.5 Other Operations with Yokogawa PT-500A Autopilot ................................................................. 29-10
29.5.1 Speed used by autopilot ................................................................................................ 29-10
29.5.2 Control strategy used by autopilot ................................................................................. 29-10
29.5.3 Load conditions used by autopilot ................................................................................. 29-10
29.6 Description of Alarms with Yokogawa PT-500A......................................................................... 29-11
29.6.1 Alarms.......................................................................................................................... 29-11
29.6.2 Errors ........................................................................................................................... 29-11
29.7 Expected Steering Performance Under Various Conditions ......................................................... 29-12
29.7.1 Expected steering performance for going ahead............................................................. 29-12
29.7.2 Expected steering performance for turns........................................................................ 29-13
29.8 Expected Steering Performance Under Critical Failure ............................................................... 29-14
29.8.1 Lost heading from autopilot (ECDIS may also have lost heading).................................. 29-14
29.8.2 Lost heading from ECDIS (Autopilot still has heading) ................................................. 29-15
29.8.3 Lost speed .................................................................................................................... 29-16
29.8.4 Low speed .................................................................................................................... 29-17
29.8.5 Total lost position ......................................................................................................... 29-18
29.8.6 Lost differential position and position discrepancy ........................................................ 29-20
29.8.7 ECDIS lost messages from Autopilot ............................................................................ 29-21
29.8.8 Autopilot lost messages form ECDIS ............................................................................ 29-22
29.9 How to Use the Curved EBL with Yokogawa PT-500A Autopilot................................................ 29-23
29.10 Using the Predictor .................................................................................................................... 29-24
30. Alarms .........................................................................................................................30-1
30.1 Overview..................................................................................................................................... 30-1
30.2 Alarms Generated by Navigation Calculation ............................................................................... 30-2
30.3 Alarms Generated by Chart Calculation ....................................................................................... 30-2
30.4 Alarms Generated by Steering Calculation ................................................................................... 30-2
30.5 Alarms Generated by Radar Overlay ............................................................................................ 30-2
30.6 Description of the Alarm Priority System ..................................................................................... 30-3
30.7 Description of Backup Navigator Alarm....................................................................................... 30-4
30.8 List of Alarms.............................................................................................................................. 30-5
30.8.1 List of navigation alarms................................................................................................. 30-5
30.8.2 List of chart alarms ....................................................................................................... 30-25
30.8.3 List of steering alarms with EMRI Trackpilot ................................................................ 30-27
30.8.4 List of steering alarms only with Yokogawa Autopilot................................................... 30-35
30.8.5 List of Radar overlay related alarms .............................................................................. 30-37
31. Maintenance and Troubleshooting.............................................................................31-1
31.1 Maintenance ................................................................................................................................ 31-1
31.2 Replacing the Fuse....................................................................................................................... 31-2
31.3 Replacing the Battery................................................................................................................... 31-2
31.4 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................................... 31-3
31.5 Keyboard Test.............................................................................................................................. 31-5
31.6 Consumable Parts ........................................................................................................................ 31-6
Appendix 1: Glossary of Terms ......................................................................................... AP-1
Appendix 2: IHO ECDIS Chart 1 ..................................................................................... AP-5
A.2.1 IHO ECDIS Chart 1.................................................................................................................... AP-5
Appendix 3: Interpreting S57 Charts.................................................................................... AP-11
A3.1 Interpreting S57 Charts ............................................................................................................. AP-11
Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts............................................................................. AP-23
A4.1 C-MAP Cartographic Service.................................................................................................... AP-23
A4.1.1 Registration of the system at C-MAP Norway .............................................................. AP-23
A4.1.2 Ordering charts ............................................................................................................ AP-23
A4.1.3 Applying licenses ........................................................................................................ AP-23
A4.1.4 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... AP-23
A4.2 Chart Subscription Service........................................................................................................ AP-24
A4.2.1 C-MAP service ............................................................................................................ AP-24
A4.2.2 RENC service .............................................................................................................. AP-25

xii
 Table of Contents

A4.3 CM93/3 Chart Display...............................................................................................................AP-26

A4.3.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................AP-26
A4.3.2 Choosing CM93/3 chart material to use.........................................................................AP-27
A4.3.3 Choosing charts for viewing .........................................................................................AP-27
A4.3.4 Chart catalogue of C-MAP charts .................................................................................AP-29
A4.4 S57 Managing C-MAP charts ....................................................................................................AP-30
A4.4.1 Licensing system used by the C-MAP...........................................................................AP-30
A4.4.2 Introduction..................................................................................................................AP-30
A4.4.3 System ID for C-MAP..................................................................................................AP-30
A4.5 CM93/3 Database......................................................................................................................AP-31
A4.5.1 Load of CM93/3 database to ECDIS .............................................................................AP-31
A4.5.2 Use of multiple databases .............................................................................................AP-32
A4.6 License of CM93/3....................................................................................................................AP-33
A4.6.1 Add license from file ....................................................................................................AP-33
A4.6.2 Add license manually ...................................................................................................AP-35
A4.6.3 Renewal of license........................................................................................................AP-36
A4.7 How to Keep Charts up to date ..................................................................................................AP-37
A4.7.1 Creating update order file .............................................................................................AP-37
A4.7.2 Loading chart updates from the file...............................................................................AP-39
A4.7.3 Review of chart updates................................................................................................AP-41
A4.8 Removing CM93/3 Charts .........................................................................................................AP-43
Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts ............................................................................. AP-45
A5.1 C-MAP Charts...........................................................................................................................AP-45
A5.1.1 Introduction..................................................................................................................AP-45
A5.1.2 S57 chart legend with C-MAP charts ............................................................................AP-45
A5.2 Managing C-MAP charts ...........................................................................................................AP-46
A5.2.1 Licensing system used by the C-MAP...........................................................................AP-46
A5.2.2 Getting started with C-MAP charts ...............................................................................AP-46
A5.2.3 Keeping C-MAP charts up to date.................................................................................AP-46
A5.2.4 Defining subscription of C-MAP charts ........................................................................AP-47
A5.2.5 Loading C-MAP charts from a CD ROM into the system ..............................................AP-52
A5.2.6 Catalogue of S57 cells with C-MAP charts....................................................................AP-56
A5.2.7 Grouping S57 chart cells...............................................................................................AP-57
A5.2.8 Automatic display until setting......................................................................................AP-64
A5.2.9 Removing C-MAP charts from the system ....................................................................AP-64
A5.2.10 Viewing status and date dependency of S57 chart cells and their updates......................AP-65
Appendix 6: Route Backup .............................................................................................. AP-67
A6.1 Route Backup & Restore in ASCII Format.................................................................................AP-67
A6.1.1 Exporting ECDIS route data into an Excel file ..............................................................AP-68
A6.1.2 Importing route data from Excel file into ECDIS...........................................................AP-69
A6.2 Route Backup & Restore in Orion Pro Weather Routing Format ................................................AP-71
A6.2.1 Exporting Route from ECDIS to Orion Pro ...................................................................AP-71
A6.2.2 Importing Route from Orion Pro...................................................................................AP-72
Appendix 7: Menu Overview ........................................................................................... AP-73
A7.1 Hierarchic Menu Tree................................................................................................................AP-73
A7.1.1 Menu............................................................................................................................AP-73
Appendix 8: Digital Interface........................................................................................... AP-85
A8.1 Data Sentences ..........................................................................................................................AP-85
A8.1.1 Input sentences.............................................................................................................AP-85
A8.1.2 Output sentences ..........................................................................................................AP-85
A8.1.3 Data reception ..............................................................................................................AP-85
A8.1.4 Sentence structure ........................................................................................................AP-86
A8.1.5 Serial interface: input ports...........................................................................................AP-94
A8.1.6 Serial interface: input/output ports ................................................................................AP-95

xiii
Table of Contents

Appendix 9: Parts List and Parts Location..................................................................... AP-97

A9.1 Parts List .................................................................................................................................. AP-97
A9.2 Parts Location........................................................................................................................... AP-98
A9.2.1 Processor unit EC-1000C............................................................................................. AP-98
A9.2.2 Control unit RCU-018.................................................................................................. AP-99
A9.2.3 Control unit RCU-015.................................................................................................. AP-99
Index .................................................................................................................................... IN-1
Specifications....................................................................................................................... SP-1

xiv
Foreword
Congratulations on your choice of the FURUNO ECDIS FEA-2107/FEA-2107-BB/FEA-2807. We are confident
you will see why the FURUNO name has become synonymous with quality and reliability.

For over 50 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for innovative and dependable
marine electronics equipment. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our extensive global network of agents
and dealers.

This equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine environment. However, no
machine can perform its intended function unless installed, operated and maintained properly. Please carefully read
and follow the recommended procedures for operation and maintenance.

Features
The FEA-2x07 series ECDIS is the product of FURUNO’s extensive experience in computer technology and marine
electronics. It complies with IMO Resolution A.817(19), IEC 61174 and other related standards. The ECDIS
displays electronic charts, nav lines, ARPA data, AIS targets and other navigation data on a high-resolution 20.1-
inch (FEA-2107) or 23.1-inch display (FEA-2807). The FEA-2107-BB is supplied without a monitor, permitting use
of the commercial monitor of your choice.
The main features of the ECDIS are

• Continuous monitoring of ship’s position through multi-sensor Kalman filter processing using GPS, DPGS,
SDME

• Route planning and route monitoring facilities

• Wide variety of warning facilities contribute to safer and more efficient navigation

• Radar image may be superimposed on electronic charts (option)

• Grounding warnings, safe depth contours

• Chart database loaded and updated using CD ROMs

• Target data from ARPA/radar and AIS transponder to aid collision avoidance. (AIS transponder and ARPA)

Program Number
05.21_05.21, October 2006

xv
Foreword

This page intentionally left blank.

xvi
1. Introduction

1.1 Manual Contents

This manual provides the following information:

• System configuration

• Screen interpretation and use of the control unit

• Set up before departure

• Rules to replace paper charts with electronic ones

• Chart material management

• Manual updates, which are used to manually enter Notices to Mariners and Navtex warnings

• Chart alarm calculation

• Route planning and monitoring

• Various user tools such as user charts, pilot data and navigation tools

• Backup operations

• Common Reference System

• Use of navigation sensors

• Use of ARPA targets

• Use of AIS targets

• Radar overlay

• Various recording functions

• Essential information of the datum used by the charts and the ECDIS

• Steering related operations

• List of alarms

1-1
1. Introduction

1.2 System Configuration

The ECDIS EC1000C Workstation, comprised of the components shown in the illustration below, displays
electronic seacharts and operates as the user interface for the system.

The ECDIS processor is connected to various sensors, and performs navigation calculations and route monitoring.
Connections to interfaces are typically made with a LAN (Local Area Network) Adapter.

The ECDIS processor can be used for both route planning and route monitoring. If required, there can be additional
identical ECDIS EC1000C Workstation(s) connected to the same LAN to share the tasks of the ECDIS. If the
system incorporates more than one ECDIS EC1000C Workstation, one or more workstation(s) can be used as a user
interface (with “full” usage rights) and one or more workstation(s) may be used as planning stations (usage rights as
“planning”).

If the system has two or more workstations connected together as multiple workstations, the system keeps data on
the workstations harmonised and also tracks selections and settings made on any workstation.

Typically there can be the following kinds of configurations of workstations:

• Mode as Single, only one workstation is used in the system.

• Mode as Multiple, two or more workstations are used in the system where usage rights and sensor source of
workstations can be changed by the user.

For more information, see Chapter 18 “Common Reference System”.

1.2.1 Single workstation

ECDIS Monitor Conning Monitor

MU-201CE MU-201CE
(FEA-2107) or
or MU-231CE ARPA RADARS
100-230 VAC 100-230 VAC
MU-231CE POSITION-FIXING EQUIPMENT
(FEA-2807) LAN-ADAPTER TRACKPIL OT
EC-1010 LOG/DUAL AXIS LOG
AIS
GYROCOMPASS
24 VDC
CALCOMP POSITION-FIXING EQUIPMENT
DRAWING- ENGINE CONTROL
BOARD III HUB- ECHOSOUNDER
DIGITIZER 100 LAN-ADAPTER WIND SENSOR
EC-1010 WATER TEMP. METER
(WORKSTATION) AMWSS (Alarm Monitoring
Watch Safety System)
ECDIS PROCESSOR 100-230 VAC 24 VDC GYROCOMPASS
EC1000C (SYNCHRO, STEPPER)
B-ADAPTER LOG (200P/NM)
RADAR OVERLAY PCB EC-1020 ANALOG INPUT (8 CHANNELS)
100-230 VAC
ALARM OUTPUT

FAR-2xx7 24 VDC
series radar Control Unit RADAR 1 (VIDEO, HL, AZ)
RCU-018 Selector
or RADAR 2 (VIDEO, HL, AZ)
Control Unit
RCU-015 PRINTER
(USB)

OPTION
Remote Control Unit
RCU-016

EXTERNAL
Category of Units: All units protected from weather DEVICE

Single workstation with connection to navigation sensors

1-2
 1. Introduction

1.2.2 Multiple workstation configuration

In the multiple workstation configuration, there can be four workstations connected together by a Local Area
Network (LAN). In this configuration, one workstation is used as the “sensor source” for navigation sensors and the
other workstation(s) are using the sensor source workstation to communicate with sensors, receiving and
transmitting data from/to workstation via the LAN. In the multiple workstation configuration where navigation
sensors are connected to two or more workstations, the sensor source may be changed and still receive and transmit
information from/to the system and to/from navigation sensors.

ECDIS Monitor Conning Monitor

MU-201CE MU-201CE
(FEA-2107) or
or MU-231CE ARPA RADARS
100-230 100-230 VAC
MU-231CE POSITION-FIXING EQUIPMENT
VAC (FEA-2807) LAN-ADAPTER TRACK PILOT
EC-1010 LOG/DUAL AXIS LOG
AIS
GYRO COMPASS
24 VDC
CALCOMP POSITION EQUIPMENT
DRAWING- ENGINE CONTROL
BOARD III HUB- ECHOSOUNDER
DIGITIZER 100 LAN-ADAPTER WIND SENSOR
EC-1010 WATER TEMP. METER
AMWSS

ECDIS PROCESSOR 100-230 VAC 24 VDC GYRO COMPASS

EC1000C (SYNCHRO, STEPPER)
B-ADAPTER LOG (200P/NM)
RADAR OVERLAY PCB EC-1020
100-230 VAC ANALOG INPUT (8 CHANNELS)
ANALOG OUTPUT
24 VDC
FAR-2xx7
series radar
Control Unit RADAR 1 (VIDEO, HL, AZ)
RCU-018 Selector
or RADAR 2 (VIDEO, HL, AZ)
Control Unit
RCU-015
PRINTER
(USB)

Remote Control Unit

RCU-016

ECDIS Monitor
MU-201CE
(FEA-2107)
or ARPA RADARS
100-230 VAC MU-231CE POSITION-FIXING EQUIPMENT
(FEA-2807) LAN-ADAPTER TRACKPILOT
EC-1010 LOG/DUAL AXIS LOG
AIS
GYROCOMPASS
24 VDC
POSITION EQUIPMENT
ENGINE CONTROL
HUB- ECHOSOUNDER
100 LAN-ADAPTER WIND SENSOR
ECDIS PROCESSOR EC-1010
100-230 WATER TEMP. METER
EC1000C AMWSS
VAC 100-230 VAC
RADAR OVERLAY PCB
24 VDC GYROCOMPASS
FAR-2xx7 (SYNCHRO, STEPPER)
series radar B-ADAPTER LOG (200P/NM)
Control Unit EC-1020 ANALOG INPUT (8 CHANNELS)
RCU-018 ANALOG OUTPUT
or
Control Unit 24 VDC
RCU-015 RADAR 1 (VIDEO, HL, AZ)
Selector
RADAR 2 (VIDEO, HL, AZ)

Remote Control Unit

RCU-016 OPTION
PRINTER
(USB)

Category of Units: All units protected from weather

EXTERNAL
DEVICE

Multiple workstation with connection to navigation sensors

1-3
1. Introduction

1.3 The Processor Unit

The processor unit is the heart of the system, responsible for the loading, storing, updating and processing of
electronic sea charts, with the DVD-ROM drive or floppy disk drive. The DVD-ROM and floppy disk drives are
behind the lid on the front panel.

DVD-ROM drive

Floppy dIsk drive

1.4 Turning the Power On/Off

The system may be turned on by turning on the power switch at the rear of the processor unit and then pressing the
POWER switch on the Control Unit, until you feel a “click.” At this time the equipment releases a beep. To turn off
the system reverse this sequence.

Note: The amount of resources used increases over time, sometimes slowing down operation. If operation seems to
be slow, re-set the power, when use of the equipment is not required; for example, when in port.

1.5 How to Find Version Number of ECDIS Software

The ECDIS software version number is displayed in the information area, next to the scale factor. In the example
below the version no. is 05.21 05.21.

05.21 05.21 Version no.

1.6 Diagnostics
The ECDIS has two types of diagnostic tests. One type (several tests) checks the functionality of the equipment and
the other type calibrates the monitor. This manual provides only the instructions for testing the keyboard. For further
details about diagnostic tests, see the service manual.

1-4
2. Navigation Tasks

2.1 Overview
Navigation tasks can be divided into four basic tasks:

Voyage
Positioning
planning

Navigation
tasks

Monitoring Steering

Navigation tasks

2.2 Voyage Planning

Voyage planning is the preparation phase for a coming voyage. Preparation includes route definition, route
calculation and route optimisation.

Required sea charts are also prepared in voyage planning, either by updating existing charts or creating new ones.

Route Chart
Planning Planning

Voyage
Planning

Route User Chart

Calculation Planning

2-1
2. Navigation Tasks

2.2.1 Route planning

A route can be created two ways: Modify an existing route to create a new route or create a new route from scratch.

A route consists of the following:

• Position of each waypoint • Safe water calculation based on safety limits

• Turning instructions for each waypoint • Required steering accuracy for individual leg

• Safety limits between waypoints (channel limits) • Speed restrictions for legs

Information notebook:

• Information pages to alert the operator to a given waypoint or a chosen area.

• Automatic and/or manual notebook function to tell operator position-based information.

Voyage optimisation parameters: See voyage optimization on the next page.

2.2.2 Route calculation

Route calculation for voyage planning includes the following:

Route profile calculation:

• Distance between consecutive waypoints • Total distance

• Course between waypoints • Estimated time for voyage

• Calculation of wheel over point

Route check:

• Grounding alarm based on available depth information in digital chart database.

Voyage optimisation:

• Timetable optimisation

• Optimisation based on economical factors

• The ECDIS processor calculates optimum speed and course between each waypoint, ETA and fuel consumption,
based on the defined data. There are four calculation strategies: Max. Speed, Timetable, Lowest Cost and Best
Profit. In case of great circle sailing between two waypoints, the ECDIS calculates minimum and maximum
latitudes, and if needed adds an extra waypoint(s) so as not to exceed minimum and maximum latitudes.

2.2.3 Chart planning

Chart planning consists of the following steps:

1. Load new S57 and ARCS charts

2. Update existing S57 and ARCS charts

3. Manage chart permits

4. Manually update charts

2-2
 2. Navigation Tasks

2.2.4 User chart planning

User chart planning consists of the following steps:

1. Create user navigation charts

2. Process chart alarms based on symbols, lines and areas of user chart

2.3 Positioning
Positioning means using all available methods available to calculate and keep ship’s position up-to-date during a
voyage.

The calculation of ship’s position is based on available navigation sensors. The system integrates valid information
from different sensors and uses the Kalman filter technology for final position calculation.

Direct
Dead reck.
positioning
equipment
sensors

Positioning

Manual
correction

2.3.1 Direct positioning sensors

Radio navigation equipment: Satellite navigation systems:

Decca navigator GPS navigator

Loran-C navigator GPS navigator with a differential correction, DGPS

SYLEDIS navigator

Local position-fixing systems

2.3.2 Dead reckoning equipment

Ship’s heading measurement devices: Speed measuring devices:

Gyrocompass Single-axis speed logs

Magnetic compass Dual-axis speed logs

GPS gyrocompass Radionavigation equipment

Satellite navigation equipment

2-3
2. Navigation Tasks

2.3.3 Manual correction

User-executed position correction where radar echoes and information from synthetic charts are combined and
verified by the operator, and adjusted if necessary.

2.4 Monitoring
Monitoring is a continuous check of navigation data, user actions and performance of the system. Part of the
monitoring is also the display of electronic sea charts and conning information.

Electronic
sea
chart

Data
Alarms
distribution

Monitoring

Data Man
logging overboard

2.4.1 Display of electronic sea chart

The following information is available on the electronic sea chart:

Own ship position Chart alarms

Planned track ARPA targets

Planned safety lines Chart information

Ship’s predictor (See paragraph 28.13.)

2.4.2 Alarms
The following alarms are incorporated:

Route monitoring alarms Alarms for sensor failure

Position calculation alarms Alarms for system failure

Position monitoring alarms Alarms for incorrect operator action

Waypoint approach alarms Alarm based on chart database

2-4
 2. Navigation Tasks

2.4.3 Man overboard

Built-in man over board function records position at the time of man overboard

2.4.4 Data logging

The following information may be logged:

Past track history Dangerous targets

Events Voyage recording

2.4.5 Data distribution

Data is distributed via the ECDIS’s computer system.

2-5
2. Navigation Tasks

This page intentionally left blank.

2-6
 3. ECDIS Display

3.1 Overview
The ECDIS (Electronic Chart Display and Information Systems) screen is divided into several areas. The Status
bar, which is always shown at the top of the screen, mainly displays equipment status.

The boxes at the right side of the screen comprise the Information areas. They are permanently displayed and show
information such as own ship position, alarms generated by the system, workstation mode and cursor position. The
operator may display the data of his or her choice in one of the information areas called a Sidebar. (See section
3.3.2.) The bottom block in the information area is the Mouse functions area, and it shows the current left button,
thumbwheel and right functions, in that order from left to right.

7/8 of the ECDIS display is taken up by the Electronic chart area.

(1) Presentation mode

(2) Vector mode and vector time
(3) Route name, User Chart name
(4) Pilot Data name
(5) Source of Radar video and source of target's information
(6) Predictor time
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
North Up TM
Status bar

Information
area

Electronic chart area Mouse function area

(Current left button,
thumbwheel and
right button functions,
in this order left to right)

Parts of the ECDIS display

3-1
3. ECDIS Screen

3.2 Electronic Chart Area

The ECDIS can use the following types of charts:

• S57ed3 ENC charts (vector)

• CM-93 charts (vector)

• ARCS charts (raster)

The following information can also be displayed:

• Cursor (moved by trackball)

• Planned route

• EBL (Electronic Bearing Line) and VRM

• Own ship symbol with speed vector

• ARPA-acquired target

3.2.1 Electronic charts in ECDIS

The electronic navigational charts are displayed in the electronic chart area. There are two kinds of electronic
navigational charts available for use in the ECDIS:

• S57ed3 ENC or CM-93 vector format

• ARCS raster format

Official paper charts may be replaced with S57ed3 ENC and ARCS charts. The user should check the current
situation in his or her flag country administration and if in doubt use the paper charts as the primary source of
navigational information.

The ECDIS combines chart and navigational information. It should be noted that modern navigation systems (e.g.,
differential GPS) may offer more accurate positioning than what was used to position some of the surveys from
which the electronic navigational chart was derived.

S57 vector format

ECDIS is compatible with S57 release 3 ENC format charts. From this format the ECDIS generates the “system
ENC”, = SENC, which is used for actual operations of the ECDIS.

When opening a chart it is displayed with the default scale called the compilation scale. The details for the chart are
displayed in the electronic chart area and these can be modified. You can change the chart scale with the ZOOM IN
and ZOOM OUT functions, and the scale range is 1:1,000 - 1:50,000,000.

CM-93
Compatibility with CM-93 format depends on commercial agreements. Some versions of this ECDIS are compatible
and others are not. The compatibility is controlled by the security device called a dongle. From CM-93 format the
ECDIS generates SENC which is used for actual operations of the ECDIS. The difference between S57ed3 ENC
charts and CM-93 charts is that the CM-93 charts are from a private source and they cannot be used as a substitute
for paper charts under any condition. To emphasize this point these charts are called “Non-HO” charts in this
manual.

3-2
 3. ECDIS Screen

North Up TM

S57 vector chart

ARCS raster format

ARCS charts are digital reproductions of British Admiralty (BA) paper charts. They retain the same standards of
accuracy, reliability and clarity as paper charts.

Zooming into the ARCS chart can be useful for magnifying a complex detail, however this decreases the density of
the data displayed, and can give a false impression of distance from danger. Therefore, it is possible to zoom 2x the
original paper chart's scale or ½ the original paper chart's scale.
North Up TM

ARCS raster format chart

3-3
3. ECDIS Screen

3.3 User Interface

The user interface is defined as the areas which are not displaying the electronic chart, either raster chart or vector
chart.

The user interface contains information about settings, parameters and selections used by the ECDIS. The nature of
the information displayed can be either static (such as name of a certain window, fields in chart legend, units, etc.)
or dynamic (such as position of own ship, time, user selections, etc.).

3.3.1 Color palettes for the user interface

There are several color palettes available for choosing colors for the chart background and information areas.
Setting Background color of chart Background color of information area
Day Bright Light-blue White
Day Blue Light-blue Dark-blue
Dusk Blue Black
Dusk Blue Blue Dark-blue
Night Black Black

With any palette selection except Day Bright, static text from dynamic text is shown in different colors to help you
distinguish between them. For example, dynamic data like own ship position, time or direct control of parameters
(scale, predictor time, etc.) is shown in yellow color.

To choose a color palette, do the following:

1. Set the cursor in the electronic chart area.

2. Spin the thumbwheel until Chart Display/Info/Standard Display is shown in the mouse functions area.

3. Push the left mouse button to open the Chart Display dialog box.

4. If the “Chart page” is not selected, click an arrow tab in the dialog box to display it.

5. Place the cursor on Palette.

6. Spin the thumbwheel to choose desired palette, referring to the table above, and then push the thumbwheel.

7. Click the X at the top right corner of the dialog box to close the box.

3-4
 3. ECDIS Screen

Information area
The information area displays details about own ship position, course and speed and the cursor's location on the
chart

Information from the positioning sensors:

• Latitude and longitude position of own ship

• Datum in use (WGS 72, WGS 84, European 1950,

etc.), which is shown above positioning source.

• Positioning source: Dead Reckoning, GPS, DGPS,

LORAN, FILTER, etc.

• GYRO reading and its source if it is not true gyro.

• COG (Course over ground) and its source

• SOG (Speed over ground)

• Range and bearing from own ship position to cursor

• Latitude and longitude position of cursor displayed in

chosen datum.

Note: The order of items in position and cursor windows

may change with the sidebar used. See the next page.

3-5
3. ECDIS Screen

3.3.2 Sidebar on user interface

You may choose what kind of information to display in the sidebar (right side) of the ECDIS. The options shown
below are available and the content of the sidebar windows change with the devices and sensors connected to the
system. The Route display or Autopilot display is always displayed. You can display one of them together with the
Conning display, Docking display or Chart legend. When two sidebars are active, the width of the information area
is doubled, as shown below.

• Route display

• Autopilot display

• Conning display

• Docking display

• Chart legend
North Up TM

CSE
CSE
Autopilot
display

Conning
display

Sidebar, with autopilot and conning display windows

3-6
 3. ECDIS Screen

Opening the sidebar on the display

Sidebar(s) may be opened as shown below. Two sidebars may be displayed.

1. Place the cursor on the area shown.

2. “Select Sidebar” appears in the mouse functions area.

See figure at right.

3. Click the right mouse button to show the sidebar

menu on the display.

4. Spin the thumbwheel to choose desired sidebar from

the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

To remove an item from the sidebar, deselect it 1.

following this procedure.

3.

2.

3-7
3. ECDIS Screen

Information in route sidebar

The following information is shown in the route sidebar:

Information from route monitoring:

• Plan Speed: Planned speed to approach “To WP”.

• Plan: Planned course between previous WP and “To

WP”.

• Route: Calculated set course to follow the monitored

route, including off track, drift and gyro error
compensation.

• Ch limit: Planned width of channel to approach “To

WP”.

• Off track: Perpendicular distance the ship is from the

intended track. Additional textual information is available if any of the
• To WP: The waypoint which the ship is approaching. following steering modes are in use:

• Dist WOP (Wheel Over Point): Distance to the • “Goto WP”, “Goto WP Great circle”, “Ass. Turn
point where rudder order for course change at “To enabled” and “Assisted turn” in Goto Waypoint
WP” will be given. mode

• Time: Time to go to WOP (dd:hh:mm:ss). • “Goto Track”, “Track Great circle” and “Track
Turn” in Go Track mode
• Next WP: The WP following the “To WP”.
Permanent alarms are available in the following cases,
• Next: Planned course between “To WP” and “Next regardless of the steering mode used:
WP”.
• “Outside channel” is indicated by displaying the
• Turn rad: Planned turning radius at “To WP”. indication “Off track” in red and its value in
orange.
• Turn rate: Calculated rate of turn which is based on
current speed and planned turning radius. • “Out of gate” is colored orange. It indicates that if
the ship continues using the current course the
The following information is calculated from data of ship will be outside of the channel at wheel over
positioning sensors and from route monitoring data: point.

• Route

• Off track

• Dist WOP

• Time

• Next

3-8
 3. ECDIS Screen

Information in autopilot sidebar

The following information is shown in the autopilot sidebar, which shows settings and readings from an autopilot.
• Steering mode (below “Autopilot”)
• Prog CSE: If you use program track or program
CSE
heading change steering modes, planned course is CSE
shown.
• Set CSE: Actual set course
• Set Heading: Actual set heading
• Radius: Actual set radius • Cond: Setting for loading condition
• ROT: Value for ROT • Perf: Setting for steering accuracy
• Off track: Distance from center line of planned
route

Information in conning display sidebar

The following information is shown in the conning display sidebar:
• ROT indicator
• Heading indicator
• Speed indicators
• Longitudinal speed and source of speed
• Transversal speed
Transversal
• Rudder angle indicator speed (frwd)

Longitudinal
speed

Transversal
speed (aft)

Information in docking sidebar

The following information is shown in the docking sidebar:
• ROT indicator
• Heading indicator
• Speed indicators
• Longitudinal speed and source
of speed
Depth
• Transversal speed Transversal
speed (frwd)
• Rudder angle indicator Depth (at bow)
Longitudinal
• Depth below transducer speed
• On bow
Transversal Depth (at stern)
• On stern speed (aft)

Information in chart legend sidebar

For detailed information see the chapters on vector charts (S57) and raster charts (ARCS).

3-9
3. ECDIS Screen

3.3.3 Activating dialog boxes on the display

There are several dialog boxes which can be activated by mouse-clicking over certain areas on the ECDIS display.
Place the cursor over the appropriate area and then click the right or left mouse button to display the corresponding
dialog box on the ECDIS display. See the figure below to find the places and mouse button to click to get desired
dialog boxes on the display. To close a dialog box, click the X at the top right corner of the dialog box. Note that
only one dialog box may be shown at a time.

North Up TM

SET TIME

SENSORS

PLAN ROUTE

ALARM
QUEUE NAV.
MARKS
MON.
ROUTE

3-10
 3. ECDIS Screen

Additional menu functions in dialog boxes

Dialog boxes which have a triangle
at their upper left-hand corner
contain a menu which provides
additional functions. See the figure
at right. Place the cursor on the
triangle to show a menu from
which to choose additional
functions.

Note: A menu will also appear if

you try to activate a dialog box
without choosing an option from
the menu. (For route, user chart or
pilot data, see paragraph 3.4.)

3-11
3. ECDIS Screen

3.4 Controlling Planning and Monitoring Modes on

the ECDIS Display
A route, a user chart or pilot data can be displayed at the top of the electronic chart in the status bar, in either the
planning mode or the monitoring mode.

To choose desired mode, place the cursor on the text Route, User Chart or Pilot Data on the status bar. A drop-down
dialog box appears, where you can choose either Monitor or Plan by clicking the appropriate button with the left
mouse button. With user chart or pilot data, only the planning mode or the monitoring mode can be displayed in the
status bar. (Displayed selected may be activated with a radio button. See the figure below.)
North Up TM

3-12
4. Control Units

4.1 How the ECDIS is Controlled

The user controls the ECDIS with the Control Unit RCU-018 or the Control Unit RCU-015. Either unit is equipped
with a trackball, right and left mouse buttons and a thumbwheel. The RCU-018 is additionally equipped with a
keyboard. All functions of the ECDIS can be accessed using the trackball, mouse buttons and thumbwheel alone. To
operate from a menu with the mouse, roll the trackball to choose desired item, operate the mouse buttons or
thumbwheel (depending on item) to choose option and then push the thumbwheel to confirm your selection.

4.2 Control Unit RCU-018

The Control Unit RCU-018 consists of a keyboard, the trackball, thumbwheel and mouse buttons. The trackball
functions like a mouse; the user rolls the trackball and operates the left and right mouse buttons to access functions.

A/C RAIN A/C SEA GAIN

OFF ON OFF ON

1 2/ABC 3/DEF
EBL MARK P BRILL MODE VRM

4/GHI 5/JKL 6/MNO

F1 F2 MENU MOB
OFF CNT SCROLL RECORD

ALARM STD 7/PQRS 8/TUV 9/WXYZ + EVENT

ACK DSP PLAN MONITOR NEXT
RANGE
SYSTEM CANCEL 0/|_| SHIFT TARGET
RADAR
FAILURE SENSOR CU/TM R HELP - DATA

Layout of the control unit RCU-018

4-1
4. Control Units

4.2.1 Keys in control unit RCU-018

Key Description
Power Turns the system on/off. (This control does not switch the display on/off.)
VRM rotary Adjusts active VRM.
encoder
VRM ON Activates and displays VRM 1 if none is displayed or VRM2 is active.
Activates and displays VRM 2 if VRM1 is active.
VRM OFF Inactivates and erases VRM 1 if both VRMs are displayed.
Inactivates and erases VRM 2 if VRM1 is active.
EBL rotary encoder Adjusts active EBL.
EBL ON Activates and displays EBL1 if none is displayed or EBL 2 is active.
Activates and displays EBL 2 if EBL1 is active.
EBL OFF Inactivates and erases EBL1 if both EBLs are displayed.
Inactivates and erases EBL 2 if EBL1 is active.
F1 Activates user-defined function or menu.
F2 Activates user-defined function or menu.
ALARM ACK Alarm acknowledgement for alarms generated by chart, navigation or steering calculation.
SYSTEM The red lamp behind the key lights and the buzzer sounds when system failure is found.
FAILURE Hit the SYSTEM FAILURE key to silence the buzzer. The key remains lit until the reason
for the problem is removed.
System failure: control unit cannot communicate with EC-1000C. (EC-1000C is
inoperative.)
RADAR Displays Radar Overlay dialog box, which provides functions for adjustment of the radar
picture.
STD DSP Activates standard display presentation on the ECDIS.
Restore monitor brilliance to calibrated state.
1/MARK Displays the Nav. Marks dialog box, which mainly provides for activation/deactivation of
various markers.
2/ABC/P BRILL Adjusts control unit dimmer.
3/DEF/MODE Chooses presentation mode: North-up TM, Route-up RM, Course-up RM, North-up RM,
Course-up TM.
4/GHI/OFF CNT Offcenters own ship position to cursor location on the ECDIS display. Press again to
return own ship position to screen center.
5/JKL/SCROLL Enables scrolling on ARCS charts, with the trackball active.
6/MNO/RECORD Opens Voyage Record sub menu.
7/PRQS/PLAN Opens Plan Route dialog box.
8/TUV/MONITOR Opens Monitor Route dialog box.
9/WXYZ/NEXT Opens “Next” page in multi-page dialog box.
CANCEL/SENSOR Opens Sensors dialog box; closes open dialog box or window.
0/space CU/TM R Returns own ship marker to screen center in TM and CU modes; inserts a space.
SHIFT/HELP SHIFT: Shifts between lower case and upper case alphabets.
HELP: Activates info/help. (Mouse must not be over input field.)
MENU Displays the Main menu.
+ RANGE – Adjusts charts scale.
MOB Inscribes MOB mark on the screen.
EVENT Records textual information fixed to own ship position.
TARGET DATA Shows target data for selected ARPA target; provides data for selected chart area.
GAIN Adjusts radar gain on the radar overlay.
A/C RAIN Reduces rain clutter on the radar overlay.
A/C SEA Reduces sea clutter on the radar overlay.

4-2
 4. Control Units

4.3 Control Unit RCU-015

The Control Unit RCU-015 provides
minimum configuration with controls
that function as shown in the table
below.

F1

F2

F3

F4

Key Description
Power Turns the system on/off. (This control does not switch the display on/off.)

F1 Executes function assigned. Press more than two seconds to restore monitor brilliance to
calibrated state.

F2 Same as F1.
F3 Same as F1.
F4 Same as F1.

4-3
4. Control Units

4.3.1 Configuring hot keys F1-F4

Hot keys (F1-F4 on the Control Unit RCU-015 and F1 and F2 on the Control Unit RCU-018) are provided to call a
desired function/menu when pressed.

How to configure keys F1-F4

You may choose desired function/menu from a predefined list. To choose desired function/menu for each key, do
the following:
1. Spin the thumbwheel until Menu/Info/Chart Menu appears in
the mouse functions area.
2. Click the left mouse button.
3. Spin the thumbwheel to choose Initial Settings and then push
the thumbwheel.
4. Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box to show the
Initial Settings menu.
5. Spin the thumbwheel to choose Function keys, and then push
the thumbwheel. The dialog box shown right appears.
6. Check Enable changes.
7. Place the cursor on the box for F1, F2, F3 or F4 as
appropriate and then spin the thumbwheel to choose desired
function or menu. The choices are Enable changes
CHART MENU: Opens chart menu.
ALARM ACK: Acknowledge ECDIS-generated alarm.
INITIAL SETTINGS: Display Initial Settings dialog box.
RANGE-: Lowers chart scale.
RANGE+: Raises chart scale.
SET CHART CENTER: Sets chart center as selected with
the cursor.
SCROLL: Scrolls display.
SET SHIP CENTERED: Centers own ship position.
SET SHIPOFFCENTER: Offcenters ship position to cursor
location.
TM RESET: Resets own ship position in true motion.
RADAR: Displays Radar Overlay dialog box.
STANDARD DISPLAY: Calls up standard display; restores
monitor brilliance to calibrated state.
MENU: Opens Main menu.
SENSORS: Opens Sensors dialog box.
CHART DISPLAY: Opens Chart Display dialog box.
In the example at right the function of each key is as below:
F1: Opens Chart Display dialog box.
F2: Sets Standard Display settings on display.
F3: Opens Chart menu.
F4: Acknowledges alarms generated by ECDIS.
8. Click the X mark at the top right corner to close the dialog
box.

How to activate a menu or function with a hot key

Press the hot key corresponding to the menu or function you wish to activate.

4-4
 4. Control Units

4.4 Mouse Operations

4.4.1 Parts of the mouse
The mouse consists of the trackball, Left Button
thumbwheel, left button and right Right Button
button.

Thumbwheel
F1

F2

F3
Trackball
F4

4-5
4. Control Units

4.4.2 How to enter alphanumeric data

Entering alphanumeric data

With trackball

Alphanumeric input fields are activated for input by pointing with the mouse cursor and clicking the left mouse
button. This action also displays minimum and maximum values beside the input field. The input value is chosen by
spinning the thumbwheel, and the value is accepted by pushing the thumbwheel. (Alphanumeric data may also be
entered directly from the keyboard-equipped control unit.)

To change a specific digit or alphabet, roll the trackball to place the cursor to the left of the digit or character that
you want to change and then spin the thumbwheel to choose appropriate alphanumeric character.

With on-screen keyboard

An-on screen keyboard is available for entering alphanumeric data. With the input cursor in a text box, right click to
show the keyboard. Click appropriate keys to enter data.

Changing co-ordinate polarity

By clicking co-ordinate polarity

1. Place the cursor before the co-ordinate (N, S, E, W) and then push the left mouse button.

2. Spin the thumbwheel to choose desired polarity and then push the thumbwheel.

By choosing polarity from drop-down menu

1. Place the cursor inside the input window.

2. Click the right mouse button to show the following window.

4-6
 4. Control Units

3. Choose Characters and push the left mouse button. Your window should now look something like the one below.
(N and S shown for latitude.)

W
E

4. Spin the thumbwheel to choose appropriate polarity and then push the thumbwheel. The coordinate is changed
and the window is closed.

Deleting a character
A character can be deleted from text/numeric input field as follows:

1. Place the cursor to the right of the digit you want to delete and then push the right mouse button.

2. Delete is chosen – push the thumbwheel to delete the alphanumeric chosen. The character is deleted and the
window is closed.

4-7
4. Control Units

4.4.3 Using the thumbwheel

Items directly controlled by the thumbwheel

Selections can be made on the screen by pointing on the screen with the cursor and then scrolling various options
with the thumbwheel. When you place the cursor over text or numeric, it turns green, purple or blue (depending on
Palette in use) to indicate that the thumbwheel can be used to scroll options available or change value of number.
Selection is confirmed by pushing the thumbwheel.

The following selections can be adjusted directly on the screen. See also the figure below.

• 1. Display mode and orientation of chart.

• 2. Presentation of speed vectors

• 3. Length of speed vectors

• 4. Source of Radar video overlay

• 5. Predictor - set predictor ON/OFF and time for predictor

• 6. Datum for output co-ordinates

• 7. Scale of displayed chart

• 8. Workstation mode (in case of multiple workstations)

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
North Up RM

6.

7.& 8.

The procedure below shows you how to change the presentation mode from North Up TM to Course Up RM.

1. Place the cursor on the text at the location shown by “1.” in the figure above, and the color of the text changes
from current color to green.

4-8
 4. Control Units

2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll options until Course Up RM appears. As you scroll, the color of the text changes
to magenta, blue or green depending on the Palette in use.

3. Click the thumbwheel to confirm your selection, and the color of the text becomes green.

4. When you move the cursor away from the text, the color of the text returns to its original color.

Choosing thumbwheel incrementing direction

The thumbwheel incrementing direction can be chosen to forward or backward as desired.

1. Open the Initial settings menu, and select Operation from the menu.

2. Spin the thumbwheel to choose Wheel Drive and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Spin the thumbwheel to choose Normal or Reverse as appropriate and then push the thumbwheel.

4-9
4. Control Units

4.4.4 Calling menus and functions by the mouse buttons

The mouse buttons can be used to call menus or functions on the display. At the lower right corner of the display the
mouse functions area displays available function or menu name, as shown in the figure below. Spin the thumbwheel
to choose menu or function desired, and then push the left button, thumbwheel or right button as appropriate to
access the menu or function desired. Available menus and functions depend on cursor location. (For more
information, see paragraph 3.3 “User Interface”.)

Left Button
Right Button

Thumbwheel
F1

F2

F3

F4

Mouse functions area

LEFT BUTTON THUMBWHEEL RIGHT BUTTON

Menu Info Chart Menu
Range- Info Range+
Set Chart Center Info Activate Scroll
TM Reset Info ShipOffcenter
Event Info MOB
Edit Insert Info Select Next
Show Value Info Nav Marks
Chart Display Info Standard Display
Using the functions shown in the figure above as an example, the available functions with the mouse are as follows:

• “Menu” by pushing left button

• “Info” by pushing thumbwheel

• “Chart Menu” by pushing right button

4-10
5. Standby Mode

5.1 Switching Standby Mode ON and OFF

The standby mode deactivates the audible alarms from the ECDIS. Use it while in harbour or other similar situation
where use of the ECDIS is not required. To switch the Standby mode ON, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions

area and then push the left mouse button.

2. Spin the thumbwheel to choose Initial Settings and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Place the cursor on the triangle inside the Initial Settings dialog box, and the
menu shown left appears.

4. Choose Standby and then push the thumbwheel.

5. The following window appears at the top of the ECDIS display to indicate that
audible alarms are switched off.

To switch Standby mode OFF, that is, return to normal operation, choose “BACK
TO NORMAL MODE” with the cursor and then push the left mouse button.

5-1
5. Standby Mode

This page intentionally left blank.

5-2
6. Setup Before Departure

6.1 Update Chart Material

Update your ARCS and S57 chart material before embarking on a new voyage. To get more information about
updating ARCS charts, see Chapter 9 “Raster Chart Material”. For information about updating S57 charts, see
paragraph 8.2 “S57 Vector Charts”.

6.2 Display and Approve Dates for S57 Charts and

Manual Updates
Note: It is very important that you set the Display and Approve dates for S57 charts as the current date.

There may be features which require chart viewing dates or seasonal dates in S57 charts. Accordingly, if you have
not set Display and Approve dates as the current date there is a possibility that you may get a wrong presentation or
some feature may be absent. For how to set Display and Approve dates, see paragraph 8.12 “Chart Viewing Dates
and Seasonal Features of the Vector Chart”.

6.3 Creating or Updating User Chart

If necessary, create a new user chart or modify an existing one. For more information about user charts, see Chapter
15 “User Chart Control”.

6.4 Creating or Updating Pilot Data

If necessary, create a new pilot data or modify an existing one. For more information about pilot data, see Chapter
16 “Pilot Data”.

6-1
6. Setup Before Departure

6.5 Setting Chart Alarm Calculation

Set chart alarm areas suitable for your
coming voyage. For more information,
see Chapter 11 Chart Alarms”.

6.6 Creating or Updating a Route

Create a new route or modify an existing one. For further information about creating or updating a route, see
Chapter 13 “Route Planning”.

6.6.1 Checking your route against chart alarms

Before you sail your route, you should always check your route against chart alarms. This is important because your
S57 charts and manual updates may contain chart viewing dates information. You can check chart alarms from the
Check page on the Plan Route dialog box. You can access this dialog box by placing the cursor on Route in the
status bar, clicking the Plan button to show the Plan Route dialog box and then clicking the Check tab.

The following information is stored with the route during route plan:

• Conditions for chart alarms during route monitoring, which includes safety contour and other chart alarms.

• Name of the user chart to be used during route monitoring together with this planned route.

• Name of the pilot data to be used during route monitoring together with this planned route.

6-2
To store selections on the Alarms page, click the Start button. Also, the name of the user chart and the name of pilot
data, which were chosen as planning mode, are stored in this route.

6.6.2 Recalculating timetable and ETA values

Timetable and ETA values can be recalculated from the Parameters page in the Plan Route dialog box. Minimally
set ETD to equal departure time, and perform desired optimization.

0 $

After checking the chart alarms and setting the ETD, cancel selection of the planned route in order to enable the
selection of it as the route to be monitored, using “Unselect” in the Plan Route menu, or use “Exchange with
Monitored” on the same sub menu to choose it directly as monitored route.

6-3
6. Setup Before Departure

6.7 Checking and Preparing Route to Monitor

Choose a route for the next voyage: Choose Route on the status bar and then click the Monitor button. For more
information about route selection, see paragraph 14.2 “Choosing Route to Monitor”.

If the text “Checked conditions are different” appears in the dialog box, this means that
conditions chosen during route planning were different than those chosen for use during route
monitoring. For further details on how to use checked conditions, see paragraph 6.7.3 “Using
checked conditions of the route plan” and paragraph 6.7.4 “Using planned user chart”.

6-4
 6. Setup Before Departure

6.7.1 Choosing TO waypoint

The system chooses a TO waypoint automatically. Check that it is the correct one. Note that waypoint number 1 is
not accepted. Use the Monitor Route dialog box to choose a waypoint.

6.7.2 Choosing final waypoint

This selection is used ONLY when the last waypoint should be different than the one defined last in your route. If
needed use the Monitor Route dialog box to choose it.

6.7.3 Confirming checked conditions of the route plan

You can check on the
Alarms page if
checked conditions
in the Alarms page
are used with the
route in route
monitoring.

If the text “Current

selection is different”
is displayed, use
Initial Settings>Chart
Alarm parameters to
make “Chart alarms”
selections. Safety
contours may be
changed with the
“Safety contour”
field in the Display
Settings. Select used
condition during
monitoring the same
as planned.
Differences between
used and planned
conditions are
displayed with
asterisks (*).

6-5
6. Setup Before Departure

6.7.4 Using planned user chart

To check if planned
user chart is chosen,
open the Selections
page in the Monitor
Route dialog box to
check that you have
the correct user chart
in the monitoring
mode.

If the text “Current

selection is different”
is displayed, click the
Use button to choose
user chart as
monitoring mode.

If the text “This has

been changed after
Route Planning
Check” is displayed,
re-check your route
against chart alarms.

6-6
 6. Setup Before Departure

6.7.5 Using planned pilot data

To check if planned
pilot data is chosen,
open the Selections
page in the Monitor
Route dialog box to
check that you have
correct pilot data in
the monitoring mode.

If the text “Current

selection is different”
is displayed, click the
Use button to choose
pilot data as
monitoring mode.

The text “This has

been changed after
Route Planning
Check” reminds you
that pilot data has
been modified after
route planning check.

6-7
6. Setup Before Departure

6.8 Verifying Configuration of Navigation Sensors

The user can choose navigation sensors for use in navigation and view their current values. There are “pages” for
speed and course and position. The figure below shows the Speed/Course page.

Checkbox status shows whether the

sensor is used for integrated navigation or
not. If there is no value shown for a
sensor, it indicates that the sensor is not
valid. Note that the content of these pages
depends on the sensors which are in use
on the ship.

To display the Sensors dialog box, place

the cursor on the position indication in the
information area and then push the right
mouse button.

6.8.1 Verifying source of navigation sensors

In a multiple workstation environment, verify that the sensor sources indicated are the intended ones. This can be
done on the Sensors dialog box.

Verifying SPEED settings (Speed/Course page)

Choose both Log and Dual log, if they are available, or choose one of them, on the Speed/Course page.

Note that manual speed should only be used in an emergency, when no other speed reference is available.
Remember that position sensors are also available as speed sources. If neither Log nor Dual log is available, you can
use a radar as the source for speed and course.

Verifying GYRO settings (Speed/Course page)

Choose Gyro1 or Gyro2 on the Speed/Course page. Note that in the typical installation Gyro1 is connected to a
traditional gyrocompass, while Gyro2 receives gyro value from either a Trackpilot or a DGPS sensor.

Manual heading should only be used in an emergency, when no other heading source is available.

A rate gyro is always automatically chosen.

6-8
 6. Setup Before Departure

Verifying position sensors (Posn page)

On the Posn page of the Sensors dialog
box, the data field of a position sensor
contains a label(s) (in the figure at right it
is DGPS, GPS+ZDA) which indicates the
type of the sensor. Primary-Secondary-
OFF indicates sensor status and priority.
Position in local datum, speed and course
are also shown. A DGPS position sensor
also shows the text “Diff” if the
differential signal is in use.

Position sensors have priority, which is

indicated by Primary and Secondary.
Only one sensor can be primary while the
others can be secondary or off position.
After a sensor is turned off, its status is
changed to Secondary state. When a
position sensor state is changed to
primary and another sensor was primary,
the sensor formerly primary becomes
secondary.

Choose the “Primary” navigation sensor as the sensor which is considered to be most accurate and reliable. Set all
other navigation sensors as “Secondary”.

Verifying Kalman filter (Posn page)

The Kalman filter is an automatic process that will calculate the most probable position based on all position
sensors. The filter uses in its process all sensors that are not chosen to OFF. For more information about the Kalman
Filter, see paragraph 19.7 “Filter Operation”.

Verifying alignment (Posn page)

The alignment is a correction given by the chart align function, and it is used to move the ship to the “correct”
position. Normally turn this feature off in the start-up procedure. For more information about position alignment, see
the paragraph 19.8 “Position Alignment”.

6-9
6. Setup Before Departure

6.9 Resetting Distance and Trip Counters

Reset menu

Record menu

To reset the distance and trip counters to zero, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse
button.
2. Choose Record and then push the thumbwheel.
3. Choose Reset and then push the thumbwheel.
4. Choose Distance Counter or Trip Counter as appropriate and then push the thumbwheel.
Distance counter: Both Distance and Trip counters are reset.
Trip counter: Trip counter is reset.
5. An appropriate prompts asks you if you are sure to reset chosen counter. Click the OK button to reset. The
prompt window disappears.

6.10 Verifying Datum

Datum is used to choose between different models of the earth. It is essential that you use datum in a consistent way.

If you use paper charts together with electronic chart material, it is recommended that you use the same datum as
your current paper chart to avoid misalignment between your electronic chart system and points taken or plotted on
your current paper chart.

Once you have chosen a datum, all

numerical latitude-longitude
position values are presented in
your chosen datum.

To change the datum:

1. Choose the datum indication in

the top box in the information
area.

2. Spin the thumbwheel to choose

appropriate datum, the one that
matches your paper charts, and
then push the thumbwheel.

Note: ARCS raster charts contain some rasterized position information, like scale bars on PA paper charts, which is
true only if you have chosen native datum of that ARCS chart.

6-10
7. Conditions Required to
Replace Paper Charts

7.1 Introduction
Carriage requirements for adequate and up-to-date charts for a voyage can be found in SOLAS Chapter V/20 of
1974. In resolution A.817(19), IMO has specified how those requirements can be fulfilled with a device called
ECDIS. In resolution A.817(19), Appendix 7 (RCDS 1998), IMO has specified how requirements of the V/20 of
1974 can be fulfilled when an ECDIS uses the RCDS (Raster Chart Display System) mode. The traditional
alternative way to fulfil requirements of the SOLAS chapter V/20 has been the use of paper charts.

If you use the type-approved version of this ECDIS (BSH type approval certificate number 6579 / 080 138 / 99) you
may replace paper charts with electronic ones. If the following conditions are met, then your system fulfils IMO
A.817(19).

• Own ship area is covered with updated ENC charts.

• Your chosen display area is covered with updated ENC charts.

• You have a backup system which fulfils IMO A.817 requirements. One example is a second ECDIS.

Note that ENC producers provide their conditions of use in the Publisher Notes, which you should always read when
loading new material into the ECDIS. For further details, see paragraph 8.3.2 “Loading S57 charts from a CD ROM,
floppy disk or LAN”.

In areas where ENCs are not available, raster chart material called ARCS (from UK HO) can be used in the ARCS
mode of this ECDIS, provided the following additional conditions are met:

• Own ship area is covered with updated ARCS charts.

• Your chosen display area is covered with up-to-date ARCS charts.

• Appropriate folio of up-to-date paper chart is carried onboard and available, if required by your flag country
administration.

7-1
7. Conditions Required to Replace Paper Charts

Can your ECDIS replace

paper charts

Is ECDIS type-
No approved according
IEC 61174?

Yes

Do you have type approved

No electronic back-up
arrangement?
(i.e. second ECDIS)
You should use Yes
paper charts
Go to flow chart
Are official ENCs available No
RCDS, on the
for intended voyage? next page.

Yes

Have responsible
Hydrographic Offices
No published official ENCs
without any limitation for
use? (i.e. you have not
signed any limitation paper)

Yes

No Have you included the latest

updates into your ECDIS?

Yes

Your system fulfills IMO resolution

A.817(19) and thus
fulfills SOLAS regulation V/20 to carry
adequate and up-to-date charts for
the intended voyage.

Data flow chart for replacing paper chart with ENC chart material

7-2
 7. Conditions Required to Replace Paper Charts

RCDS (Raster Chart

Display system)

Is ECDIS type
No approved according
IEC 61174 including
RCDS mode
(Appendix 7)?

Yes

No Are Raster charts

You should use available for intended
paper charts voyage?

Yes
No

Have you included the

latest updates into your
ECDIS?

Yes

Have you a
No minimum set of
up-to-date paper charts
for RCDS mode as specified
by your flag country
Administration?

Yes

Your system fulfills IMO MSC Meeting

11 Dec 1998 requirements and thus
fulfills SOLAS regulation V/20 to carry
adequate and up-to-date charts for
the intended voyage.

Data flow chart for replacing paper chart with Raster chart material

7-3
7. Conditions Required to Replace Paper Charts

7.2 Detecting ENC Coverage in S57 Chart Display

The electronic chart system can display more than one S57 chart cell at a time. This feature is called multi-cell
display. If one S57 chart cell does not cover the whole display, the system will open more S57 chart cells for
display, if appropriate cells for the displayed area are available. The status bar shows information about S57 chart
cells displayed on the electronic chart display area. When automatic TM reset is active, the information is displayed
with reference to own ship position. If TM reset is OFF, the information is displayed with reference to current cursor
position.

The possible indications are as follows:

“RCDS mode” is shown in red text “Non ENC data” is shown in red “No indication” is shown at the
at the upper right-hand corner. This text at the upper right-hand corner. upper right-hand corner: This means
means that raster chart material is This means that the S57 chart shown the S57 chart shown is official ENC
displayed on the electronic chart is not official ENC material. material.
display area.

7-4
8. Vector Chart Material

8.1 Introduction
Theoretically a chart can be coded for use on a computer as raster or vector chart. Vector-coded charts are coded
using a variety of techniques. One technique is called S57ed3 and it has been chosen by IMO as the only alternative
for SOLAS compliant electronic charts. If an S57ed3-coded chart is published by a government-authorised
Hydrographic Office, then it is called “ENC”. If an S57ed3-coded chart is published by a private firm, then it is
called “NON ENC”. Another vector coding technique is known as CM-93/2, and it is employed by the private firm
C-MAP. All CM-93/2 charts are NON ENC. For further details about C-MAP charts, see Appendix 4. You can read
more about ENC and related legal issues in Chapter 7. Hereafter, all references to vector chart material are referred
to as “S57 charts” regardless of their source.

Sometimes you may wish to manually add Notices to Mariners or Navtex warnings into your S57 charts. This is
called “manual updates”. Manual updates are valid for both S57 and ARCS charts so you need to define them only
once. Also, manual updates are valid for all scales so that you don't need to repeat them for charts published in
different scales from the same area. For further details, see Chapter 10 “Manual Updates”.

8.2 S57 Charts

8.2.1 Introduction
The electronic chart system is compatible with official IHO S57 release 3 chart material produced by Hydrographic
Offices (HO). This material, when issued by a government-authorised Hydrographic Office, is called ENC
(electronic navigational chart). Use, presentation and display of S57 charts are based on International Maritime
Organisation (IMO), International Hydrographic Organisation (IHO) and International Electrotechnical Commission
(IEC) regulations and rules (S52ed3.1). When this ECS (Electronic Charts system) uses an ENC (S57 release 3 chart
produced by a government-authorised Hydrographic Office), it is an ECDIS as defined by IMO, IHO and IEC.

An ENC could be encrypted to prevent unauthorised use so the user needs a permit to view the ENC. This permit
could be entered manually from the control unit, loaded from a floppy disk or loaded through telecommunications
from an RENC.

Before any ENC can be used in the ECDIS, it is loaded into your hard disk and converted into the system’s own
internal format (SENC). Some parts of the charts may be date dependent, i.e., they are visible after a set date or they
are visible only for a limited period, etc. In the electronic chart system, you control all date-dependent objects with
Display Until and Approve Until dates. In the paper chart world, the Preliminary and Temporary Notices to
Mariners represent the date dependency described above for S57 charts.

An important part of ENCs are the updates. Hydrographic Offices can issue two kinds of updates:

• Incremental updates, which are small additions to original Base cells.

• Reissues and new editions, which are complete replacements of previous Base cells and their updates.

All updates are date stamped and they may also contain date-dependent parts. You control usage of updates in the
electronic chart system from Display Until and Approve Until dates. Using Display Until and Approve Until dates,
you can view your charts correctly drawn on any date in the past or in the future.

Chart material will be stored in media such as CD ROMs and floppies, electronically through telecommunications
from RENCs or electronically from LAN (Local Area Network) in which it could have arrived from RENCs, CD
ROMs or floppies. Such material can contain only basic cells, cells and updates or only updates. The electronic chart
system contains as standard the software required to access CD ROMs, floppies and LAN. A telecommunications
package to establish a connection to an RENC in Stavanger, Norway, which operates using the marketing name
PRIMAR, is optionally available.

8-1
8. Vector Chart Material

Each S57 chart may contain additional links to textual descriptions or pictures, besides the chart itself. Typically
additional textual descriptions and pictures contain important sailing directions, tidal tables and other traditional
paper chart features that do not have any other method to be included into the S57 chart. This ECDIS copies these
textual descriptions and pictures into its hard disk so the user may cursor-pick them for viewing purposes.

For how to interpret the S57 ENC chart display, see Appendix 2.

Definitions of terms
Cell A cell is a geographical area containing ENC data. Each cell has a separate unique name.
Hydrographic Offices divide their responsibility area by the cells that they publish.

S57 chart A database, standardized as to content, structure and format, is issued for use with ECDIS
without any authority of government-authorized Hydrographic Office. The difference of S57
chart and ENC is that non-ENC charts require complete up-to-date paper charts to be used as
the primary aid to navigation.

ENC A database, standardized as to content, structure and format, is issued for use with ECDIS on
the authority of government-authorized Hydrographic Offices. The ENC contains all the chart
information necessary for safe navigation and may contain supplementary information in
addition to that contained in the paper chart (e.g., sailing directions) that may be considered
necessary for safe navigation. The name of the coding standard for ENC is S57ed3.

SENC A database resulting from the transformation of the ENC by ECDIS for appropriate use,
updates to the ENC by appropriate means, and other data added by the mariner. It is this
database that is actually accessed by the ECDIS for display and other navigational functions,
and is the equivalent to an up-to-date paper chart. The SENC may also contain information
from other sources.

RENC A service provider offering ENC delivery and update service as defined in IHO standard
S52e3. Often an RENC provides both CD ROM and telecommunications-based service to
ECDIS users. One example of an RENC is an RENC in Stavanger, Norway, operating under
the marketing name PRIMAR.

8.2.2 Chart legend of S57 chart

The chart legend, which provides various data about the chart currently displayed, can be toggled on and off by
placing the cursor in the sidebar, clicking the right mouse button, choosing Chart Legend from the menu and then
pushing the thumbwheel.

This system is capable of showing more than one S57 chart at a time. This feature is called the multi-chart display.
If one S57 chart does not cover the whole display, the system will open more S57 chart cells for display, if
appropriate cells for the displayed area are available. The chart legend shows information about S57 charts
displayed on the electronic chart display area. The information is displayed with reference to own ship position if
automatic TM reset is active, or with reference to the current position of the cursor if automatic TM Reset is OFF.

8-2
 8. Vector Chart Material

Cell name:

Name of chart.

Navigational purpose:

S57 charts are compiled for a variety of navigational purposes.

The navigational purpose, for which an individual S57 chart
has been compiled by a Hydrographic Office, is indicated in
this field. Alternatives are: Overview, General, Coastal,
Approach, Harbour and Berthing.

Issue date:

Issue date of the Base cell of the chart.

Edition number:

Edition number of the chart.

Last displayed update:

Number of last update, which is visible on the chart screen.

Update issue date:

Issue date of last update, which is visible on the chart screen

Last update appl. date:

Date to which the last update, which is visible on the chart screen, is effective.

Projection:

Projection of the chart. The projection is always Mercator.

Horizontal datum:

Horizontal datum of the chart data as published by the chart producer. By definition this must be WGS 84.

Vertical datum:

Vertical datum of the chart.

Sounding datum:

Datum used for soundings.

Quality of data:

Quantitative estimate of the accuracy of chart features, given by the chart producer.

8-3
8. Vector Chart Material

Magnetic var.:

Amount of magnetic variation. A positive value indicates a change in an easterly direction and a negative value
indicates a change in a westerly direction.

Depth:

Unit of measurement for depth.

Height:

Unit of measurement for height above sea level (for example, clearance height).

8.2.3 Permanent warnings of S57 charts

Permanent warnings help you keep the S57 charts up-to-date and these are shown at the top left corner on the
screen. Only up-to-date S57 charts can be legal replacement for paper charts. Permanent warnings appear if the
system detects a condition which may cause the use of charts which are not up-to-date.

Note: The system can assist in keeping RENC-received charts up-to-date. For charts which have been loaded from
sources other than an RENC, the system is unable to know the exact up-to-date situation.

For further details see paragraph 8.12 “Chart

Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of the Vector
Chart“.

You have loaded updates into your hard disk, but

these updates are not included in the SENC. The
name of the chart appears in orange in the chart
catalogue.

Perform SENC conversion for these charts. For

SENC conversion, see paragraph 8.4.6 “Using SENC
convert window to initiate SENC conversion”.

For further details, see paragraph 8.7.3 “Knowing

up-to-date status of an RENC Product List”.

You have loaded an update which contained cancel

information for a chart, and you have chosen not to
remove the cancelled chart. This permanent
indication reminds you about your intended use of a
cancelled chart.

Consider removing the chart. For information on

how to remove S57 charts, see paragraph 8.5.5
“Removing an S57 chart cell from the system“.

8-4
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.3 Loading S57 Charts

8.3.1 Flow chart for loading S57 charts into ECDIS

Load ENC into

ECDIS.

Load S57 charts from CD.

- Open SENC Convert
window.
- Wait until all conversions
are completed.
Yes
- If any ENC conversion Do you want to see
fails, a Failed Senc result of SENC conversion?
Conversion window
appears.
No

Do you want to see No

details of failed ENC
conversions?
Yes
- Highlight desired
ENC in list.
- Press Cell Status Continue from POINT
button. 1 on next page.
- Open Conv. Log.

Data flow chart, How to load S57 charts into ECDIS

8-5
8. Vector Chart Material

POINT 1

During SENC conversion,

the system sets Display
Until date for the current
system date.
Visually inspect ENC
for changes.
- Added objects are marked
with orange circles. Yes
Do you want to see changes
- Deleted objects are marked before approving them?
with orange slash marks.
- Modified objects are marked No
with both orange circles and
slash marks.
Approve loaded changes by
setting Approve Until to
current date.
- Open Date Dependent.
- Select "All".
- Set Approve Until current
date.

Loaded ENCs are ready

for use.

How to load S57 charts into ECDIS (continued)

8-6
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.3.2 Loading S57 charts from a CD ROM, floppy disk or LAN

When you load S57 charts by CD ROM catalogue, the system first loads a CD ROM catalogue, which stores certain
information into your hard disk such as cell IDs, their position, and edition number, from your LAN (Local Area
Network) connection, floppy disk or CD ROM. Then, the system asks which charts you want to load from the
chosen media. After building the CD ROM catalogue, you can view the contents of it using the Chart Catalogue
command in the Chart menu.

Note: All CD ROMs, floppies or LAN (Local Area Network) connections from one single National Hydrographic
Office have the same names although their contents could be totally different. You can use your own unique names
to identify them separately and correctly later.

To load by CD ROM catalogue, do the following:

1. Insert CD ROM or floppy disk to drive. Spin the thumbwheel to
show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and
then push the right mouse button.
2. Choose Load and Update Charts from the menu and “from CD
ROM” from the sub menu (see bottom figure at left). The default
load source is from CD ROM. Click the Load button to load from
a CD ROM. If you want to load from another ECDIS using LAN,
you have to change Load Dir. Click the Browse button to choose
a new Load Dir.

3. The ECDIS loads content summary and Product List from the CD
ROM and then opens the Load or Update Charts from CD ROM
dialog box.
4. The system automatically copies all text and pictures files
associated with charts from the CD ROM catalogue. The system
keeps only the latest version of these. If your system already has
newer text or pictures in use, you will get the notice below.

8-7
8. Vector Chart Material

5. In the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM dialog box (see page 8-10), you choose the charts to load
into the ECDIS. Then, click the Load button to load charts into the ECDIS. See also “Interpretation of Load or
Update Charts from loaded CD ROM dialog box” on page 8-10.
North Up TM

6. Before loading starts (and then automatically converts them into SENC format) you are asked confirmation for
this operation.

8-8
 8. Vector Chart Material

7. Charts are loaded and then automatically converted to SENC format. The SENC Convert window appears.

If an error is detected during conversion from ENC to SENC, the

following window appears. To find the reason click the Details button.

8. When conversion is completed, the following window appears.

8-9
8. Vector Chart Material

Interpretation of Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM dialog box

This window provides information about the loaded CD-ROM. To display this window, open the Chart Menu and
choose Load and Update Charts from the menu and “from loaded CD-ROM” from the sub menu.
North Up TM

1.

2.

3.

4.
5.
6.

1. The source and edition date of the CD is displayed here.

2. A list of charts stored in the CD-ROM, edition number of the chart and the number of updates included in the
chart.

3. In the Load Selector field, you can choose how to pick desired charts from the list:
• Name: Chart names are displayed on graphical presentation if selected.
• Permit: Available charts will be highlighted in the CD-ROM and for which you have permits.
• RENC Canceled Charts: The system will display charts on display which are canceled on RENC and
normally on CD-ROM.
• Group: If you have predefined a group of charts the system will highlight those charts in the group which are
available in the CD-ROM.
• Manual Selection: You can highlight desired charts from the list.
• Missing only: loads and display on graphical presentation only charts and their updates which are not already
loaded.
4. The View CD-ROM Publisher Notes button is used to view important notices published by chart producer.

5. The Edit Group button is used to create and modify group.

6. The Load button is used to start loading.

8-10
 8. Vector Chart Material

Note 1: If you want to make chart selection by group, click the Group button and choose desired group. If the same
chart exists in both the group and the list, they are highlighted in the list box.

Note 2: The system can make conversion into the SENC and set the “Display Until” date automatically. This is the
recommended way. For how to do this, see paragraph 8.4.2 “Choosing automatic SENC conversion and displaying
until date”.

Note3: You should read the text file associated with each catalogue. The text file typically contains very important
notices for the usage of the charts from the producing Hydrographic Office.

1. Click the View CD ROM Publisher Notes button in the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM
dialog box (see previous page)

2. To close this window, click the X at the upper right corner of the window.

Note4: You can view the summary of the contents of the CD ROM. It contains information about charts you are
going to load.

1. Click the View CD ROM content Summary button on the S57 load window.

2. Date for the selected CD-ROM is displayed.

Cell ID: Name of the chart
Edition: Edition number of the chart
Base: Including update number and issue date of Base cell of the chart
First Update: Update number and issue date of the first update included
Last Update: Update number and issue date of the last update included
3. If you want to make a hard copy of the Content Summary, hit the Print Text button.

4. To close this window, click the X in the upper right corner of the window.

8-11
8. Vector Chart Material

Viewing load history of CD ROM

You can view what is loaded from a CD ROM using Load History, which is in the Load or update Charts from CD
ROM dialog box.

1. Show the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM dialog box. (See page 8-10.)

2. Choose desired CD ROM from the list of CD ROMs.

3. Click the Load History button.

4. A window which looks something like the one below appears.

5. You can verify which charts are already loaded from the CD ROM.

Viewing conversion history of CD ROM

1. Show the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM dialog box. (See page 8-10.)

2. Choose desired CD ROM from the list of CD ROMs.

3. Click the Conv. History button.

4. A window which looks something like the one below appears.

5. You can verify which charts are already converted from the CD ROM.

8-12
 8. Vector Chart Material

Removing an unnecessary CD ROM catalogue

If you have unnecessary CD ROM catalogues on your CD ROM list, you can remove them as follows:
North Up TM

1.

2.

1. Show the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM dialog box. (See page 8-10.) Choose desired CD
ROM.

2. Use the Remove button to permanently remove chosen CD ROM catalogue from ECDIS.

Messages which control reload

If you try to load charts with the
same edition already loaded into
your hard disk or if you try to load
the same update already loaded into
your hard disk, you get the following
messages after clicking the Load
button.

If you want to avoid the very time consuming task of reloading charts which you already have, then you should
choose No (=“No for all” option in above window).

However if you want to reload charts, then choose Yes (=“Yes for all” option in above window).

8-13
8. Vector Chart Material

Messages which contain only notice

If you tried to load chart data which is older than you already have in your hard disk, you will get one of the
following messages:

This indicates that you are using a

newer edition of the chart mentioned
in the box.

This indicates that you are using a

newer reissue of the chart mentioned
in the box, which includes this
update.
.

This indicates that you are using a

newer reissue of the chart mentioned
in the box.

This indicates that you are using the

updates mentioned in the box.

Note: You cannot replace chart data which is already in use unless you only replace the latest Base cell or update. If
you want to reload older data again, you must first remove the chart from your hard disk. For further details, see
paragraph 8.5.6 “Removing an S57 chart cell from the system”.

Messages which require careful attention

All messages in this chapter change the legal status of the charts in your system. Study these messages very
carefully because you may need to use paper charts to fulfil SOLAS requirements.

Test before ENC to SENC conversion fails

CRC checksum is tested before the

SENC conversion and if it fails you
get this message.

Conversion from ENC to SENC fails partly

Conversion failed partly due to internal booking error of
the chart.

Load the chart and updates again into the system.

8-14
 8. Vector Chart Material

ENC to SENC conversion fails or detects errors

If the SENC conversions detect

anything abnormal, you get the
following message window:

For further details, see paragraph 8.4

“S57 SENC Conversion Details“.

A new edition of the chart has been published and you missed it
If you tried to load updates for a
chart for which you do not have new
enough Base cell or reissue in your
hard disk, you will get following
message:

The message above clearly indicates that this chart is not up-to-date and thus it does not fulfil SOLAS requirements.
Get the latest edition of the chart from the publisher immediately.

You do not have all the published updates

If you tried to load updates and you

missed one or more updates between
updates already loaded into your
hard disk and the updates that you
are loading, then you get following
message:

The message above indicates that you tried to load update numbers 3, 4 and 5 when at least update 2 and possibly
update 1 were not available in your hard disk. Check the content of your CD ROMs to find the missing
update/updates or contact your chart supplier.

The message above clearly indicates that this chart is not up-to-date and thus it does not fulfil SOLAS requirements.
Get the latest edition of the chart from the publisher immediately.

Unsafe chart has been cancelled by the publisher

If you load an update which contains

instructions from the publisher to
cancel the chart, you get following
message:

Normally, you should accept the cancellation by clicking the Yes button. Then the system automatically removes the
chart from the hard disk and from your chart screen.

You may elect to keep the chart although the publisher of it has told you that the content of the chart is so unsafe
that they have cancelled it. The reason might be that you do not have anything better available. In this case, click the
No button. Then the system automatically removes the ENC status from the chart, because the publisher has told so
in his special cancellation update.

Note that the cancellation message above clearly indicates that the publisher says that this chart is unsafe for
navigation and thus it does not fulfil SOLAS requirements. Get the latest edition of the chart from the publisher
immediately to replace the unsafe cancelled chart.

8-15
8. Vector Chart Material

8.3.3 Loading S57 charts which are not fully compliant with the
IMO standards
The ECDIS could in some cases load S57 charts which do not have full compliance with S57 standard coding for
transfer media. Minimum requirements for loading manually is legally coded:

• XXXXXXXX.000 file, which includes a Base cell.

• XXXXXXXX.NNN file, in which NNN is a number from 001 to 999, and which includes an update.

To load charts without building a named “CD ROM catalogue” do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse

functions area and then push the right mouse button. Choose Load and
Update Charts from the menu and Manual from the sub menu. Then, you can
choose desired drive and charts.

When you are ready to load charts, click the Load Chart button.

2. The system may also make conversion into the SENC and setting of Display
Until date automatically if you have set up for them. This can take a few
minutes.

8-16
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.4 S57 SENC Conversion Details

S57 charts from Hydrographic Offices are called ENCs. An ENC has to be converted into SENC format before it
can be used in the ECDIS. The ECDIS can convert ENC into SENC format automatically. If the conversion is
successful, the Failed SENC conversion window does not appear.

If the system fails to convert ENC into SENC or if the system detects a coding error in an ENC, the Failed SENC
conversion window appears with a list of failed ENCs. In this window you can choose any of the charts to see the
reason for failure in conversion.

Normally the conversion is initiated automatically when a chart is loaded. Paragraph 8.3 “Loading S57
Charts“ describes the loading process. Paragraph 8.4.2 describes how to choose automatic conversion. You can also
initiate conversion from The SENC Convert window or from a cell status window.

Note: SENC conversion must be done in the single-workstation mode. Switch to single-workstation mode before
converting, following the procedure below. This procedure should also be followed when converting C-MAP Ed.2
charts to SENC format.

1. Multi-workstation mode to single-workstation mode conversion

(1) Operating procedure at workstation designated as sensor source
- Right-click “MULTI” at the bottom of the information area to show the Initial Settings dialog box.
- Check “Usage rights” and change Multi(slave) to Master.
- Check “Mode” and change Multi workstation to Single workstation.
(2) Operating procedure at other workstation(s)
- Right-click “MULTI” at the bottom of the information area to show the Initial Settings dialog box.
- Check “Usage rights” and change Multi(slave) to Master.
- Check “Mode” and change Multi workstation to Single workstation.
2. Turning off radar overlay (do for all workstations)
- Left-click “Radar” on the status bar to show the Radar Overlay dialog box.
- In the Mode box, change “ECDIS and Radar” to “ECDIS only”.

8.4.1 Speeding up SENC conversion

The SENC conversion speed depends about how many other tasks the system is occupied with. The system can
conduct SENC conversion in the background during any other system operations, but you can greatly lessen the time
for SENC conversion by doing the following:

1. Disable radar overlay by choosing radar overlay mode as “ECDIS only”.

a) Click Radar on the status bar with the left mouse button to show the Radar Overlay window.
b) Choose “ECDIS only” and then push the thumbwheel.
2. Choose control of visible navigation features as “Off” for radar overlay.
a) Roll the thumbwheel to display Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area and then
push the left mouse button.
b) Click the right arrow tab to display the Standard page.
c) Uncheck Radar.
d) Click the X at the top right corner of the window to close the window.
3. Choose display mode (upper left corner on the status bar) as True Motion.

4. Spin the thumbwheel to display Set Chart Center/Info/Active Scroll in the mouse functions area and then push
the left mouse button. Set chart center so ship is off the screen or TM reset is OFF.

5. Set the scale to 1:1,000 by displaying Range+/ /Range- in the mouse functions area and pushing the appropriate
mouse button to display 1:1,000.

8-17
8. Vector Chart Material

8.4.2 Choosing automatic SENC conversion and display until date

When you are loading new S57 charts Base cells and/or their updates into your hard disk, they can be automatically
converted to SENC format. Further, display dates can be set as issue dates automatically. Do the following to set
these options:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse function area
and then push the right mouse button.

2. Choose SENC Convert Settings from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. A SENC Convert Settings dialog box appears:

4. Check Automatic SENC conversion and Automatic Display Until.

5. Click the X at the top of the dialog box to close the box.

8-18
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.4.3 Viewing progress of SENC conversion

If you want to view the progress of SENC conversion, display the SENC Convert window as follows:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions

area and then push the right mouse button.

2. Choose SENC Convert from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. The SENC Convert window appears.

The example above shows a queue of unfinished SENC conversions.

Note: You can remove charts from the conversion list at any time. Use the cursor to
highlight desired amount of chart names in the Conversion List. Then, click the
Cancel Conv. button to remove those charts from the SENC conversion queue.

The example above shows that all SENC conversions have been finished. Then, you
can see CD ROM history by clicking the CD History button.

You can view the results of loaded charts from a CD-ROM by clicking the Load
History button, or you can view the results of the finished SENC conversions by
clicking Conv. History button.

8-19
8. Vector Chart Material

8.4.4 Using the Failed SENC conversion window

If the system is unable to convert ENC into SENC without any error or failure, the Failed SENC conversion window
appears with a list of failed ENCs. Status of Failure means that the system completely failed to convert the ENC into
the SENC and thus the ENC cannot be used.

Status of Errors means that the system detected minor or major errors in the conversion of the ENC into the SENC.
Check the content of Conv. History and cell status to see if the error was minor or major. Major errors are indicated
as NON ENC in Conv. History. Note that the status of errors together with NON ENC in Conv History clearly
indicate that this chart is not up-to-date and thus it does not fulfil SOLAS requirements. Get the latest edition of this
chart from the publisher immediately.

“Failed” means that the system completely failed to convert the ENC into the SENC and thus the ENC cannot be
used. Failure clearly indicates that this chart is not up-to-date and thus it does not fulfil SOLAS requirements. Get
the latest edition of this chart from the publisher immediately.

The Failed SENC conversion window contains two buttons. Conv. History opens the conversion history log and
Cell Status opens the window of chosen item in the list of Failed SENC conversions window.

The Conv. History button is used to display

the conversion log. The conversion log shows
the status of converted ENCs. For further
details about the results of conversions, see
paragraph 8.4.5 “Using SENC conversion
history log“.

Click the Cell Status button, and a Cell Status window appears.

Then you can click the Conv Log button to view a detailed description of errors and failures detected during SENC
conversion (see example below).

8-20
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.4.5 Using SENC conversion history log

The system automatically records the results of all conversions into the conversion history log. You can view the
content of this log at any time by doing the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right
mouse button.

2. Choose SENC Convert from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. The SENC Convert window appears.

After conversion (Conversion list is empty), click the Conv. History button.
Note: You can also activate the Conv. History from the “Failed SENC conversions” window.

4. A list of converted charts appears:

You can view the status of converted charts on the list, and also source if it is available.

5. Click the X at top right corner to close the window.

Below are examples of all possible results of conversion:

Perfect chart
Successful auto. conv: ENC: GB203000.000, edt: 1, upd: 0 / 1999 4 3

Perfect chart which is produced by a private chart producer (i.e., chart doesn't have ENC
status)
A private chart cannot fulfil SOLAS requirements and you must refer to a paper chart as legal primary aid of
navigation, when you navigate in the area covered by this chart.
Successful auto. conv: ENC: AS31MATT.000, edt: 1, upd: 0 / 1999 4 8 NON ENC

Conversion errors, but the chart is partly usable

Use cell status to check details of errors. Note that the chart is still ENC.
Successful auto. conv with errors: ENCD ROME416050.000, edt: 3, upd: 0 / 1998 6 12

8-21
8. Vector Chart Material

Conversion errors, but the chart is partly usable as NON ENC

Use cell status to check details of errors. Note that the chart is no longer ENC if it was produced by a Hydrographic
Office. You must refer to a paper chart as legal primary aid of navigation, when you navigate in the area covered by
this chart.
Successful auto. conv with errors: ENC: n1302322.000, edt: 1, upd: 0 / 1999 1 4 NON ENC

Failed conversion
Chart is not usable and you cannot view the chart. You must refer to a paper chart as legal primary aid of navigation,
when you navigate in the area covered by this chart.
Failed automatic conversion: ENCD ROMK3EI0XE.000, edt: 1, upd: 0 / 1999 2 17

Failed conversion of an update

Chart is partly usable, but it is not up-to-date and you need the latest edition of the chart from its publisher. Note that
the chart is still ENC, but it no longer fulfils the SOLAS requirement. You must refer to a paper chart as legal
primary aid of navigation, when you navigate in the area covered by this chart.
Failed auto. conv: ENC: GB500005.001, edt: 2, upd: 1 / 1997 9 26 Updating impossible before
new edition of Base cell

Failed conversion. Checksum is not correct

Chart is not usable and you cannot view it. Try to reload the Base cell or update from the original media. And if that
doesn't work order a new CD ROM from your chart supplier. You must refer to a paper chart as legal primary aid of
navigation, when you navigate in the area covered by this chart.
Failed automatic conversion: ENC: SG5CONTL.000, edt: 1, upd: 0 / 1996 2 25 CHECKSUM ERROR

Failed conversion. Checksum of an update is not correct

Chart is partly usable, but it is not up-to-date. Try to reload the update from the original media. And if that doesn't
work order a new CD ROM from your chart supplier. Note that the chart is still ENC, but it no longer fulfils the
SOLAS requirement. You must refer to a paper chart as legal primary aid of navigation, when you navigate in the
area covered by this chart.
Failed automatic conversion: ENC: GB5X01SW.002, edt: 1, upd: 2 / 2005 1 1 CHECKSUM ERROR

Failed conversion. At least one of the previous updates has failed in its SENC conversion
The system cannot accept additional updates unless all previous updates have been successfully converted into the
SENC. Chart is partly usable, but it is not up-to-date. Try to reload the failed previous update from the original
media (in this example the failed previous update is GB5X01SW.002). And if that doesn't work, order a new CD
ROM from your chart supplier. Note that the chart is still ENC, but it no longer fulfils the SOLAS requirement. You
must refer to a paper chart as legal primary aid of navigation, when you navigate in the area covered by this chart.
Failed automatic conversion: ENC: GB5X01SW.003, edt: 1, upd: 3 / 2005 9 8 PREVIOUS Update
MISSING

Failed conversion. The Base cell has failed in its SENC conversion
The system cannot accept updates unless the Base cell has been successfully converted into the SENC. Chart is not
usable and you cannot view it. Try to reload the Base cell from the original media (in this example the failed Base
cell is GB5X01SW.000). And if that doesn't work, order a new CD ROM from your chart supplier. You must refer
to a paper chart as legal primary aid of navigation, when you navigate in the area covered by this chart.
Failed automatic conversion: ENC: GB5X01SW.001, edt: 1, upd: 1 / 1998 9 8 PREVIOUS Base CELL
OR Update MISSING

NOTE: Always study both the “Failed SENC conversion” dialog and “Conversion history log” very
carefully, because they contain important information about the legal status of the charts. Specially
note that a chart may lose its legal status to fulfil SOLAS requirements and you may need to refer to
a paper chart as legal primary aid of navigation.

8-22
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.4.6 Using SENC convert window to initiate SENC conversion

Normally automatic SENC conversion is chosen and there is no need to initiate SENC conversions from the SENC
convert window. If you do not use the automatic SENC conversion, you need to manually initiate SENC conversion.
Another case in which you need to manually initiate SENC conversion is if you upgraded or reloaded the ECDIS
software from the ECDIS software CD ROM.

To initiate SENC conversions manually, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions

area and then push the right mouse button.

2. Choose SENC Convert from the menu and push the thumbwheel.

3. The SENC Convert window appears:

4. Use the Cells button to choose an individual chart or use the Groups button to
choose a group of charts. Then click the Convert button to initiate the SENC
conversion of the charts. Note that Convert only converts those charts which are
not currently converted into the SENC format. If your chosen chart or all members
of your chosen group are already in the SENC format, the Conversion list remains
empty. If all or some charts are not yet in the SENC format, they are added to the
Conversion list (see the example below). If, for some reason, you need to force
SENC conversion of an already converted chart, refer to paragraph 8.15 “Other
Features of Vector Charts”.

Note 1: You may remove charts from the conversion list at any time. Use the cursor
to highlight the charts to remove and then click the Select button. Finally, click the
Cancel Conv. button to remove chosen charts from the SENC conversion queue.

Note 2: You can view the results of the finished SENC conversions at any time. Click
the Conv. History button to view the conversion log.

8-23
8. Vector Chart Material

8.5 Features of the Chart Menu

8.5.1 Overview of the chart menu
The Chart menu provides various features for processing charts. To display the menu, spin the thumbwheel to
display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then click the right mouse button.

Activate ARCS chart:

This function activates ARCS chart onto the screen. You have two options for
how to open the chart on the display. “Ignore scale” opens an ARCS chart with
the chart scale used the last time you opened an ARCS chart. “Sync scale” opens
an ARCS chart with a scale which is as close as possible to the scale which was
used with S57 charts.

Load and Update Charts:

You can load ENCs into your hard disk, using CD ROMs, floppies or LAN
(Local Area Network). For further details see the paragraph 8.3 “Loading S57
Charts.”

SENC Convert:

You can convert ENCs (Base cells and/or updates) into the SENC format by
individual cell or by groups of cells. For further details, see paragraph 8.4.6
“Using SENC convert window to initiate SENC conversion”.

SENC Convert Settings:

You can choose automatic conversion from ENC format into the SENC format
when you load charts into your hard disk. You can also choose automatic setting
of Display Until date to current date after the SENC conversion. For further
details see paragraph 8.4.2 “Choosing automatic SENC conversion and display
until date“.

Remove Charts:

You can remove cells from your hard disk. See paragraph 8.5.6 “Removing S57 charts from the system”.
C-MAP Ed3:
Load, register, update, etc. C-Map charts.
Chart Catalogue:
You can manage S57 charts. See paragraph 8.5.2 “Catalogue of S57 cells“.
Set Chart viewing dates:
You can view date dependency of the cells (RENC status query date, number of updates available, update display
dates, update approve dates of the cells) in the SENC format. For more information, see paragraph 8.12 “Chart
Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of the Vector Chart“.
Chart Permits:
You can load permits for encrypted charts to enable their use in your ECDIS. Currently PRIMAR and C-MAP use
encryption.
ECDIS Chart 1:
This is used to open the chart set “IHO ECDIS Chart 1”. This function helps you familiarize yourself with the
various chart symbologies used with the ECDIS. For detailed information, see paragraph 8.13 “Symbology Used in
Vector Charts”.
Open Chart by Cell name:
You can open a S57 chart by its number. See paragraph 8.10.2 “Choosing charts for viewing”.

8-24
 8. Vector Chart Material

Chart Cell Status:

You can view status of the cells (edition number and date, number of updates of the cell) stored in your hard disk,
CD ROMs or RENC. You can compare that you have the latest cell with latest update in use. For further details, see
paragraph 8.15 “Other Features of Vector Charts”.

Manual Updates:

You can update your charts manually. For the procedure, see Chapter 10 “Manual Updates”.
System:
System contains a set of additional selections, and they are
described below:

Log file

The log file contains various system events which might be useful when your system supplier tries to find the reason
for unexpected behavior of the system reported by you.

S52 presentation library

You can confirm the S52 presentation library revision

number for S57 charts. The current official Presentation
library is shown in this example.

User permit

You can check your user permit, which is used as your

identifier in security systems such as PRIMAR and CMAP.
See the example at left.

Refresh charts after backup

This is used to refresh available charts and updates after someone backs up all charts and updates from another
ECDIS to this ECDIS.

Reset files

For factory-use only. This feature demonstrates chart uploading and downloading.

S57_Error If you accidentally choose this option, you get the question shown left.

Cannot find Reset file Click the OK button to escape.

Restart drawing process

This is used to restart chart drawing. Use restart drawing process, if you are not able to move chart or zoom in/out.

8-25
8. Vector Chart Material

8.5.2 Catalogue of S57 cells

An S57 catalogue is used to view graphical coverage of the charts stored in your hard disk, available in a named
“CD ROM” or available from an RENC. Available charts are displayed using their limits of charts. Note that
sometimes the real coverage of the charts may be considerably less than the declared limits of it. You can cursor-
pick any chart by going over its limit and then you can view the information for it.

To display the catalogue, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right
mouse button.

2. Spin the thumbwheel to choose Chart Catalogue and then push the thumbwheel.
North Up TM

O CD O RENC O SENC O C-Map 1.

2.

3.
4.

5.

8-26
 8. Vector Chart Material

1. Source of Chart Catalogue

• CD ROM: Display charts available in a named “CD ROM”.
• RENC: Display charts available from an RENC.
• SENC: Display charts stored in your hard disk in SENC format.
2. View Filters
• Name: Display also cell names in graphical coverage display.
• Permit: Display only charts for which you have permit.
• RENC Cancelled Charts: Display charts which are cancelled in an RENC.
• Navigation purpose: Display charts for chosen navigation purpose (overview, general, coastal, approach,
harbour, berthing).
3. Selected Chart

• Cell: Name of the chart

• Permit: Existence of the permit

• SENC: Existence of SENC in your hard disk

4. Edit Group: For further details, see paragraph 8.5.3 “Grouping S57 chart cells”.

5. The chart limit boxes are color-coded as follows:

Green The chart is available for use in SENC format. If the source of the chart is an RENC then the chart is
also up-to-date. If the source of the chart is something other than an RENC, then all loaded updates are
included into the SENC.

Orange The chart is available for use in SENC format but the chart is either not up-to-date or has been
cancelled. Either the SENC is from a former edition, the SENC is missing the latest updates or the
chart has been cancelled.

Red If the chart is permit free, you do not have it available for use in SENC format and thus you cannot use
the chart currently.
The chart requires a permit but you do not have the permit for the chart therefore you cannot use the
chart currently.

Blue The chart is available either in ENC format, in SENC format for another software version or in SENC
format for another ECDIS. For example, the chart is blue during SENC conversion and when you
loaded a chart into the ECDIS and the system could not convert the chart into SENC format.

Magenta You have a permit to use the chart, but the chart is not available in SENC format and thus you cannot
use the chart currently.

8-27
8. Vector Chart Material

8.5.3 Grouping S57 chart cells

You can define groups of S57 charts. This means you can collect related charts, for example, all cells which cover a
route from Liverpool to New York or all cells available from a National Hydrographic Office. This makes it easier
to perform many SENC maintenance functions such as loading Base cells and updates, setting Display Until and
Approve Until dates, etc. Below is the procedure for how to make a group and add charts into it.

When you load or update S57 charts from CD-ROM, you are able to define a group in “Load or Update Charts from
loaded CD-ROM” window. To do this, proceed as follows:

Using Load or Update Charts from loaded CD-ROM window

When you load or update S57 charts from CD-ROM, you are able to define a group in “Load or Update Charts from
loaded CD-ROM” window. To do this, proceed as follows:

1. Select Load or Update charts>From CD-ROM in Chart menu. A “Load or Update Charts from loaded CD-
ROM” window appears.
North Up TM

2. Press the Edit Group button.

3. Press the New button.

4. Enter group name and click the OK button.

8-28
 8. Vector Chart Material

5. Click the Add Frame button.

North Up TM

6. Use the trackball to define a frame and then the push the left button.
North Up TM

7. When frame is completed, then press the Done button.

8-29
8. Vector Chart Material

8. When you have completed , press the Close Edit button.

North Up TM

9. Select Group as a qualifier for loading.

North Up TM

10. Now you can load charts member of group Japan by pressing the Load button followed by the Yes button.

8-30
 8. Vector Chart Material

Using Chart catalogue window

Chart Catalogue can be used to define a group as follows:

1. Select “Chart Catalogue” from the Chart menu window.

North Up TM

o CD O RENC o SENC o C-Map

2. Press the Edit Group button and then press the New button.

8-31
8. Vector Chart Material

3. Enter name for Group and click the OK button.

North Up TM

o CD O RENC o SENC o C-Map

4. Press the Add Frame button.

5. Define frame using left mouse button and press the Done button.
North Up TM

o CD O RENC o SENC o C-Map

8-32
 8. Vector Chart Material

6. Select Group to view content of group in Chart Catalogue window.

North Up TM

o CD O RENC o SENC o C-Map

8-33
8. Vector Chart Material

Removing S57 chart cells from a group

You can remove chart cells from a defined group as follows:

1. Select desired group.

2. Press the Edit Group button.

3. Use the Remove frame button to define area for charts or pick charts individually from the list.
North Up TM

O CD O RENC O SENC O C-Map

1. Check group and choose

group name to remove.

2. Click Edit Group.

North Up TM

O CD O RENC O SENC O C-Map

3. Use Remove Frame button to use

graphical catalog, or choose individual
cell by using left mouse button and
clicking >>.

4. Click Done.

8-34
 8. Vector Chart Material

Deleting a group
You can delete a defined group as follows:

North Up TM

O CD O RENC O SENC O C-Map

1. Choose group.

2. Click Remove Frame

button to delete.

Choosing active group for viewing with catalogue

To choose active group do the following:

1. Choose Chart Catalogue from the Chart menu.

2. Check Groups.

3. Choose desired group from Edit Group list box.

The name of active group appears in the Active Group field.

8-35
8. Vector Chart Material

Viewing active group with catalogue

To view active group, check “Group” selection and select desired group from list box
North Up TM

O CD O RENC O SENC O C-Map

Select "Group" to activate a

Group selection. Select
desired group.

8-36
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.5.4 Viewing status and setting viewing dates of S57 chart cells
and their updates
When you load S57 chart cell(s) and/or their updates, the system sets Display Until of S57 chart cell(s) as current
date of the system. To set Approve Until as current date of the system, you must open the Set Chart viewing dates
dialog box and perform Approve Until. You can view status and set viewing dates of S57 chart cells and their
updates. To view status and date dependency, do the following:

1. Choose Set Chart viewing dates from the Chart menu.

2. The Chart Viewing date dialog box appears.

Note: You can perform

various scrolling functions by Recommended settings in Chart viewing date are:
placing the cursor on the
scroll bar and pushing the • Sync Manual Update Dates: ON position
right mouse button to show
the sub menu below. Choose • All SENCs: ON position
item and then push left mouse
button to execute.

Scroll Here

Top
Bottom

Page Up
Page Down

Scroll Up
Scroll Down

Scroll here: Place the cursor

on the scroll bar to scroll to
that location and then push
the left mouse button.
Top, Bottom: Scroll to top,
bottom.
Page Up, Page Down: Scroll
page up, page down.
Scroll Up, Scroll Down:
Scroll up, scroll down.

8-37
8. Vector Chart Material

RENC edt / upd: The column “RENC” contains edition/update status from Product List.

SENC edt / upd: The column “SENC” contain edition/update status from “SENC”, i.e., loaded and converted in the
ECDIS.

Updates displ. until: “date until updates” is displayed. You can enter desired date by using the Display Until field.
The number after the date shows the number of updates for the displayed cell (number of displayed updates /
number of updates in SENC format).

Updates approv. until: View the Date Until updates is approved. You can enter desired date by using the Approve
Until field (number of approved updates / number of updates in SENC format).

The issue date of the Product List used is displayed as “Latest RENC Product List”. An RENC Product List contains
information about the charts stored in RENC and the date when the Product List was issued. If the ECDIS does not
contain any Product List, then the date of the Product List is displayed as “—NVLD—”.

The “>>>“ mark is used to indicate that a chart is not up-to-date. The “<<<“ mark is used to indicate that SENC
contains newer information than the information in an RENC Product List. (You may need to load newer RENC
Product List.) Cancelled charts are indicated as “cancelled” instead of “edtn/updn”. If an SENC contains a cancelled
chart, then the indication “>>>“ is replaced with “XXX”.

8.5.5 Removing an S57 chart cell from the system

To remove an S57 format vector chart cell from the system, do the following:

1. Choose Remove Charts from the Chart menu.

2. Choose chart cells to remove from the system. You can remove Base
cell (000), updates (001…) and SENC format (snc).

Click the Remove Chart button.

3. Click the OK button to remove the chart chosen.

The system will remove file(s) from the hard disk.

8-38
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.6 S57 Chart Service from an RENC

8.6.1 Introduction
Before you can use an RENC service, you have to be authorized as a customer of an RENC. To be authorized you
have to contact an official distributor (chart agent) of RENC. Then, the following services are available:

8.6.2 Permits
Permits are used to control the permission to use a chart. A permit in RENC security is connected to an edition.

Permits are issued as two different types:

• Subscription permit. These include updates for subsequent 12 months. It is assumed that a typical user is a
SOLAS class ship, which is required to use up-to-date charts.
• One-Off permit. These include only updates up to the issue date of the permit. It is assumed that a typical
user is a non-SOLAS class ship, which is not required to use up-to-date charts.

Each permit also includes the expiry date. The expiry date of a permit controls the ENC to SENC conversion. If the
issue date of a chart or update is older or equal to the permit expiry date, then the system can convert an ENC into
the SENC. There are no viewing time limits as used in some other security systems such as ARCS. The user has a
right to view a chart forever and more over he has a right to convert a chart from its ENC format into the SENC
forever.

An RENC can issue permits in two formats:

• “*.pmt” format. This format does not include the applicable chart edition nor does it include applicable
permit type.

• PERMIT.TXT format. This format includes the applicable chart edition as well as applicable permit type.

Both permit formats are fully operational, but the older “*.pmt” format creates confusion because it cannot support
the user when chart edition changes.

The system display warnings associated with expiry date. Examples are “will expire” warning 30 days before the
expiry date and “have expired” after the expiry date. These warnings are relevant only for Subscription permits.
Only the new PERMIT.TXT format supports the system to suppress irrelevant warnings associated with expiry date.

8.6.3 Product list

A Product List is maintained by an RENC. You can retrieve the Product List from an RENC via telecommunications
or you can load it from the CD ROM of an RENC. This list contains an up-to-date list of available charts and their
edition/update status in an RENC. When you load a CD ROM or use telecommunications to receive a Product List
from an RENC, the ECDIS checks the issue date of the Product List. If the issue date indicates a newer Product List,
then it is copied into the ECDIS. If the issue date indicates an older Product List, then ECDIS shows a notice to the
user that newer Product List is already loaded.

8.6.4 Authentication
Normally the authentication process is invisible to the user. Only if the authentication fails, then the user gets an
appropriate notice. From a user point of view, the authentication is similar to the CRC checksum test. If the CRC
checksum test or authentication fails, then the chart is unusable.

Authentication uses a private key and a public key. A digital signature associated with each chart contains a private
key. A public key is stored in the ECDIS and it is truly public. RENC may publish a new public key. This public
key will be available as text by fax, by post, by front page of a newspaper, etc. and as a text file, for example,
PRIMAR.PUB.

8-39
8. Vector Chart Material

8.6.5 Available service types

CD ROM service
If you are using a CD ROM service, you receive the following from an RENC:
• Base CD ROM contains all Base cells that are available in an RENC CD ROM database when the CD ROM was
released.

• Update CD ROM contains all updates to the Base CD ROM, but it will also contain any new Base cells and new
edition and re-issues received from the contributing Hydrographic Offices. Update CD ROM will be issued once
a week.
If you want to enlarge your chart coverage, you have to contact your distributor to order more permits for new
charts.

8.6.6 Subscription types

Charts and their updates stored in RENC are decrypted and you have to get a key (permit) to load charts into the
ECDIS. There are two different kinds of permits: subscription and one-off.

Subscription
Subscription period is 12 months and it starts when you order first permit(s) from an RENC.

• User subscribes to an updating service

• Updating service has a renewable expiration date

• ENC is still available after expiration, but cannot apply any new information

• User will receive the following during the service period:

• All updates issued to the ENC

• Any re-issues for the ENC

• Any new edition of the ENC

If you enlarge your chart coverage during your subscription period as shown above, the date of subscription
expiration for all charts will be the same date.

One-Off
In the one-off permit, you order permit for chart and updates which are valid until date you order permit (i.e., chart
is up-to-date when you ordered it). No more information can be retrieved for this chart, which is published after
order date.

One-Off Current Edition: Permit for a chart which is based on data on the hard disk of the ECDIS.

One-Off Latest Edition: Permit for a chart which is the latest available based on the Product List of an RENC.

8-40
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.7 Services Provided by an RENC

8.7.1 Viewing the coverage of an RENC service
To view the Product List in graphical presentation, use the catalogue, which you may display by opening the Chart
menu and choosing Chart Catalogue. The catalogue of S57 charts shows the situation when you last ordered the
Product List from an RENC or loaded the latest Base or Update CD ROM into the ECDIS.

Note: The ECDIS automatically keeps the latest available Product List. Thus the ECDIS does not load the Product
List if it is older than the one already loaded into the ECDIS.
North Up TM

1. Select RENC.

O CD O RENC O SENC O C-Map

2. Select desired
filters.

The chart limit boxes are color-coded as follows:

Green The chart is available for use in SENC format. If the source of the chart is an RENC, then the chart is
also up-to-date. If the source of the chart is something other than an RENC then all loaded updates are
included into the SENC.

Orange The chart is available for use in SENC format but the chart is either not up-to-date or has been
cancelled. Either the SENC is from a previous edition, the latest SENC update was missed or the chart
has been cancelled.

Red If the chart is permit free, you do not have it available for use in SENC format and thus you cannot use
the chart currently.
If the chart requires a permit and you do not have the permit for the chart, you cannot use the chart
currently.

Blue The chart is available either in ENC format, in SENC format for another software version or in SENC
format for another ECDIS. For example the chart is blue during SENC conversion and if you loaded a
chart into the ECDIS and the system could not convert the chart into SENC format.

Magenta You have a permit to use the chart, but the chart is not available in SENC format and thus you cannot
use the chart currently.

8-41
8. Vector Chart Material

8.7.2 Knowing up-to-date status of a chart from an RENC

To keep charts up-to-date, you should check for updates with an RENC weekly. The ECDIS compares charts used to
Product List of an RENC. If a Permanent Warning appears on the chart display of ECDIS (at the upper left corner),
this means that the charts used were checked against the Product List and at least one of the charts used is not up-to-
date. See the Permanent Warning below.

The information of available charts and their up-to-date status is available both in the catalogue and in the Chart
viewing dates window.

The easiest method to check if charts are up-to-date is to view the catalogue and check that the names of all
required charts appear in green. The names of charts which are not up-to-date appear in orange. For further
details see paragraph 8.7.1 “Viewing the coverage of an RENC service”.
You can also use the Chart viewing dates window in the Chart menu when you have doubt that some charts are not
up-to-date or the Permanent Warning shown above is displayed.

1.
2.

3.
4.

5.
6.

8-42
 8. Vector Chart Material

Interpreting the chart viewing date window

• RENC edt / upd: The chart's edition and its update in an RENC appear here. The information is based on the last-
ordered Product List.
• SENC edt / upd: The chart's edition and its update in the ECDIS appear here.
• If a chart is not available in an RENC but it is in the ECDIS the RENC edt/upd shows “ -/ -”.
• If a chart in the ECDIS is newer than the associated chart in an RENC, for example, the Chart viewing date
window the RENC edt/upd field shows “2/ 8” and the SENC edt/ upd field shows “2/ 9”.
• Chart Displayed and Approved Until are set based on Updates number (Updates Displayed and Approved until
as NVLD (Not Valid) indication).
• If a chart in the ECDIS is older than the associated chart an RENC, for example, the RENC edt/upd field shows
“1/ 21” and the SENC edt/ upd field shows “1/ 0”.

8.7.3 Knowing up-to-date status of an RENC product list

The ECDIS periodically checks for the last time you ordered the Product List from an RENC. If the Product List is
more than 30 days old, the ECDIS displays the S57 Message shown below:

To check the date when you last ordered the Product List of an RENC CD ROM, choose Set Chart viewing dates
from the Chart menu. The date the Product List was last ordered is shown at the lower left corner of the Chart
viewing dates window.

8-43
8. Vector Chart Material

8.7.4 Managing permits from an RENC

Permits are used to control the right to use a chart in the ECDIS. A permit in an RENC ENC service is connected to
an edition of a chart. Permits are issued in different types:

• Subscription permit: This type of permit includes updates for subsequent 12 months.

• One-Off permit: This type of permit includes only updates up to the issue date of the permit.

The expiry date of a permit controls the loading of Base charts and their updates to the ECDIS. The ECDIS will
warn you when you are loading charts or updates which are issued less than 30 days before the expiration date of a
permit. If a permit has expired, it is impossible to load a chart or its update which was issued after the expiration
date of the permit. The user has a right to view a chart forever, but it will not complete the requirements for having
up-to-date charts. To view the Chart Permits window, open the Chart menu and choose Chart Permits.

1.

2.
3.
.
4.
5.
6.

Description of the chart permits window

1. Public Key lets you view a public key or load a new one.
2. Load File enables downloading from an RENC when you receive permits from that RENC.
3. Backup makes a back-up copy of permits.
4. The Edt (Edition) field displays edition number of a chart to which the permit is valid. Note that when a new
edition of a chart is issued a new permit is required. It is possible to have permits for different editions of the
same chart.
5. The Type field shows type of permit held for a chart: S, Subscription or O, One-off.
6. The Expires field shows the expiration date of permits. All subscription-type permits will expire on the same
date.

8-44
 8. Vector Chart Material

Subscription warnings
If you have at least one subscription-type permit, the system will automatically warn you about the expiration date
of your subscription license.

Warning about soon-to-be-expired

subscription is activated every 12
hours when it is less than 30 days
from the expiration date.

Warning about expired subscription

is activated every 12 hours after the
subscription has expired.

Note: The top half of this message

display provides a warning that the
Product List is not up-to-date.

8.7.5 Managing public key from an RENC

To view a public key or to load a public key into the ECDIS, choose Chart Permits from the Chart menu and then
click the Public Key button.

8-45
8. Vector Chart Material

The View Current button displays current public key. The Load New button loads a new public key from *.PUB
file (for example, PRIMAR.PUB) and displays that file’s contents.

Compare the content of the newly loaded public key with the known content of the public key of an RENC you use.

If the contents are the same, you can accept the newly loaded public key by clicking the Accept New button.

8-46
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.8 CD ROM Service From an RENC

8.8.1 Getting started with S57 charts using an RENC

How to get started with a CD ROM service

Make a Subscription /
End User Agreement with
your chart distributor.

Send a list of charts to

your distributor.
Remember subscription type.

You received Permits, etc.

Load Permits into ECDIS.

Load Base
CD ROM into ECDIS.

Load Update
CD ROM into ECDIS.

8-47
8. Vector Chart Material

8.8.2 Keeping S57 charts up to date using an RENC

How to keep current charts

up-to-date in a CD ROM service

Subscription type: Subscription type:

Subscription One-Off
You received a weekly
or monthly packet.
If you received new permits, Nothing is received
load them into ECDIS. automatically.

If you received new base Order new Permits

CD ROM, load it into ECDIS. and latest BASE and
UPDATE CD-ROMs
at regular intervals.

You received new Permits, etc.

Load updates from the latest
Update CD ROM.
Load Permits into ECDIS.

After 12 months from

Subscription agreement
order new Permits. Load BASE CD-ROM
into ECDIS.

Load the latest Update

CD-ROM into ECDIS.

8-48
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.8.3 Enlarging chart coverage using an RENC

How to enlarge coverage in a CD-ROM service

Use Catalogue of S57 charts

to select additional charts.

Send a list of Charts to

your Distributor.
Remember subscription type.

You received new Permits, etc.

Load Permits into ECDIS.

Load BASE CD-ROM

into ECDIS.

Load the latest UPDATE

CD-ROM into ECDIS.

8.8.4 Base CD ROM from an RENC

A Base CD ROM from an RENC contains all the charts stored in an RENC when the CD ROM was issued. When
you load charts (using the CD ROM catalogue) the following information is also loaded into the ECDIS hard disk:

• The Content Summary of the Base CD ROM

• Publisher Notes

• Product List

When you receive a new Base CD ROM from an RENC, load charts into the ECDIS as follows:

8-49
8. Vector Chart Material

1. Check that you have already loaded correct Public key. This is
very important if you receive CD ROMs for multiple RENC. For
details, see paragraph 8.7.5 “Managing public key from an
RENC”.

2. Input CD ROM to drive.

3. Choose Load and Update Charts from the Chart menu and “from
CD ROM” from the sub menu. If the following window appears,
you have to define location of CD ROM, and then press the Load
button. If you want to load from another ECDIS via LAN, you
have to change Load Dir. Click the Browse button to select a new
Load Dir.

4. When you click the Load button, the ECDIS loads Content
Summary, Publisher Notes and Product List from the CD ROM
and opens the Load and Update Charts from CD ROM dialog box.

5. The system automatically copies all text and pictures files

associated with charts on the CD ROM catalogue. The system
keeps only the latest version of these. If your system is already
using the latest text and picture files you will get the notice
If you have a newer Product List already in below.
use, you get following notice.

Note: It is very typical that the Product List

of a base CD ROM is older than the Product
List in use.

8-50
 8. Vector Chart Material

6. In the Load or Update Charts from CD ROM dialog box, choose the charts to load into ECDIS, and then click
the Load button to load the charts into the ECDIS. For further details, see “Interpretation of Load or Update
Charts from CD ROM” on page 8-47.
North Up TM

7. Before ECDIS starts loading charts (and then automatically

converts them into SENC format) you are asked confirmation for
this operation.

8.The SENC conversion window appears.

8-51
8. Vector Chart Material

9. If error is detected during conversion from ENC to SENC, the

following window appears.

10. When conversion is completed, the following window appears.

For further details, see the paragraph “Viewing load history of

CD ROM“ on page 8-12.

8-52
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.8.5 Update CD ROM from an RENC

An Update CD ROM from an RENC contains all the updates included for charts stored in an RENC when the latest
Base CD ROM was issued. When you load charts by a CD ROM catalogue the following information is also loaded
into the ECDIS hard disk:

• The Content Summary of the Update CD ROM

• Publisher Notes

• The Product List

When you receive a new Update CD-ROM from an RENC, load charts into the system as follows:

1. Check that you have already loaded correct Public key. This is
very important if you receive CD-ROMs for multiple RENC. For
details, see paragraph 8.7.5 “Managing public key from an
RENC”.
2. Insert CD-ROM or floppy disk to drive. Spin the thumbwheel to
show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and
then push the right button.
3. Choose Load and Update Charts from the menu and “from CD-
ROM” from the sub menu (see bottom figure at left). The default
load source is from CD-ROM. If ECDIS finds a CD-ROM
containing chart data then CD-Catalogue will be automatically
loaded otherwise window shown below appears, you have to
define correct directory, then click the Load button to load from a
CD-ROM. If you want to load from another ECDIS using LAN,
you have to change Load Dir. Click the Browse button to choose
a new Load Dir.

4. The system loads content summary, publisher notes and Product

List from the CD-ROM and then opens the Load or Update Charts
from CD-ROM dialog box.
5. The system automatically copies all text and pictures files
associated with charts from the CD-ROM catalogue. The system
keeps only the latest version of these. If your system already has
newer text or pictures in use, you will get the notice below.

8-53
8. Vector Chart Material

6. In the Load or Update Charts from loaded CD-ROM window, choose the charts to load.
North Up TM

7. Then, click the Load button to load charts. See also “Interpretation of Load or Update Charts from loaded CD-
ROM dialog box” on page 8-11.
8. Before ECDIS starts loading charts (and then automatically converts them into SENC format) you are asked
confirmation for this operation.

8-54
 8. Vector Chart Material

9. Charts are loaded into ECDIS and then automatically converted to SENC format. The SENC Convert window
appears.

10. If an error is detected during conversion from ENC to SENC, the following window appears. To find the reason
click the Details button.

11. When conversion is completed, the following window appears.

8-55
8. Vector Chart Material

Interpretation of Load or Update Charts from loaded CD-ROM window

North Up TM

1.

2.

3.
7.

4.
5.
6.

1. The source and edition date of the CD is displayed here.

2. A list of charts stored in the CD-ROM, edition number of the chart and the number of updates included in the
chart.

3. In the Load Selector field, you can choose how to pick desired charts from the list:

• Name: ECDIS will display chart names on graphical presentation if selected.

• Permit: ECDIS will highlight the charts which are available in the CD-ROM and for which you have
permits.

• RENC Canceled Charts: ECDIS will display charts on display which are canceled on RENC and normally
on CD-ROM.

• Group: If you have predefined a group of charts, ECDIS will highlight those charts in the group which are
available in the CD-ROM.

• Manual Selection: You can highlight desired charts from the list.

• Missing only, loads and display on graphical presentation only charts and their updates which are not
already loaded into the system.

4. The View CD-ROM Publisher Notes button is used to view important notices published by chart producer, The
View CD-ROM content Summary button is used to list charts available on CD-ROM and the Load History
and Conv. History button check what is loaded and converted from the CD-ROM. The Remove button is used
to remove the CD-ROM catalogue permanently from the system.

5. The Edit Group button is used to create and modify group.

6. The Load button is used to start loading.

8-56
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.8.6 Viewing coverage of a base or update CD ROM from an RENC

Insert desired CD-ROM into CD-ROM drive. Select from Chart menu Load or Update Charts and next menu
select from CD-ROM.
North Up TM

Sample coverage area when a CD-ROM catalogue is from a Base CD-ROM from an RENC

Note: remove selection “Missing only” to see total content of CD-ROM.

8-57
8. Vector Chart Material

8.8.7 Loading an RENC-generated permit CD ROM or floppy disk

An RENC can deliver permits in a CD ROM or a floppy disk. When you receive new permits from an RENC, you
have to load them into the ECDIS. A permit is a key which is used to decrypt the chart you want to use in the
ECDIS. To load permits, do the following:

1. Choose Chart Permits from the Chart menu.

.
2. Click the Load File button.

3. Choose correct drive from the Look in list box.

Permits are available in two formats.

• PERMIT.TXT which contain permits and their editions and subscription

types. This is the preferred format.

• *.PMT, received from an RENC, contain permits, but no edition or

subscription information. Note that the *.PMT format is used by the system
for backup of permits. As a backup it contain also subscription type and
edition.

• Choose suitable permit file and click the Open button to load permits.

• The Chart Permits window displays permits which are loaded into the
ECDIS.

8-58
 8. Vector Chart Material

Messages which may appear when loading a permit

If you try to load a One-off permit
for a chart for which you already
have a Subscription permit, you get
the following message:

If you load permits from a different

ECDIS, you get the following
message:

8-59
8. Vector Chart Material

8.9 RENC Security System

8.9.1 Standard messages in S57 chart load
When loading S57 charts into the ECDIS, messages appear to alert you to permits and authentication. These are
described below and on the next several pages.

8.9.2 Additional messages in S57 chart load

Issue control of Base and Update CD ROM from RENC

CD ROMs from an RENC contain issue control. If you later use a CD ROM catalogue created during loading of S57
charts, you get the following messages for a wrong CD ROM.

8-60
 8. Vector Chart Material

Messages which contain only notice

If you tried to load charts for which
you do not have a permit, you will
get the following message:

Messages which require careful attention

All messages in this chapter change the legal status of the charts in your system. Study these messages carefully
because you may need to use paper charts to fulfil SOLAS requirements.

You do not have a valid permit

A chart was not converted into
SENC because the permit for it has
expired.

A chart was not converted into

SENC because a permit is for a
different edition.

You can check edition of the permit

using the Chart Permits window in
the Chart menu and the edition of the
chart by using the Cell Status Typical reason is that the chart has been updated too many times as new
window. edition instead of an update. Ask for new permits from your chart agent.

A chart was not converted into

SENC because your permit was for
different edition.

You can check edition of a permit

using the Chart Permits and the
edition of a chart using the Chart The common reason for this message is that the chart has been updated too
Cell Status window, both in the many times as new edition instead of update. Ask for new permits from
Chart menu. your chart agent.

A chart was not converted into

SENC because the software, data and
system time in the ECDIS indicates
tampering.

The common reason for this message is that RENC released a chart before
the issue date of the chart.

8-61
8. Vector Chart Material

Authentication of chart failed

The chart was not loaded because of

missing signature.

The chart was not loaded because of

coding error in Signature.

The chart was not loaded because of

tampered Signature or invalid Public
Key.

The chart was not loaded because of

invalid or tampered Signature.

8.9.3 Standard messages in S57 SENC conversion

When converting S57 charts for use in the ECDIS, messages appears to alert you during the conversion. For details
see paragraph 8.4.5 “Using SENC conversion history log”.

8-62
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.9.4 Additional messages in S57 SENC conversion

Messages which contain only notice

You do not have a permit.

Messages which require careful attention

Permit for a chart has expired.

You have a permit, but it is valid for

another edition of the cell.

You can check edition of the permit

using the Chart Permits window and
the edition of a chart using the Cell
Status window, both in the Chart
menu.
A typical reason is that the chart has been updated too many times as a new
edition instead of an update. Ask for new permits from your chart agent.

8-63
8. Vector Chart Material

8.10 Vector Chart Display

8.10.1 Choosing vector chart material to use
To activate S57 chart material onto the display, do the following:

1. Place the cursor just above the chart scale indication in the information area.

2. Activate S57 Chart appears in the mouse functions area; push the left mouse button.

8.10.2 Choosing charts for viewing

Choosing a chart from a catalogue

To choose a chart for viewing from a catalogue, do the following:

1. Choose Chart Catalogue from the Chart menu.

2. From the Chart Catalogue dialog box, use the cursor to choose desired chart. For further details, see paragraph
8.5.2 “Catalogue of S57 cells“.

3. Click the Open button.

Browsing your charts

You may view S57 charts using different positions and different scales. The basic tools for browsing charts are
Range -, Range+, Set Chart Center, ShipOffcenter and TM Reset.

Set Chart Center allows you to look ahead from a place other than own ship’s current position. Choose Set Chart
Center from the Menu. The dialog box shown below appears. Turn off automatic true motion reset by displaying and
clicking TM Reset (in the mouse functions area). When true motion reset is off, the indication “Ship off screen”
appears in the information area.

Use the thumbwheel to set the latitude and longitude

position for chart center and then click the Set Center
button.

To restore own ship’s position to the screen center, display TM Reset/Info/ShipOffcenter in the mouse functions
area and then push the left mouse button.

Range - and Range+ change the chart scale. If true motion reset is active, ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT keep the
relative position of the own ship with respect to the display. If true motion reset is on, ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT
keep the relative position pointed by the cursor with respect to the display.

The system automatically chooses next larger or smaller scale. If a chart with larger compilation scale available at
your current viewing position, the message “Larger Scale Data Exists” appears.

8-64
 8. Vector Chart Material

Looking for charts around own ship

You can use either true motion or relative motion. In the true motion mode, own ship moves until it reaches the true
motion reset borderline, where it jumps back to an opposite position on the screen based on ship’s course. In the
relative motion mode, own ship stays in a fixed position, while the chart moves on screen.

If, in the true motion mode, you reset own position with TM Reset, own ship will immediately jump to the true
motion reset position.

If, in the true motion mode, you use ShipOffcenter, your ship will go to that position on screen and continue true
motion movement from that position. When it reaches the true motion reset borderline, it will automatically jump to
the true motion reset position.

If, in the relative motion mode, you reset own position with TM Reset, your ship will immediately jump to the true
motion reset position and use that position as fixed position to stay on screen.

If you use relative motion, you can choose a new fixed position for your ship by using ShipOffcenter.

Use Range - and Range+ to choose desired chart scale.

8.10.3 Choosing a chart by its name on the display

To activate a specific S57 chart cell onto the display, use Open Chart by Cell name menu in the Chart menu as
follows:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions

area and then push the right mouse button.

2. Choose Open Chart by Cell name from the menu and then push the
thumbwheel.

3. Choose desired chart from chart list dialog and then click the Open Chart
button.

The chosen chart is automatically displayed in the electronic chart area.

8-65
8. Vector Chart Material

8.10.4 Controlling visible chart features

The Chart Display dialog box contains several pages of chart features which you may adjust as appropriate. To
display this dialog box, spin the thumbwheel to show Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions
area and then push the left mouse button.

Chart page

Black and grey color symbol:

This symbol is used to verify that you can distinguish black (frame of symbol) and
grey (inner part of symbol) colors with current contrast and brilliance settings.

Dsp Dimmer:

Use this control to adjust dimming of the display. The text “CALIB” indicates that
dimming of display is set within calibration values. Monitor brilliance is restored to
calibrated state by doing the following:
1) Place the cursor on the calibration bar and spin the thumbwheel to show
“CALIB”.
2) Operating the STD DSP key on the Control Unit RCU-018.
3) Choosing “Set Std Display” from the menu.
4) Pressing and holding down any one of the F1-F4 keys more than two seconds on
the Control Unit RCU-015.

Shallow contour:

Set value of shallow water contour.

Safety depth:

Set value of safety depth. Spot soundings below the safety depth are highlighted.

Safety contour:

Set value of safety contour. Visible safety contour is equal to set value or if the
contour of set value is not available then the visible safety contour is next deeper
contour than safety contour.

Note: The system uses safety contour also for chart alarms.

Deep contour:

Set deep-water contour.

TM reset:

In the true motion mode, own ship moves until it reaches the true motion reset
borderline (set here), and then it jumps back to an opposite position on screen based
on its course. Set the limit for TM reset (in percentage).

Palette:

Choose appropriate palette for the display depending on the brightness of the bridge.

Symbols:

Choose how to display chart symbols. The options are:

Simplified: The shape of symbols is of modern design and the sea mark symbols are filled in a color.

Paper Chart: The shape of symbols imitates traditional symbols used in paper charts.

8-66
 8. Vector Chart Material

Depths:

Set how to display different depth zones on the chart display.

For MULTICOLOUR, the chart display uses four different colors for contours:

• Deeper than user-chosen deep contour

• Between deep contour and user-chosen safety contour

• Between safety contour and user-chosen shallow water contour

• Between shallow water contour and coastline.

For TWO COLOUR, the chart display uses only two colors:

• Deeper than safety contour

• Shallower than safety contour

Boundaries:

Set how to display boundaries of some chart features. The options are:

• Plain: The line styles are limited to plain solid and dashed lines.

• Symbolized: Some of the line styles use symbols to highlight the purpose of a line.

Light sectors:

Set how to display light sectors. The options are:

• Limited: The length of a light sector is fixed at 25 mm independently of the displayed scale.

• Full: The length of a light sector represents its nominal range as defined by the chart producer.

Shallow pattern:

Set how to display shallow water area. The options are:

• None

• Diamond: Provided to distinguish shallow water at night.

Update highlight:

Set how the updates are highlighted on the screen before you approve them. The options are

• Detailed: The system tries to highlight updates so that only those objects which have visible changes are
highlighted. Use this option to see the practical change of an update.

• All effects: The system highlights updates so that all the objects pertaining to updates are highlighted although
some of them have not been changed.

8-67
8. Vector Chart Material

“Standard, Other 1 and Other 2” pages

The Standard page contains chart features defined by IMO which comprise a standard display. You can recall the
standard display at any time using a single action, by pressing the STD DSP key on the Control Unit RCU-018 or
displaying Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse function area and pushing the right mouse button.

The Other 1 and Other 2 pages contain chart features for which you can control visibility and which are not part of
IMO-defined standard display.

Note 1: To use the Info request feature, which provides information for cursor-chosen chart feature, the associated
chart feature must be turned on from the Standard page.

Note 2: To navigate between the pages in the Chart Display dialog box, click the appropriate arrow tab with the left
mouse button or hit the NEXT key on the Control Unit RCU-018.

8.10.5 Display base

A subset of chart features is called the Display Base. As required by IMO, these features cannot be made invisible.
The Display Base consist of the following chart features:

• Coastline (high water)

• Own ship's safety contour, which is chosen by the user

• Indication of isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the safety contour which lie within the safe waters
defined by the safety contour

• Indication of isolated dangers which lie within the safe water defined by the safety contour such as bridges,
overhead wires, etc., and including buoys and beacons whether or not these are being used as aids to navigation.

• Traffic routine systems

• Scale, range, orientation and display mode

• Units of depth and height

8-68
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.10.6 Controlling visible navigation features

Visibility control of the navigation features is divided into four pages in the Chart Display menu. The “Route” page
controls planned and monitored routes. The “Tracking” page controls past tracks and some other features. The
“Target” page controls ARP and AIS targets. The “Mariner” page controls pilot data, user charts and chart alarms.
The “Target” page.

The user can define settings for chart details which are displayed over the chart area. This means that the user can
choose different layers to be Off, Std or Other. Off turns off the feature chosen. Std turns on the navigation feature
chosen when the standard display is made active (with the STD DSP key on the Control Unit RCU-018 or accessing
the mouse function Standard Display). Other turns off the navigation features when the standard display is made
active as mentioned above.
Route page

This page contains selection of route related navigation features

Monitored route: Choose which part of monitored route to display.

Planned route: Choose which part of planned route to display.

Note: WP mark on both monitor and planned routes is set permanently to Std
position.

8-69
8. Vector Chart Material

Tracking page

Past tracks

• Ship System: Choose Std or Other to plot own ship’s tracks using
system-fed position.

• Ship Primary: Choose Std or Other to plot own ship’s past track
with position fed from the primary sensor.

• Ship Secondary: Choose Std or Other to plot own ship’s past track
with position fed from a secondary sensor.

• Length: Choose length (in minutes) of past tracks shown on the

screen.

• Labels: Choose period of track labeling.

• Targets: Choose Std or Other to plot ARPA target past tracks. Use
chooses number of track points to display; Interval chooses the
plotting interval for the track points.

Events: These marks are based on voyage log records. For more
information, see paragraph 19.3.2 “Voyage log”.

• User Event: Choose Std or Other to display event symbols on

ECDIS, where the system has recorded an event based on conditions
you have set (Type: User and Auto).

• Automatic Event: Choose Std or Other to display automatically

entered event symbols, where the system has recorded an event based
on conditions you have set (Type: Ship and Alarm).

• Positions: Choose Std or Other to display the latitude and longitude

of an event.
Note 1: MOB event is always visible.
Note 2: You can choose period of time to display event marks in the
list box “Show”.

8-70
 8. Vector Chart Material

Targets page

ARPA Targets:

• Choose Std or Other to show ARPA target labels.

AIS Targets:

• Symbol: Choose Std or Other to display AIS target symbols.

• Max (count): Set the maximum number of AIS targets to display.

• Max. (range): Set maximum range of AIS targets from own ship to
display.

8-71
8. Vector Chart Material

Mariner page

Pilot data:

• Position: Choose Std or Other to show positions of pilot data records

with symbols on the chart.

• Range: Choose Std or Other to circumscribe pilot data records with

circles on the display. The size of a circle depends on the value set in
pilot data.

• Text: Choose Std or Other to show text of pilot data records on the
chart.

User chart:

• Points: Choose Std or Other to show user points on user charts.

• Lines: Choose Std or Other to show lines on user charts.

• Symbols, Tidals: Choose Std or Other to show symbols and tidals on

user charts.

• Areas: Choose Std or Other to show areas on the display. Color fill for
the areas can be chosen as transparent from 25 to 75% and as No color
fill. If No color fill is chosen, only the boundaries of the areas are
visible.

• Only radar of Symbols, Lines, Areas: If chosen as Std or Other, only

those Lines, Symbols and Areas are displayed which have user
selection “on radar” activated for them in the user chart. This is used to
view only that part of the user chart which will be sent to the ARPA
radar connected to the system.

Chart Alarm: Choose Std or Other to show chart alarm warning areas (in red
highlight).

Manual Updates: Choose Std or Other to show manual updates with orange
symbols.

Note: Visibility of manual updates made as true symbols are controlled

through Standard and Other pages of the Chart Display menu.

Ship: Own ship symbol is displayed in true scale if the displayed chart scale is
larger than the chosen limit scale and if the size of the true scale symbol is
longer than 6 mm on the chart display.

Radar overlay: Choose Std or Other to display the radar video overlay on the
display.

8-72
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.10.7 Storing and recalling chart display settings for visible chart
and navigational features
You can define chart display settings for chart details which are displayed over S57 charts cells. You can save these
chart display settings to your hard disk and recall them whenever you need them.

Creating new chart display settings

To create new settings for chart displays, do the following:

1. Display Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse button.

2. Move the cursor over the small triangle on the Chart Display dialog box to show the Chart Display menu.
Choose Create from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Enter desired name for chart display settings and click the OK button in the window.

Choosing chart display settings

1. Open the Chart Display dialog box and place the cursor on the triangle.

2. Choose Select from the menu and push the thumbwheel.

3. Choose desired chart display settings from the list box.

Saving changes to chart display settings

1. Open the Chart Display dialog box and place the cursor on the triangle.

2. Choose Save from the menu to save current chart display settings.

8-73
8. Vector Chart Material

8.10.8 Control of predefined IMO chart display settings

There are three sets of predefined Chart Display Settings which can be used to display Charts with certain chart
features. In IMO Chart Display Settings you are not able to change visibility of chart feature using Chart Display
Settings. The predefined Chart Display Settings are called as:

• IMO-Base

• IMO-Standard

• IMO-All ON

To select desired IMO Chart Display Settings, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Chart Display dialog box and click the triangle with the left
button.

2. Choose Select from the menu.

3. Select desired Chart Display Settings from list box.

If you try to modify selection in Chart Display dialog box when any of IMO
Chart Display Settings is used, following message appears:

8-74
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.11 Sailing Directions, Tidal Tables, etc., Features

of Vector Charts (S57)
Vector charts (S57) contain sailing directions, tidal tables and other textual and picture information which is not
immediately visible on the chart. This information forms an integral part of the legal ENC chart which can fulfil
SOLAS requirements and thus replace a paper chart. As a navigator you should check them as well as you check the
visible chart when you do your planning and when you perform navigation.

Because these features are not permanently visible on the chart as they used to be in case of a paper chart, the
ECDIS has special symbols to highlight the locations from which you can use the Info request to know additional
information about the above-mentioned features. Below are examples of these symbols. For further details, see
paragraph 8.14 “Requesting Information About Vector Chart Objects”.

A grey box is used to show that Tidal information is available for Info request by cursor pick.
Note: The visibility of the grey box symbol is controlled by the item “Depth contours, magnetics,
currents” in the Other 1 page of the Chart Display dialog box.

A magenta-colored symbol is used to show that additional textual or picture information such as
sailing directions are available from Info request by cursor pick.
Note: The visibility of the magenta symbol is controlled by the item “Additional information
available” in the Other 1 page of the Chart Display dialog box.

8-75
8. Vector Chart Material

8.12 Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of

the Vector Chart
8.12.1 Introduction
Vector charts (S57) contain date-dependent features. Updating in general, including reissues, new editions and
updates, creates date dependency. In addition to the obvious date dependency, some features of the S57 charts create
additional date dependency. These features include “Date Start”, “Date End”, “Seasonal date start” and “Seasonal
date end”. Hydrographic Offices use these features to publish Temporary and Preliminary Notices to Mariners, as
their paper chart equivalent updates are called. The ARCS equivalent is called T&P Notices. “Seasonal date start”
and “Seasonal date end” are used for seasonal chart features such as summer-only sea marks, seasonal yacht race
areas, etc. For further details see paragraph 8.12.5 “About chart viewing date dependency of S57 standard“.

You can efficiently use chart viewing date dependency to use the valid data for any given date applicable for your
navigation or planning purposes. For example, you can check for existence of changes and restrictions weeks before
they became valid. Date dependency is a part of the new electronic method to keep your chart up-to-date and valid
for your intended use. Normally you should set Display Until and Approve Until once per week to keep your chart
up-to-date.

Note: When you load charts and their updates into your system, the Display Until date is set as current date of the
system. You must set the Approve Until date yourself. Make sure that you have set Display Until and Approve Until
dates to the current date or to your planning date, whichever is applicable to your current usage of charts. For details
on how to set Display/Approve date, see the paragraph 8.12.2 “Approving and highlighting vector chart updates”. If
the charts you are currently using have Display Until and/or Approved Until set more than 1 week from current
system date, you will you get the Permanent Warning on your chart display.

8.12.2 Approving and highlighting vector chart updates

Before you approve updates, you can display (highlight) updates which are included into S57 charts. Normally you
have chosen “Automatic Display Until” after the SENC conversion. In this case, after all the SENC conversions
have been finished, all updates are automatically highlighted and you can view and approve them after viewing. For
further details, see paragraph 8.12.4 “Setting approve until date”.

If you want to review updates after the initial approval of the updates do the following:

1. Use Approve Until to set the begin date for the

update highlight. See paragraph 8.12.4 “Setting
“approve until date”.

2. Use Display Until to set the end date for the update
highlight. See paragraph 8.12.3 “Setting display
until date”.

3. Review the changes. Added features are

highlighted with orange circles. Removed features
are highlighted with orange slashes. Changed
features are highlighted with both orange circles
and slashes. See the picture at right.

4. After reviewing, set Approve Until and Display

Until back to the current system date.

8-76
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.12.3 Setting “display until” date

1. Open the Chart menu.

2. Choose Set Chart viewing dates from the

menu.

3. Set the cursor in the Display Until field,

use the thumbwheel to set desired date,
and confirm by pushing the thumbwheel.

8.12.4 Setting “approve until” date

1. Open the Chart menu.

2. Choose Set Chart viewing dates from the

menu.

3. Set the cursor in the Approve Until field,

use the thumbwheel to set desired date,
and confirm by pushing the thumbwheel.

8-77
8. Vector Chart Material

8.12.5 About chart viewing date dependency of S57 standard

How the issue date of updates changes the visibility of the changes
Study the example below to understand the behavior of updates relative to date.

The figure above shows how updates are dependent Chart viewing dates set in Display/Approve date settings by
user. Actions 1 to 4 areas as follows:

1. Base cell including three updates is converted into SENC. Display date is set as current date of the system.
Approve date has to be set to current date.

2. The date in which update 1 was issued. Display and Approve dates have to be set to correct date in order to see
the chart with update 1.

3. The date in which update 2 was issued. Display and Approve dates have to be set to correct date in order to see
the chart with update 1 and update 2.

4. The date in which update 3 was issued. Display and Approve dates have to be set to correct date in order to see
the chart with update 1, update 2 and update 3.

Note 1: In order to display charts with correct updated situation, always use current date during your voyage. If
your voyage lasts more than one week, set current date at least once per week during your voyage.

Note 2: In order to display charts with correct updated situation during route planning, always use planned date of
each waypoint to check your plan.

How temporary and preliminary notices to mariners behave with vector charts (S57)
In some cases the producer of a chart (Hydrographic Office) is aware of changes which will happen in the future. A
Hydrographic Office is able to include this kind of update into the chart for later use. In the paper chart world, these
changes are published in Preliminary and Temporary Notices to Mariners. In ARCS these are known as T&P
Notices.

8-78
 8. Vector Chart Material

An example of changes known to happen in the future

Display/Approve date is set

to 2005-01-02.
You can see a box-shaped Caution
area on the screen.

Display date is now set to 2005-09-08

and Approve date is 2005-9-09.
You can see a new area (Restricted
Area) inserted into existing area
(Caution Area).

Display/Approve data is set

to 2005-09-08.
You see only a Restricted Area
without any Caution Area.

8-79
8. Vector Chart Material

How seasonal features are coded in vector charts (S57)

Some chart producers may define a chart feature to use seasonal date start and end as shown below.

• YYMMDD (Full date for date start and date end)

• --MMDD (The same date every year)

• --MM (The same month every year)

The example below shows how a user can find, using Info query (seasonal), the full date for starting date
(YYYYMMDD).

>>
>>

The example below shows how a user can find, using Info query (seasonal), the full date for ending date
(YYYYMMDD).

>>
>>

8-80
 8. Vector Chart Material

This example shows how a user can find, using the Info query (seasonal), the starting and ending month and day
in every year (-MMDD).

>>
>>

This example shows how a user can find, using the Info query (seasonal), the starting and ending month and day
in every year (-MM).

>>
>>

8-81
8. Vector Chart Material

An example of a seasonal chart feature

The next two figures show a caution area which is valid from April 1 to November 15.

The figure below shows the attributes of the caution area in the example above, in the Info request window.

>>
>>

8-82
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.12.6 Other functions of chart viewing dates window

Manual update dates

You can check when a manual update has been added into the ECDIS. Click the Manual Update Dates button to
open the Manual Update Chart viewing dates window. Enter date and edition, and a Manual Update symbol for that
time appears on the display. For further details, see paragraph 10.7 Checking Creation and Usage History of Manual
Updates.

Cell status
To find cell status from the Chart viewing dates window, choose a cell in the window and click the Cell Status
button to show the Chart Cell Status window. For further details, see paragraph 8.15.1 Cell status.

8-83
8. Vector Chart Material

8.13 Symbology Used in Vector Charts

You can familiarize yourself with the symbology used by browsing IHO ECDIS Chart 1, which is included in this
ECDIS. Note that it behaves as any S57 chart and it follows your selections. See paragraph 8.10.4 “Controlling
visible chart features“.

1. Open the Chart menu.

2. Choose ECDIS Chart 1 from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Choose desired chart symbols from the submenu to show on the ECDIS.

Appendix 2 contains examples of plots with symbols.

The Return dialog window appears when you choose something from the submenu of ECDIS Chart 1. When you
close the Return dialog window, by clicking the X at the upper right corner, ECDIS Chart 1 will be closed and
normal chart presentation is displayed.

An example of Overview chart

8-84
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.13.1 How to change presentation library used for vector chart

features
The ECDIS uses the official IHO presentation library to draw vector charts (S57). The presentation library is
replaceable, but this feature is only intended to be used by qualified service personnel and type approval authorities.

When this manual was published the official presentation library was “pslb03_2.dai”, known as “Official IHO
presentation library for ECDIS Ed 3 revision 1, Edition: 3.2”.

8.14 Requesting Information About Vector Chart

Objects
The ability to cursor-pick an object to find additional information about the object is an important function of the
ECDIS. However, an unprocessed cursor pick, which does not discriminate or interpret and merely dumps on the
interface panel all the information available at that point on the display, will normally result in pages of unsorted and
barely intelligible attribute information.

8.14.1 Setting visible vector chart features

The request information about S57 chart objects is given only to objects which are chosen for display by the user.
For how choose chart details to display, see paragraph 8.10.4 “Controlling visible chart features”.

8.14.2 Choosing desired object from the list of found objects

To specify desired SENC and object for information request, do the following:

1. Place the cursor on object desired.

2. Push the thumbwheel. Two windows appear: Objects by Cell and Object.

3. Use the Objects by Cell window to choose desired chart cell and desired object from which you need
information. If there are different navigation purpose S57 charts over the area where you are making an
information request, you can choose desired S57 chart cell from the Cell window. A list of S57 chart cells is
displayed in the Cell list box. Choose desired S57 chart cell from the list.

4. Choose desired object from the Objects in display priority order list box.

5. Chosen object on the chart is shown with mark showing information in the Object window.

8-85
8. Vector Chart Material

6. Detailed information for the chosen object appears in the Object window.

>>
>>

7. To close the windows, click the CANCEL key on the Control Unit RCU-018, or click the X on the window you
wish to close.

8-86
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.14.3 Viewing properties of a vector chart object

After you have chosen a vector chart object, you can view detailed information about it in the Object window:

Object name and

validity period
Pictorial presentation

Additional coded text

information

Detailed properties of
the object

Position of the
object

>>
>>

Other related object

8-87
8. Vector Chart Material

8.14.4 About vector chart coding

Tidal information is available as a table

>>
>>

8-88
 8. Vector Chart Material

More information is available in text

More information is available as a picture

>>
>>

8-89
8. Vector Chart Material

Linked objects
Often a group of chart objects are linked together. The most common example of this practice is a beacon or buoy,
in which the body and the top mark are defined separately. Another example is lights and recommended track. Still
another example is measurement mile. There are also other similar cases.

Body and top hat of a beacon or buoy

>>
>>

8-90
 8. Vector Chart Material

Recommended track defined by two beacons

>>
>>
>>
>>

>> >>
>> >>

8-91
8. Vector Chart Material

Recommended track defined by a building and a beacon

>> >>
>> >>

>> >>
>> >>

8-92
 8. Vector Chart Material

Measurement mile

>> >>
>> >>
tails

>> >>
>> >>
tails

8-93
8. Vector Chart Material

8.15 Other Features of Vector Charts

There are some functions or features which are not used on a daily or weekly basis, but sometimes there is a need to
use them.

8.15.1 Cell status

Use the Chart Cell Status function in the Chart Menu to find out the status of individual cells in your system, in a
CD ROM or in an RENC.

Status of CD ROM: This information is based on information in the CD ROM catalogue you have loaded and
chosen here from the CD ROM list box.

Status of RENC: This information is based on information in an RENC. One example of an RENC is PRIMAR.
You get the status of cells in an RENC via telecommunications, if you have optional telecommunication installed in
your system and you are a licensed user of an RENC.

Status of ENC: This information is based on information on the hard disk of the system. The ENC used here is
S57ed3 delivery formatted chart. Before it can be displayed as a chart it has to be converted into the system’s
internal display format SENC.

Status of SENC: This information is based on information on the hard disk of the system. A SENC is the system’s
internal display format.

Use the Conv Log button to view a detailed conversion log of S57 chart cell.

8-94
 8. Vector Chart Material

8.15.2 S57 cell details

You may need to check when an update has been added into your ECDIS. Also you may need to check what was
shown in your chart display three weeks ago. There are also many other cases where you need to find what was
known by your ECDIS.

To view updates by their numbers, open the Chart menu, choose Chart Cell Status to display the Chart Cell Status
window and then click the Details button. You will get a Chart Cell Details window, where you can view updates by
their numbers.

To check any situation in the past, you can use the Displayed Update and Approved Update fields to specify update
number.
Chart Cell Details

Cell: X

RENC
Item: X CD
HD

8-95
8. Vector Chart Material

8.15.3 Using cell status window to initiate SENC conversion

The Cell Status window in the Chart menu can be used to force a new SENC conversion for any chart cell which is
already in the SENC format. Normally you do not need this feature, but it could be useful if, for example, you need
to analyze why an update cannot be converted, etc.

Open the Chart menu, choose Cell Status and then click
the Create SENC button to initiate SENC conversion
of the Base cell.

If the Base cell has already been converted to the SENC

format, then the system asks you if it is OK to write
over existing SENC.

Click the OK button to overwrite the existing SENC.

If the S57 Error window shown right appears, the

permit for the chart is for another edition.

Then, the contents of the Cell Status window change as

in this example at right.

Note that the SENC row is now empty.

After the SENC conversion is completed, the contents

of the Cell Status window change as in this example at
right.

Note that the last update number for the SENC row is
now 0 to indicate that only the Base cell is included into
the SENC.

Now click the Add Update button to add an update in

the SENC.

After the SENC conversion for the added update is

completed, the contents of the Cell Status window
change as in the example at right.
Note that the last update number for the SENC row is
now 1 to indicate that the first update has been added
into the SENC.

Now click the Add Update button again to add the rest
of the updates in the SENC. In this example you need to
repeat it four times to get updates 2, 3, 4 and 5.

8-96
9. Raster Chart Material

9.1 ARCS Charts

Approximately 2,700 ARCS charts are available on 11 chart CD ROMs, covering the world's major trading routes
and ports. Regionally based chart CD ROMs RC1 to RC10 contain standard BA navigation charts, while RC11
contains ocean charts at scales of 1:3,500,000 and smaller. ARCS charts are facsimile copies of BA paper charts,
and as such share a common numbering system. New editions and new charts for ARCS and BA paper charts are
issued simultaneously. They are supplied on each Weekly Update CD ROM until incorporated into the chart CD
ROMs at the next issue.

Occasionally, it is necessary to issue new charts in advance of their intended date of validity, for example a change
in regulations commencing on a future date. In such cases the current chart will co-exist with the new chart until the
date of implementation, the earlier chart being indicated with the suffix “X” after the chart number. The system will
allow access to both charts for the period of overlap by issue of new chart permits.

Sometimes you may wish to manually add Notices to Mariners or Navtex warnings into your ARCS charts. In this
system this is called Manual Updates. Manual updates are valid for both ARCS and S57 charts so that you need to
define them only once. Further, manual updates are valid for all scales so that you don't need to repeat them for
charts published in different scales from the same area. For further details see Chapter 10 “Manual Updates”.

9.1.1 Chart legend of ARCS chart

The chart legend provides information about edition date and updates of the displayed chart. To toggle the legend
ON/OFF, place the cursor in the sidebar area, confirm that “Select Sidebar” appears in the mouse functions area and
then push the right mouse button. Then, choose Chart Legend from the menu and push the thumbwheel to open or
close the ARCS chart legend.

Chart Number:

Number of current chart is shown in this field.

Country Of Origin:

The country which produced the original chart.

Latest NM:

Date of the latest Notice to Mariners included in the chart.

Edition Date:

Date when the chart was issued.

Publication Date:

Issue date of Update CD ROM used to update the system.

WGS shift status:

Datum shift between local datum and WGS-84 datum is known (=Defined), unknown, user defined (=Undefined) or
shift is known only some parts of chart (=Partially defined).
Depth:
Unit of depth measurement.
Height:
Unit used for indication of height above sea level (for example, clearance height).

9-1
9. Raster Chart Material

9.1.2 T&P notices, details and warnings of ARCS

Access to view T&P Notices, which are details or warnings of ARCS, is contained in the ARCS chart legend
mentioned on the previous page. At the lower part of the legend there are three buttons to activate a corresponding
window. These are as follows:

T&P notices
T&P Notices are also known as Temporary
and Preliminary Notices to Mariners. Click
the T&P Notices button to open a text
window. This window provides chart
information that does not warrant permanent
chart correction.

Details
Click the Details button on the ARCS Chart Legend sidebar to open the ARCS Details dialog box, which shows
detailed information about current chart.

Projection:

Projection of current chart. Click the

Projection button to find information about
latitude of true scale and rotation angle.

Orig. Scale:

The scale of the original paper chart is shown

here.

Hor Datum:

Horizontal datum used with current chart.

Depth Unit:

Unit of depth used with current chart.

Depth Datum:

Vertical datum of depth used with current

chart.

Height Unit:

Unit of measurement used to measure height of objects above sea level.

Height Datum:

Vertical datum for objects located above sea.

9-2
 9. Raster Chart Material

Panels:

Chooses desired inset (Panel) from the combo box. This function also works in conjunction with Locate, Preference
and Notes.

Locate:

This function displays the inset chosen in the Panels combo box.

Warnings
There could be warnings not included in Notices to Mariners. British Admiralty may release textual warnings for
any chart and they are available here.

Setting preference for inset (panel)

If there are the different insets with the same position, the user can choose preferred inset, which displays own ship
position.

Chart with three insets

1. Place the cursor in the sidebar area, confirm that “Select Sidebar” appears in the mouse functions area and then
push the right mouse button.

2. Choose Chart Legend from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Click the Details button on the Chart Legend sidebar to open the ARCS Details dialog box.

4. Choose desired inset from the Panels combo box. Check Preference as shown below.

9-3
9. Raster Chart Material

Viewing notes of ARCS chart

The user can choose a desired item from the combo box in the ARCS Details dialog box in order to view notes for
that item. After choosing the item from the Notes combo box, click the Notes… button, and a text window appears.
To close the window, click the X at the right corner of the display.

Using Source Data Diagram (SDD)

A Source Data Diagram (SDD) consists of two parts: a graphic showing the areas covered by each type of source
material from which the chart was compiled, and a tabulation, keyed to a graphic, giving details of source dates and
scales. The layout of the graphic corresponds to the layout of the chart, and the borders of the diagram equate to the
limits of the chart panels. If this option is chosen, on the ARCS Details dialog box, it is possible to click by the
cursor ARCS chart to plot origin on SDD. If plot positions on SDD are not active, there is no SDD on the chart.

9-4
 9. Raster Chart Material

9.2 Datum and ARCS Charts

9.2.1 Difference between ARCS chart local datum and positions in
WGS-84 datum
The difference between ARCS chart local datum and WGS-84 datum is known as WGS-84 Shift. For most of the
ARCS charts this is known and the system can do the conversion automatically. For some ARCS chart, however,
this is unknown and the user must define the shift. For some ARCS charts this is partially known and the user is
responsible for defining the shift for the unknown areas of partially known ARCS charts. For further details, see the
paragraph “Specifying user WGS-84 shift“ on page 9-9.

Further, see “Use with GPS” in the ARCS Navigator User Guide.

How the state of WGS shift is indicated permanently

No warning appears in the cursor window. The
cursor position is shown in the user-chosen working
datum. (See paragraph 13.3 “Choosing Datum”.)

The warning WGS undefi. appears (in red) in the

Cursor window.

The system still operates in the user-chosen working

datum. However, the system is unable to correctly do
the transformation between local paper chart datum
and the user-chosen working datum.

The warning WGS user appears (in red) in the

Cursor window.

The system still operates in the user-chosen working

datum. However, the system uses the user-defined
WGS shift to perform the transformation between
local paper chart datum and the user chosen working
datum.

Checking WGS shift status of current chart

The ARCS chart legend contains a WGS shift status field. (To display the ARCS chart legend, place the cursor in
the Sidebar, confirm that the mouse functions area shows Select Sidebar, push the right mouse button, choose Chart
Legend and then push the thumbwheel.)

9-5
9. Raster Chart Material

WGS shift is defined for this chart. All latitude and

longitude positions of the cursor, routes, user charts,
pilot data, etc. are correctly displayed on this ARCS
chart.

WGS shift is not defined for this chart. Latitude and

longitude positions of the cursor, routes, user charts,
pilot data, etc. may not be correctly displayed on the
current ARCS chart. You can use WGS shift to
define correct transformation from WGS-84 co-
ordinates to local datum of the current ARCS chart.

WGS shift is partially defined for this chart. Some

parts or panels of this chart do not have defined
WGS shift. Latitude and longitude positions of the
cursor, routes, user charts, pilot data, etc. may not be
correctly displayed on current ARCS chart. You can
use WGS shift to define correct transformation from
WGS-84 co-ordinates to local datum of the ARCS
chart for the parts or panels of this chart which do
not have defined WGS shift.

9-6
 9. Raster Chart Material

Viewing cursor position in local datum of an ARCS chart

On demand you can view the cursor position in local datum of an ARCS chart. This is useful when you need to refer
to the corresponding paper chart. You can access ARCS details with the Details button in the chart legend of ARCS.

In this example WGS-84 shift is defined for the

current ARCS chart.

The Cursor Position window shows cursor

position in local ARCS chart datum (indicated
as Local Datum) and in WGS-84 datum as
defined in the used ARCS chart (indicated as
WGS84 Chart).

Note: The Cursor window, below the ARCS

Details dialog box, always shows cursor
position in user-chosen working datum.

In this example WGS-84 shift is not defined for

the current ARCS chart.

The Cursor Position window shows cursor

position only in local ARCS chart datum
(indicated as Local Datum).

Note: The Cursor window, below the ARCS

Details dialog box, shows the warning “WGS
undefi” to indicate that the system is unable to
do a correct transformation from local ARCS
chart datum to the user-chosen working datum.

9-7
9. Raster Chart Material

In this example WGS-84 shift is not defined for

the current ARCS chart.

The Cursor Position panel shows cursor

position in local ARCS chart datum (indicated
as Local Datum) and in WGS-84 datum as
defined by the user WGS shift (indicated as
WGS-84 User).

Note: The Cursor window, below the ARCS

Details dialog box, shows the warning “WGS
undefi” to indicate that the system uses user-
defined transformation from local ARCS chart
datum to the user chosen working datum.

Viewing value of WGS-84 shift

You can view the value of WGS-84 shift of the current ARCS chart. To do this, click the Details button on the
ARCS Chart Legend sidebar to open the ARCS Details dialog box, and then click the WGS84 Shift… button.

In this example the WGS-84 shift is defined

for current ARCS chart.

Chart Shift:

The latitude and longitude shifts between

WGS-84 datum and the local datum.

Accuracy:

This field contains accuracy as defined by the

chart producer.

In this example WGS-84 shift is not defined

in the current ARCS chart. Undefined Undefined
Chart Shift:

Undefined indicates that this ARCS chart 00.000'N 00.000'E

does not have defined WGS-84 shift.

Accuracy:
.
This field contains accuracy as defined by the
chart producer.

9-8
 9. Raster Chart Material

In this example WGS-84 shift is not defined

in the current ARCS chart
Undefined Undefined
Chart Shift:

Undefined indicates that current ARCS chart

does not have defined WGS-84 shift.
00.176'N 01.290'E
Accuracy:

This field contains accuracy as defined by the

chart producer.

User WGS shift

The shifts between WGS-84 datum and the

local datum as defined by the user.

Active

Indicates that the user-defined WGS-84 shift

is in use.

Specifying user WGS-84 shift

You can define WGS-84 shift for those ARCS charts which do not have defined WGS-84 shift. You cannot redefine
WGS-84 shift for any ARCS chart for which it is defined by the chart producer.

To define user WGS-84 shift do the

following:

1. Click the Details button on the ARCS

Chart Legend sidebar to open the ARCS
Details dialog box.
00.000'N 00.000'E
2. Click the WGS84 Shift…button. Check
Enable changes. Locate the cursor where
desired. Check Active and Enable
changes.

Use the Reset button to reset the values of the

user defined WGS-84 shift to zero.

Use Active to control use of user defined

WGS-84 shift. Check to activate user-defined
WGS-84 shift; uncheck to deactivate. 00.000'N 00.000'E

00.176'N 00.290'E

9-9
9. Raster Chart Material

9.2.2 Permanent messages of ARCS

The system can help you to keep your ARCS charts up-to-date for the charts which you have received from ARCS.
Producers of ARCS charts store up-to-date status on an ARCS Weekly Update CD ROM (system Files). This
information is loaded into the ECDIS when you update, either by permits or by active group. Based on this
information, ARCS permanent messages are displayed to help you keep your ARCS charts up-to-date.

Chart is loaded from RCxx CD ROM, but not

updated using ARCS Weekly Update CD ROM.

Perform update for the chart.

Chart is not updated using an ARCS Weekly Update

CD ROM from which ARCS system files are loaded.

Use the correct ARCS Weekly Update CD ROM to

load updates for chart.

Updates for the chart are not for the same edition as
chart. Load chart from the latest RCxx CD ROM and
update chart using latest Update CD ROM.

Chart is cancelled and no longer kept up-to-date by

its producer.

ARCS license has expired.

Contact chart agent to renew your license.

9-10
 9. Raster Chart Material

9.3 Chart Menu

The Chart menu is used for managing chart database.
Menu description
Activate S57 chart:
The function activates an S57 chart onto the display. You have two options to
choose how to open a chart on the display. “Ignore scale” opens S57 chart cell
with the scale that was used the last time you used an S57 chart. “Sync scale”
opens a S57 chart with the scale that was used with ARCS charts.
Load Charts:
User can load ARCS chart from a CD ROM to the hard disk.
Update Charts:
User can update ARCS charts stored in the hard disk. Updates are delivered
weekly by British Admiralty, in a CD ROM.
Load and Update History:
You can view history of load and update actions for ARCS charts.
Remove Charts:
User can remove charts from the hard disk.
Chart Catalogue:
For managing ARCS charts. See paragraph 9.4.12 “ARCS Catalogue”.
Chart Permits:
Load permit from floppy disk.
License:
View license information of the current ARCS chart.
Select Next Chart:
Select next chart in currently selected group.
Open Chart:
User can open appropriate ARCS chart on the display.
Manual Updates:
User can see manual updates made.
System:
• ARCS Update Status: Display information about ARCS Update CD
ROM which is loaded in the system.
• S52 Presentation Library: View information of presentation library used
with manual updates.
• Verify system files: Compare loaded system files with files on Update CD
ROM.
• Refresh Charts after backup: Refresh charts after backup from another
ECDIS.
• Log File: User can view log file including ARCS depending functions
• Colors: Display color sample.
• Restart drawing process: Redraw chart.
Close:
Close menu.

9-11
9. Raster Chart Material

9.4 ARCS Subscriptions

ARCS customers can subscribe to one of two service levels, ARCS Navigator or ARCS Skipper.

9.4.1 ARCS Navigator

ARCS Navigator users receive a comprehensive weekly updating service on CD ROM which mirrors the Admiralty
Notices to Mariners (NMs) used to correct Admiralty paper charts. The update information is cumulative, ensuring
that only the most recent Update CD ROM is necessary. ARCS Navigator license is valid for 12 months. During this
period, weekly updates will be delivered on Weekly Update CD ROMs. ARCS Navigator is intended for SOLAS
class users who require that their charts are up-to-date.

Content of ARCS Navigator pack:

• One (1) or more Chart CD ROMs (RC1-RC11) containing ARCS charts

• One (1) Update CD ROM containing the latest ARCS chart corrections

• One (1) floppy disk storing ARCS chart permits

9.4.2 ARCS Skipper

For the ARCS Skipper user, the charts you have a license for were fully up-to-date at the day of sale. They can be
updated for NMs whenever you like by buying a new ARCS Skipper license, which is again fully up-to-date for the
day of sale.

Content of ARCS Skipper pack:

• One (1) or more Chart CD ROMs (RC1-RC11) containing ARCS charts

• One (1) Update CD ROM containing the latest ARCS chart corrections

• One (1) floppy disk storing ARCS chart permits

Note: If you are holding more than one ARCS Skipper packs onboard, only one pack can be loaded into the ECDIS
at a time.

9.4.3 ARCS license information

License information, which is transferred between participants, is as shown below.

9-12
 9. Raster Chart Material

If ARCS format is active, you can choose ARCS License from the Chart menu, with “Licence”. License information
is shown in the window. This window contains information about owner of license, user permit and type of license.

License information window

9.4.4 Getting started with ARCS charts

In order to get charts in the system and display them you have to do the following:

1. Load permit from the floppy disk by using Chart Permits in the Chart menu. For further details, see paragraph
9.4.5 “Loading chart permits for ARCS Navigator license”.

2. Load chart from ARCS CD ROMs. For how to load chart, see paragraph 9.4.8 “Loading a new ARCS chart into
the system“.

3. Load update from a Weekly CD ROM. For how to update chart, see paragraph 9.4.9 “Updating ARCS chart“.

4. Open desired chart from the Chart menu by using the Open Chart or Chart Catalogue command.

If new Update CD ROM arrives, continue from step 3.

If you order more charts, continue from step 1.

9-13
9. Raster Chart Material

9.4.5 Loading chart permits for ARCS Navigator license

Permits are usually delivered in a floppy disk. You may load permits as follows:

Select Next Chart

1. Open the Chart menu and then choose Chart Permits from the menu.

2. Choose Navigator license as the type of license. Insert a permit floppy disk in the floppy disk drive. Click the
Load File button.

3. Choose Gb.ncp and then click the Open button.

4. Check in the Permit Management window that permits are displayed here with correct information. Close the
window by pressing the CANCEL key on the Control Unit RCU-018 or clicking the X at the upper right side of
the window.

Enter Manual button:

This function enables manual entry of permit string which is delivered, for example, by telex. After typing the
string, the user can accept it by clicking the Add button or reject it by clicking the X at the upper right side of the
window.

Backup button:

This button opens the “Save As” window, where the user may make a backup copy from a chart permit file.

9-14
 9. Raster Chart Material

9.4.6 Loading chart permits for ARCS Skipper license

Permits are usually delivered in a floppy disk. To load chart permit into the system, do the following:

1. Open the Chart menu, and then choose Chart Permits from the menu.

2. Choose Skipper license as the type of license. Insert a permit floppy disk in the floppy disk drive. Click the
Load File button.

3. Choose Gb.scp and then click the Open button.

4. Check in the Permit Management window that permits are displayed there with correct information. Close the
window by pressing the CANCEL key on the Control Unit RCU-018 or clicking the X on the window.

Note: If you are holding more than one ARCS Skipper packs onboard, only one pack can be loaded into the ECDIS
at a time. If you load a new ARCS Skipper permit floppy disk into the ECDIS, you must load charts and weekly
updates from CD ROMs delivered with and listed in your License Agreement (also known as “Schedule A”).

9-15
9. Raster Chart Material

9.4.7 Removing chart permits

Normally you do not need to remove permits during normal operation. However, it may be necessary to remove
chart permits from the system. Permits may be removed individually or collectively.

To remove chart permits, do the following:

1. Open the Chart menu and then choose Chart Permits from the menu.

2. To remove all permits, click the Select All button and then click the Remove button.
To remove an individual permit, use the cursor to choose the permit and then click the Remove button.

3. Check that chosen permits have been removed. Close the window by clicking the X on the window.

9-16
 9. Raster Chart Material

9.4.8 Loading a new ARCS chart into the system

You may load a new ARCS chart into the system for which you have a permit, by the following methods.

• Load by permit. You can load all the charts which are covered in your license. The system will load them
automatically.

• Load by active group. You can define a group of charts to be loaded into the system. It will be useful to define
groups to make it easier to maintain your chart database.

• Load manually. You can manually load charts into the system.

Loading ARCS charts by permits

1. Choose Load Charts from the Chart menu and By Permits from the sub
menu.

Reset Set

2. Insert desired CD ROM into the CD ROM drive and then click the Load
[Update Charts]
button. The progress indicator shows the number of charts loaded and the
Go Back number of charts to be loaded.
By Permits
By Group
Manual

3. Repeat step 2 until you have loaded all the CD ROMs covered in your
license. After you have loaded all CD ROMs, click the X on the ARCS
Load window to close the window.

9-17
9. Raster Chart Material

Loading ARCS charts by active group

“Loading by active group” is used when you want to load only ARCS charts which are in a group which you have
defined. This is very useful if your license includes many charts from around the world and you are going to use
only a part of those charts for which you have a permit. Simply define a group of charts you need for voyage and
then load them into the system. To load by active group, do the following:

1. Define a group, if one does not exist. For further details, see paragraph 9.4.13 “Grouping ARCS charts“.

2. Set group as an active group. To set a group as an active group, see the paragraph “Choosing active group“ on
page 9-29.

3. Choose Load Charts from the Chart menu and By Group from the sub
menu.

4. An ARCS Load window appears, which shows active group and desired
ARCS CD ROMs.

[Update Charts]
Go Back

By Permits
By Group
Manual

5. Insert desired CD ROM in the CD ROM drive and then click the Load
button.

6. Repeat step 5 until you have loaded all the CD ROMs pertaining to the
active group. After you have loaded all CD ROMs, click the X on the
ARCS Load window to close the window.

9-18
 9. Raster Chart Material

Loading ARCS charts manually

You can also load ARCS charts manually into the system as follows.

1. Insert desired ARCS CD ROM into the CD ROM drive.

2. Choose Load Charts from the Chart menu and Manual from the sub menu.

3. A Chart Operations window appears; choose desired chart from the list box.

[Update Charts] To load a chart into the system, click the Load Chart button.
Go Back

By Permits
By Group
Manual

Note: To use another CD ROM drive connected in your network, choose desired drive from the Drive field.

D: Local CD ROM drive

F: Other CD ROM drive (from other ECDIS, connected via LAN)

9-19
9. Raster Chart Material

9.4.9 Updating ARCS charts

The updates are delivered separately in an Update CD ROM. To update ARCS format raster chart into the system,
you can use one of following procedures:

• Update by permit. You can update all the charts which are applicable to your license. The system will update
them automatically.

• Update by active group. You can define a group of charts to be updated. It is useful to define groups to make it
easier to maintain your database.

• Loading updates manual. You can manually choose the charts which will be updated into the system.

Loading updates by permits

1. Spin the thumbwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse
functions area and then push the right mouse button.

2. Choose Update Charts from the menu and By Permits from the sub menu.

Reset Set

[Update Charts]
Go Back 3. Insert Update CD ROM to drive and then click the Load button. A loading
progress indicator appears.
By Permits
By Group
Manual

The system will automatically update charts for which you have a permit.

9-20
 9. Raster Chart Material

Loading updates by active group

Loading updates by active group is used when you want to update only ARCS charts which you have designed to
include in a defined group. This is very useful if your license includes a lot of charts from around the world and you
are going to use only a part of charts for which you have a permit. Define a group from charts you need for voyage
and update them into the system. To update by active group, proceed as follows:

1. Define a group, if one does not exist. For more information, see paragraph 9.4.13 “Grouping ARCS charts”.

2. Set group as an Active group. To set group as Active group, see “Choosing active group“ on page 9-30.

3. Open the Chart menu, choose Update Charts from the menu and By Group
from the sub menu.

4. An ARCS Update window appears and it shows active group.

5. Insert Update CD ROM in the CD ROM drive and then click the Load
[Update Charts]
button.
Go Back

By Permits
By Group
Manual

9-21
9. Raster Chart Material

Loading updates manually

You can also load updates for ARCS charts manually as follows:

1. Insert Update ARCS CD ROM into CD ROM drive.

2. Open the Chart menu, choose Update Charts from the menu and Manual
from the sub menu.

3. The Chart Operations window appears; choose desired chart from list box.

[Update Charts]
Go Back To load updates into the system, click the Load Chart button. To close this
window, click the OK button.
By Permits
By Active Group
Manual

Note: To use a different CD ROM drive connected in your network, use the Drive field to choose appropriate CD
ROM drive.

D: Local CD ROM drive

F: External CD ROM drive

9-22
 9. Raster Chart Material

9.4.10 Viewing chart load and update history of ARCS

You may view a history of all chart load and updates (Notices to Mariners) of ARCS. This information is stored in
the ECDIS.

1. Open the Chart menu and choose Load and Update History.

2. Log file of loaded ARCS Update appears.

You can view all Notices to Mariners loaded to the ECDIS.

9-23
9. Raster Chart Material

9.4.11 Viewing update status of your ARCS charts

You can easily check which is the latest Update CD ROM introduced to your system.

To view update status of ARCS charts, do the following:

1. Open the Chart menu, choose System from the menu, and then choose
ARCS Update Status from the submenu.

2. An ARCS Message window appears.

This dialog shows information about the Latest Update CD ROM loaded
into the system.

9-24
 9. Raster Chart Material

9.4.12 ARCS catalogue

The Chart Catalogue command in the Chart menu helps you manage ARCS charts. When you choose this command,
the ARCS Catalogue window opens in the electronic chart area and the ARCS Catalogue dialog box appears in the
information area.

View filters window:

You may filter ARCS chart limits with “Scale” in the ARCS Catalogue dialog box. There are different categories for
the ARCS charts depending on their scale. The categories are:

• Planning

• Ocean

• Coastal

• Approach

• Harbour

“Inset” displays insets contained in charts. “Name” displays ID number of charts. “Permit” displays limits only for
charts which the system has a permit to use.

“Group” displays limits for user defined group charts.

9-25
9. Raster Chart Material

The ARCS catalogue displays chart limits in different colors. Each ARCS Weekly Update CD ROM contains
information for each chart available in UKHO with up-to-date information at the date of issue. When loading
updates using by permits or by active group, this information is loaded into the ECDIS. This information is used to
display limits of charts on the ARCS catalogue. The chart limit boxes are color coded as follows:

Color of Meaning
chart limit
Green The chart is available for use and it is also up-to-date.
Orange The chart has a valid permit and it is loaded on the hard disk, but it is not up-to-date. Update
chart using the same weekly updates as displayed in the ARCS Catalogue information.
Red Neither permit nor chart has been loaded onto the hard disk. Load permit, chart and updates.
Blue The chart is not seen on the ECDIS. Possible reasons are:
• Chart permit is for different edition of the chart. This may occur when a new edition of a
chart has been issued, but either only new permit or only new chart has been loaded onto the
hard disk.

• Chart permit has expired. Contact your chart agent to renew permit for the chart.

• Content of the chart is corrupted. Load the chart and updates.

Magenta A permit for the chart has been loaded, but the chart is not loaded on the hard disk. Chart
cannot be seen on the ECDIS unless the chart is loaded into the ECDIS.
You can choose a chart by clicking the limit of the chart in the ARCS Catalogue dialog box. The information about
the chosen chart is displayed in the Selected Char field.

After you have clicked the limit of chart you get

information of the chart in Selected Chart window
as follows:

• Number: Chart number as stated on the

corresponding paper chart.

• Orig. Scale: Scale of original paper chart.

• Chart CD ROM: The number of the CD ROM

in which chosen chart is stored.

• Permit: If chosen there is permit in the ECDIS.

• Loaded: If chosen chart is loaded into the

ECDIS.

• Chart usability and Update Status

The Selected Chart window also contains several buttons for handling charts. The Check button checks if the
edition and updates of the chosen chart are valid. The Open button opens chosen chart, if it has been loaded and the
system has a permit for chosen chart.

The Edit Group button is used to define a group of charts. For further details, see paragraph 9.4.13 “Grouping
ARCS charts“.

9-26
 9. Raster Chart Material

9.4.13 Grouping ARCS charts

Creating an ARCS chart group

To create a ARCS chart group, do the following:

1. Open the Chart menu.

2. Choose Chart Catalogue from the menu to show the ARCS Catalogue
dialog box.

3. Click the Groups button to show the Group dialog box. See the figure
below.

4. Click the New button, use the thumbwheel to create a name for the new
group, and then click the OK button.

Entered group name (in the example above it is ENG-CHA) appears in the Edit
Group field. Now you can define chart cells to include in this group, following
the procedure on the next page.

9-27
9. Raster Chart Material

Adding ARCS charts to a group

After you have entered a name for the group, click the Add Frame button in the Group field. Choose the area to
group by moving the cursor to the desired location and clicking the left mouse button. Below is a sample group.

Charts that are inside the frame or intersect a frame limit are added to the group. When your frame is ready, click the
Done button in the Group field. Chart cells which are chosen into defined group are displayed in the Inside list box
in the Group window.

You can also add charts to your group by using the << (add) button. To add a chart, choose the chart ID from the
Outside list box and then click the << button.

Note: Check the Permit box to have the system display only the chart cells for which you have permits.

After you have selected some charts to group, click the Save button to save the chosen charts as a group.

9-28
 9. Raster Chart Material

You can also save your chart cells as a text file, if you want to have a list of chart cells in text format. To do this,
click the Save As Text... button. The Save As window appears as below.

Choose directory and drive where you want save your text file. You can use the Windows NotePad application to
view and print a list of charts in a group.

Removing ARCS charts from a group

You can remove charts from a group as follows:

1. Open the Chart menu. Choose Chart Catalogue from the menu.

2. Click the Groups button in the Group window to show the Group window.

3. Choose desired group from the Edit Group list box.

4. Choose desired chart(s) from the Inside list box, by pointing the cursor and
clicking the left mouse button.

5. Click the >> button. Chosen chart is removed to the Outside list box and it is
no longer a member of the group.

9-29
9. Raster Chart Material

Choosing active group

You can make a group an active group as follows:

1. Open the Chart menu. Choose Chart Catalogue from the menu.

2. Click Groups in the View Filters window.

3. Choose desired group from the Edit Group list box.

Removing a group
You can remove a group from the hard disk as follows:

1. Open the Chart menu. Choose Chart Catalogue from the menu.

2. Choose desired group from the Edit Group list box.

3. Click the Edit Group button followed by clicking the Remove button. Click the Ok button to confirm.

9.4.14 Removing ARCS charts from the system

You can remove ARCS charts from the system, manually or by active group.

Manually removing an ARCS chart

1. Open the Chart menu.

2. Choose Remove Charts from the menu and Manual from the sub menu.
Then, the Chart Operations window appears.

[Remove Charts] 3. Choose desired charts to remove them from the system.
Go Back
4. Click the Remove Chart button to remove chosen charts from the hard
By Group
disk.
Manual

9-30
 9. Raster Chart Material

Removing ARCS chart group by “active group”

1. Open the Chart menu.

2. Choose Remove Charts from the menu and By Active Group from the sub
menu to show the ARCS Remove window.

[Remove Charts]
Go Back

By Group
Manual

3. Choose group from Group List and then choose the chart you want to
remove.

4. Click the Remove charts by group button. The system removes the ARCS
charts from the hard disk which pertain to the active group.

5. Click the OK button.

9-31
9. Raster Chart Material

9.5 ARCS Chart Display

9.5.1 Displaying ARCS chart material
To display ARCS format raster chart material on the display, do the following:

1. Place the cursor just above the area where the ECDIS shows chart scale.

2. Spin the thumbwheel to show “Activate ARCS Chart” in the mouse functions area, and then push the left mouse
button to show ARCS charts on the display.

9.5.2 Choosing ARCS chart datum

Datum is used to choose between different models of the earth. It is essential that you use datum in a consistent way.

If you use paper charts together with electronic charts, it is recommended that you use the same datum as your
current paper chart to avoid misalignment between your electronic system and points taken or plotted on your
current paper chart.

Once you have chosen a datum, all numerical latitude and longitude position values are presented in your chosen
datum.

Note: If you use ARCS raster chart material, the rasterized charts contain some rasterized position information.
These positions, like scales in the edges of ARCS charts, are true only if you have chosen native datum of that
ARCS chart. Normally this is the natural situation, because you use ARCS together with corresponding official
paper chart and because you have chosen the datum which is equal to the official paper chart.

To find out native datum of ARCS chart, do the following:

1. Click the sidebar area in the information area, spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/ /Select Sidebar in the mouse
functions area, push the right mouse button, choose Chart Legend from the menu and then push the
thumbwheel.

2. Click the Details… button in the Chart Legend window to show ARCS Details.

In the Hor Datum field the native datum of the displayed ARCS chart is shown.

3. Move the cursor over Datum on the upper right corner of the ECDIS and choose desired datum by spinning the
thumbwheel and pushing it to confirm selection. Chosen datum is shown on the status bar (at the top of the
screen).

9-32
 9. Raster Chart Material

9.5.3 Viewing different ARCS charts

Choosing a chart from ARCS catalogue

You may use the ARCS Catalogue to display an ARCS format chart.

1. Open the Chart menu.

2. Choose Chart Catalogue from the menu.

3. From the ARCS Catalogue dialog box, activate desired chart. For more information, see paragraph 9.4.12
“ARCS Catalogue”.

4. Click the Open button.

Indication of availability of alternative charts such as S57 (ENC) or other suitable ARCS
chart
The system has several indications to alert you to availability of charts. The indication is based on information
available from position of own ship if automatic TM reset is active, or from current position of cursor if automatic
TM reset is off.

• Larger RNC: Larger ARCS scale is available.

• Equal RNC: Same scale ARCS scale is available.

• Larger ENC: Larger ENC compilation scale is available.

• Eq ENC: Same ENC compilation scale is available.

• Smaller ENC: Smaller ENC compilation scale is available.

Note: When using ARCS, the system also recognises if ENCs are available over the specified area and indicates it
with the texts shown above. This is important because under the current IMO rules only ENC charts can fully
replace the traditional paper charts.

Browsing your ARCS charts

You may view S57 charts using different positions and different scales. The basic tools for browsing charts are
Range -, Range+, Set Chart Center, ShipOffcenter and TM Reset.

Set Chart Center allows you to look ahead from a position other than own ship position. With the cursor inside the
electronic chart area, spin the thumbwheel to display Set Chart Center/Info/Activate Scroll in the mouse functions
area and then push the left mouse button. See the figure below. Turn off automatic true motion reset by displaying
and clicking TM Reset/Info/ShipOffcenter in the mouse functions area and pushing the left mouse button. When
true motion reset is off, the indication “Ship out of dsp” appears in the information area.

Choose Set Chart Center from the Menu and the

window shown right appears. Enter the position which
you want to be screen center and then click the Set
Center button.

To restore own ship’s position to the screen center, display TM Reset/Info/ShipOffcenter in the mouse functions
area and then push the left mouse button.

Range - and Range+ change the chart scale. If true motion reset is active, ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT keep the
relative position of the own ship with respect to the display. If true motion reset is off, ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT
keep the relative position pointed by the cursor with respect to the display.

9-33
9. Raster Chart Material

The system automatically chooses next larger or smaller scale. If a chart with larger compilation scale available at
your current viewing position, the message “Larger Scale Data Exists” appears.

If the indication “Equal RNC” appears, this means that you have a chart with the same scale and overlapping with
the displayed ARCS chart. When you reach an edge of a chart and the indication “Equal RNC” appears, this means
you can switch to another chart with the same scale to the display by pressing the NEXT key on the Control Unit
RCU-018 or displaying Edit Insert/Info/Select Next in the mouse functions area and pushing the right mouse button.
An overlapping chart with the same scale will be opened.

Searching for an ARCS chart around your own ship

You can use either true motion or relative motion. In the true motion mode, own ship moves until it reaches the true
motion reset borderline, where it jumps back to an opposite position on the screen based on ship’s course. In the
relative motion mode, own ship stays in a fixed position, while the chart moves on screen.

If, in the true motion mode, you reset own position with TM Reset, own ship will immediately jump to the true
motion reset position.

If, in the true motion mode, you use ShipOffcenter, your ship will go to that position on screen and continue true
motion movement from that position. When it reaches the true motion reset borderline, it will automatically jump to
the true motion reset position.

If, in the relative motion mode, you reset own position with TM Reset, your ship will immediately jump to the true
motion reset position and use that position as fixed position to stay on screen.

If you use relative motion, you can choose a new fixed position for your ship by using ShipOffcenter.

Use Range - ¨and Range+ to choose desired chart scale.

9-34
 9. Raster Chart Material

9.5.4 Choosing an ARCS chart by its number on display

Opening an ARCS chart manually

To choose a specific ARCS format raster chart onto the display use Open menu command. Do the following:

1. Open the Chart menu.

2. Check if the text Activate S57 chart appears on the first line of the menu. If
it is displayed, then go to step 4.

3. If the text Activate ARCS Chart is shown, push the thumbwheel.

4. Choose Open Chart from the menu and Manual from sub menu.

5. Choose desired chart from the chart list dialog and then click the Open
Chart button.

The chosen chart is automatically displayed in the electronic chart area.

9-35
9. Raster Chart Material

Opening an ARCS chart by position

To open an ARCS chart by position of own ship or by chart center, if your display is in TM RESET OFF status, use
the item “Open by position”. Then you get a list of charts which cover current position. To open chart by position,
do the following:

1. Open the Chart menu.

2. Check if the text Activate S57 chart appears on the first line of the menu. If
it is displayed, then go to step 4.

3. If the text Activate ARCS chart is shown, push the thumbwheel.

4. Choose Open Chart from the menu and By Position from sub menu. The
ARCS Open window appears.

5. Choose desired chart from the list box and then click the Open Chart
button.

9-36
 9. Raster Chart Material

9.5.5 Controlling visible ARCS chart features

The Display dialog box contains several pages to control visible chart features.

Chart page
Black and grey color symbol:

This symbol is used to verify that you can distinguish black (frame of symbol) and
grey (inner part of symbol) colors with current contrast and brilliance settings.

Dsp Dimmer:

Use this control to adjust dimming of the display. The text “CALIB” indicates that
dimming of display is set within calibration values. Monitor brilliance is restored to
calibrated state by doing the following:
1) Place the cursor on the calibration bar and spin the thumbwheel to show
“CALIB”.
2) Operating the STD DSP key on the Control Unit RCU-018.
3) Choosing “Set Std Display” from the menu.
4) Pressing and holding down any one of the F1-F4 keys more than two seconds on
the Control Unit RCU-015.

Shallow contour:

Set value of shallow water contour.

Safety depth:

Set value of safety depth. Spot soundings below the safety depth are highlighted.

Safety contour:

Set value of safety contour. Visible safety contour is equal to set value or if the
contour of set value is not available then the visible safety contour is next deeper
contour than safety contour.

Note: The system uses safety contour also for chart alarms.

Deep contour:

Set deep-water contour.

TM reset:

In the true motion mode, own ship moves until it reaches the true motion reset
borderline, and then it jumps back to an opposite position on screen based on its
course. Set the limit for TM reset (in percentage).

Note: ARCS charts are “photocopies” of original paper charts. One cannot change images of
these photocopies. Selections of shallow contour, safety depth, safety contour, deep contour,
symbols, depths, boundaries, light sectors, shallow pattern and Update highlight in Chart page
control only visibility of add-on layer(s) on top of the ARCS chart image (manual updates are
such an add-on layer). For more information about manual updates, see the chapter on manual
updates.
Palette:
Choose appropriate palette for the display depending on the brightness of the bridge.

9-37
9. Raster Chart Material

Symbols:
Choose how to display chart symbols. The options are:
Simplified: The shape of symbols is of modern design and the sea mark symbols are filled in a color

Paper Chart: The shape of symbols imitates traditional symbols used in paper charts.
Depth:

Set how to display different depth zones on the chart display.

For MULTICOLOUR, the chart display uses four different colors for contours:

• Deeper than user-chosen deep contour

• Between deep contour and user-chosen safety contour

• Between safety contour and user-chosen shallow water contour

• Between shallow water contour and coastline.

For TWO COLOUR, the chart display uses only two colors:

• Deeper than safety contour

• Shallower than safety contour

Boundaries:

Set how to display boundaries of some chart features. The options are:

• Plain: The line styles are limited to plain solid and dashed lines.

• Symbolized: Some of the line styles use symbols to highlight the purpose of a line.

Light sector:

Set how to display light sectors. The options are:

• Limited: The length of a light sector is fixed at 25 mm independently of the displayed scale.

• Full: The length of a light sector represent its nominal range as defined by the chart producer.

Shallow pattern:

Set how to display shallow water area. The options are:

• None

• Diamond: Provided to distinguish shallow water at night.

Update Highlight:

Set how the updates are highlighted on the screen before you approve them. The options are

• Detailed: The system tries to highlight updates so that only those objects which have visible changes are
highlighted. Use this option to see the practical change of an update.

• All effects: The system highlights updates so that all the objects pertaining to updates are highlighted although
some of them have not been changed.

9-38
 9. Raster Chart Material

“Standard, Other 1 and Other 2” pages

The Standard page contains chart features defined by IMO which comprise a standard display. You can recall the
standard display at any time using a single action, by pressing the STD DSP key on the Control Unit RCU-018 or
displaying Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse function area and pushing the right mouse button.

The Other 1 and Other 2 pages contain chart features for which you can control visibility and which are not part of
IMO-defined standard display.

Note 1: To use the Info request feature, which provides information for cursor-chosen chart feature, the associated
chart feature must be turned on from the Standard page.

Note 2: To navigate between the menus in the Chart Display dialog box, click the appropriate arrow tab with the left
mouse button or hit the NEXT key on the Control Unit RCU-018.

9.5.6 Display base

A subset of chart features is called the Display Base. As required by IMO, these features cannot be made invisible.
The Display Base consists of the following chart features:

• Coastline (high water)

• Own ship's safety contour, which is chosen by the user

• Indication of isolated underwater dangers of depths less than the safety contour which lie within the safe waters
defined by the safety contour

• Indication of isolated dangers which lie within the safe water defined by the safety contour such as bridges,
overhead wires, etc., and including buoys and beacons whether or not these are being used as aids to navigation

• Traffic routine systems

• Scale, range, orientation and display mode

• Units of depth and height

9-39
9. Raster Chart Material

ARCS details page

The ARCS details page provides details about current ARCS chart.
To open this box, spin the thumbwheel to show Chart
Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area and then
push the left mouse button. You can change pages by clicking the
right mouse button (Choose Next), clicking the arrow tabs in the
dialog box or hitting the NEXT key on the keyboard-equipped
control unit.

View original: Check to show current chart without displaying updated parts.

Mark updates: Check to show updated parts of chart with red rectangles.

The figures below show how to find places on the chart which have been updated.

The ARCS chart that

is displayed for
“normal” use.

9-40
 9. Raster Chart Material

The ARCS chart that

is displayed as
original edition and
places that show
updates are marked
with a red rectangle.

9-41
9. Raster Chart Material

9.5.7 Controlling visible navigation features

Visibility control of the navigation features is divided into four pages in the Chart Display dialog box. The “Route”
page controls planned and monitored route. The “Tracking” page controls past tracks and some other features. The
“Mariner” page controls pilot data, user charts and chart alarms. The “Targets” page controls ARPA and AIS
targets.

The user can define settings for chart details which are displayed over the chart area. This means that the user can
choose different layers to be Off, Std or Other. Off turns off the feature chosen. Std turns on the navigation feature
chosen when the standard display is made active (with the STD DSP key on the Control Unit RCU-018 or accessing
the mouse function Standard Display). Other turns off the navigation features when the standard display is made
active as mentioned above.

Route page
This page contains selection of route related navigation features

Monitored route: Choose which part of monitored route to display.

Planned route: Choose which part of planned route to display.

Note: WP mark on both monitor and planned routes is permanently set to Std
position.

9-42
 9. Raster Chart Material

Tracking page
Past tracks

• Ship system: Choose Std or Other to plot own ship’s tracks using
system-fed position.

• Ship Primary: Choose Std or Other to plot own ship’s past track
with position fed from the primary sensor.

• Ship Secondary: Choose Std or Other to plot own ship’s past track
with position fed from a secondary sensor.

• Targets: Choose Std or Other to plot ARPA target past tracks.

Events: These marks are based on voyage log records. For more
information, see paragraph 23.3.2 “Voyage log”.

• User Event: Choose Std or Other to display event symbols on

ECDIS, where the system has recorded an event based on conditions
you have set (Type: User and Auto).

• Automatic Event: Choose Std or Other to display automatically

entered event symbols, where the system has recorded an event based
on conditions you have set. (Type: Ship and Alarm)

• Positions: Choose Std or Other to display the latitude and longitude

of an event.
Note 1: MOB event is always visible.
Note 2: You can choose period of time to display event marks in the
Show list box.

9-43
9. Raster Chart Material

Targets page

ARPA Targets:

• Symbol: Choose Std or Other to show ARPA target labels.

AIS Targets

• Symbol: Choose Std or Other to display AIS target symbols.

• Max (count): Set the maximum number of AIS targets to display.

• Max. (range): Set maximum range of AIS targets from own ship to
display.

9-44
 9. Raster Chart Material

Mariner page
Pilot data:

• Position: Choose Std or Other to show positions of pilot data records

with symbols on the chart.

• Range: Choose Std or Other to circumscribe pilot data records with

circles on the display. The size of a circle depends on the value set in
pilot data.

• Text: Choose Std or Other to show text of pilot data records on the
chart.

User chart:

• Points: Choose Std or Other to show user points on user charts.

• Lines: Choose Std or Other to show lines on user charts.

• Symbols, Tidals: Choose Std or Other to show symbols and tidals on

user charts.

• Areas: Choose Std or Other to show areas on the display. Color fill for
the areas can be chosen as transparent from 25 to 75% and as No color
fill. If No color fill is chosen, only the boundaries of the areas are
visible.

• Only radar of Lines, Symbols, Areas: If chosen as Std or Other, only

those Lines, Symbols and Areas are displayed which have user
selection “on radar” activated for them in the user chart. This is used to
view only that part of the user chart which will be sent to the ARPA
radar connected to the system.

Chart Alarm: Choose Std or Other to show chart alarm warning areas in red
highlight.

Manual Updates: Choose Std or Other to show manual updates with orange
symbols.

Note: Visibility of manual updates made as true symbols are controlled

through Standard and Other pages of the Chart Display menu.

Ship: Own ship symbol is displayed in true scale if the displayed chart scale is
larger than the chosen limit scale and if the size of the true scale symbol is
longer than 6 mm on the chart display.

Radar overlay: Choose Std or Other to display the radar video overlay on the
display.

9-45
9. Raster Chart Material

9.5.8 Storing and recalling chart display settings for visible chart
and navigational features
You can define chart display settings for chart details, which are displayed over S57 charts cells. You can save these
chart display settings into your hard disk and later recall them on demand.

Creating new chart display settings

To create new settings for chart displays, do the following:

1. Display Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse button.

2. Place the cursor on the triangle in the Chart Display dialog box to show the Chart Display menu.

3. Choose Create from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

4. Enter desired name for chart display settings and click the OK button in the window.

Choosing chart display settings

1. Open the Chart Display dialog box and place the cursor on the triangle.

2. Choose Select from the menu and push the thumbwheel.

3. Choose desired chart display settings from the list box.

Saving changes to chart display settings

1. Open the Chart Display dialog box and place the cursor on the triangle.

2. Choose Save from the menu to save current chart display settings.

9-46
10. Manual Updates

10.1 Introduction
SOLAS requires that mariners keep their charts up-to-date for an intended voyage. Mariners receive chart
corrections and other essential information for the area of their intended voyage as

• Notices to Mariners (by post, by email, by fax, etc.)

• Navtex warnings

Mariners should also keep the electronic charts in their ECDIS up-to-date. Regardless of the chart material used,
mariner must know which of these chart corrections are applied into their ECDIS charts and which of them needs to
be added as manual updates.

Manual update may include deleting an already existing object, modifying a position or other characteristics of an
already existing object or inserting of a new object. In this ECDIS, manual updates are stored in a common database,
which is used for both S57 and ARCS charts. For further details, see paragraph 10.7. “Other Manual Update
Features”

Mariners cannot permanently remove any of the official objects from the chart display. If a mariner needs to make
obsolete any of the official objects he deletes them. Then, in practice, the deleted features are still visible, but they
are displayed a certain way to indicate a deleted object.

However, a mariner can remove objects which he has inserted himself.

Note that the manual updates have no automatic connection to any automatic update received later for S57 or ARCS
charts. If a manual update itself became obsolete, because the official chart has been updated to include the update
defined as a manual update, the mariner must himself delete the obsolete manual update in question.

This ECDIS records complete usage of manual updates. All deletions, modifications and insertions are recorded and
time stamped. If the mariner wishes to see what kind of manual updates he had in the past, for example, two weeks
ago, he uses Update History to specify the relevant date range. For information on how to set Display and Approve
dates, see paragraph 8.12 “Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of Vector Chart”.

10-1
10. Manual Updates

10.2 Symbols to Use with Manual Updates

Manual updates can be used for the following purposes:

• Keep charts up-to-date using similar symbols as the real chart uses. We refer to these symbols as “True
symbols”.

• Keep charts up-to-date using conspicuous orange symbols reserved for this purpose. We refer to these symbols
as “Orange symbols”.

• Add additional mariner information using conspicuous orange symbols reserved for this purpose.

Orange symbols are recommended because then you, your mates and pilots can easily find these symbols. Another
benefit of the orange symbols is that they are very easy to insert. However, orange symbols do not cover all
possibilities. Experienced users can use true symbols to create their own cartography.

10.3 Displaying Manual Updates

10.3.1 Controlling visibility of orange symbols from manual updates
Visibility of the orange symbols from manual updates is controlled on the Mariner pages of the Chart Display dialog
box.

On the Mariner page the item Manual Updates is selected to “Std Orange”.

For chart alarms calculation, the following orange symbols can be detected and highlighted during route planning
and route monitoring. The associated alarm is “5100 Safety contour”.

Category type:

• Symbol: Mariner Danger Highlight

• Symbol: Mariner Foul Ground

• Symbol: Mariner Isolated Danger

• Symbol: Mariner Obstruction

• Symbol: Mariner Underwater Rock

• Symbol: Mariner Wreck

• Line: Mariner Danger Highlight Line

• Area: Mariner Danger Highlight Area

10-2
10.3.2 Controlling visibility of true symbols from manual updates
Chart features added by manual updates behave exactly as any other chart feature. Their visibility follows common
rules. For more information, see the paragraph “8.10.4 “Controlling visible chart features”.

10.4 Controlling Chart Viewing Dates of Manual

Updates
10.4.1 Setting current date for viewing
Manual updates operate like any other S57 chart which contains updates and other set chart viewing dates features.

When you accept manual updates as permanent, the system sets Display Until of manual updates as current date of
the system. To set Approve Until as current date of the system, you must open the Set chart viewing dates window
(in the Chart menu) and perform Approve Until. For how to set current date, see paragraph 8.12 “Chart Viewing
Dates and Seasonal Features of Vector charts (S57)”. Recommended settings in the Chart viewing dates window
are:

• Sync Manual Update Dates as ON position

• All SENCs ON position

See the example below where Displ. until and Approv. until are set as the system current date.

10-3
12. Navigation Tools

10.5 Using Manual Update Editor w/Orange Symbols

The manual update editor has the choices shown below and you can choose one
by choosing Manual Updates from the Chart menu.

• Planning: Operate with new manual updates.

• Undo Last: Remove last accepted manual update planning session. By

repeating Undo Last you can remove any amount of old manual update
planning session.

• Clear: Remove all manual updates in a single operation.

• Backup and Restore: Make a backup or recall already recorded backup.

• With an ARCS chart, you also have “Set chart viewing dates” to set viewing
date of manual updates. Note that with S57 charts “Set chart viewing dates”
is in the Chart menu.

10.5.1 Manual update planning

The manual update editor operates in sessions. You create a session when you activate the Manual Update Planning
dialog box, displayed by choosing Manual Update from the Chart menu followed by Planning from the sub menu.
You can freely delete, modify, copy or create chart objects until you feel finished with your session. Then, you
terminate your session by clicking the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button and then the ECDIS stores
your manual updates permanently. If you need to leave your manual update session and discard all modifications
made during the current session, click X in upper right corner.

Note: The manual update editor is only available in the North Up or Course Up orientation mode.

New, Copy, Modify, Delete: These buttons are used to collect chart objects into a list shown in the Manual Update
Planning dialog box for further editing during current session of manual update planning. New creates an object
from scratch. Copy creates an object using an existing object as an example. Modify changes an existing object.
Delete removes an existing object.

Remove from List: If you made a manual update by mistake, you can remove it if you haven't accepted it yet as
permanent. You can remove it by choosing (highlighting) that chart object in the List and then clicking the Remove
from List button.

Edit Properties: You can edit properties of a chosen (highlighted) chart object by using the Edit Properties button.

10-4
10.5.2 Inserting new orange symbols
The mariner can insert a new object either using New or Copy in the Manual Update Planning dialog box. With
New he creates a new feature from scratch. With Copy he uses an already existing object as an example for the
newly inserted feature.

Inserting new orange symbols using “new”

When you want to create a new object from scratch, you start creating by clicking the New button in the Manual
Update Planning dialog box. A New Object window appears. Use the default Category Standard Orange to insert a
new orange symbol. The detailed procedure is as follows:

5.
4. 6.

7.

8.

10. Set the positions

with cursor and
push left mouse
button.
Click Accept button.

11.
12.

13.

14.

10-5
12. Navigation Tools

1. Spin the thumbwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area.

2. Push the right mouse button.

3. Choose Manual Updates, push the thumbwheel, choose Planning and then push the thumbwheel.

4. Click the New button in a Manual Update Planning dialog box.

5. Choose desired Drawing Type (Point, Line or Area), and choose Category as Standard Orange.

6. Choose desired Symbol from the Symbol list box.

7. Click the Accept New Object button.

8. Click the Edit Properties button.

9. Click the Edit Position button. Now you have two alternatives: If you want to add a text, then continue from
step 10. Otherwise go to step 14.

10. Use the cursor and the left mouse button to define position of symbol and then click the Accept button.

11. If you would like to include textual information related to an orange symbol, click the Edit Properties and
values button.

12. Highlight Information in the right side box and then click the << button to move it to the left hand box and then
highlight it. Then, you can add textual information in the Property Value field. To enter text or numeric value,
click inside the box, spin the thumbwheel to choose character desired and then push the thumbwheel. After
entering all characters desired, click the Accept List and Values button.

13. Click the Accept button.

14. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button.

10-6
Inserting new orange symbols using “copy”
You can make new orange symbols by copying existing orange symbols. Then you pick up an orange symbol and
make a copy of it. After copying you can modify position suitable for your purposes.

3. Click desired
object with cursor
4.
2.
and push left
mouse button.
5.

6.

7.
9.

8. Set the positions

with cursor and
push left mouse
button. Then click
Accept.
1. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.

2. Click the Copy button in the Manual Update Planning dialog box.

3. Place cursor on the desired object and press left mouse button.

4. Choose object from the Objects by Cell window. There can be more than one object in the area.

5. Click the Accept button.

6. New orange symbols are displayed in the list in the Manual Update Planning dialog box. Then click the Edit
Properties button.

7. Click the Edit Position button.

8. Place cursor on the desired location on the ECDIS display. Push the left mouse button and then click the Accept
button.

9. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button.

10-7
12. Navigation Tools

10.5.3 Deleting orange symbols

The mariner cannot permanently remove any of the official chart objects from the chart display. If the mariner needs
to remove any of the official chart objects, he is allowed to mark them as deleted. In practice the deleted chart object
is still visible, but it has a special presentation for a deleted object on top of it. To delete a chart object, do the
following:

2. 4.
6.
5.

3. Place cursor on
desired object
and push left mouse
button.

1. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.

2. Click the Delete button in the Manual Update Planning dialog box.

3. Place the cursor on the desired chart object and push the left mouse button.

4. Choose the object from the Objects by Cell window that you wish to delete. You can also view data of each
object before making your selection.

5. Click the Accept button.

6. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button to complete the deletion.

Note: If you deleted an official ENC chart object, a deletion mark is added over the original chart object which is
still visible. If you delete a manual update chart object, it is removed from the chart display based on date of
deletion.

10-8
10.5.4 Editing position of orange symbols
An object can be type of point, line or area.

• Point has only one point in its presentation.

• Line can consist of one or more chains. A chain consists of two or more points.

• Area consists of a line which is closed.

3.

6.
4.
5. Set the positions
with cursor and
push left mouse
button.
Click Accept button.
1. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.

2. Click the Modify button, click the object on the chart which you want to edit, and then click the Accept button.

3. Click the Edit Properties button. The Object window appears.

4. Click the Edit Position button.

5. Edit the position of the chosen chart feature and then click the Accept button. See the next two pages for how to
modify a chart object.

6. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button.

10-9
12. Navigation Tools

The example below shows how to modify a line.

1) Activate Position Edit. 2) Place cursor on point to edit.

3) Keep left mouse button

pushed down to modify
a point.

The example below shows how to set position for a point.

This method is also applicable to insert or append new points for existing chart features.

1) Activate Position Edit.

2) Insert a point with

left mouse button pushed.

3) Change lat and lon if necessary.

Choose digit with cursor and
push thumbwheel and then spin
it change digit.

10-10
The example below how to define an area for an existing chart feature.
1) Activate Position Edit.

3) Place cursor on requred point

and push left mouse button.
2) Choose
"Set Center".

10-11
12. Navigation Tools

10.6 Using Manual Update Editor with True Symbols

.
The manual update editor has the following features:

• Planning: Operate with new manual updates.

• Undo Last: Remove last accepted manual update planning session. By

repeating Undo Last you can remove any amount of old manual update
planning session.

• Clear: Remove all manual update in a single operation.

• Backup and Restore: Make a backup or to recall already recorded backup.

• With an ARCS chart, you also have “Set chart viewing dates” to set viewing
date of manual updates. This is done with “Set Chart viewing dates” in the
Chart menu.

10.6.1 Manual update planning

The manual update editor operates in sessions. You create a session when you activate the Manual Update Planning
dialog box. You can freely delete, modify, copy or create chart objects until you feel finished with your session.
Then, you terminate your session by clicking the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button and the ECDIS
stores your manual updates permanently. If you need to leave your manual update session and discard all
modifications made during the current session, click X in upper right corner.

Note: The manual update editor is only available in the North Up or Course Up orientation mode.

New, Copy, Modify, Delete: These buttons are used to collect chart objects into a list shown in a Manual Update
Planning dialog box for further editing during current session of manual update planning. New creates an object
from scratch. Copy creates an object using an existing object as an example. Modify changes an existing object.
Delete removes an existing object.

Remove from List: If you made a manual update by mistake, you can remove it if you haven't accepted it yet as
permanent. You can remove it by choosing (highlighting) chart object in the List and then clicking the Remove
from List button.

Edit Properties: You can edit properties of chosen (highlighted) chart object by using the Edit Properties button.

10-12
10.6.2 Deleting chart objects
The mariner cannot permanently remove any of the official chart objects from the chart display. If mariner needs to
remove any of the official chart objects he is allowed to mark them as deleted. In practice the deleted chart object is
still visible, but it has a special presentation for a deleted object on top of it. To delete a chart object, do the
following:

2. 4.
6.
5.

3. Place cursor on
desired object
and push left mouse
button.

1. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.

2. Click the Delete button in the Manual Update Planning dialog box.

3. Place cursor on desired chart object and push the left mouse button.

4. Choose the object from the Objects by Cell window. Confirm data for selected object.

5. Click the Accept button.

6. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button to complete the deletion.

Note: If you deleted an official ENC chart object, a deletion mark is added over the original chart object which is
still visible. If you delete a manual update chart object, then it is removed from the chart display based on date of
deletion.

10-13
12. Navigation Tools

10.6.3 Modifying chart objects

The mariner cannot permanently remove from the chart display any of the official chart objects, but he can modify
position and/or properties of chart objects. When the mariner modifies a chart object, the ECDIS will mark original
chart object as deleted and a copy of original chart object as inserted.

1. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.

2. Click the Modify button.

3. Place the cursor on the desired object and then push the left mouse button.

4. Choose the object from the Objects by Cell window. Confirm data for selected object.

5. Click the Accept button.

6. Click the Edit Properties button.

7. If you want to modify the position of the object, click the Edit Position button. Otherwise continue from step 13.

8. Place the cursor on the desired location on the ECDIS display. Click the Accept button.

9. Click Accept Manual Updates as Permanent. If you want to modify also properties continue from step 10.

10. If you want to modify properties, also click Accept.

11. If you want to modify the properties of the object click Edit Properties and values button. Otherwise continue
from step 9.

12. Pick from the list properties you want to modify and give them new values. You can also add new properties or
remove old.

13. Click Accept List and values to continue from step 5 or 11 again. Otherwise continue from step 9.

2. 4.

5.
6.

3. Place cursor on
desired object and
press left mouse button.

10-14
 7.

8. Set positions with

10. cursor and push
11. left mouse button.
Click Accept button.

9.

12.

13.

10.6.4 Inserting new chart objects

The mariner can insert a new object either using New or Copy. With New he creates a new feature from scratch.
With Copy he uses an already existing object as an example for the new inserted feature.

Inserting new chart objects using “new”

When you want to create a new object from a scratch, you start creating by clicking the New button in the Manual
Update Planning dialog box. A S57 Object window appears. In this window you can choose geometric type of
object (Point, Line or Area) and type of object:

Object type (category)

• Standard orange. This category is reserved for simple orange symbols.

• Single. All self-understandable chart objects which can be created based on a single chosen chart object.
Examples are different kind of restricted and warning areas, light ships, anchorage symbols, etc.

• Nav Aid. Nav Aid is a guided method to create navigational aids such as lights and buoys, because they consist
of several objects put together with master and slave relationships.

• Easy Lateral Sea Mark. Guided method to create nav aid easily for any lateral sea marks.

• Easy Cardinal Sea Mark. Guided method to create nav aid easily for any cardinal sea marks.

• Easy Other Sea Mark. Guided method to create nav aid easily for any other sea marks.

• Easy Obstruction. Guided method to create obstructions.

• Easy Light. Guided method to create nav aid easily for any simple lights.

10-15
12. Navigation Tools

Example of how to insert a “restricted area”

1. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.

2. Click the New button in the Manual Update Planning dialog box.

3. Choose Area from the Drawing Type list box and then choose Single from the Category list box.

4. Choose desired icon from the list of available chart objects.

5. Click the Accept New Object button. New object is displayed in the List.

6. Then, click the Edit Properties button.

7. Click the Edit Position button.

8. Set cursor on the desired location on the ECDIS display and then push the left mouse button. Repeat this until
you have defined all points.

9. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button to finish.

2.
3.

4.

5.
7.
6.

9.

8. Set position with

cursor and push
left mouse button.
Click Accept button.

10-16
Example of how to insert easy lateral sea mark

The method is similar also for easy cardinal sea marks, easy other sea marks, Easy lights and easy obstructions.

1. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.

2. Click the New button.

3. Choose Easy Lateral Sea Mark from the Category list box.

4. Select appropriate items from Type, Shape, Region and Side.

5. Click the Accept New Object button. New object is displayed in the List.

6. Then click the Edit Properties button.

7. Click the Edit Position button.

8. On the desired location on the ECDIS display push left mouse button. Click the Accept button.

9. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button.

3.
4.

5.
7.
6.

9. 8. Set position with

cursor and push
left button. Click
Accept button.

10-17
12. Navigation Tools

Example of how to insert a nav aid

A light is only a light - it also requires a support which could be a pile or buoy, etc. Body and top mark of a buoy are
separated to enable a vast number of possible combinations.

1. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.

2. Click the New button.

3. Choose Point as Drawing Type; choose Nav Aid as Category. Then use the cursor to choose desired icon from
the master object.

4. Click the Set as Master button.

5. When you have set a master object, you can define nav aid slaves for it. Use the cursor to choose desired icon
(for example, Light) of a slave object.

6. Click the Set as Nav Aid Slave button. If you need more than one slave object continue from step 5.

7. When you are ready with master and its slave objects, click the Accept New Object button. The new object
w/slave (two lights) is shown in the list box.

8. Then, set the position of your master and slave objects. Click the Edit Properties button.

9. Click the Edit Position button.

10. Place the cursor on desired location on the ECDIS display and the push the left mouse button.

11. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button (11b in the example), or click the Accept button (11a
in the illustration on the next page).

12. Click the Accept button.

13. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button, and the object appears on the display at the position
selected.

10-18
 3.
5.

4.
6.

7.

8.

10. Set postion with cursor

and push left mouse
button. Press Accept
button.
9.

11a.
11b. Set position and then click
the Accept Manual
Updates as Permanent
button.
12.

13.

10-19
12. Navigation Tools

Inserting new chart objects using “copy”

You can make a new object by copying an existing one. Then you pick up an object and make a copy of it with all
related properties. After copying, you can modify position and properties of copied object suitable for your
purposes.

2. 3. Click desired 4.
object with
cursor and
push left
5.
mouse button.

6.

7.
9.

8. Set position with

cursor and push
left mouse button.
Click Accept
button.
1. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.

2. Click the Copy button in the Manual Update Planning dialog box.

3. Place the cursor on a desired object and click the left mouse button.

4. Choose object from the Object by Cell window.

5. Click the Accept button.

6. New object is displayed in “List of”. Then, click the Edit Properties button.

7. Click the Edit Position button.

8. Place the cursor on desired location on the ECDIS display. Click the left mouse button.

9. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button. (If button is hidden by window, move the window.)

10-20
10.6.5 Editing properties of manually updated chart objects

Editing properties of chart objects

2.

6.

3.

4.

5.

1. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.

2. In Manual Update Planning dialog box, click the Edit Properties button. An Object window appears.

3. Click the Edit Properties and values button. A Properties List and Values Edit window appears.

4. Add or remove features from/to the Properties List using >> and << buttons. To edit property value, highlight
desired value in the Properties List, then you can edit in the Property Value field using Alternatives field or enter
Numeric or Textual value. If the Object has a linked object, you can also edit those values. Click Edit
Master/Slaves relationship button to edit them. Make desired modifications in the Master/Slave relationship
edit window. After you have edited all the values of the linked objects, click the Accept button.

5. After you have edited all the values of the object you click the Accept List and Values button, if you want
continue from step 2 with the object. Otherwise continue from step 4.

6. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button.

10-21
12. Navigation Tools

Editing position of chart objects

An object can be type of point, line or area.

• A Point has only one point in its presentation.

• A Line can consist of one or more chains. A chain consists of two or more points.

• An Area consists of a line which is closed.

2.

5.
3.
4. Set cursor on
position and push
left mouse button.
Click Accept
button.
1. Follow steps 1-3 on page 10-6 to display the Manual Update Planning dialog box.

2. Press the Modify button, select object on chart and then click the Edit Properties button. Object window
appears. An Object window appears.

3. Click the Edit Position button.

4. With the Position Edit window open, you can edit the position of the chosen chart feature. For further details, see
the next several pages.

5. Click the Accept Manual Updates as Permanent button.

Example of how to modify a line

2) Place cursor on
1) Activate Position Edit. point desired.

3) Keep left mouse button pushed down

when you modify position of a point.

10-22
Example of how to set new position for a point

The method is also applicable to insert or append new points for existing chart features.

1) Activate Position Edit.

2) Insert point with

left mouse button.

3) If necessary change lat

and lon position. Place
cursor on digit, push
thumbwheel and then
roll thumbwheel.

Example of how to define a new center point for an existing chart feature

1) Activate Position Edit.

3) Place cursor on new required center

2) Select point and push left mouse button.
"Set Center".

10-23
12. Navigation Tools

10.7 Checking Creation and Usage History of

Manual Updates
You may need to check when a manual update has been added into your ECDIS. Also you may need to check what
was shown in your chart display three weeks ago. There are also many other cases when you need to know what was
known by your ECDIS.

To check any situation in the past, you can use either Display Until and Approve Until to specify exact date of
interest. Alternatively, you can specify directly the number of the manual update planning session. See below.

To open the Manual Update Chart viewing dates window, open the Chart menu, choose Set Chart viewing dates. In
the Chart Viewing Dates window, click the Manual Update Dates button.

10-24
11. Chart Alarms

11.1 General
The ECDIS can detect areas where the depth is less than the safety contour or detect an area where a specified
condition exists. If you plan a route or if prediction of own ship movement goes across a safety contour or an area
where a specified condition exists, the system will display a visual alarm or sound an audible alarm to alert you to
impending danger. For this function, the ECDIS utilises the chart database (S57 charts) stored on the hard disk in
SENC format. Note that the ECDIS calculates dangerous areas using the largest scale chart available, which
may not be the visualised chart.

You can choose objects which are included for calculation of danger area (for example, restricted areas). A window
lists the various areas which activate danger warnings.

You can also define your own safe area by creating a user chart area. The system can utilise these areas when
calculating chart alarms. This is very useful with raster chart material such as ARCS.

The ECDIS can check the following for you:

• Predicted movement area of own ship

• Planned route with an easy to use locator function to find dangerous areas

The ECDIS will highlight the following for you:

• Dangerous areas inside predicted movement area of the own ship

• Dangerous areas inside your monitored route

• Dangerous areas inside your planned route

11-1
11. Chart Alarms

11.2 Chart Alarms

Official S57 chart material contains depth contours which can be used for calculation of chart alarms. A chart
database also includes different types of objects which the operator can use for chart alarms. The procedure for
setting chart alarms is outlined below.

1. Choose suitable safety contour for your own ship. See paragraph 11.2.1 “Choosing safety contour“.

2. Check that “Chart Alarms” is set for display. See paragraph 11.2.3 “Highlighting chart alarm“. If you want
chart alarms to be included in some other objects or areas, choose them for indication or alarm. See paragraph
11.2.2 “Choosing objects in chart alarms”.

3. In the route planning mode, define a new route or choose an existing one. Make a chart alarm calculation of the
route if there are indications of danger areas in the route. For more information, see paragraph 11.5 “Route
Planning”. Modify your route if necessary and do the chart alarm calculation again.

4. Choose route as monitored route.

5. Set watch sector for your own ship.

The system is now ready for chart alarm calculation of monitored route and estimated own ship position.

11.2.1 Choosing safety contour

User has to choose safety depth suitable for the own ship. To choose suitable depth, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to display Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area and then push
the left mouse button.

2. If the Chart page is not displayed, click the Chart tab to display it.

3. Enter desired depth in the Safety contour field.

Note: If the chart does not contain chosen depth contour, the system will automatically choose next deeper contour.

In the example above the safe water depth is set for 10 m.

11-2
 11. Chart Alarms

11.2.2 Choosing objects used in chart alarms

You can also include calculation areas which have to be noted when sailing (for example, restricted areas). To
include these areas in chart alarms, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse
button.

2. Choose Initial Settings from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Place the cursor on the triangle inside the Initial Settings dialog box to open the Initial Settings menu.

4. Choose Chart Alarm parameters and then push the thumbwheel.

5. Click the Chart Alarms tab to show the Chart Alarms dialog box. In the Ignore box at the top of the window, use
the left mouse button to click the alarm item you wish to process.

6. Choose what alarm type you desire. Click the Indication button to display visual alarm, or Alarm button to get
the audible alarm. The item chosen is moved from the Ignore box to the Indication or Alarm box as appropriate.

7. To remove an alarm, click it in the Indication or Alarm box with the left mouse button and then click the Ignore
button. To change an alarm alert method, click it in the Indication or Alarm box with the left mouse button and
then click the Indication or Alarm button as appropriate.

8. Click the Parameters tab with the left mouse button.

9. Time and sector angle are explained in paragraph 11.4 “Activating Own ship Check”. Set them appropriately.

11-3
11. Chart Alarms

List of areas
There are the areas which the ECDIS detects and provides the audible alarm or visual indication if estimated own
ship position or planned or monitored route cross the area defined on the Chart Alarms page. You can choose from
the following areas:

Fairway Cargo Transhipment Area

Restricted Area User Chart Danger

Caution Area Traffic Separation Zone

Offshore Production Area TRS Crossing/Roundabout

Military Practise Area TRS Precautionary Area

Seaplane Landing Area Two Way Traffic Route

Submarine Transit Lane Deep Water Route

Fishing Ground Recommended Traffic Line

Pipeline Area Inshore Traffic Zone

Cable Area Ice Area

Anchorage Area Channel

Anchorage Prohibited Fishing Prohibited

Dumping Ground Spoil Ground

Incineration Area Dredged Area

Note: Areas To Be Avoided and Specially Protected Areas are collections of certain types of areas. If you choose
either of them, a group of areas will trigger an indication or audible alarm. The table below shows which areas are
chosen if Areas To Be Avoided or Special Protected Areas is chosen.

Areas To Be Avoided Specially Protected Areas

Fairway Fishing Ground

Restricted Area Pipeline Area

Caution Area Cable Area

Offshore Production Area Anchorage Area

Military Practise Area Anchorage Prohibited

Seaplane Landing Area Dumping Ground

Submarine Transit Lane Incineration Area

Cargo Transhipment Area

11-4
 11. Chart Alarms

11.2.3 Highlighting chart alarms

The user can choose the level of transparency of the chart alarm highlight. Follow the procedure below to choose the
level of transparency.

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show

Chart Display/Info/Standard
Display and then push the left
mouse button.

2. Click the right or left arrow tab

to choose the Mariner page, as
shown right.

3. In the User chart box, place the

cursor in the combo box, spin the
thumbwheel to choose level of
transparency desired and then
push the thumbwheel.

4. In the Chart Alarm box, choose

Std or Other position to enable
highlighting of alarm area.

11-5
11. Chart Alarms

11.3 Inserting User Chart Symbols, Lines and Areas

in Chart Alarm
Symbols
For user chart symbols, use the option Danger Symbol in the Symbol page of the Plan User Chart dialog box. To
display this box, do the following:

1. Place the cursor on UserChart on the status bar.

2. Click the Plan button to show the Plan User Chart dialog box.

3. Click the Symbol tab.

To include symbols in the chart alarm, first check the Enables changes box and then check the Danger Symbol box
of the Plan User Chart dialog box. Danger Symbol must checked, otherwise danger symbols of a user chart cannot
not be used in the chart alarm. The dangerous symbol is drawn in red instead of dark yellow (color may be different
depending on Palette in use).

In the Symbol page, you can

include symbols in the chart
alarm by checking Danger
Symbol.

Lines
To include lines in the chart alarm, check the Danger Line box in the Line page of the Plan User Chart dialog box.
Danger Line must checked, otherwise danger lines of a user chart cannot not be used in the chart alarm. The
dangerous line is drawn in red instead of dark yellow (color may be different depending on Palette in use).

In the Line page, you can

include lines in the chart
alarm by checking Danger
Line.

11-6
 11. Chart Alarms

Areas
To include areas in the chart alarm, check the Danger Area box in the Area page of the Plan User Chart dialog box.
Danger Area must checked, otherwise danger areas of a user chart cannot not be used in the chart alarm. The
dangerous area is drawn in red instead of dark yellow (color may be different depending on Palette in use).

In the Area page, you can

include areas in the chart
alarm by checking Danger
Area.

The figure below shows the behaviour of a dangerous symbol, line and area in the chart alarm check.

Presentation of
Dangerous Area

Presentation of
Dangerous Symbol

Presentation of
Dangerous Line

11-7
11. Chart Alarms

11.4 Activating Own Ship Check

Calculation of own ship predicted movement area is done using watch sector from own ship position. Sector size is
defined by time and angle. To set them, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart menu in the mouse

functions area and then push the left mouse button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose Initial Settings and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Place the cursor in the Initial Settings dialog box to show the menu
displayed at left.

4. Roll the thumbwheel to choose Chart Alarm parameters from the menu and
then push the thumbwheel.

5. Click the Parameters tab.

6. Set the sector time and sector angle as appropriate.

7. Click the X at the top right corner to close the dialog box.

The figure below and on the next page shows how a watch sector is displayed on the ECDIS display.
North UP TM

(MAN)
(POS)
(POS)
(POS)

11-8
 11. Chart Alarms

North UP TM

(MAN)

(POS)

(POS)

(POS)

Chart alarm always uses the largest scale chart available no matter which chart is chosen for display.

11-9
11. Chart Alarms

11.5 Route Planning

The system will calculate chart alarms using user-defined channel limit for routes. Danger areas are shown
highlighted if safety contour or user-chosen chart alarm areas are crossed by the planned route. For more
information on route planning, see the chapter on route planning.

Note: If your voyage is going to take a long time or you are planning it much earlier than it is to take place, use
display and approve dates corresponding to the dates you are going to sail.

You can generate a list of chart alarms which cross by the planned route. This can be done as follows:

1. Enter safety contour you want to use. See paragraph 11.2.1.

2. Plan a route; define waypoints and other necessary information. See the chapter on route planning.

3. Choose dangerous objects to be monitored during route monitoring, on the Alarms page in the Plan Route
dialog box, shown below.
a) Open the Plan Route dialog box by selecting UserChart-Plan from the status bar.
b) Click the Alarms tab.
c) Check the Enable changes box, and then click the alarm to process from the Ignore during monitoring list
and then click the Indication or Alarm button as appropriate to choose what type of alarm you want.

4. Click the Check tab and then click the Start button to generate a list of chart alarms.

The system will check a route leg by leg and when finished you will see the number of Legs and Alarms below
the tab buttons.

The figure above shows the alarms to be monitored. If there are alarms included in the planned route, check
alarms leg by leg, or check alarms by using category of alarm.

11-10
 11. Chart Alarms

11.5.1 Finding chart alarms leg by leg

After you have done chart alarm calculation, the system is able to show you legs on the route where danger areas are
located. All the alarms for each leg where alarms occur are shown in the Alarms list. The list of alarms is based on
selections made in the Chart alarm parameters sub menu. To find chart alarms by route leg, do the following:

1. In the Check page of the Plan Route dialog box, the Alarms by leg field has a selection box where you may
choose desired leg number.

2. Choose the Alarm from the Alarms by leg field and then click Locate leg button. The system will display
chosen leg on the electronic chart area as shown below.

11-11
11. Chart Alarms

11.5.2 Finding chart alarms by category

After you have done chart alarm calculation, the system is able to show you legs on the route where the chart alarms
are located. The system can show alarms by their category. To find chart alarms for a route by alarm category, do
the following:

1. In the Check page of the Plan Route dialog box, the Legs by alarm field has a selection box where you may
choose desired leg number.

Caution Area

11

2. Choose the leg number from the Leg field and then click Locate leg button. The system will display chosen leg
on electronic chart area as shown below.

11-12
 11. Chart Alarms

11.6 Route Monitoring

Route monitoring can be divided into two categories: own ship estimated position and monitored route.
North Up TM

(MAN)

(POS)

(POS)

(POS)

The figure above shows how the system highlights chart alarms inside channel limits of a monitored route and inside
predicted movement area of own ship.

Note: The system has a route monitor which facilitates

safe use of routes. You can check your route plan for
safe water and you can attach a user chart and pilot data
which you intend to use together with a route plan. To
show the route monitor, choose Route-Monitor from the
status bar and then push the left mouse button to show
the Monitor Route dialog box.

If the text “Checked conditions differ” appears at the

bottom of the Monitor Route dialog box, use the Alarms
page in this dialog box to verify difference between
actual and planned situation.

11-13
11. Chart Alarms

11.7 Chart Alarm Using ARCS Charts

In case of ARCS charts, the user can define danger areas by using a user chart. The system can use user chart
symbols, lines and areas and calculate chart alarm from this material. For further details, see Chapter 15 “User Chart
Control”.

This figure shows chart alarm used with an ARCS chart. The chart alarm calculation is done with route and
predicted movement area of own ship.

To get chart alarm with a user chart, when you start planning of next voyage, do the following:

1. Create a new user chart or choose an existing one in which has been defined symbols have been defined, lines
and/or areas for chart alarms. See Chapter 15 for how to create a user chart.

2. Check that “Chart Alarm Warning Area” is set for display. See paragraph 11.2.3 “Highlighting chart alarms”
for the procedure.

3. Choose user chart danger area indication or alarm position. See paragraph 11.2.2 “Choosing objects used in
chart alarms” for the procedure.

4. In the route planning mode, define a new route or choose an existing one. Make chart alarm for the route if
there are indications of danger areas along the route. Modify your route if necessary. See paragraph 11.5 “Route
Planning“.

5. Choose route as monitored route, by using Exchange with Monitored in the Route menu.

6. Set watch sector for your own ship. See paragraph 11.4 “Activating Own ship Check” for the procedure.

The system is ready for chart alarms based on user chart for monitored route, planned route and own ship.

11-14
12. Navigation Tools

12.1 Display Mode and Chart Orientation

There are two display modes to present own ship’s movement on the electronic chart. They are true motion, TM,
and relative motion, RM. In the true motion mode, the ECDIS shows own ship's position and other movable data
such as radar targets moving on the earth-fixed chart background. In the relative motion mode, the ECDIS shows the
chart information and radar targets moving relative to own ship position fixed on the screen.

The display mode currently in use is shown at the top left corner on the screen.

North Up TM

The list below shows the display mode and chart orientation combinations available.

True Motion:

• True Motion North Up

• True Motion Course Up

In the true motion display mode, the orientation of the chart is automatically reset when it reaches the TM reset
boundary, or when you use the TM Reset function, accessed from the mouse functions area or the CU/TM R key on
the keyboard-equipped unit.

Relative Motion:

• Relative Motion North Up

• Relative Motion Course Up

• Relative Motion Route Up

In the relative motion display mode, the orientation of the chart is automatically reset when it reaches the TM reset
boundary, or when you use the TM Reset function, accessed from the mouse functions area or the CU/TM R key on
the keyboard-equipped unit.

Note: When using Route-up RM, the chart is redrawn whenever the chart source is changed.

12.1.1 Choosing desired display mode and chart orientation

Place the cursor on the orientation indication at the top left corner on the screen, spin the thumbwheel to choose
orientation desired and then push the thumbwheel.

12-1
12. Navigation Tools

12.2 Navigation Marks

Navigation marks consist of Reference Point, EBL, VRM, Parallel Index and Range Rings. Two sets of these marks
are provided on the Nav. Marks dialog box, so that you can arrange each set according to a particular navigation
operation. To display the Nav. Marks dialog box, spin the thumbwheel to display Show Value/Info/Nav Marks in
the mouse functions area and then push the right mouse button.

Note: If you are using the Control Unit RCU-018, the EBLs and VRMs can also be turned on or off from the
keyboard.
Set 1 page
Centered reference point:

Use this to set center for own ship.

Ref. Pt:

Turn on/off the reference point on the electronic chart.

VRM:

Turn on/off the VRM (Variable Range Marker), which is displayed around the
reference point.

EBL:

Turn on/off EBL (Electronic Bearing Line), which extends from the reference point.

Parallel index:

Turn on/off the parallel index lines. The distance between the parallel index lines is
controlled by adjusting the VRM.

Rings:

Turn on/off the range rings, which circumscribes the reference point. The ring
interval depends on scale of displayed chart.

Info:

Turn on/off numerical information about VRM, EBL and reference point.

Set 2 page
This page contains the same items as does Page 1. Set it according to your needs.

12-2
 12.Navigation Tools

12.2.1 Shifting the EBL

With control unit RCU-018

There are two EBLs, No. 1 and No. 2. Each EBL is a straight dashed line extending out from the own ship position
up to the edge of the screen. The long dashed line is the No. 1 EBL and the short dashed one is the No. 2 EBL. Press
the EBL ON key to display either of the EBLs. Successive presses of the EBL ON key toggle the active EBL
between No. 1 and No. 2. To adjust an EBL, use the EBL rotary encoder, above the EBL OFF and EBL ON keys.
The EBLs can be turned on or off from the Nav Marks dialog box by checking or unchecking EBL on the Set 1 or
Set 2 page.
Each EBL carries a range marker, or a short line crossing the EBL at right angles and its distance from the EBL
origin is indicated at the VRM readout whether or not the corresponding VRM is displayed. The range marker
changes its position along the EBL with the rotation of the VRM rotary encoder. The corresponding VRM must be
turned off to use a range marker.

With control unit RCU-015

You have two methods available to adjust the EBL. You can directly enter a numeric value for the EBL on the Nav.
Marks dialog box, or you can place the cursor on an EBL, and then press and hold down the left mouse button while
rotating the trackball. If you locate the cursor over the intersection of a VRM and an EBL, you can adjust them
together, using the left mouse button and trackball. (Note that this can also be done from the keyboard-equipped
control unit.) The EBLs can be turned on or off from the Nav Marks dialog box by checking or unchecking “EBL”
on the Set 1 or Set 2 page.

12.2.2 Shifting the VRM

With control unit RCU-018

There are two VRMs, No. 1 and No. 2, which appear as dashed rings so that you can discriminate them from the
fixed range rings. The two VRMs can be distinguished from each other by different lengths of their dashes. Press the
VRM ON key to display either of the VRMs. Successive presses of the VRM ON key toggle the active VRM
between No. 1 and No. 2. To adjust a VRM, use the VRM rotary encoder, above the VRM OFF and VRM ON
keys.

With control unit RCU-015

You have two methods available to adjust the VRM. You can directly enter a numeric value for the VRM on the
Nav. Marks dialog box, or you can locate cursor over the VRM, and then press and hold down the left mouse button
while rotating the trackball. If you locate the cursor over the intersection of a VRM and an EBL, you can adjust
them together, using the left mouse button and trackball. (Note that this can also be done from the
keyboard-equipped control unit.) The VRMs can be turned on or off from the Nav Marks dialog box by checking or
unchecking “VRM” on the Set 1 or Set 2 page.

12.2.3 Adjusting the parallel index lines

Parallel index lines are useful for keeping a constant distance between own ship and a coastline or a partner ship
when navigating. You may control their orientation with the No. 1 EBL and line interval with the No. 1 VRM.

12-3
12. Navigation Tools

12.2.4 Shifting the reference point

The reference point, shown on the display with a cross mark (if turned on in the Nav Marks dialog box), is a
specified location to which measurements of range and bearing are referred. To choose the location for the reference
point, open the Nav. Marks dialog box, check Ref. Pt, place the cursor at the location desired and then push the right
mouse button.
North Up TM

Centered reference point with Variable Range Marker (VRM) and Electronic Bearing Line (EBL)
North Up TM

Reference point off centered with Variable Range Marker (VRM) and Electronic Bearing Line (EBL)

12-4
 12.Navigation Tools

North Up TM

Centered reference point with range ring

12-5
12. Navigation Tools

This page intentionally left blank.

12-6
13. Route Planning

13.1 Introduction
A route plan defines the navigation plan from starting point to the final destination. The plan includes:

• Route name

• Name, latitude and longitude of each waypoint

• Radius of turn circle at each waypoint

• Safe channel limits

• Chart alarm calculation based on channel limits against chart database and user chart danger

• Deadband width

• Minimum and maximum speed for each leg

• The navigation method (rhumb line, great circle)

• Fuel saving

• ETD for the first waypoint

• ETA for the last waypoint

• Ship and environmental condition affecting the ship speed calculation

• Name of the user chart to use during route monitoring together with this planned route

• Name of the pilot data to use during route monitoring together with this planned route

Using the above-mentioned data, the system calculates speed, course and length for each leg, ETAs for each
waypoint, fuel consumption and WOP for the Trackpilot. It also calculates safe water areas based on user-defined
channel limits. The calculated data is displayed in tabular form, which can be printed as a documented route plan
and also stored in a file for later use. The route files thus formed contain the trackpilot commands for each waypoint.

Main functions of route planning are:

• Define waypoints

• Define turnings for each waypoint

• Define channel limits for each leg (a leg is the line connected between two waypoints). The channel limits are
used to detect chart alarms when you are planning or monitoring your route.

• Define the speed for each leg

• Calculation for ETD and ETA

• Calculation for most economical sailing

13-1
13. Route Planning

13.2 Main Menu for Route Planning

The main parameters for the route planning are:

• Latitude and longitude of the waypoint

• Channel limits to the waypoint

• Turning radius of the waypoint

• Maximum and minimum speed limits for a leg

There are two phases for a route: Route Plan and Route Monitor. Route plan is used for planning the route and route
monitor is used to control a route for monitoring.

To complete route planning, do the following

1. Create a new route or choose an existing one. See paragraph 13.4 “Creating a New Route”.

2. Modify your route if necessary. See paragraph 13.5 “Modifying an Existing Route”.

3. Make chart alarm (safe water) calculation. See paragraph 13.4.3 “Using the check page”.

4. Optimize your route. See paragraph 13.6 “Route Optimization”.

Description of Plan Route menu

1. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar, and the following dialog box appears:

2. Click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box. The Plan Route dialog box appears together with the
Plan Route menu, shown below.

3. The Plan Route menu is where you select, unselect or create a route. If it is not shown, that is, a route has been
selected, you can show it by placing the cursor on the triangle in the Plan Route dialog box.

Select:

Choose an existing route and edit it for use. Choose Select from the menu and
push the thumbwheel, and a list box appears. Spin the thumbwheel to choose
appropriate route from the list box, push the thumbwheel to confirm and then
click the OK button.

Unselect:

Deselect a route here. The operation is similar to how you select a route.

Create:

Create a new route. An input box appears; enter name for new route, using the
thumbwheel. The route name may have up to 30 alphanumeric characters. See
also paragraph 13.4.

Exchange with Monitored:

This function exchanges planned and monitored routes. Planned route is used both as alternative route and as an
editable route.

13-2
 13. Route Planning

Copy from Monitored:

Copy monitored route to plan route.

Backup and Restore:

You can make a backup of a route to a floppy disk or restore a route from a floppy disk. See Chapter 17.

Report:

Generate report of planned route.

Full WP Report:

Generate detailed report of planned route.

Passage Plan Report:

Generate a combined report from active planned route and active pilot data.

Note: To display a planned route, make sure that desired options of the planned route (Center line, Channel borders,
WP marks, Leg marks, etc.) are chosen to either Std or Other on the Route page in the Chart Display dialog box. For
the procedure, see below.

Spin the thumbwheel to display Chart Display/Info/Standard

Display in the mouse functions area and then click the left mouse
button to open the Chart Display dialog box. Click the arrow tabs
or right mouse button (or NEXT key on the keyboard-equipped
control unit) to choose the Route page.

• If all Planned route options are set to Std or Other, the text
“Displayed” is shown in the Plan Route dialog box.

• If any Planned route option is set to Off, the text “Partly

Displayed” is shown in the Plan Route dialog box.

• If all Planned route options are set to Off, the text “Not
Displayed” is shown in the Plan Route dialog box.

13.3 Choosing Datum

Selection of datum is very important, especially if you manually enter latitude-longitude positions or if you use a
digitizer. If you use the cursor to add and to modify waypoint locations, then you could use any datum, although it is
recommended to use native datum of the chart. For more information to choose datum, see paragraph 15.3
“Choosing Datum”.

13-3
 13. Route Planning

13.4 Creating a New Route

3.
1.

4.

2.
5.

6.

To make a complete route for a voyage, do the following:

1. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar, and then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box
with Route Plan menu (the menu appears if no plan route has been chosen). If the menu does not appear, click
the Plan button again to open the Route Plan menu. Choose Create from the menu and push the thumbwheel.

2. Enter a name (max. 30 alphanumeric characters) for the route by spinning the thumbwheel to choose character
desired and confirming desired character by pushing the thumbwheel. When name is ready, click the OK
button.

3. Check Enable changes in the Plan Route dialog box. Choose position of a waypoint by placing the cursor on the
location desired on the electronic chart display and then pushing the left mouse button. After entering a
waypoint, edit Name, Steering mode, Radius, Channel limit and Speed (Min, Max) as appropriate in the Plan
Route dialog box. (Place the cursor on an item, spin the thumbwheel to change value and then push the
thumbwheel.) Do this for all waypoints of your route.

4. Use the Alarms page to define safety contour and other specified conditions for checking the route. Choose item
from a list and then click Indication (to get a visual indication), Alarm (to get the audible alarm) or Ignore (to
remove check item) button as appropriate.

5. Use the Check page to detect areas where depth is less than the safety contour or where specified conditions
exist. The ECDIS can examine chart database against planned route to make a list of alarms where a route
crosses a safety contour or specified areas used in chart alarms. To create a list of alarms, click the Start button.

6. Use the Params page to enter Estimated Time of Departure (ETD) and Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), if you
are using Time table optimizing. Choose desired optimizing mode from the Optimize window.

To print a waypoint report, open the Plan Route dialog box, place the cursor on the triangle to show the Plan Route
menu, choose Report or Full Report from the menu and then push the thumbwheel. Click the Print Text button. (If
you want to change the font size, place the cursor on the triangle, choose font size and then push the thumbwheel,
before clicking the Print Text button.)

13-4
 13. Route Planning

13.4.1 Processing waypoints

Following fields and buttons can be found in the WP page.

Enable changes: Check to edit waypoints.

Note: Routes can only be modified in the North-up or Course-up mode.

WP: Each waypoint has a number.

NAME: You can name each waypoint.

Lat: WP's latitude co-ordinate is displayed in chosen datum.

Lon: WP's longitude co-ordinate is displayed in chosen datum.

Leg/° Bearing of leg

Leg/Nm: Leg's length (nm)

Str mode: Define steering mode, rhumb line or great circle, for each leg.

Radius/Nm: Define turning radius for each waypoint.

Chl limit/m : Define channel limit for each leg.

Spd min: Define minimum speed of ship used with a leg.

Spd max: Define maximum speed of ship used with a leg.

Insert before: Insert a new waypoint before the current waypoint.

Next WP: Add a new waypoint after current waypoint. You can define direction and distance for
next waypoint.

Delete: Delete current waypoint.

Import: Import new waypoints from already existing routes into your current route.

Reverse: Reverse sailing order of the entire route.

All Visible: Center line, channel borders, WP marks and leg marks are made visible on top of the
electronic chart.

13-5
13. Route Planning

13.4.2 Alarms page

The Alarms page lets you define conditions along a route for which you want to be alerted, by visual or audible
indication. (You cannot get both visual and audible indications for a condition.) You can choose safety contour and
chart alarms used to check the safety of the route. This allows you to check safety with conditions different from
those chosen for system use. This is useful when making a route for different loading or sailing conditions.

Enable changes: Check here in order to enable editing.

Note: A route may only be modified when using the north-up or course-up mode.

Ignore during monitoring Chart objects in this list box are not used for chart alarm calculation.

Indication during monitoring Chart objects in this list box are used for chart alarm calculation. Only the visual
alarm is released.

Alarm during monitoring Chart objects in this list box are used for chart alarm calculation. Both visual and
audible alarms of chosen chart objects are generated by the system.

Safety contour Deep contour chosen for chart alarm calculation

Copy from used settings Copy system settings to here.

13.4.3 Using the check page

The Check page allows you to make safe water calculation for your route. You also store the names of the user chart
and pilot data to use during route monitoring together with planned route on this page. This storage happens when
you activate the safe water calculation by pushing the Start button. The stored names are the names of the planned
user chart and planned pilot data.

Note 1: In order to display charts with correct updated situation, always use current date during your voyage. If your
voyage lasts more than one week, set current date at least once per week during your voyage.

Note 2: In order to display charts with correct updated situation during route planning, always use planned date of
each waypoint to check your plan.

13-6
 13. Route Planning

13.4.4 Using the parameters page

The Parameters page allows you to set departure time and arrival time for your route. Also optimisation type is
chosen in this page.

Enable changes: Check in order to enable editing.

Note: A route may only be modified when using the north-up or course-up
mode.

Description: Enter note concerning the route.

ETD/UTC: Planned estimated time of departure from a specified waypoint. (0 is

automatically the first waypoint)

ETA/UTC: First part is planned estimated time of arrival to last waypoint. (0 is

automatically the last waypoint). ETA can be calculated between two specified
waypoints.
Second part is calculated ETA which may differ from planned ETA if it is
impossible for them to agree with chosen optimization method. Also total
length of the route is displayed.

Speed limit: Set speed limit for a route.

Income: Budget for this voyage. ( Income * 1000$)

Optimize: Optimize types are max. speed, timetable, max profit and min. cost.
(Description is provided in paragraph 13.6.1.)

Optimizing your route

After all waypoints are inserted and you have made safe water calculation, you can optimize your route. If not
chosen, then optimisation will be done automatically with max. speed. If you want do optimization with specific
strategy, see paragraph 13.6.1 “Available route optimization strategies“.

13.4.5 Using the prepare page

The Prepare page allows you to prepare for exchange of planned route with monitored route. Use this page if you
are going to use the exchange function to choose planned route as monitored route. If you do not use this page to
define To WP and Final WP for steering in the planning mode, ECDIS will choose the most suitable To WP based
on own ship position and Final WP based on waypoint selected on the Parameters page.

13-7
13. Route Planning

13.5 Modifying an Existing Route

North Up TM

Modifying an existing route

13.5.1 Parameters
Main parameters for the route planning are:

• Latitude and longitude of the waypoint

• Channel limits to the waypoint

• Turning radius of the waypoint

• Maximum and minimum speed limits for a leg

13.5.2 Changing waypoint position

To change position of a waypoint you have following alternatives:

• Enter latitude and longitude on the WP page in the Plan Route dialog box.

• Enter distance and direction for next waypoint.

• Drag and drop waypoint using the left mouse button.

13-8
 13. Route Planning

Entering latitude and longitude in position field

1. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar, click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box and then
click the WP tab.

2. Check Enable changes, and then choose desired WP. Place the cursor in the Lat or Lon field as appropriate, spin
the thumbwheel to set co-ordinates and then push the thumbwheel to confirm.

Entering distance and direction for next waypoint

Position of WP can be defined using distance and direction between two waypoints.

1. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar, click Plan to open the Plan Route dialog box and then click the WP
tab.

2. Check Enable changes, and then highlight number of WP by cursor and then push the left mouse button.

3. Click the Next WP button, and the following dialog box appears.

4. Enter Direction and Distance in respective box in the Next WP field and then click the OK button.

13-9
13. Route Planning

Dragging and dropping waypoint to new position

1. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar, click Plan to open the Plan Route dialog box and then click the WP
tab.

2. Check Enable changes, and then place the cursor on the waypoint you want to process.

3. Press and hold down the left mouse button while rolling the trackball to move the cursor to a desired position.
Keep the button pressed down while you move the cursor and release it when the cursor is at desired position.
North Up TM

Drag and drop waypoint to new position (in this case waypoint number 9 is taken to a new position)

13.5.3 Changing other waypoint data

To change other data of a waypoint, such as name, steering mode, turning radius, min/max speed, do the following:

1. Place the cursor on a desired field and spin the thumbwheel to change data.

2. Push the thumbwheel to confirm changes.

13-10
 13. Route Planning

13.5.4 Adding a new waypoint at the end of a route

There are two ways by which you can add a new waypoint at the end of a route:

• Use the cursor and left mouse button to define position of a waypoint.

• Use the Next WP button in the WP page.

To add a new waypoint by using the left mouse button, do the following:

1. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar and then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box.
Click the WP tab to open the WP page. Check Enable changes.

2. Place the cursor in the electronic chart area on the location desired for a waypoint and then push the left mouse
button. The waypoint is added at the end of route.

3. Modify data of added waypoint.

To add a new waypoint by the Next WP button, do the following:

1. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar and then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box.
Click the WP tab to open the WP page. Check Enable changes.

2. Choose last waypoint.

3. Click the Next WP button in the Waypoints page. Enter direction and distance for waypoint and then click the
OK button.

13.5.5 Inserting a waypoint

If you want to insert a waypoint between two waypoints, use the Insert before button, on the WP page. This inserts
a waypoint next to current waypoint. For example, you want insert a new waypoint between waypoints 6 and 7.
Choose WP 7 and then click the Insert before button. The new waypoint will be inserted between WP 6 and WP 7.
WP is highlighted on WP list.

13-11
13. Route Planning

13.5.6 Deleting a waypoint

To delete a waypoint, do the following:

1. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar and then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box.
Click the WP tab to open the WP page. Check Enable changes.

2. Highlight WP number on WP list which you wish to delete.

3. Click the Delete button.

13.5.7 Importing waypoint from other routes

You are able to choose waypoints from other routes to import them to current route. To import waypoints do the
following:

1. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar and then click Plan to open the Plan Route dialog box. Click the WP
tab to open the WP page. Check Enable changes.

2. Click the Import button. The following dialog box appears.

3. In the Copy from window, place the cursor in the Route box, spin the thumbwheel to choose the route from
which to copy waypoints and then push the thumbwheel.

4. Enter first waypoint to copy in “First wp to copy”. Spin the thumbwheel to choose WP number and then push
the thumbwheel.

5. Enter number of waypoints to copy in “Number of wp's”. Spin the thumbwheel to choose desired number and
then push the thumbwheel.

6. Enter where to import waypoints. To enter them after a WP in a route, enter waypoint number in the “Copy
after wp” box. If you want to enter them before a WP in the route where WPs will be imported, enter waypoint
number in the “Copy before wp” box.
Spin the thumbwheel to choose desired number and then push the thumbwheel.

7. Choose copying order, Direct or Reverse. “Direct” copies the waypoints in their original order; “Reverse”
copies them in reverse order. Spin the thumbwheel to choose desired option and then push the thumbwheel.

8. Click the Copy button.

9. When finished, click X at top right corner of the dialog box to close the dialog box.

13-12
 13. Route Planning

13.5.8 Importing waypoint from external device (GP-80 or GP-90)

You are able to import waypoints from other External Device, like FURUNO GP-80 or GP-90 GPS Navigator to
current route. To import waypoints do the following:

1. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar and then click Plan to open the Plan Route dialog box. Click the WP
tab to open the WP page. Check Enable changes.

2. Click the Import button. The following dialog box appears.

Enter where to import waypoints. To enter them after a WP in a route, enter waypoint number in the “Copy
after wp” box (if applicable). If you want to enter them before a WP in the route where WPs will be imported
enter waypoint number in the “Copy before wp” box.
Spin the thumbwheel to choose desired number and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Press the Copy from ext. device button.

When text “Import from ext. device: Waiting messages” appears, you can start importing WPs from a GPS
Navigator.

When WPs are imported, you can monitor progress of it as it is shown picture above.

When it is ready you will have “Transfer ready” message as shown picture above.

4. Click the Done button.

5. When finished, click X at top right corner of the dialog box to close the dialog box.

13-13
13. Route Planning

13.5.9 Reversing sailing order of a route

You may reverse the order of waypoints in a plan route. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar and then click the
Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box. Click the WP tab to open the WP page. Check Enable changes. Click
the Reverse button.

13.5.10 Geometry check of route

When you added a new waypoint, modify a waypoint or change other waypoint data, the message “Impossible turn
at WPXX” (XX=waypoint number) may appear (in red). It means that the geometry of route makes it impossible for
the ship to sail along a certain leg. Typically it is enough if you do the following, on the WP page in the Plan Route
dialog box.

1. Decrease the radius of turn of the waypoint or one of its neighbors.

2. Change lat/lon position of the waypoint or its neighbors.

13.6 Route Optimization

13.6.1 Available route optimization strategies
After all waypoints are inserted, the route is optimized from the Parameters page in the Plan Route dialog box.
Optimization calculates all parameters for route steering (course and distance between two waypoints, maneuvering
start point, WOP, etc.). There are four methods for optimization:

Max Speed:

This calculation uses the maximum speed defined in the ship parameters and multiplies by all reduction factors
(weather, ice, fouling, etc.) together with speed limits given for each waypoint to generate ETA. ETA may be
entered, however it is calculated with user-entered ETD and Speed limit. ETA and ETD are shown on the Monitor
display (see the figure on page 14-3).

Time Table:

Calculates the speed required in order to arrive at destination at required ETA. Maximum speed is never exceeded.
The user enters ETD and ETA to calculate speed to use. * If, the user-entered ETA is earlier than that found with the
Max. Speed calculation, the Max. speed -calculated ETA will be indicated below the Time Table ETA calculation
figure.. The calculated speed is shown on the Monitor display as “Suggested **.*Kt”.

Max. Profit:

Based on ETD, this calculation takes in account the fuel cost and the fixed cost of the ship and calculates the most
profitable speed (highest profit per time unit). You need to set Optimization parameters beforehand to use this
feature. For further details, see paragraph 25.1.5.

Min. Cost:

Based on ETD, this calculation takes in account the fuel cost and the fixed cost of the ship and calculates the speed
which gives the minimum total cost. You need to set Optimization parameters beforehand to use this feature. For
further details, see paragraph 25.1.5.

13-14
 13. Route Planning

13.6.2 Optimizing a route

You can define Estimated Time of Departure (ETD), desired number of waypoints and Estimated Time of Arrival
(ETA) on the Parameters page in the Plan Route dialog box to optimize your route.

1. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar and then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box.
Click the Parameters tab to open the Parameters page. Check Enable changes.

2. Choose desired optimization strategy from the Optimize field. Spin the thumbwheel to choose desired strategy
and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Enter speed limit, ETC/UTC, ETA/UTC (Max. speed not required) in respective boxes.

In case of optimization by “max. speed”

With entered EDT as reference, ETA is calculated with entered speed limit. ETA may be entered in ETA/UTC box,
however ETA is shown below it.
The monitor display shows ETD, speed limit and calculated ETA.

13.6.3 Planning a speed profile

A speed profile is defined by general max. speed and optimization types. These values are given while planning a
route. You can define speed limit and optimize type in the Parameters page of the Plan Route dialog box and in the
WP page of the Plan Route dialog box you can give min. and max. speed for each leg. The table and illustration
below demonstrate how different optimize types and speed limits influence speed.

max speed (general) 17

wp min speed cost profit timetable Max speed max speed
1 4 4.8 10.0 10.0 10 10
2 4 4.8 12.9 15.0 15 15
3 4 4.8 12.9 16.2 17 20
4 4 4.8 12.9 16.2 17 20
4 4 4.8 12.9 16.2 17 20
5 6 6.0 12.9 15.0 15 15
6 6 6.0 12.9 16.2 17 20
7 4 4.8 12.9 16.2 17 20
8 4 4.8 12.9 16.2 17 20
9 6 6.0 12.9 16.2 17 17
10 4 4.8 8.0 8.0 8 8

An Example of speed profile

20 max speed
max_speed
15
Speed [Kn]

timetable
10
profit
5 cost
0 min speed
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Waypoint

13-15
13. Route Planning

13.7 WP Table Report

This report is generated when you choose Report from the Plan Route menu. To display the report viewer, choose
Route-Plan from the status bar, place the cursor on the triangle in the Plan Route dialog box, choose Report and then
push the thumbwheel. To close the report viewer, click X in the right corner of the report viewer. The report may be
printed by clicking the Print Text button.

WP report consists information of:

- Position of waypoints

- Planned speeds - Estimated times of arrival (ETA)

- Planned courses - Planned fuel consumption

- Distances between waypoints. Distance is not directly -Total distance of route. Distance is not directly
calculated from LAT and LON values of WP's location, calculated from LAT and LON values of WP's location,
but the distance is shorter distance compensated for but the distance is shorter distance compensated for
planned radius for each waypoint. planned radius for each waypoint.

Changing font used in report

If you want to change the size of the font for the report:

1. Place the cursor on the triangle in the report window.

2. Choose desired option from the list and then push the thumbwheel.

13-16
 13. Route Planning

13.8 Full WP Report

The Full WP Report provides detailed information on each waypoint in a plan route. To display the report viewer,
Place the cursor on the triangle in the Plan Route dialog box, choose Full WP Report from the menu and then push
the thumbwheel. The report may be printed by clicking the Print Text button.

13-17
13. Route Planning

13.9 Passage Plan Report

Passage Plan report generates WP report together with pilot data report. The system automatically attaches pilot data
from the planning mode on the route plan when you choose the Passage Plan report. To display the report viewer,
choose Route-Plan from the status bar, place the cursor on the triangle in the Plan Route dialog box, choose Passage
Plan Report from the menu and then push the thumbwheel. To close the report, click X in the right corner of the
report viewer. The report may be printed by clicking the Print Text button.

The example below shows that a passage plan has been generated using the route plan “SOUTHAMPTON
ROTTERDAM” and pilot data generated for “SOUTHAMPTOROTTERDAM”.

An example of WP report

An example of pilot data report

An example of passage plan report. Pilot data text notes are placed between waypoints based on their position (in
which leg defined Pilot data will be activated)

13-18
14. Route Monitoring

14.1 Introduction
Route monitor is a means for permanent monitoring of the ship’s behavior relative to the monitored route. The
information area displays the data on the ship’s position relative to the monitored route. The monitored route
consists of the following information, displayed in the electronic chart area:

• The route is displayed with red dots.

• The limits of channels of each leg are displayed with solid red lines. These limits are used to detect chart alarms
when you are monitoring the route. For further details, see paragraph 11.2 Chart Alarms”.

• Each leg has information about planned speed, shown inside a rectangle.

• Each leg has information about planned course to steer.

Note: In order to display charts with correctly updated situation, always use current date as Approve Until and
Display Until during your voyage. If your voyage lasts more than one week, set current date at least once per week
during your voyage. For more information, see paragraph 8.12 “Chart Viewing Dates and Seasonal Features of the
Vector Chart”.

14.2 Choosing Route to Monitor

North Up TM

To choose the route to monitor, place the cursor on Route in the status bar, put the cursor in the Monitor combo box,
spin the thumbwheel to choose route and then push the thumbwheel.

14-1
14. Route Monitoring

Note: When you choose a route for monitoring, the message shown below may appear when the geometry of the
route makes it impossible to sail the ship. Choose the Plan Route dialog box and make necessary modifications.

14.3 Choosing TO Waypoint

When the connected ARPA radar is
FURUNO or ARPA radar which
communicates using IEC 61162-1
standard the monitor dialog box
looks like the figure at right. Note
that there is no control for visibility
of monitored route in this dialog
box.

To display this dialog box, choose

Route from the status bar, and then
click the Monitor button.

When you have chosen a route to monitor, the system chooses a next waypoint automatically. Check that the To
waypoint is the desired one. The ECDIS will automatically advance to a next waypoint when you pass the To
waypoint.

The ECDIS automatically sets the last waypoint of your monitored route as the final waypoint.

To choose To waypoint, do the following:

1. Open the Monitor Route dialog box, choose Route from the status bar, and then click the Monitor button.

2. Place the cursor in the To WP box, and then spin the thumbwheel to choose desired WP.

3. Push the thumbwheel to confirm your selection.

14-2
 14. Route Monitoring

14.4 Choosing Final Waypoint

Normally you use the last waypoint in a monitored route as the final waypoint, and the ECDIS automatically does
this when you choose the route to monitor. However, sometimes you may prefer to use some other waypoint as the
final waypoint of a monitored route.

To choose a waypoint as final waypoint, do the following:

1. Open the Monitor Route dialog box; choose Route from the status bar, and then click the Monitor button.

2. Place the cursor in the Final WP box, spin the thumbwheel to choose a waypoint.

3. Push the thumbwheel to confirm your selection.

14.5 Viewing Waypoint Information

You can view waypoint information for the monitored
route by clicking the Waypoints tab in the Monitor
Route dialog box. This information is printed from route
planning information made for this voyage.

“TO WP” and “NEXT WP” are indicated on this list.

Speed limit
setting

ETD

ETA

14-3
14. Route Monitoring

14.6 Displaying a Route on the Electronic Chart

Screen
To display a monitored route, make sure that desired options of the monitored route (center line, channel borders,
WP marks, leg marks and wheel over line) are chosen on the Route page of the Chart Display dialog box.

To show this display, spin the thumbwheel to show Chart Display/Info/Standard

Display in the mouse functions area, push the left mouse button, and then click
an arrow tab to display the Route menu.

Setting “WP” to Std or Oth enables display of a waypoint's number in a route.

“Leg marks” enables display of planned speed and planned course to steer in a
route.

“Wheel over line” enables display of a line which denotes turn start line for a
waypoint. This line appears when “WP approach” is coming and disappears
when turning has started.

14-4
 14. Route Monitoring

14.7 Route Assistant

The system has a built-in route assistant, which facilitates safe use of routes. During route planning, you can check
your route plan for safe water and you can attach a user chart and pilot data which you intend to use together with a
route plan.

The assistant reminds you if

• you are using a route which you have not checked following recent change to your route plan.

• you use a combination of a route plan, user chart and pilot data which you did not plan to be used together.

If the conditions defined during route plan do not meet the conditions during route monitoring, Mon. Route appears
in red on the status bar.

The following
indications may appear
on the Monitoring page:

“This route is
unchecked”.
Reminds you that you
did not check the route
plan after the route was
modified. Remedy:
check route plan for the
route.

“Checked conditions
differ” means that
current conditions differ
from set conditions of
route plan. Remedy:
Use Alarms and
Selections pages to set
them as they were when
route was planned.

14-5
14. Route Monitoring

The Alarms page may

show the following
message:

“* = Current selection
differ” indicates which
conditions are currently
set differently as
planned.

The Selection page may

show the following
messages:

“Current selection is
different” This means
the name of user chart
and/or pilot data in the
monitoring mode is not
the same as route
planning check.
Remedy: Click the Use
button to choose user
chart and/or pilot data in
the monitoring mode.

“This has been

changed after Route
Planning Check” This
means that user chart
and/or pilot data was
modified after the latest
route planning check.
Remedy: Check route
planning for the route
with attached user chart
and/or pilot data.

14-6
 14. Route Monitoring

14.8 Monitoring a Route

You can monitor the route from the two Plan Speed windows in the information area.

Upper window:

• Plan Speed: Planned speed to approach “To WP”.

• Plan: Planned course between previous WP and “To WP”. Note that if the
gyro value is compensated and Gyro error correction and Gyro error
compensation have been enabled in Ship and Route parameters in the Initial
Settings menu, then the text “(corr)” appears (in red) in the Plan field.

• Route: Calculated set course to follow the monitored route, including off
track, drift and gyro error compensation.

• Ch limit: Planned width of channel to approach “To WP”.

Below is an example with • Off track: Perpendicular distance of the ship from the track.
additional text information
Additional textual information is available if any of following steering modes
are in use:

• Waypoint mode: “Goto WP”, “Goto WP Great circle”, “Ass. Turn

enabled” and “Assisted turn”

• Go Track mode: “Goto Track”, “Track Great circle” and “Track Turn”

Permanent alarms are available regardless of the steering mode used and these
are as follows:

• “Outside channel” is indicated by showing “Off track” in orange and its

value in red.

• “Out of gate” is shown in orange. Out of gate indicates that, if the ship
continues using the current course, then the ship will be outside of the
channel at wheel over point.

Lower window:

• To WP: The waypoint which the ship is approaching.

• Dist WOP: Distance to the point where rudder order for course change at
“To WP” will be given.

• Time: Time remaining until WOP (dd:hh:mm:ss).

• Next WP: The WP following the “To WP”.

• Next: Planned course to steer after “To WP”. Note that if the gyro value is
compensated and Gyro error correction and Gyro error compensation have
been enabled in the Ship and Route parameters in the Initial Settings menu,
then the text “(corr)” appears (in red) in the Plan field.

• Turn rad: Planned turning radius at “To WP”.

• Turn rate: Calculated rate of turn, which is based on current speed and
planned turning radius.

14-7
14. Route Monitoring

14.9 ETA (Estimated Time Of Arrival)

Estimated time of arrival to a waypoint is calculated by the ECDIS. The user can choose waypoint number and
speed profile for calculation in the Monitoring page of the Monitor Route dialog box.

To WP:

Indicates approaching “TO WP”.

ETA WP:

Indicates waypoint number of special ETA waypoint and estimated time and distance to it.

Final WP:

Indicates waypoint number of final waypoint and estimated time and distance to it.

Monitored route is optimized

using “Max Speed”.

Speed profile:

There are three calculation strategies:

• Plan: The system calculates with optimization made in route planning.

• Trial: You can enter speed to test ETAs with different speeds.

• Current: The system calculates ETAs using average speed of last five minutes. Note that if Speed profile is
chosen as Current, own ship average speed (i.e., speed for calculation) the Trial speed box replaces the Average
Speed box.

14-8
 14. Route Monitoring

Trial speed:

Choose Trial from the Speed profile box to enter desired speed for calculation of ETA to waypoint.

Speed profile is changed to

Trial speed. You can enter
Trial speed and system will
calculate ETAs.

Spd profile

14-9
14. Route Monitoring

Time table optimization

displayed in route monitoring.

Plan:

This displays ETA at final WP. This value also appears in the Parameters page of the Plan Route dialog box.

Off Plan:

Indicates time difference between planned ETA and calculated ETA to final WP.

Suggested speed:

The system calculates suggested speed so that ETA to the final WP would be same as planned ETA if type of
optimization was “Time table”.

The table below shows how the system calculates ETAs.

Type of chosen speed profile / Used speed from current point Used speed from the To WP to the
optimization on Route Monitor dialog to the To wp final wp
box
Speed profile: Plan MAX SPEED current average speed planned leg speed
Speed profile: Plan TIMETABLE current average speed planned leg speed
Speed profile: Plan ECO: COST current average speed planned leg speed
Speed profile: Plan ECO: PROFIT current average speed planned leg speed
Speed profile: Trial current trial speed current trial speed
Speed profile: Current current average speed current average speed

14-10
 14. Route Monitoring

14.10 Route Monitoring Alarms

The following alarms are related to route monitoring.

2052 Route: Illegal ETA WP: Appears when the system cannot use the chosen ETA waypoint. The reason might
be corrupted or missing route file.

2053 Route: Illegal To WP: Appears when the system cannot use the chosen “To WP”. The reason might be
corrupted or missing route file.

2054 Route: Illegal final WP: Appears when the system cannot use the chosen final waypoint. The reason might be
corrupted or missing route file.

2060 Route: WP change disabled: Appears when you try to change next or final waypoint while the system is in
automatic route steering. Leave automatic route steering and change the waypoint.

2063 Route: Choose disabled: Appears when the you try to choose a new route for route monitoring while the
system is in automatic route steering. Leave automatic route steering and choose a new route.

2064 Route: Cancel disabled: Appears when you try to cancel current monitored route while the system is in
automatic route steering. Leave automatic route steering and cancel the current route.

2454 Route: End reached: Appears when own ship passes the last waypoint. The system cancels current route
monitoring. Normally this alarm only appears if alarm 2458 is left unacknowledged.

2457 Route: Outside chl limits alarm: Appears if own ship is outside the monitored channel.

The following alarms are related to route monitoring when automatic route steering is not used:

2451 Route: WP approach alarm: Appears when own ship is “x” minutes of the wheel over point of the next
waypoint, “x” being the time specified.

2458 Route: Last WP approach alarm: Appears when own ship arrives “x” minutes from the last waypoint, “x”
being the time specified. Acknowledgement of this alarm cancels current route monitoring.

14-11
14. Route Monitoring

This page intentionally left blank.

14-12
15. User Chart Control

15.1 Introduction
User charts are simple overlay charts which the user makes for his own purposes. They can be displayed on both the
radar display and the electronic chart. These charts are intended for highlighting safety-related items like position of
important navigation marks, safe area for the ship, etc. User charts areas can be used to activate alarms and
indications based on user-defined danger symbols, lines and areas. When route or own ship estimated position is
going to cross a user chart symbol, line or area which is defined as a dangerous one, an alarm or indication is
generated by the system. For further details about chart alarms, see Chapter 11.

A user chart consists of points, lines and letter/number, symbols, etc. Size of user chart is limited to have the max.
number of items below:
• 200 Points
• 2000 Lines
• 1000 Symbols (alphanumerics)
• 50 Areas; an area can have 20 corner points.
The user chart is displayed on the radar display and its position and shape is based on the ship’s actual position.
When own ship is moving in the area covered by the user chart, the elements of the user chart are superimposed on
the radar overlay, with max. 80 nearest elements displayed. The user charts can also be shown on the ECDIS
display. In this way the radar display can be kept as “clean” as possible for radar target detection.

15.1.1 Objects of user charts

Below is a description of the objects used in a user chart.
• Line: You can define four different types of lines. Lines can be used in chart alarm calculation and/or display
on the radar:
• Navigation lines: Displayed on both displays (radar overlay + ECDIS). Navigation lines are reference
lines for coast line.
• Coast line: Displayed on the ECDIS display only. Coastal line is usually a well-defined (by chart
digitizer) multi-segment line showing the coastline. The user is able to create this type of line in case there
is no suitable chart available over desired area in ARCS or S57 format.
• Depth contour: Displayed on the ECDIS display only. Depth line shows the chosen depth levels. The user
is able to create this type of line in case there is no suitable chart available over desired area in ARCS or
S57 format.
• Route line: Displayed on both radar overlay and ECDIS. Route lines are zones for anchoring, traffic
separation lines, etc.
• Area: User can define closed areas, which the system can use to detect safe water areas. If route or estimated
ship position is going to cross the area, the system generates a warning to the user. These areas can be used to
specify safe areas as defined by the master or by the policy of the ship's owner. They are always available
regardless of the type of chart material used.
• Symbols: User chooseable symbols can be displayed on both displays or on the ECDIS display only. Symbols
are used to indicate buoys, light houses, fixed targets, wrecks, etc. Symbols can be used in chart alarm
calculation.
• Tidals: Displayed on the ECDIS display only. Tidals can be used to make own notes about tides at user-defined
points.
• Points: It doesn't itself have any symbol on the radar screen, but it is a very important element of a user chart
For further details, see paragraph 15.2 “What is a User Chart Point and How is it Used?”.

15-1
15. User Chart Control

15.1.2 Modes of user charts

A user chart can be chosen for the monitoring mode, which means that it is displayed on connected ARPA radar
display and it can be used in chart alarm calculation. Another user chart mode modifies the user chart planning
mode. In the planning mode, a user chart is only displayed on the ECDIS display; it is not displayed on the
connected ARPA radar nor is it used in chart alarm calculation. It is possible to have both the monitored and
planned user chart at the same time. Eventually the monitored and planned user charts copy the operation of
monitored and planned routes. Below is an example how to know which user chart is used for monitoring mode and
which one is used in planning mode.
North Up TM

The UserChart field in the status bar always shows the name of the user chart chosen for the monitoring mode. If the
user chart displayed on the ECDIS is the monitored user chart, then the text “UserChart” is black (or white
depending on color scheme). If the user chart displayed on the ECDIS is the planned user chart, then the text
“UserChart” is in red. The name of the planned user chart is only available in the planning mode dialog box.

15-2
 15. User Chart Control

Opening the user chart dialog box and menu

1. Place the cursor on UserChart on the status bar. Click either Plan or Monitor button to open corresponding
dialog box. If no User Chart has been chosen, one of the menus shown below appears, along with appropriate
dialog box.

2. Use the menu to choose user chart.

If you want to make further selection from a menu and only the dialog box is shown, you can show the menu on the
display by clicking the Plan or Monitor button again, or place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box.

Activate Monitor(or Plan) mode:

The user can switch user chart mode between plan and monitoring modes
with Activate Monitor(Plan) mode on the menu. Push the thumbwheel to
show the sub menu shown below.
Activate Monitoring mode>Goto Monitor mode: User chart used in
planning mode can be switched directly to monitoring mode.
Activate Planning mode>Goto Plan mode: User chart used in
monitoring mode can be switched directly to planning mode.

Select:

User can specify user chart to use.

Unselect:

Remove current user chart from active use.

Create:

User can create a new user chart.

Backup and Restore:

User can make backup copy of user chart or restore user chart from
backup device.

Combine:

User can combine two or more user charts together.

Point report:
Generates report about points in a user chart.
Line report:
Generates report about lines in a user chart.
Area report:
Generates report about area objects in a user chart.
Symbols report:
Generates report about symbols in a user chart.
Tidal report:
Generates report about tides in a user chart.
Full report:
Generates report about all the objects in a user chart.
Report for radar:
Generates report about all the objects in a user chart which are displayed on the radar screen.

15-3
15. User Chart Control

15.2 What is a User Chart Point and How is it Used?

A point is a center point for a sub chart inside a user chart. Sub charts are small enough (max 80 elements) to be sent
for display on the radar. Sub charts are made with post processing, which is performed automatically, when you
leave editing (i.e., you uncheck Enable changes), you close the user chart window with the CANCEL button on the
keyboard-equipped control unit or you choose a user chart from the menu.

The system doesn't require any points if the amount of lines intended for the ARPA radar display is less than 60 and
if the amount of symbols intended for the ARPA radar display is less than 20. Note than lines are counted both from
lines and area objects.

If the user chart has more than 60 lines or 20 symbols and if the user chart does not contain any points, the system
will generate the alarm “2101 UserChart: Need Points” when you choose that user chart for use. It reminds you that
only a part of your lines will be visible on the connected ARPA radar, if you don't define points.

The symbol used for points is box with “I” inside:

¨¨¨

This an example of a complex user chart with several hundreds of lines and symbols. The ARPA radar can display
max. 60 lines and 20 symbols from the complete user chart. Points are used to create sub-charts for ARPA radar use.
Each point can collect 60 nearest lines and 20 nearest symbols in a sub chart.

15-4
 15. User Chart Control

Below are some examples of sub-charts. Note the position used for points to collect the sub charts.

15-5
15. User Chart Control

15.3 Choosing Datum

Selection of datum is very important, especially if you manually enter latitude-longitude positions from the control
panel or keyboard or if you use digitizer. If you only use the cursor to add and to modify waypoint locations, then
you could use any datum, although it is recommended to use native datum of the chart.

15.4 Choosing User Chart to use in Monitoring Mode

The user chart which is chosen for the monitoring mode is indicated in the UserChart field in the status bar. If
“UserChart” is red this means that the workstation is currently displaying the user chart for the planning mode. To
activate the monitoring mode and choose a user chart for the monitoring mode, do the following:
North Up TM

Place cursor here and

use thumbwheel to choose
desired user chart.

15-6
 15. User Chart Control

15.5 Choosing User Chart to use in Planning Mode

If “User Chart” on the status bar is white (or black depending on color scheme in use) it means that the workstation
is in the monitoring mode user chart. To activate the planning mode and choose a user chart for the planning mode,
do the following:
North Up TM

Place cursor here and

use thumbwheel to choose
desired user chart.

15-7
15. User Chart Control

15.6 Creating a User Chart

You can create and modify a user chart when you have chosen the planning mode of user chart.

1. 2.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Note: If you want to display a user chart on the electronic chart, make sure, that Points, Symbols & Tidals, Lines
and Areas of User chart are selected to Std or Oth from the Mariner page of the Chart Display menu.

To make a complete user chart, do the following:

1. Place the cursor on UserChart in the status bar and then click the Plan button. The Plan User Chart dialog box
appears in the information area.

2. Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box, choose Create from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.
Enter a name for the user chart; spin the thumbwheel to choose character and push it to confirm character. Click
the OK button to finish.

3. Click the Line tab and then check Enable changes. Spin the thumbwheel in the Element type box to choose line
type and then push the thumbwheel. To start a new line from a new position, check “New start position”. Check
“Danger Line” if you want to use the line in chart alarm calculation. Use the cursor to specify position for line
point and then push the left mouse button. Use the thumbwheel to enter a name for the line in the Name field.

4. Click the Symbol tab and then check Enable changes. Define Style (Symbol or Label), Name and Symbol
character in case of symbol. “Dsp on radar” is automatically chosen; uncheck it if you do not want the symbol or
label to appear on the radar. Check “Danger Symbol” to use the symbol in chart alarm calculation. Use the
cursor to choose position for symbol or label and then push the left mouse button.

5. Click the Area tab and then check Enable changes. To make a new area, click the Add button in the Area field.
Define Name for area, define also if it is displayed on Radar display (On Radar) and used in Chart Alarms
calculation (Danger Area). Use the cursor to choose position for points and then push the left mouse button.

6. Click the Tidal tab and then check Enable changes. To mark a tidal on the screen, use the mouse to locate the
cursor and then push the left mouse button. Define Name, Type, Orientation, Strength and Time for Tidal. The
Tidal symbol is displayed only on the ECDIS display.

7. Click the Point tab and then check Enable changes. Use cursor and left mouse button to define location of points.

15-8
 15. User Chart Control

15.6.1 Point page

The Point page lets you
define points on a user chart.
To choose this page, push the
right mouse button (Next
Card), click the tab with the
left mouse button, or hit the
NEXT key on the keyboard-
equipped control unit.

Enable changes: Check in order to modify user chart.

Note: The user chart may only be modified in the Course-up or North-up mode.

Point box: Shows the current and total number of points.

Name: Permits naming of current point.

Position: Manually enter latitude and longitude of point in this box.

Add: Add new record next to current record with the same information.

Import: Choose a user chart from which to import points.

Delete: This function deletes current point.

15-9
15. User Chart Control

15.6.2 Symbol page

The Symbol page lets you
draw symbols on a user chart.
To choose this page, push the
right mouse button (Next
Card), click the tab with the
left mouse button or hit the
NEXT key on the keyboard-
equipped control unit.

Enable changes: Check in order to modify user chart.

Note: The user chart may only be modified in the Course-up or North-up mode.

Symbol box: Shows the current and total number of symbols

Style: You can choose either Label (displayed only on ECDIS) or Symbol (displayed
also on ARPA display).

Name: If available, user can give name to symbol.

Symbol: If available, user can give name for displayed text on ECDIS

Position: Manually enter latitude and longitude of symbol in this box.

Display on radar: Check to also display the symbol on the radar screen.

Danger Symbol: Check to use symbol in chart calculation.

Add: Add new record to end of symbol list.

Import: Choose a user chart from which to import symbols.

Delete: This function deletes current symbol.

15-10
 15. User Chart Control

15.6.3 Line page

The Line page lets you
inscribe lines on a user chart.
To choose this page, push the
right mouse button (Next
Card), click the tab with the
left mouse button or hit the
NEXT key on the keyboard-
equipped control unit.

Enable changes: Check in order to modify user chart.

Note: The user chart may only be modified in the Course-up or North-up mode.
Line box: Shows the current and total number of line points.
Name: Permits naming of current line.
Element type: User can choose appropriate line type from combo box. Available types are:
• Navigation line
• Route line
• Depth contour
• Coast line
Navigation and route lines may also be displayed on the ARPA radar screen.
Depth contours and coast lines are visible only on the ECDIS display.
Danger Line: Check to use line in chart alarm calculation.
Start position: Manually enter starting latitude and longitude in this box.
End position: Manually enter ending latitude and longitude of line in this box.
New start position: Check to draw a new line. If unchecked, any newly entered line will be
connected to previous line.
Add: This function adds new record next to current record. User can either edit
position by entering new co-ordinates or by showing new location with the
trackball and left mouse button.
Import: Choose a user chart from which to import lines.
Delete: This function deletes current record of line.

15-11
15. User Chart Control

15.6.4 Tidal page

The Tidal page lets you inscribe
tidal data on a user chart. To
choose this page, push the right
mouse button (Next Card), click
the tab with the left mouse button
or hit the NEXT key on the
keyboard-equipped control unit.

Enable changes: Check in order to modify user chart.

Note: The user chart may only be modified in the Course-up or North-up mode.
Tidal box: Shows the current and total number of tidal points.

Name: Permits naming of current tide.

Type: User can choose type of tide here.

Position: Manually enter latitude and longitude of tide in this box.

Orientation, Strength and You may enter speed, course and time for tide. Note that time of the tide is
Time: always in local time.

Add: This function adds new record next to current record.

Import: User is able to choose from the list of user charts to import to current tidal file.

Delete: This function deletes current record of tide.

15-12
 15. User Chart Control

15.6.5 Area page

The Area page lets you inscribe
areas on a user chart. To choose
this page, push the right mouse
button (Next Card), click the tab
with the left mouse button or hit
the NEXT key on the keyboard-
equipped control unit.

Enable changes:
Check in order to modify user chart.
Note: The user chart may only be modified in the Course-up or North-up mode.

Area window
When a user defines an area for a user chart he adds an area object and then gives a name and chooses if it is
displayed on radar and/or if it is used for safe water calculation (Danger Area).

Area box: Number of current area appears in this field. User can choose area by editing
desired number in the Current box or create new one.

Name: You may assign a name to the current area.

On Radar: Check to also display the area on the ARPA radar display.

Danger Area: Check to include the current area in chart alarm calculation.

Add: Sets different area. Click button then set area.

Corner Points of Area: See description on next page.

Import: Import area.

Delete: Delete area.

15-13
15. User Chart Control

Corner points of area window

After you have defined an area, you can define corner points for it, by inserting a new point or appending a point, as
shown in the figure below. For example, place the cursor on position A, click the left mouse button, and the area
changes as in the right-side figure below. Pulling the closest line to the point changes the area as shown.

1 1
2
2
A
3

5 6
3 4

4 5
Place the cursor at point 6 to insert a point between points 1 and 5. Click the point with the left mouse button,
holding down the button, and then drag cursor to desired location.

1 1
2 2

6
6

5 5
3 3

4 4

Adding a new area to a user chart

An area of a user chart can be used, for example, to define a safe water area for display on the ARPA radar. To add a
new user chart area, do the following:

1. Open the Area page as described on the previous page. Check Enable changes.

2. Click the Add button in the Area field.

3. Give a name for the area and check Danger Area to use it in chart alarm calculation and check “On Radar” to
show the area on the radar as well.

4. Define corner points on the electronic chart area using the cursor and the left mouse button.

5. To define more areas, continue from step 2.

15-14
 15. User Chart Control

Choosing an area of a user chart to modify

In the Area field, Current indicates which area of a user chart is chosen for modification. To modify another area,
two methods are available:

• Enter desired area number of user chart object in the Rec box. To modify number, place the cursor in the
Current box and use thumbwheel to change desired number.

• Use the Info feature to find area. Place the cursor on the desired corner point of the area on the electronic chart
and then push the thumbwheel.

Changing position of corner point

The easiest way to move a corner point is to drag and drop it to a desired position. This can be done as follows:

1. Open user chart and then check Enable changes on the Plan User Chart dialog box.

2. Choose appropriate chart scale so you can see desired area of user chart on display.

3. Place the cursor on the corner point you want to move to a new position.

4. While pressing and holding down the left mouse button, roll the trackball to place the cursor on desired
position. Keep the button held down while you move the cursor and release it when the cursor is at the position
desired.

Deleting an area from a user chart

To completely delete an area from a user chart, check Enable changes on the Plan User Chart dialog box. Choose
desired area object to display from the Area field and then click the Delete button.

15-15
15. User Chart Control

Importing an area to a user chart

You can copy Areas of User Chart from another User Chart file to active User Chart file.

1. Click the Import button in the Area field, and the User Chart Import
dialog box appears.

2. Choose chart from which to copy areas in the Chart box; spin the
thumbwheel to choose a chart and then push the thumbwheel.

3. “Total record count” shows number of areas stored in chosen user chart.
Enter into the “First record to copy” field the area number from which
you want to start copying.

4. Enter in the “Number of records” field how many areas you want copy
into the active user chart file.

5. Click the Copy button to copy chosen areas. If you do not want copy,
click the X at the top right corner to quit.

15.6.6 Adding a new point, symbol, line or tidal to a user chart

In this manual the term “user chart object” refers to any of point, symbol, line or tidal. The procedure for modifying
a user chart object is common to all user chart objects. To choose a user chart object to modify, open the appropriate
user chart object page in the Plan User Chart dialog box. The Current field shows the user chart object currently
chosen for modification.

To modify user chart areas, see “Area page” on page 15-13.

To add a new user chart object you have following methods available:

• Use the left mouse button (Edit Insert feature).

• Click the Add button in corresponding user chart object page.

To add a new user chart object by using the left mouse button, do the following:

1. Open desired user chart object page.

2. Place the cursor in the electronic chart on the desired position and then push the left mouse button. New user
chart object appears.

3. Modify data of added user chart object. For how to modify Point, Symbol, Line and Tidal data, see paragraph
15.6.7 “Changing other data of point, symbol, line or tidal”.

To add a new user chart object by using the Add button, do the following:

1. Open desired user chart object page.

2. Click the Add button in the chosen user chart object page. This adds a new user chart object to the end of file,
which is a copy of current user chart object.

3. Modify position of user object. Modify position following “Changing position of a point, symbol, line or tidal,”
on the next page.

4. Modify other data of user chart object. For how to modify position, see paragraph 15.6.7 “Changing other data
of point, symbol, line or tidal”.

15-16
 15. User Chart Control

Choosing a point, symbol, line or tidal to modify

In this manual the term “user chart object” refers to any of point, symbol, line or tidal. The procedure for modifying
a user chart object is common to all user chart objects. To choose the user chart object to modify, open the
appropriate user chart object page. In the Current field, the number indicates user chart object which is currently
chosen for modification. If you want to select a different number, do one of the following:

• Enter desired number of user chart object in the Current box. To change the number place the cursor in the
Current box, spin the thumbwheel to choose number and then push the thumbwheel. Click the OK button.

• Use the Info feature to find area. Place the cursor on the desired corner point of the area on the electronic chart
and then push the thumbwheel.

Changing position of a point, symbol, line or tidal

You can change the position of a user chart object two ways:

• Enter latitude and longitude in the Position field.

• Drag and drop a user chart object with the left mouse button.

Entering latitude and longitude in position field

1. Open desired user chart object page.

2. Choose desired user chart object.

3. Enter co-ordinates in the Position field. To change a co-ordinate, place the cursor to the right of the digit to
change, in the appropriate box, click the left mouse button, spin the thumbwheel to choose desired value and
then push the thumbwheel. Note that lines have starting and ending point position fields.

Dragging and dropping a user chart object to new position

1. Open desired user chart object page.

2. Place the cursor on the user chart object in the electronic chart area and press and hold down the left mouse
button while rolling the trackball to position the user chart object.

3. Keep the button pressed down while you move the cursor and release it when the cursor is at the position
desired.

15.6.7 Changing other data of point, symbol, line or tidal

To change other data of a user chart object, such as name, symbol, element type, do the following:

1. Choose desired user chart object. For more information, see “Choosing a point, symbol, line or tidal to modify”
on page 15-16.

2. Place the cursor in desired edit box and then use the thumbwheel to enter data. Push the thumbwheel to confirm.

15.6.8 Deleting a point, symbol, line or tidal

To delete a user chart object, do the following:

1. Open desired user chart object page.

2. Choose user chart object to delete.

3. Click the Delete button in the chosen user chart object page.

15-17
15. User Chart Control

15.6.9 Importing points, symbols, lines or tidals from other user

chart
User is able to choose User chart objects from other user chart to import them to current User chart. To import User
chart object do the following:

1. Open desired user chart object page.

2. Click the Import button. The dialog box shown

right appears.

3. In the Chart box, choose the chart from which to

copy user chart objects.

4. The Element category field shows the category

elements which will be copied.

5. In the First record to copy box, enter the number of

the object from which to begin copying.

6. In the Number of records box, enter number of

records to copy.

7. Click the Copy button to copy.

15.7 Joining Two or More User Charts

The ECDIS allows you to combine two or more user Charts into one user chart. To join two or more user charts, do
the following:

1. Click Plan in UserChart in the status bar to show the Plan User Chart dialog box. Place the cursor on the
triangle in the Plan User Chart dialog box to display the menu. Choose a chart with “Select” and press the OK
button, or choose “Create” and create a new chart.

2. Choose Combine and then push the thumbwheel.

3. From the Chart box, choose a chart and then push the thumbwheel.

4. Click the Copy button.

15-18
 15. User Chart Control

15.8 Displaying User Charts on ECDIS display

User charts can be displayed on the ECDIS display, and you can choose which chart objects to display from the
Mariner page in the Chart Display dialog box. Below are some examples from the same user chart with different
selections.

This user chart has all user

chart objects displayed.

An example with only radar part of lines, symbols and areas displayed

15-19
15. User Chart Control

An example with only symbols and points displayed. Note that this is also a very good example how many and where
the points should be defined.

No symbols displayed

15-20
 15. User Chart Control

15.9 Backing up User Charts to a Floppy Disk

You may make backups of user charts. This feature is also useful for carrying user charts to other planning or
navigation station. For further details, see paragraph 17.5 “Backing up a File to a Floppy Disk”.

15.10 Restoring User Charts from a Floppy Disk

This procedure can be used to read backup copies of any User Chart file if some data is lost during Pilot data
modifying. The other usage is to read User Chart files originating from other planning or navigation station. For
further details, see paragraph 17.6 “Restoring a File from a Floppy Disk”.

15.11 Reports
You may generate a report for each chart object (point, line, area, symbol and tidal) as follows:

3. Choose UserChart from the status bar and then click the Plan button to show the Plan User Chart dialog box.

4. Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box to show the User Plan menu.

5. Choose desired report from the report group and then push the thumbwheel.

6. To print the report, click the Print Text button.

See the next page for sample reports.

15-21
15. User Chart Control

Changing font size in report

If you want to change the size of the font in a report hard copy, do the following:

1. Move the cursor onto the triangle in the report window.

2. Spin the thumbwheel to choose desired font size from the list and then push the thumbwheel.

15-22
 15. User Chart Control

Sample reports

Points report

Lines report

Areas report

Symbols report

Full report

Report for radar

15-23
15. User Chart Control

This page intentionally left blank.

15-24
16. Pilot Data

16.1 Introduction
A navigation-related notebook is called “pilot data”. Pilot data is a “notebook data” file which provides messages for
the operator relative to a specific ship position in the monitoring mode. The user specifies range for each pilot data
record. The ECDIS compares pilot data range and own ship position and displays pilot data when own ship goes
within the range set for the pilot data. (See figure below.)

The operator may assign a brief message that will appear on the radar display together with the notice of the
proximity of the relevant point.

While the ship sails, notebook pages (= records) in the chosen pilot data file are compared with own ship position
once per minute to choose pilot data. Further, when the ship has passed a waypoint, the system will make a
comparison against own ship position. If the system finds that you have arrived within a new pilot data notebook
page, it generates the alarm “5001 Pilot Data: New Record”.

Position of own ship

when pilot data will
disappear.

Location of
pilot data
i

Range

Position of own ship

when pilot data will
be activated (also
audible alarm)

16-1
16. Pilot Data

16.1.1 Pilot data modes

Pilot data can be chosen for the monitoring mode, which means that pilot data gives predefined messages for the
operator relative to a specific ship position. Another mode is for modifying pilot data in the planning mode. In the
planning mode, pilot data is used to define predefined messages relative to own ship position. Eventually the
monitored and planned pilot data copy the operation of the monitored and planned routes. Below is an example of
how to know which pilot data is used in the monitoring mode and which is used in the planning mode.
North Up TM

The PilotData field in the status bar always shows the name of the pilot data chosen for the monitoring mode. If the
displayed pilot data on the ECDIS display is the monitored pilot data, then the text “PilotData” is in black (or white
depending on color scheme). If the displayed pilot data on the ECDIS display is the planned pilot data, then the text
“PilotData” is in red. The name of the planned pilot data is only available in the dialog box for the planning mode of
pilot data.

16-2
 16. Pilot Data

16.2 Using Pilot Data

To prepare pilot data, do the following:

1. Place the cursor on PilotData in the status bar, and then click the Plan or Monitor button as appropriate. If no
pilot data is chosen, the Pilot Data menu (shown below) appears in addition to the Monitor Pilot Data dialog
box or Plan Pilot Data dialog box.

2. If no menu appears, click the same button once more to open the menu.

Activate Monitor/Plan mode:

User can switch pilot data mode between plan and monitor. Using
Activate Monitor mode> Goto Monitor mode, pilot data used in the
planning mode can be switched directly to the monitoring mode. Using
Activate Plan mode> Goto Plan mode, pilot data used in the monitoring
mode can be switched directly to the planning mode.

Select:

Chooses pilot data to use; monitor or planning mode.

Unselect:

Unselect removes pilot data from active use.

Create:

Creates new pilot data. Pilot data can be named, using up to 30

alphanumeric characters.

Backup and Restore:

User can make backup copy from pilot data or restore from backup
media.

Report:

Generates tabulated report from chosen pilot data.

Note: If you want pilot data to be displayed on the electronic chart, make sure that pilot data options are turned on in
the Mariner page of the Chart Display dialog box.

1. 2. 3.

THIS IS A TEST
i i i
Position mark

Position mark plus Position mark,

range mark range mark and text

Three different variations as examples of how pilot data is presented on the chart area:

1. Only position mark is displayed.

2. “1” and range marks are displayed.

3. “1”, “2” and pilot data text are displayed on the chart.

16-3
16. Pilot Data

16.3 Choosing Pilot Data to use in Monitoring Mode

Pilot data which is for system use is displayed in the pilot data field on the status bar. If the text “PilotData” is red
this means that the workstation is in the planning mode for pilot data. To activate the monitoring mode and choose
pilot data for the monitoring mode, do the following:
North Up TM

Place cursor here,

spin thumbwheel to
choose pilot data
and push thumbwheel.

16-4
 16. Pilot Data

16.3.1 Monitor pilot data dialog box description

Current page
If “View all records” is not
chosen (checked):

• Opens “Current Record”

page.

• When the ship is within the

range set for a pilot data, the
information of current record
appears, something like the
dialog box shown right.

View page
If “View all records” is chosen:

• Opens “View Record” page.

• Choose “View all records”.

• You can view any pilot data

record by clicking the arrow
keys.

Rec box: This indicates current number of record which is activated.

Position: This indicates position of current record (LAT, LON).

Range: Control range for the system to activate current record of pilot data.

16-5
16. Pilot Data

16.4 Choosing Pilot Data to use in Planning Mode

If the PilotData in the status bar is black (or white depending on color scheme) this means that the workstation is in
the monitoring mode for pilot data. To activate the planning mode and choose pilot data for the planning mode, do
the following:
North Up TM

Move cursor here and

use thumbwheel to
select desired user chart.

16-6
 16. Pilot Data

16.4.1 Plan pilot data dialog box description

Edit record page

Enable changes: Check to enable changes.

Note: Pilot data may only be modified in the North-up or Course-up mode.

Position: Indicates the latitude and longitude position of current record.

Range: Range from own ship at which current pilot data is activated on the screen.

Description: The user may edit a pilot data message record, which appears on the screen,
after the ship has passed the calculated point. To edit the text, place the cursor
in the text window, spin the thumbwheel to choose character and then push the
thumbwheel.

Add: This function adds a new record next to current record. User can edit position
by entering new co-ordinates or by choosing new location with the trackball
and then pushing the left mouse button.

Import: You may import an existing file (whole file or part of file), to current pilot data
file.

Delete: Deletes current record of pilot data.

16-7
16. Pilot Data

16.5 Creating New Pilot Data

You can create and modify pilot data, and this can be done in the planning mode. It is recommended to use the true
motion display mode while editing.

1. 3.

2.

To create a new pilot data, do the following:

1. Place the cursor on PilotData in the status bar and then click the Plan button to show the Plan Pilot Data dialog
box. If you have not already chosen pilot data, the Plan Pilot Data menu also appears. If the menu is not
displayed, click the Plan button again. Choose Create from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

2. In the pilot name entry box, spin the thumbwheel to choose character, and then push the thumbwheel. Repeat to
enter name desired and then click the OK button.

3. In the Edit page of the Plan Pilot Data dialog box, check “Enable changes”. Roll the trackball to place the cursor
on the location desired for pilot data and then push the left mouse button. In the Range box, enter the range from
own ship at which to activate the pilot data. To show text message on the screen, enter desired message in the
text window; spin the thumbwheel to choose character and push the thumbwheel to confirm.

16.5.1 Adding new pilot data record

To add a new pilot data record the following choices are available:

• Using the left mouse button.

• Using the Add button in the Edit page.

To add a new pilot data record by using the left mouse button:
1. Open the Edit page of the Plan Pilot Data dialog box and check Enable changes.

2. Place the cursor on the location in the chart area where you want to add a new pilot data, and then push the left
mouse button. New pilot data record appears at the end of file.

3. Modify Range, Position, text message, etc. as appropriate.

16-8
 16. Pilot Data

To add a new pilot data record by Add button:

1. Open the Edit page of the Plan Pilot Data dialog box and then check Enable changes.

2. Click the Add button. This adds a new pilot data record to the end of record, and it is a copy of current pilot
data record.

3. Modify position of pilot data record. For how to modify position, see paragraph 16.5.3 “Changing pilot data
record position”.

4. Modify other data of pilot data record as appropriate. For how to modify other data in a pilot data record, see
paragraph “16.5.4 “Changing other data of pilot data record”.

16.5.2 Choosing pilot data record to modify

The Current box in the Plan Pilot Data dialog box shows the pilot data currently selected for modification. To
choose a different pilot data the following methods are available:

• Enter desired record number in the Current box, using the thumbwheel; spin the thumbwheel to choose record
number and then push the thumbwheel.

• Place the cursor on desired pilot data in the electronic chart area, and then push the thumbwheel.

16.5.3 Changing pilot data record position

To change the position of a pilot data, two choices are available:

• Enter latitude and longitude in the Position field on the Edit page.

• Drag and drop pilot data mark using the trackball and left mouse button.

Entering latitude and longitude in position field

1. Open the Edit page of the Plan Pilot Data dialog box and then check Enable changes.

2. Choose desired pilot data, following paragraph 16.5.2.

3. Enter co-ordinate in Lat (Lon) field as appropriate. Spin the thumbwheel to change digit and then push the
thumbwheel to confirm.

Dragging and dropping pilot data to new position

1. Open the Edit page of the Plan Pilot Data dialog box and then check Enable changes.

2. Use the trackball to place the cursor on the pilot data you wish to move.

3. Press and hold down the left mouse button while rolling the trackball to position the pilot data mark where
desired. Keep the button pressed and held down while you move the cursor and release it when the cursor is at
position desired.

16-9
16. Pilot Data

16.5.4 Changing other data of pilot data record

To change function range or character data of pilot data, such as range and text, do the following:

1. Choose desired pilot data record, following paragraph 16.5.2.

2. Place the cursor in the desired edit box, spin the thumbwheel to choose desired value, and then push the
thumbwheel to confirm.

16.5.5 Deleting a pilot data record

To delete a pilot data record, do the following:

1. Open the Edit page of the Plan Pilot Data dialog box and then check Enable changes.

2. Choose desired pilot data record to delete, following paragraph 16.5.2.

3. Click the Delete button.

16.5.6 Importing pilot data from other routes

You may import pilot data records from other pilot data records as follows:

1. Open the Edit page of the Plan Pilot Data dialog box and then check Enable changes. Click the Import button
to show the following dialog box.

2. In the Pilot data field, choose the source pilot data.

3. Enter first pilot data record to copy in the First page to copy field.

4. Enter number of pilot data records to copy in the Number of pages to copy field.

5. “Copy to pilot data” shows where the pilot data record is to be copied to and “First page copied as page” shows
the number which the first record from the pilot data source will be copied into the current pilot data.

6. After confirming settings, click the Copy button to import pilot data records.

16-10
17. Backup Operations

17.1 Introduction
There are several menus from which the user may initiate backup and restore functions. From those menus the user
may execute hard disk operations such as backup, copy, rename and delete. The user may make backup copies to
backup devices or restore from backup device to hard disk. These pushbuttons and menu commands, which are used
to access the system’s database, are listed below.

Note: Use only IBM PC formatted floppy disks.

The Backup & Restore dialog box is where backup and restore operations are initiated.

Selection of file category

Operation on local
hard disk

Operation with all

files in category

Operation on backup
device/medium

17-1
17. Backup Operations

17.2 Choosing Appropriate File Category

The system automatically chooses corresponding file depending on your selection. The categories consist of the
following files:

• Route plans

• User charts

• Pilot data

• Installation parameters

• Chart display settings

• Paper chart setup

• Presentation libraries

• Logs

• Manual updates

• All charts and updates

You can choose desired category from the File category box in the Backup & Restore dialog box. For the chosen
category, the system shows all the possible functions executable with the chosen category.

17.3 Copying a File

You can make a copy of an original file using the Copy function in the Backup & Restore dialog box. To copy a file,
do the following:

1. Choose desired file category.

2. Choose desired file from the Hard Disk field.

3. Click the Copy button.

4. Enter new name for chosen file and then click the OK button.

17.4 Renaming a File

You can rename a file using the Rename function in the Backup & Restore dialog box. To rename a file, do the
following:

1. Choose desired file category from the Category field.

2. Choose desired file from the Hard Disk field.

3. Click the Rename button.

4. Enter new name for chosen file and then click the OK button.

17-2
 17. Backup Operations

17.5 Backing up a File to a Floppy Disk

You can make a backup from an original file to a floppy disk. To make a backup of a file to a floppy disk, insert a
floppy disk in the disk drive, and then do the following:

1. Choose desired file category.

2. Choose desired file from the Hard Disk field.

3. Choose desired Drive from the Drive field.

4. Click the Backup button.

17.6 Restoring a File from a Floppy Disk

You can restore a file with one stored on a floppy disk. To restore a file stored on a floppy disk, do the following:

1. Choose desired file category.

2. Choose desired Drive from the Drive field.

3. Choose desired file from the Backup Device field.

4. Click the Restore button.

17.7 Deleting a File

You can delete a file as follows:

1. Choose desired file category.

2. Choose desired file from the Hard Disk field.

3. Click the Delete button.

17-3
17. Backup Operations

17.8 Moving a File to Planning or Navigation Station

If there are two ECDIS workstations connected via a LAN, files can be moved from one workstation to another and
vice versa.

Note: The intention of the Backup function is to make a backup copy of a route, user chart, etc. to a backup
medium. If you want to copy charts, routes, user charts, etc. between ECDIS workstations, it is recommended that
you use the Restore function instead of Backup. For use of Backup, see the illustration below for when it is possible
to use the Backup function.

Between ECDIS workstations when both worstations are set

as single workstation mode

ECDIS 1 ECDIS 2

SINGLE SINGLE

LAN

Between both workstations are set as Master/Slave or Multi-workstation

mode, but backup is done to external device/media.

Backup to floppy disk

ECDIS 1 ECDIS 2
Backup to additional
MASTER/MULTI-SLAVE MASTER/MULTI-SLAVE ECDIS PC which
LAN operates in SINGLE
workstation mode

To use the Backup function:

1. Open desired menu.

2. From the menu, choose the Backup and Restore command.

3. Choose desired file from the Hard disk field.

4. Select backup drive from the Backup device field.

5. Press the Backup button.

The figure below shows when you should not use the backup function to copy files between ECDIS workstations.
To copy files between ECDIS workstations use the Restore function. For more information, see “Reading a File
from Planning or Navigation Station” on the next page

DO NOT use the backup function between two ECDIS workstations

when both workstations operate as master/slave or multi-mode
(or one workstation mode indication is red (single))

ECDIS 1 ECDIS 2

MASTER/MULTI-SLAVE MASTER/MULTI-SLAVE

LAN

17-4
 17. Backup Operations

17.9 Reading a File from Planning or Navigation

Station
If there are two ECDIS workstations connected via a LAN, it is possible to read files from planning station to
navigation station and vice versa.

1. Select desired menu.

2. Choose Backup and Restore command from menu.

3. Choose backup drive from the Backup device field.

4. From the Backup Device field, choose desired file.

5. Click the Restore button in the Backup Device field.

17.10 Loading User Chart and Route Files of Former

Vector System Format
Route and user Chart files can be read in vector system format (Inc) files. When loading Inc format files, the ECDIS
converts the files to the format used with the ECDIS. To do this, do the following:

1. Choose desired menu.

2. Choose Backup and Restore from the menu.

3. Choose backup drive from the Backup device field.

4. From the Backup Device field, choose desired file.

5. Click the Restore button in the Backup Device field.

17.11 Saving User Chart and Route Files in Former

Vector System Format
The Route and User chart files can be read in vector system format (Inc). When moving files from the ECDIS to a
backup device the ECDIS converts the file to Inc format.

To do this:

1. Choose desired menu.

2. Choose Backup and Restore from the menu.

3. From the Hard Disk field, choose desired file and then choose Backup file format as Inc.

4. Choose backup drive from the Backup device field.

5. Click the Backup button in the Hard Disk field.

17-5
17. Backup Operations

17.12 Saving a Route as an ASCII Text File

Sometimes it is useful to save route information as an ASCII text file for use with some other application, or to
restore some ASCII text produced by some other application to the ECDIS. For further details see Appendix 5.

The following formats are available for route backup and restore:

• ASCII PROPRIETARY

• ASCII POSITION (list of Latitude/Longitude values)

• ASCII WPNAME POSITION (list of WP names and Latitude/Longitude)

• ASCII POSITION WPNAME (list of Latitude/Longitude and WP names)

• ASCII FULL (all route related information)

To make a backup of a route in ASCII format, do the following:

1. Choose the Backup and Restore command from the menu.

2. From the Hard disk field, choose desired file.

3. Choose desired backup format with Backup format.

4. Choose backup drive in the Backup drive field.

5. Click the Backup button in the Hard Disk field.

17.13 Restoring a Route from an ASCII Text File

Sometimes it is useful to restore to the ECDIS route information stored in an ASCII text file which was produced by
some other application. For further details see Appendix 5.

The following formats are available for route backup and restore:

• ASCII PROPRIETARY

• ASCII POSITION, list of Latitude/Longitude values

• ASCII WPNAME POSITION, list of WP names and Latitude/Longitude

• ASCII POSITION WPNAME list of Latitude/Longitude and WP names

• ASCII FULL, all route related information

To restore a route using ASCII data, do the following:

1. Choose the Backup and Restore command from the menu.

2. Choose desired Backup Format.

3. Choose backup drive from the Backup device field.

4. Choose desired file.

5. Click the Restore button in the Backup Device field.

17-6
 17. Backup Operations

17.14 Backing up Chart Material

The ECDIS lets you keep a chart database identical both in the hard disk of the ECDIS and the hard disk of the
backup ECDIS. If you want to make a backup of chart material to backup ECDIS, open the Backup & Restore
dialog box and do the following:

1. Choose file category

2. Choose Drive for backup of ECDIS at Drive in the Backup Device window.

3. Click the Backup button.

Note: To copy charts between ECDIS workstations, it is recommended that you use the Restore function instead of
Backup. For use of Backup, see the illustration below for when it is possible to use the Backup function.

After the backup has been completed, the hard disk content of the backup ECDIS is identical with backup ECDIS.
However, the backup ECDIS doesn’t automatically start to use possible new material. To do this, open the Chart
menu and select System>Refresh Charts after backup from the menu.
Between ECDIS workstations when both worstations are set
as single workstation mode

ECDIS 1 ECDIS 2

SINGLE SINGLE

LAN

Between both workstations are set as Master/Slave or Multi-workstation

mode, but backup is done to external device/media.

Backup to floppy disk

ECDIS 1 ECDIS 2
Backup to additional
MASTER/MULTI-SLAVE MASTER/MULTI-SLAVE ECDIS PC which
LAN operates in SINGLE
workstation mode

17-7
17. Backup Operations

17.15 Restoring Chart Material

The ECDIS lets you keep a chart database identical both in the hard disk of the ECDIS and the hard disk of backup
the ECDIS. If you want restore a backup of some chart material from the backup ECDIS, open the Backup and
Restore dialog box and do the following:

1. Choose file category.

2. At Drive in the Backup Device window, choose the drive where backup ECDIS is stored. Then, click the
Restore button.

Note: After the restore has been completed, the hard disk content of the backup ECDIS is identical with backup
ECDIS. However, the backup ECDIS doesn’t automatically start to use possible new material. To do this, open the
Chart menu and select System>Refresh Charts after backup from the menu.

17-8
18. Common Reference System
(Multi-workstation mode)

18.1 Introduction
A system is comprised of one or more Workstation(s) and it is configured as follows:

• Single workstation
• Multiple workstation (for example, navigation workstation(s) and planning station(s))
• Multiple workstation (for example, navigation workstations)
An access server takes care of information shared inside the system to keep workstations consistent within the
common reference system concept. The access server also monitors if a workstation has a right to make certain
actions (for example if a workstation has usage rights to change monitored route for the system).

The common reference system concept includes the following features:

• Shared navigation sensors

• Shared alarm management
• Shared chart databases for S57 (ENC) and ARCS
• Shared databases for routes, user charts, manual updates and pilot data
• Some user selections are shared (for example safety contour), while some other user selections are defined
separately for each workstation.
• User selections used for route planning are separate for each workstation
The Installation parameters of the system define if the system consists of more than one workstation and in which
the access server is running. For further details see the service manual.
North Up TM

Workstation mode
indication

18-1
18. Common Reference System

18.2 Controlling Common Reference System

If the system has more than one workstation, the following dialog box appears when choosing the Initial Settings
menu, which may be opened by moving the cursor onto the workstation mode indication and pushing the right
mouse button.

1.

2.
3.

1. Usage rights: The following options are available to request usage rights:
• Master: Only this workstation can be used to make selections for the monitoring mode (for example, route
monitor, user chart monitoring mode, etc.) and system use (for example, navigation sensors, ARPA target
source, etc.).
• Plan: Only this workstation can access the planning mode (i.e., another workstation(s) is used for
selections for the monitoring mode and system use).
• Multi: This workstation shares usage rights in order to make selections for the monitoring mode and
system use with other Workstation(s) set as Multi. Note that this is only a request for shared operation. If
any other Workstation has been chosen as Master, then you do not get Multi usage rights, but Slave usage
rights. The difference between Slave and Plan usage rights is that Plan retains that status but Slave will be
changed to Multi, if the current workstation holding Master usage rights is changed from Master to any
other alternative.
2. Sensor source: This box shows the Workstation into which all the navigation sensors are connected. If you
have a fully redundant system where all the sensors are connected to all workstations, you can choose which
workstation is used as a sensor source.

3. Mode: Normally, in a multi-workstation environment, this selection should always be “Multi workstation”. The
alternative selection is “Single workstation” and it is used for two purposes:
• If you do not have more than one workstation powered, then this workstation is chosen for “single
workstation” mode.
• If you want to use this workstation of your system temporarily as a totally independent separate
workstation, then choose “Single workstation” mode. Note that during the “Single workstation” mode the
system does not use the common reference system concept, since everything you do is not shared by other
workstations.

Switching between single mode and multi mode

The operator may change the operating mode to “single” or “multi”. Switch to single mode when conducting SENC
conversion of S57 or C-MAP CM-93/2 charts. (All stations must be in the single mode in SENC conversion.)

1. Right-click MULTI in the information area.

2. Check Usage Rights and change from Multi(slave) to Master.

3. Check Mode and change from Multi Workstation to Single Workstation.

18-2
 18. Common Reference System

18.2.1 Shared alarm management

The common reference system concept provides that all alarms are indicated in all workstations and a single
acknowledge of alarm from any workstation is enough to acknowledge the alarm from all workstations.

18.2.2 Harmonized databases on workstations

When the multi-workstation mode is used, information between workstations is shared via the access server. The
access server is responsible for harmonizing data on all workstations when any data listed below has been changed
in one of the workstations.
• Chart data
• ARCS
• S57
• Manual updates
• Permits

Notes on harmonization
• If you have the multi-workstation mode in use, it is recommended that loading or updating of ARCS and S57
charts be made when the ship is NOT sailing on restricted waters, because harmonising of databases may cause
delay in system operations. To load or update charts while sailing, switch to single-workstation mode. For how
to change the mode, see paragraph 18.5 “Mode of Workstations”.
• In the multi-workstation mode, ECDIS charts are harmonized whenever a chart is loaded, removed, manually
updated, viewing dates set, etc. If harmonization is executed between ECDIS units operating in the single-
workstation mode, however, the ECDIS workstation having the latest “global_catalog.cat” is used for
harmonization. This can cause loss of charts if, for example, the ECDIS workstation to be harmonized has more
charts than the other ECDIS workstation but its global_catalog.cat is older than the ECDIS workstation with
fewer charts.
• The date of modification of global_catalog.cat for both the S57 system and ARCS system is changed whenever
respective charts are loaded, deleted, etc. Both chart systems are harmonized with the latest charts, with no order
or priority. The date of global_catalog.cat is modified in the following instances: Permit loading, Permit
removal, Chart loading, Chart update, Chart removal, Manual chart viewing dates, Manual update, etc.
• When ECDIS is installed or updated, global_catalog.cat of both the ARCS system and S57 system is deleted.
After ECDIS is restarted, rebuild is executed to create a new global_catalog.cat, and the newly created file is
time-stamped “Monday, January 01, 1601 9:00:00 AM”. (This happens only when it and the S57_setup_file are
deleted together. If only global_catalog.cat is deleted, the current time stamp is applied.)

This usually presents no problem with harmonization of S57 charts. However, if “Permanent Warning” appears
during the rebuild, “Set chart viewing date” will be executed. When this occurs, the time stamp for
global_catalog.cat is written over and its time stamp becomes older than the ECDIS time stamp. This causes the
ECDIS to revert to the harmonized state directly after installation. To prevent this, “use” the time stamp obtained
from “Set chart viewing date” and execute “Set chart viewing date” on the ECDIS on which to harmonize S57
charts. This will always give the most recent time stamp to the ECDIS to be harmonized.
• Do not turn off the power of an ECDIS unit when charts are being harmonized between two ECDIS units in the
multi-workstation mode. The unit which was turned off may malfunction after activating the single-workstation
mode.
• Turn off the radar overlay feature before conducting harmonization after loading or updating charts, to prevent
the overload condition, which causes slow operation.
• For multi-workstation system, if charts are loaded and updated at Workstation A in the single mode and then the
mode is switched to multimode, charts are then automatically loaded to Workstation B for harmonization of
charts. After harmonization is completed, charts must be refreshed at Workstation B, in the following operating
sequence: Chart menu→System→Refresh charts after backup. This same operating procedure applies if charts
are loaded and updated while the multi-workstation mode is active.

18-3
18. Common Reference System

You can set access server display options ON if you want to monitor access server windows to know harmonization
status, whenever harmonization is completed by the system.

To set access server display ON/OFF, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the

mouse functions area and then push the left mouse button.

2. Choose Initial Settings and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Place the cursor on the triangle in the Initial Settings dialog

box to show the menu shown left.

4. Choose Access Server and Diagnostic from the menu and then
Access Server Display from the submenu.

5. When access server windows are displayed, the following

messages may appear.

If the system recognises that any data

mentioned above has been changed in one
workstation, the access server indicates the
need for pending harmonisation, using the
window shown right.

When the access server recognises that the

editing, loading, updating, etc. session has
been completed in one workstation, the access
server starts harmonising databases in order to
get databases identical on all workstations.
The message “Access Server is currently
harmonizing” appears to alert you to this
action. If you click the Show Details…
button, the “Progress of harmonization”
window appears to give detailed information
about harmonization progress. This window
can be closed by clicking the “Access server
is currently harmonizing” window.

Note: The Stop button in the Progress of

harmonization window is intended to stop the
harmonization in case of system malfunction.

When route, user chart or pilot data is chosen for the planning mode, the access server locks it and rejects further
selection of it in other workstations until “Enable changes” selection is removed or the Plan Route dialog box is
closed.

Harmonising starts when “Enable changes” selection is removed or corresponding window(s) are closed. After
harmonisation has been done, the route, user chart or pilot data can be chosen in another workstation for the
planning mode.

18-4
 18. Common Reference System

18.2.3 Shared user selections

The common reference system concept allows that some selections and settings made by a user in one workstation
are transferred to other workstation(s). These are as follows:
• Route, user chart and pilot data in monitoring mode
• Chosen sensors in speed/course and position pages (including position alignment of own ship and gyro
correction) in the Sensors dialog box
• Settings for chart alarms and watch sector
• Settings of conditions for voyage and dangerous targets recordings
• Ship parameters (table of forwarding distance, optimization parameters and navigation parameters)
• Setting for position discrepancy limit

18.3 Usage Rights

A workstation can have different usage rights. Master and Multi (Slave) rights allow control of both planning and
monitoring modes and navigation sensors. Slave (Multi) and Plan usage rights allow only control of the planning
mode. Workstations can be set so that

• One has Master usage rights. The rest has Slave (Multi) or Plan usage rights.

• One or two have Multi (Slave) usage rights. The rest has Plan usage rights.

18.3.1 Setting usage rights as “master”

One single workstation can be chosen to control the monitoring mode and navigation sensors. This means that this
particular workstation is used to choose route, user chart and pilot data for the monitoring mode.

To choose configuration of system in which one workstation has

usage rights set as Master, do the following:

1. Place the cursor below the chart scale indication, confirm that
Initial Settings is shown in the mouse functions area and then
push the right mouse button.

2. Check the Usage rights box and choose Master from the List
box.

3. The indication MASTER appears at the lower right hand corner

on the chosen workstation.

4. The indication SLAVE appears at the lower right hand corner on

other workstations.

18-5
18. Common Reference System

18.3.2 Setting usage rights as “multi” or “slave”

Multiple workstations can be chosen to control monitoring modes and navigation sensors. This means that these
particular workstations are used to choose route, user chart and pilot data for monitoring modes. However, the
multiple control requires that none of the other workstations is set for Master usage rights. If any other workstation
is set for Master usage rights, then this workstation can be set only as Slave or Plan. The transition from Slave to
Multi usage right is automatic. If later the usage right selections in other workstations are changed, then the usage
rights in this workstation is automatically set as Multi or Slave based on non-existence or existence of a Master
usage rights workstation.

To choose configuration of system in which multiple

workstations have usage rights set as Multi, do the
following:

1. Operate at the workstation for which you like to

give Multi or Slave usage rights.

2. Place the cursor below the chart scale indication,

confirm that Initial Settings is shown in the mouse
functions area and then push the right mouse button.

3. Check the Usage rights box and choose either Multi

(Slave) or Slave (Multi) from the List box. First
alternative indicates the selection and second
alternative in parenthesis indicates the provisional
selection. Provisional selection may be used by the
system if new usage rights selections are made in
other workstations.

or

4. If, based on your request, you got shared Multi

usage rights, then the indication MULTI appears at
the lower right hand corner of display. If one of the
workstations was already chosen as Master, then the
SLAVE
system cannot give you Multi usage rights. In this or
case the indication SLAVE appears at the lower
right hand corner of display.

18-6
 18. Common Reference System

18.3.3 Setting usage rights as “plan”

Workstation(s) can be chosen to control only the planning mode. This means that these particular workstation(s) are
used to edit route, user chart and pilot data in the planning mode. Selection of Plan usage rights is done in the
Installation Parameters of the ECDIS by service personnel. The user is not able to set these usage rights.

Note that a workstation chosen for Plan usage rights still

has full viewing access to navigation sensors and to
monitored routes, user charts, etc. This is important
because it allows that parallel operator(s) can monitor
navigation situation.

To verify configuration of the system in which a chosen

workstation(s) has usage rights set as Plan, do the
following:

1. Operate at the workstation for which you like to

give Plan usage rights.

2. Place the cursor below the chart scale indication,

confirm that Initial Settings is shown in the mouse
functions area and then push the right mouse button.

3. Check Usage rights and choose Plan from the list

box.

The indication PLAN appears at the lower right hand

corner of the display.

18-7
18. Common Reference System

18.4 Sensor Source for the System

Normally the sensor source of a system is a single workstation to which all the sensors are connected. All
workstations share the navigation sensors. The workstation chosen as a sensor source is connected to all sensors.
The workstations which can be used as sensor source are shown in the Sensor source list box in the Sensors dialog
box.

Typically, the following kinds of installations for connecting sensors to the system are used:

• One workstation to which all the sensors are connected and the others have only one DGPS connected
(minimum system configuration which fulfil IMO back-up arrangement for the ECDIS).

• Multiple workstations to which all the sensors are connected (fully redundant workstations)

Consult with the installer to know the installation method.

Note: If you have a fully redundant system where all the sensors are connected to all workstations, it is possible to
have the same information available no matter which workstation is chosen as the sensor source. If there is any
difference in installation parameters due to different combination of sensors connected, the information available
may vary when changing the sensor source. It is highly recommended that you change sensor source only when it is
required (for example when you have some failure in communications, when hardware fails, etc.) and also to change
the sensor source only when it is safe for navigation to do so. (Change of sensor source will take some time during
which the system is not fully operational.)

To change sensor source, do the following:

1. Operate at the workstation for which you want to set

sensor source.

2. Place the cursor below the chart scale indication,

confirm that Initial Settings is shown in the mouse
functions area and then push the right mouse button.

3. Check Sensor source and then choose sensor source

from the list box.

Communication program is started at the workstation

specified as the sensor source responsible for receiving
and transmitting data from/to sensors. The workstation
selected as sensor source is also indicated at the top of
the Sensors dialog box.

18-8
 18. Common Reference System

18.5 Mode of Workstations

The system is designed so that information and operations can be shared among workstations. Sharing requires that
the access server be running in the specified workstation. (This is an installation parameters. See the Installation
Manual.) The access server requires that the workstation be designated as multi workstation.

If something fails in a workstation(s) or in the LAN connecting the workstations which prevents multi workstation
operations, it is possible to switch the mode to single workstation. If the mode of a workstation which is defined in
the installation parameters for the access server is set as a single workstation, the access server is stopped and the
workstation(s) continues as if they are separate individual ECDIS systems.

Note: When the mode is single workstation, no data are harmonised nor are information of user selection shared
between workstations.

18.5.1 Changing mode to single or multi workstation

To change sensor source, do the following:

1. Operate at the workstation for which you

want to set sensor source.

2. Place the cursor below the chart scale

indication, confirm that Initial Settings is
shown in the mouse functions area and then
push the right mouse button.

3. Check Mode and choose appropriate

workstation from the List box.

In this example, mode was changed from multi to

single.
The selection Single workstation disables
selections of usage rights and sensor source and
stops the access server operations on the
workstation. In the single workstation mode, the
indication SINGLE appears at the lower right
hand corner in red.

18-9
18. Common Reference System

18.6 Troubleshooting
If something fails while the access server is harmonizing workstations, the following window appears to indicate
that harmonising has failed.

18.6.1 What to do if pending access server window remains on

screen
The window below indicates that operation of the access server is pending.

There are two alternatives for pending state:

1. You have not closed all related windows. To solve this, click the Cancel button several times to erase all
windows from the ECDIS display.

2. The Access Server remains in pending state for some other reason. To solve this, try manual activation of
harmonization of workstations as follows:

1. Place the cursor below the chart scale indication, confirm that Initial
Settings is shown in the mouse functions area and then push the
right mouse button.

2. Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box to display the
menu shown left.

3. Choose Access Server and Diagnostic from the menu and choose
Access Server from the sub menu to start harmonization.

18-10
 18. Common Reference System

18.6.2 Access server log

The access server log is used to analyze and diagnose access server operation. Service personnel can use this log to
check the access server for proper operation. To access the access server log, do the following:

1. Place the cursor below the chart scale indication, confirm that Initial
Settings is shown in the mouse functions area and then push the
right mouse button.

2. Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box to display the
menu shown left.

3. Choose Access Server and Diagnostic from the menu and choose
Access Server Log from the sub menu.

18-11
18. Common Reference System

18.6.3 Human interface log

The human interface log is used to analyse and diagnose system operation. Service personnel can use this log to
check the system for proper operation. To activate the human interface log, do the following:

1. Place the cursor below the chart scale indication, confirm that Initial
Settings is shown in the mouse functions area and then push the right
mouse button.

2. Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box to display the menu
shown left.

3. Choose Access Server and Diagnostic from the menu and choose
Human Interface log from the sub menu.

18-12
19. Navigation Sensors

19.1 Choosing Navigation Sensors

The operator can choose navigation sensors to use for navigation and view their current values on the Sensors dialog
box. To access this dialog box, place the cursor on the Position field in the information area and then push the right
mouse button.

Checkbox status shows whether the sensor is used for integrated navigation or not. If there is no value shown for a
sensor this means that the sensor is not valid. Note that the content of these pages depends on sensors which are in
use on the ship.

19.1.1 Sensors dialog box description

Speed/Course page
Source:

In a multiple workstation environment verify that the

sensor source indicated at the top of dialog box is the
intended one.

Manual speed:

If checked, user can enter value (Kt) for speed.

Note: This is used only if there are no other speed or

SOG sensors chosen.

Log:

If checked, a log is used as water speed source. “(no

pulse)” is used to indicate that a log device with closed
contact relay interface using 200 pulses/nm does not
give any pulses and thus the speed might be wrong. If
Log is chosen and “no pulse” condition is detected, then
the system generates the alarm “2005 Log data
unreliable”.

Note: If you have a dual-axis doppler log which can

measure both water and bottom track, then installation
parameters can be set to receive water tracking as log
device.

Dual log (water):

If checked, a dual log is used as speed and course source. “(water)” is used to indicate that this information is from
water track of dual log.

Dual log (bottom):

If chosen, a dual log is used as speed and course source. “(bottom)” is used to indicate that this information is from
bottom track of dual log.

19-1
19. Navigation Sensors

ARPA:

If checked, ARPA is used as speed and course source. The following indications appear to denote source:

(bottom): Log operating in bottom tracking mode.

(water): Log operating in water tracking mode.
(posit.): Position receiver such as GPS.
(manual): Manual speed.
(reftgt): Speed according to reference target.

Manual heading:

If chosen, the operator enters heading manually. Note that this is used only if there are no other sensors chosen.

Gyro1:

Heading source is a gyrocompass. “(mag)” means the source is magnetic heading. True heading source has no
indication. If the source of Gyro1 is a gyro with synchro or stepper interface, the indication “(require set)” appears
when you need to set a new initial value for the gyro.

Gyro2:

Heading source is a gyrocompass. “(mag)” means the source is magnetic heading. True heading source has no
indication.

If you have both gyro1 and gyro2 chosen and if their value differs more than 5°, the system generates the alarm
“2004 Gyro data unreliable”.

Rate gyro:

Heading source is a Rate of Turn gyro. “(calc.)” means the rate of turn is calculated from gyro movement.
Setting initial value of gyro1:

Initial setting of gyro1 is not necessary if it outputs serial data. However, if it is of synchro or stepper type, you will
need to set initial gyro value. If gyro1 requires initial value, then the indication “(require set)” is displayed. Use the
thumbwheel to enter initial value. After you enter a value “require set” disappears.

19-2
 19. Navigation Sensors

Position page
The field of a position sensor contains a label (here
FURUNO 1 and MX 200) which indicates the name of
the sensor; a status (primary/secondary/off) which
indicates if the sensor is used or not; position at conning
position and local datum; speed and course which has
(mag) if the course is referenced to magnetic north. A
DGPS position sensor has additional text Diff, if
differential signal is in use. Latitude and longitude
values will appear in red and with additional text in the
following conditions:

• Kalman filter has excluded the sensor from its

estimated position. Additional text is “Excluded”.

• Received position from position sensor is in

another datum as set to be received in the ECDIS.
Additional text is “Datum”.

• If position sensors have position discrepancy

active. Additional text is “Discrepancy”.

Position sensors have priority, which is indicated as “primary” or “secondary”. Only one sensor can be primary
while the others can be secondary or off. If a position sensor is changed from secondary to primary state and another
position sensor was chosen as primary, then that sensor previously selected to primary state is then automatically
selected to secondary state. When the position source is changed based on priorities and signal validity to another
position source, then you get the alarm “2009 Position source change”. Note that alarm 2009 is active only when the
Kalman filter is off because the filter has his own process to calculate estimated position and in that process priority
given by primary and secondary is not used.

If a DGPS is chosen as primary or secondary, and its status changes from “no Diff” to “Diff” or from “Diff “ to “no
Diff” the system generates the alarm “4027 DGPS pos. Source change” (alarm numbers are from 4027 to 4032
depending on position receiver).

“Pri no alarm” and “Sec no alarm” can be chosen from the DPGS box if you want to disable the alarm “4027 DGPS
pos. source change”. These selections are intended for the area where the differential coverage is fading. One
example is if you sail along coastline but you are so far away that the differential signal changes its status very often.

The system generates the alarm “4038 Datum mismatch” (alarm numbers are from 4038 to 4043 depending on the
position receiver) if output datum of a chosen position sensor (status other than Off) is changed from WGS-84 to
another datum or if chosen position sensor does not send datum message. Additional text “datum” appears, in red.
Further, lat/lon values for the position sensor turn red. If the position sensor is also used for system position, Kalman
filter and own ship position (Lat/Lon values and datum used) are indicated in red. If output datum of a chosen
position sensor is changed from no datum message or another datum to WGS-84 and the user has used the selection
Primary or Secondary, then the system generates the alarm “4044 Datum change” (alarm numbers are from 4044 to
4049 depending on position receiver).

Note: The ability to check datum of position is a relatively new feature for position receivers. It was introduced in
standard IEC 61162-1 Ed2, published in July 2000. Only EPFS (for example GPS or DGPS) which has “IEC 61162-
1 Ed 2 (2000-7)” indicated in their type approval certificate can support the ECDIS to detect datum mismatch.

The system generates the alarm “2007 Position discrepancy” if there is discrepancy in position. Together with this
alarm, the system shows the text “Discrepancy” in red in the Position page for a position sensor which has position
discrepancy active.

19-3
19. Navigation Sensors

Enable:

Check to align chart, using the “drag and drop” feature.

Chart alignment:

Alignment is automatically chosen if the user has defined position offset by using the chart align feature. The offset
values are given in nautical miles and degrees. If position alignment is used, the user is reminded of it every 30
minutes by the alarm “2011 ChartAlign: over 30 min”.

Dead rec:

The system automatically chooses dead reckoning if there are no valid and chosen position sources and if there are
valid and chosen speed and course sources. If the system has chosen dead reckoning, then the user can enter a new
position for the ship in the Lat and Lon fields.

Kalman filter:

The Kalman filter calculates estimated position using all valid and chosen position, speed and course sensors.
Choose On to activate this feature.

19-4
 19. Navigation Sensors

Other page
Set and Drift: See description below.

Wind: Posn

Wind (True or North) speed (Kt or m/s) and direction

are displayed. Note that true wind is wind relative to
own ship heading. For further details, see paragraph
19.10 “Wind Sensor”.

Depth below trans:

Depth from hull at bow and aft to bottom. A depth

alarm value may be entered to alert you to

Temperature:

Water surface temperature.

Water current:

Tide at current position.

AIS targets:

Status of AIS data. Check Danger & Lost Alms to get

alarm for dangerous or lost target.

Set and drift:

Check the Manual box to manually set speed and course of drift.

Note that you can choose manual drift only if there are no automatic sources for SOG and COG. In other words, you
have neither a dual-axis log nor any position receiver available.

Angle = Difference between heading and COG

Spd = Speed component of the drift vector

Crs = Course component of the drift vector

Vector defined by (SOG and COG) is equal to vector sum of vectors defined by (SPD and HDG) and (set and drift).

North

crs
SOG HDG
COG spd
SPD

SPD: water speed

HDG: heading of ship
gle SOG: speed over ground
an
COG: course over ground
spd: speed of drift
crs: course of drift
angle: difference between HDG and COG

19-5
19. Navigation Sensors

19.2 Source of Position

The figure below shows how source for position is chosen. The Kalman filter uses all position sensors which have
either primary or secondary as input for its calculation. DGPS and SYLEDIS position sensors are considered more
accurate than other position sensors.

The latitude and longitude position is shown at the upper right corner on the ECDIS display, and in the example
below the position source is DGPS. Other indications which may be displayed in the position area are as follows:

• NO POSIT: Appears (in red) when no dead reckoning sensors are chosen and valid.

• DEAD REC: Shown (in red) when position source is dead reckoning.

• DGPS, GPS: LORAN, DECCA or SYLEDIS: Name of position source.

• LOST DGPS: Shown (in red) when the user-selected DGPS device has lost the DGPS signal.

• FIL LOST DGPS: Shown (in red) when the Kalman filter is in use and the user-selected DGPS device has lost
the DGPS signal.

• FILTER HIGH: Shown when the position source is the Kalman filter with high-precision position sensor.

• FILTER: Shown when position source is the Kalman filter without high-precision position sensor.

• BAD FILTER: Shown (in red) when position source is the Kalman filter and the filter has excluded at least one
of the chosen sensors because of poor accuracy.

Selected and position exists

KALMAN filter

Not GPS in diff. mode

selected or SYLEDIS Selected and position exists
selected as
PRIMARY

Not selected GPS in diff. mode

or no position or SYLEDIS Selected and position exists
selected as
SECONDARY
Position
Not selected Any other than used by
or no position GPS in diff. mode the system
Selected and position exists
or SYLEDIS
selected as
PRIMARY
Any other than Selected and
Not selected GPS in diff. mode
or no position position exists
or SYLEDIS
selected as
Selected and SECONDARY
no posit ion
Not selected
or no position Backup
Dead Reckoning

If the system changes the source of position because of lost sensor data or the differential mode is changed on a
DPGS device, the system immediately generates the alarm “2009 Position source change”. If the Kalman filter is
used, the system generates the alarm “2010 Filter: Pos source change” after a time out period of 90 sec.

If a chosen DGPS sensor changes its operation mode and its status is primary or secondary, then the system
generates the alarm “4027 DGPS pos. source change” (4027 for first sensor, 4028 for second, etc.). These alarms are
not generated if the user has chosen Pri no alarm or Sec no alarm.

If source of position includes a position sensor which is in datum mismatch condition, the latitude, longitude and
chosen datum are displayed in red.

19-6
 19. Navigation Sensors

19.3 Primary and Secondary Positions of Own Ship

The system has three different positions for own ship: System position, primary position and secondary position:

• System position: Used for navigation and steering. See “Source of Position” on page 19-6.

• Primary position: Position generated by position source chosen as primary position source.

• Secondary position: Position generated by position source chosen as secondary position source.

The position source for primary position of own ship is chosen either as Primary or as Pri no alarm on the Position
page of the Sensors dialog box.

The position source for secondary position of own ship is chosen either as Secondary or as Sec no alarm on the
Position page of the Sensors dialog box. Secondary position of own ship is not available as latitude/longitude value
for the user.

GPS in diff. mode

or SYLEDIS Selected and position exists
selected as
SECONDARY
Any other than Secondary
Not selected Selected and position
GPS in diff. mode position exists
or no position or SYLEDIS of the
selected as own ship
SECONDARY used by
the system
Not selected
or no position Secondary position
of own ship is
is not valid

System, primary and secondary positions of the own

ship may be plotted on the ECDIS display with the Past
tracks feature. You can control their visibility from the
Tracking page of the Chart Display dialog box, shown
right. In this example, past tracks are plotted using Ship
system position.

19-7
19. Navigation Sensors

19.4 Position Discrepancy Alarm

You can activate the alarm “2007 Position discrepancy”
from the Initial Settings dialog box. The alarm is active
between primary position and any secondary positions.
Note that the alarm is also effective between own ship
position and any positions, since ECDIS compass
position discrepancy between position used by system
(own ship position) and any individual position sensor
selected as primary or secondary source of position. To
deactivate the alarm set limit as 0.00.

19-8
 19. Navigation Sensors

19.5 Source of SOG, COG, Speed, Heading, ROT,

Drift and Docking Speed Components
The figure below shows how various sources of navigation data are chosen. “SOG, COG” is speed over ground and
course over ground, respectively. “Speed” is speed over water, “Drift” is the difference between speed over water
and speed over ground. Docking speed components are bow speed (transversal), stern speed (transversal) and center
speed (longitudinal).

Heading used by the system is shown at the upper right corner of the ECDIS display. In the example shown below,
heading is received from a gyrocompass and it is shown without additional text, meaning the value is referenced to
true North. Additional gyro-related text which may appear are “(mag)” if the value is referenced to magnetic North,
“(man)” if the value has been manually entered; or “(corr)”, which is displayed in red, if the value includes gyro
correction.

Manual Selected
COURSE

Not selected Selected and value exist

GYRO 1

Heading
used by
Not selected the system
or no value Selected and value exist
GYRO 2

Not selected
or no value GYRO from Available
RADAR

Not available
Alarm 2002
No Course
Available

ROT used by the system is shown in the Speed/Course page of the Sensors dialog box. The Rate Gyro field shows
the text “(calc.)” when the system calculates ROT from movement of heading. No text is shown when the value is
received from an ROT gyro.

Posn
Calculated ROT Selected in Installation parameters
from movement
of Heading

Not selected in Installation parameters

Value exists ROT

ROT Gyro used by
system

No value
Alarm 4018
ROT gyro error

19-9
19. Navigation Sensors

SOG/COG used by the system is shown at the upper right corner of the ECDIS display. In the example below, COG
and SOG are from chosen position sensors and this is indicated with the text “(pos)”. Other text which denote
SOG/COG source are
“(bot)”: Bottom tracking dual-axis log
“(wat)”: Water tracking log
“(arpa)”: Mixed sources of COG and SOG in the connected ARPA radar
“(pos)”: Average of chosen position sensors
“(filter)”: Kalman filter
“(man)”: Manual entry
Note that (pos), (bot), (wat) and (man) could come from direct interfaces of the system or from the connected ARPA
radar.

Average of
SOG/COG from all Selected and value exist
selected DGPS,
GPS or SYLEDIS

DUALLOG
Not selected Selected and value exist
(Bottom track of
or no value
dual axis doppler
log)

Not selected RADAR

or no value (measures
Selected and value exist
SOG/COG
from target
= Autodrift) SOG/COG
Not selected Average of used by
or no value SOG/COG from all the system
Selected and value exist
selected Decca,
Loran or
Ref.Target

Not selected KALMAN filter Selected and

or no value calculation result value exist
from the movement
of position

Not selected
or no value Water speed
and
Gyro heading

The figure below show the source of docking speed components used for the predictor.

Installation parameter offset values

ROT used by the system

Bow and
SOG/COG used by the system stern speed
Calculator
used by
the system
Speed (water speed) used by the system

Heading used by the system

19-10
 19. Navigation Sensors

The figure below shows the source of water speed is used for drift calculation.

Manual Selected
SPEED

LOG
Not selected (Water track of Selected and value exist
dual axis doppler
log OR Pilot log) Speed
used by
the system
Not selected
(Water
or no value RADAR Selected and value exist
(measures Speed)
water speed)

Not selected SOG, if available

or no value from any of Available
selected position
receiver

Not available
Alarm 2001
No Speed
Available

Drift used by the system is shown in the Other page of the Sensors dialog box. In the example below, set and drift
have been entered manually since the Manual box is checked. Other text which may appear to show source of set
and drift are

“(log)”: Log or dual axis log

“(posit)”: Position sensor
“(filter)”: Kalman filter
“(man)”: Manual entry.

Manual Selected
Posn

DRIFT

Not selected
Drift
SOG/COG used by the system used by
the system
Speed (water speed) used by the system Calculator

Heading used by the system

19-11
19. Navigation Sensors

Alarm related to SOG, COG, speed, heading, ROT, drift and docking speed components
It is possible that the user has not chosen any speed or heading sensors, or that the chosen sensors do not have any
valid values. This kind of a situation is critical for the system, because it cannot even perform dead reckoning. When
no speed source is available, the system generates the alarm “2001 No speed available”. When no heading source is
available the system generates the alarm “ 2002 No heading available”.

The system may find that SOG and/or COG from the sensors are unreliable, at which time it generates the alarm
“2013 SOG&COG unreliable”. Note that the source of SOG and COG is not only speed and course sensors, but the
source can also be position-fixing equipment. For more information about source priority for SOG/COG, see
paragraph 19.5 “Source of SOG, COG, Speed, Heading, ROT, Drift and Docking Speed Components”.

Verify and choose valid sensors in the Speed/Course and Pos pages of the Sensors dialog box for SOG and COG
used by the system.

19-12
 19. Navigation Sensors

19.6 Dual Gyro Interface for DNV NAUT-AW

DNV NAUT-AW requires dual gyro interface for a track control system, which consists of the ECDIS and a
Trackpilot. The benefit of this arrangement is that loss of a single gyro does not interrupt track control. The track
control system can continue smoothly with a backup gyro.

Dual gyro interface is accomplished by connecting two gyros (Gyro 1 and Gyro 2) directly to the Trackpilot. A
selection switch (first priority Gyro selector) is used to choose heading source for Trackpilot, ECDIS and common
gyro distribution unit. The ECDIS indicates the state of “First priority Gyro Choose selector” switch on the
Speed/Course page of the Sensors dialog box, with the text indication “active” or “backup” in the Gyro 1 or Gyro 2
field.

Smoothing is added for smooth transition (i.e., without unexpected large rudder movements) from one gyro source
to another gyro source. This smoothing is used both for user requested changes (i.e., user change position of “First
priority Gyro Choose selector”) and for automatic changes (i.e., automatic continuation with backup source).

Gyro 1 Gyro 2

First priority Gyro

Gyro selector ARP
AAR
Repeater
A
P

Common
Distribution
Unit for Gyro AR
P
A
(Selected gyro ARPA
(Gyro 1 or Gyro 2)

Gyro 1

Gyro 2 IEC-61162-1 ($XxHDT)

or
Stepper/Synchro Posn

Gyro 1 Gyro 2 Gyro 1

Select
ECDIS
TrackPilot Gyro 2

Gyro 2 through Trackpilot

Gyro data distribution for track control system

19-13
19. Navigation Sensors

19.6.1 Indication of gyro source

Information area
Possible gyro source indications, which appear at the upper right corner, are as follows:

• (1): Heading used by the ECDIS is from Gyro 1.

• (2): Heading used by the ECDIS is from Gyro 2.

• (cor1): Heading used by the ECDIS is from Gyro 1 and that gyro correction has been used

• (cor2): Heading used by the ECDIS is from Gyro 2 and that gyro correction has been used

• (mg1): Heading used by the ECDIS is from Gyro 1 which is a magnetic compass

• (mg2): Heading used by the ECDIS is from Gyro 2 which is a magnetic compass

Above is an example where “First priority Gyro selection” switch is in state Gyro 2.

19-14
 19. Navigation Sensors

Sensors dialog box

The Speed/Course page of the Sensors dialog box shows gyro indication as follows:

• (active): The system uses value from this gyro which is chosen by “First priority Gyro Choose selector”.

• (backup): The system uses value from this gyro which is NOT chosen by “First priority Gyro Choose selector”

In the example screen at left in the figure below, heading information from Gyro 2 is used by a Trackpilot and the
ECDIS. The indication “(active)” in the Gyro 2 field indicates that the system uses user-chosen gyro as source of
heading (State of “First priority gyro selector” switch). In this case the text “(2)”appears at the upper right corner.

In the example screen at right in the figure below, heading value from Gyro 1 is lost. In this case, the system
automatically chooses Gyro 2 to be used as the source of heading. The indication “(backup)” in the Gyro 2 field
means that a backup gyro is used.

19.6.2 Gyro-associated alarms

When no gyro value is received from gyro chosen by “First priority gyro selection”, alarm AL 10 (Missing working
gyro) is generated at the Trackpilot.

When no gyro value is received from a gyro not chosen by “First priority gyro selection”, alarm AL 11 (Reference
gyro missing or Compass comparison alarm) is generated at the Trackpilot. Note that alarm AL 11 is activated also
if the deviation between Gyro 1 and Gyro 2 is too large (default is 12º).

ECDIS generates alarm 4005 for missing Gyro 1 and alarm 4006 for missing Gyro 2. If the deviation between gyro
1 and gyro 2 is over 5º, then ECDIS generates the alarm 2004 Gyro data unreliable.

19-15
19. Navigation Sensors

19.7 Filter Operation

The ECDIS has an automatic multi-sensor Kalman filter for position. The filter can calculate estimated position
using all operative position sensors.

To view position sensor status, place the cursor on the Position indication, confirm that Sensors appears in the
mouse functions area and then push the right mouse button.

Operator can manually include or exclude sensors. Remaining sensors (= sensors with any selection other than OFF)
are included in the filter processing. The purpose of this filter is to continuously monitor the position given by each
individual sensor to determine if the sensor is reliable or not. Also chosen gyro and log sensors are included into this
analysis. The filter knows the behavior of different types of sensors (Loran, Decca, GPS, DGPS, etc.). The result of
the processing is a smoothed position which is used as final position of the ship. The filter eliminates all “position
jumps” in the final position even if there is a position jump in a sensor. (A position jump is caused by line change in
Decca, loss of differential signal with DGPS, etc.)

The filter can be selected or deselected by switching it ON or OFF. When switching filter state from ON to OFF,
new start position of the filter is set as an average value of the enabled sensors (sensors with any selection other than
OFF). Change the filter state from OFF to ON, and the filter continues processing from current position.

When the filter is chosen, alarms are generated if the system does not have a valid position available. No alarms are
generated for position jumps of the position sensors chosen to be used with the filter as long as the filter is able to
estimate a reliable position based on chosen position sensors. If there is a change in the availability of the sensor
chosen with the Kalman filter and if the filter cannot continue the same level of position accuracy, then the system
generates the alarm “2010 Filter: Pos source change”. This change of available sensor may or may not affect the
operation of the filter.

The filter requires at least one position sensor and one course sensor (i.e., gyro) chosen and valid in order to operate.
The filter has one main alarm “2000 Filter: Pos unreliable”. This alarm means that the filter is not able to calculate
the position from the connected sensors. This can happen if there is only one position sensor connected and the
position generated by it becomes unreliable or if there are more position sensors but they are deviating too much.
Alarm can appear also if the speed/course sensor (Log or Gyro) is found to be unreliable. Note that the filter
indicates unreliable position sensor by showing position in red.

If the filter is used without automatic route steering then, in case of alarm 2000, only the filter itself is set in the OFF
state. After generating the alarm 2000, the system will use its normal method to choose position source from
available sensor. Normally, this causes a jump in the position. After the alarm 2000 is generated, the user should
evaluate which sensor caused the problem. Disable the bad sensor and then turn the filter ON again.

The Kalman filter is designed to support automatic route steering and thus it requires that you have some speed. If
the speed is less than the value set in the installation parameters (for example 4 kt), the system generates the alarm
“2008 Filter: Speed below 4 kn”. If you don't use automatic route steering, the system also chooses the filter as OFF
after generating the alarm 2008. With automatic route steering the system keeps the filter chosen, but repeats alarm
2008.

The system can check that each chosen position sensor is within position discrepancy limit set by the user. (For
further details, see paragraph 19.5 “Position Discrepancy Alarm”.) If a position sensor has position discrepancy
active, it is automatically excluded from the Kalman filter. This feature enables the user to control how much
discrepancy there can be between the Kalman filter position and any position sensor.

19-16
 19. Navigation Sensors

19.7.1 Filter and automatic route steering

The filter can operate based on only one position sensor and one gyro. However, this minimum selection is not
suitable for automatic route steering or program track, which both require an independent speed source. With
automatic route steering the minimum selection is for GOTO Waypoint:

• One position sensors, gyro and log or

• Two position sensors and gyro

• And for GOTO Track:

• One high-precision position sensor, gyro and log or

• One high-precision position sensor, secondary position sensors and gyro

Source of position indicates what kind of sensors the filter is using for position calculation. The permanent
indication is shown at the top right hand corner:

• FILTER: There is no high-precision position sensor chosen and available for the filter.

• FILTER HIGH: There is a high-precision position sensor chosen and available for the filter. It is possible to use
track steering modes which require accurate position (Goto Track, Program Track).

Filter state, automatic route steering and alarm

Filter state, automatic route steering and alarm
Alarm Meaning
2000 Filter: Pos unreliable The filter is not able to calculate the position from the connected sensors.
2006 Route: CRS jump possible Generated after alarm 2000 is displayed. It reminds you that if you want to
continue automatic route steering you need to choose one of the position
sensors. Then, most probably your ship will perform a turn as a
consequence of new position.
2470 Disabled: Needs filter on You tried to enable automatic route steering without Kalman filter
positioning.
2475 Route: Needs filter ON Filter is lost during automatic route steering.
2476 Route: Needs log sensor Log device is lost during automatic route steering and your remaining log
selection doesn’t meet minimum requirements.
2490 Disabled: Needs log sensor You tried to enable automatic route steering without an independent speed
source.
2491 Disabled: Needs diff pos. You tried to enable automatic route steering for GOTO Track mode without
a high-precision sensor.
2492 Route: Needs diff pos. You lost high-precision sensor in automatic steering, GOTO Track mode,
and remaining sensor doesn’t meet the minimum requirements for high-
precision sensor.
2493 ProgTrack: Needs Filter You lost the Kalman filter position during program track.
ON
2494 ProgTrack: Needs diff pos. You lost high-precision position sensor during program track and remaining
sensor doesn’t meet the minimum requirements for high-precision sensor
remaining selection doesn't meet the minimum.
2495 ProgTrack: Needs log You lost a log device during program track and your remaining log devices
sensor selections don’t meet the minimum requirements.

19-17
19. Navigation Sensors

About alarm “2000 Filter: Pos unreliable”

If the filter is used with automatic route steering then, in case of alarm “2000 Filter: Pos unreliable”, all position
sensors and the filter itself are switched OFF and the system continues with backup dead reckoning, based on
chosen speed/course sensors. In this case it is recommended that you leave automatic route steering and continue
using a more traditional steering mode until you find the reason why alarm 2000 was generated. If you don't leave
automatic route steering, the system will repeat alarm “2475 Route: Needs filter ON” every 15 seconds.

After the alarm 2000 is generated, the user should leave automatic route steering and evaluate which sensor caused
the problem. If the ship position from a position sensor is acceptable, switch it on. Don't choose any sensor which
causes jumping. Then, you can turn the filter ON again and continue automatic route steering.

19.8 Position Alignment

The position alignment feature functions to fine tune ship’s position by using radar overlay, radar echo target and
ECDIS chart material.

If position alignment is in use, the ECDIS will generate the following alarm every 30 minutes to remind the user to
align position: “2352 ChartAlign: over 30 min”.

19.8.1 Position alignment by means of the ECDIS

If the radar echo targets' symbols are not positioned correctly, there is either position error or gyro error or some
combination of these errors.

Position may be aligned on the ECDIS display by moving own ship position or by moving ARPA radar target
position. Moving is done by dragging and dropping own ship symbol or ARPA radar target to desired location. Drag
and drop means that you place the object on desired location by rolling the trackball while pressing and holding
down the left mouse button and then “anchoring” the object by releasing the left mouse button.

Note: If the radar overlay is on the ECDIS display when position alignment is done, then

• Mode of radar overlay is temporarily changed to “Radar over Chart”.

• ECDIS temporarily uses radar overlay color also for own ship and ARPA targets symbols.

To align position, do the following:

1. Choose desired chart material (ARCS or S57).

2. Choose suitable radar target manually for tracking.

3. Place the cursor on the position indication in the information area and then push the right mouse button to
display the Sensors dialog box. Open the Position page, and then check Enable chart align.

Spd/Cse Posn

19-18
 19. Navigation Sensors

4. Use the trackball and the left mouse button to drag and drop a symbol or suitable chart detail on a radar target.
See figures below.

Before position alignment After position alignment

5. If the position source is dead reckoning, the position set with chart alignment is the new start position for dead
reckoning. In this case, there is no offset and the text indication OFFSET does not appear. If the position source
is something other than dead reckoning, then the indication OFFSET is displayed at the upper part of the
information area. Also the range and bearing of the offset are shown in the Position page of the Sensors dialog
box. See the figure at the top of the next page.
You can see range and
bearing of the offset in the
Position page of the Sensors
dialog box.
Spd/Cse Posn

The indication OFFSET

appears on the ECDIS
display.

19-19
19. Navigation Sensors

19.8.2 Resetting position alignment

To reset position alignment, proceed as follows:

1. Open the Sensors dialog box and then open the Position page.

2. Uncheck “Chart Align”.

Spd/Cse Posn

..

3. Check that the indication OFFSET is not shown in the upper part of the information area, to the right of the
position source indication.

19.8.3 Position alignment by ARPA radar

A user chart, showing coast line, buoys, etc., can be used as a position reference once the ARPA radar is able to see
these objects. If the ARPA radar targets and the user chart are not exactly overlapping there is either position error
or gyro error or some combination of these errors. This feature can only be performed on ARPA radars which are
able to display a user chart.

Position alignment with ARPA radar which has a CHART ALIGN button
1. Display user chart on the ARPA radar.

2. Press the CHART ALIGN button on the ARPA radar display once. Then, use the trackball on the ARPA radar
to move the user chart so that it overlaps radar echoes correctly. Press the CHART ALIGN button again once.
Then the amount of alignment is transferred to the ECDIS.
If the position source is dead reckoning, the position set with chart alignment is the new start position for dead
reckoning. In this case there is no offset and no OFFSET indication in the information area. If the position
source is something other than dead reckoning, then the indication OFFSET is displayed at the upper part of the
information area, to the right of the position source.

19-20
 19. Navigation Sensors

19.9 Gyro Error Correction

Typical gyro error sources are installation error, speed/latitude error and dynamic settling error. Typically you detect
gyro error on a user chart superimposed on the ARPA picture, on ARPA targets drawn on the ECDIS display or on
radar overlay drawn on the ECDIS display.

Gyro error correction is used to remove the difference between the chart north and the gyro north.

Gyro error can be corrected totally or partially in the gyro compass system itself. Many gyro compass systems have
automatic speed/latitude corrector, which may use automatic or manual input for speed and latitude. Some
gyrocompass systems also include correction for dynamic settling error.

Automatic gyro error correction based on tabled speed/latitude correction can be used, if the gyrocompass itself does
not make any corresponding correction.

Gyro error compensation can be used to:

• Correct user chart on ARPA radar screen

• Correct ARPA target positions on ECDIS display

• Correct radar overlay drawn on ECDIS display

• Compensate courses used in route monitoring and automatic route steering.

If you have enabled Gyro error correction (see the next

page) and if this correction has modified the value of the
own ship heading, then this condition is always visible
in the information area. Red “(corr)” means the gyro
value has been corrected.

If you have enabled both Gyro error correction from

ship parameters and Gyro error compensation from route
parameters, then Plan and Next in the information area
display show compensated values, as shown in the
example at right. Also, course to steer (used by
automatic route steering) is compensated in this case.

The current value of gyro correction and its method are

displayed in the Other page of the Sensors dialog box as
shown in the example at right. “Table” means Posn
speed/latitude table is the source for gyro correction;
“Manual” indicates manual entry of gyro correction.

19-21
19. Navigation Sensors

19.9.1 Enabling gyro error correction

To enable gyro error correction, which is effective for radar, ECDIS and route steering, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area, push the left mouse button,
choose Initial Settings from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

2. Place the cursor on the triangle in the Initial Settings dialog box, choose Navigation Parameters from the menu
and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Choose Ship and Route parameters from the sub menu and then push the thumbwheel.

4. Place the cursor in the Gyro error correction box, spin the thumbwheel to choose Auto and then push the
thumbwheel. This enables automatic gyro correction.

Gyro correction related settings in Ship parameters field in Ship and Route parameters
dialog box
Ship parameters field

Gyro error correction:

• Off: Disables any gyro error correction.
• Auto: Enables automatic gyro correction based on tabled speed/latitude.
• Manual: Enables manual gyro error correction, in the Manual gyro correction field.
Gyro spd/lat error: Chooses the automatic gyro error compensation based on tabled speed/latitude correction. Gyro
error correction must be set for Auto for Gyro spd/lat error to be effective.

Max gyro error correction: Sets limit for maximum correction allowed. Typical value is 3 degrees.

Manual gyro correction: Adjusts gyro error manually. Note that to enable this function you have to switch Gyro
error correction to the Manual position.

Route parameters field

Gyro error compensation: Choose ON if set courses in route steering are corrected for gyro error.

19-22
 19. Navigation Sensors

19.10 Wind Sensor

ECDIS can display and output wind data in the following three formats:
Apparent: Windmeter-measured wind speed and direction.
Wind angle reference: Heading
North: True wind angle, true wind speed
Wind angle reference: True North
Theoretical: True wind angle, true wind speed
Wind angle reference: Heading

The illustration below shows wind speed and direction with given ship data.

The wind values are as shown below.

Ship information:
COG: 60 deg SOG: 8.7 kt
Heading: 45 deg

Wind angle Wind speed

Apparent: 345 deg 10 kt
North: 330 deg 5 kt
Theoretical: 285 deg 5kt

19-23
19. Navigation Sensors

True wind or Relative wind may be selected from the Other dialog box in the Sensors menu.

Relative wind/true wind

selection box

19.10.1 Installation parameter for wind sensor

There are installation parameters for a wind sensor:
• Source of True wind (Setting for inputted serial data)
• Display format (Relative wind, true wind)
• Output format to ARPA (output format to ARPA)
The tables which follow describe the above-mentioned parameters. Greyed options are default settings.

Source of true wind

Option Description

Receive (R)elative/Apparent Wind and Calculate True R(Relative) is extracted from the MWV sentence, read
Wind as Apparent data and North and Theoretical are
calculated.

Receive (T)heoretical Wind(HDG) and Calculate True T(True) is extracted from the MWV sentence, read as
Wind Theoretical data and North and Apparent are calculated.

Receiver (T)rue Wind(North) and use it directly T(True) is extracted from the MWV sentence, read as
North data and Apparent and Theoretical are calculated.

Display format
Option Option in Sensor dialog box

Rel wind True wind

Display Rel(=Theoretical) or True(=North) Theoretical North

Display Rel(=Apparent) or True(=North) Apparent North

Display Rel(=Apparent) or True(=Theoretical) Apparent Theoretical

19-24
 19. Navigation Sensors

Output to ARPA
Option Description
Output T(=True/North) only The reference field of the MWV sentence is T(True) and North data is
output.

Output T(=True/Theoretical) only The reference field of the MWV sentence is T(True) and Theoretical data is
output.
Output R(=Rel/Apparent) only The reference field of the MWV sentence is R(Relative) and Apparent data
is output.
Output R(=Rel/Theoretical) only The reference field of the MWV sentence is R(Relative) and Theoretical
data is output.

The output sentence of the items Option on Sensor dialog box

below changes according to setting
of Rel Wind and True Wind. Rel Wind True wind

Output T(=True/North) or The reference field of the MWV The reference field of the MWV
R(=Apparent) sentence is R(Relative) and sentence is T(True) and North data is
Apparent data is output output.
Output T(=True/North) or The reference field of the MWV The reference field of the MWV
R(=Theoretical) sentence is R(Relative) and sentence is T(True) and North data is
Theoretical data is output. output.
Output T(=True/Theoretical) or The reference field of the MWV The reference field of the MWV
R(=Apparent) sentence is R(Relative) and sentence is T(True) and Theoretical
Apparent data is output. data is output.

MWV sentence
$--MWV,x.x,a,x.x,a,A*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +--------- 6
| | | | +------------ 5
| | | +--------------- 4
| | +----------------- 3
| +--------------------- 2
+------------------------ 1

1. Wind angle, 0 to 359 (degrees)

2. Reference, R=relative, T=true
3. Wind speed
4. Wind speed units, K/M/N
5. Status, A=data valid, V=data invalid
6. Checksum

19-25
19. Navigation Sensors

19.11 Depth Sensor

The depth output from a depth sensor (for example, echo sounder) is shown on the Other page in the Sensors dialog
box.

The content of the Other page in the

Sensor menu depends on sensors
connected. Posn

In this example there are two transducers

(bow and aft) installed.

The system displays depth value as depth below the transducer. If required, you can activate an alarm, in the Echo
alarm box, based on the depth below the transducer. If the measured depth is less than the set at Echo alarm, the
system generates the alarm “1200 Depth below limit”.

19-26
 19. Navigation Sensors

19.12 Sensor-related Alarms

The following alarms, which are not described elsewhere, are related to sensors.
“2055 ARPA Radar Comm. Error”: Lost connection to ARPA radar 1. As a consequence the system loses tracked
ARPA targets and speed/course available from ARPA.
“2056 ARPA Radar Comm. Error”: Lost connection to ARPA radar 2. As a consequence the system loses tracked
ARPA targets and speed/course available from ARPA.
“2057 ARPA Radar Comm. Error”: Lost connection to ARPA radar 3. As a consequence the system loses tracked
ARPA targets and speed/course available from ARPA.
“2058 ARPA Radar Comm. Error”: Lost connection to ARPA radar 4. As a consequence the system loses tracked
ARPA targets and speed/course available from ARPA.
“2071 Source ARPA Radar changed”: Lost connection to the ARPA radar which is the source of tracked ARPA
targets and speed/course information. Then, if other ARPA radars exist, the system chooses one of them as the new
source of tracked ARPA targets and speed/course information and the system generates alarm 2071.
“4001 B-Adapter Error”: Lost connection to B-Adapter, which is an interface to various navigation sensors.
“4002 Engine Control Comm Error : Lost connection to engine control, which could be an interface to various
navigation sensors.
“4005 Gyro Error”: Lost connection to gyro1 sensor.
“4006 Gyro Error”: Lost connection to gyro2 sensor.
“4008 Log Error”: Lost connection to log sensor.
“4009 Dual Axis Log Error”: Lost connection to dual axis log sensor.
“4010 Echo Sounder Error”: Lost connection to echo sounder sensor.
“4011 Wind Sensor Error”: Lost connection to wind sensor.
“4012 Position Eq Error”: Lost connection to position sensor number 1.
“4013 Position Eq Error”: Lost connection to position sensor number 2.
“4014 Position Eq Error”: Lost connection to position sensor number 3.
“4015 Position Eq Error”: Lost connection to position sensor number 4.
“4016 Position Eq Error”: Lost connection to position sensor number 5.
“4018 ROT gyro error”: Lost connection to ROT gyro sensor.
“4021 ARPA Radar system Error”: Displayed if ARPA radar number 1 reports internal failure.
“4022 ARPA Radar system Error”: Displayed if ARPA radar number 2 reports internal failure.
“4023 ARPA Radar system Error”: Displayed if ARPA radar number 3 reports internal failure.
“4024 ARPA Radar system Error”: Displayed if ARPA radar number 4 reports internal failure.
“4201 Ext. navigation eq. error”: Displayed if external navigation equipment number 1 reports internal failure.
“4202 Ext. navigation eq. error”: Displayed if external navigation equipment number 2 reports internal failure.
“4203 Ext. navigation eq. error”: Displayed if external navigation equipment number 3 reports internal failure.
“4204 Ext. navigation eq. error”: Displayed if external navigation equipment number 4 reports internal failure.
“4205 Ext. navigation eq. error”: Displayed if external navigation equipment number 5 reports internal failure.
“4206 Ext. navigation eq. error”: Displayed if external navigation equipment number 6 reports internal failure.
“4207 Ext. navigation eq. error”: Displayed if external navigation equipment number 7 reports internal failure.
“4208 Ext. navigation eq. error”: Displayed if external navigation equipment number 8 reports internal failure.

19-27
19. Navigation Sensors

This page intentionally left blank.

19-28
20. ARPA Target Functions

20.1 ARPA Radar Targets

ARPA-tracked targets may also be displayed on the ECDIS display. To do this, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to display Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area.

2. Push the left mouse button.

3. Place the cursor on an arrow tab and click it until the Targets page appears.

4. Click the Std or Oth radio button of ARPA Targets.

Note: AIS and ARPA targets viewing limitations are as below.

• AIS and ARPA targets are displayed on top of chart 1:1,000,001 for S57 charts.

• AIS and ARPA targets are displayed on top of chart 1:1,900,001 for ARCS charts. This allows display
of AIS and ARPA targets on top of the largest scale ocean charts (original scale 1:3,500,000) when
they are zoomed to overscale.

20.1.1 Dangerous ARPA radar targets

A dangerous ARPA radar target is displayed on the ECDIS as a blinking target symbol in green and red color
alternately. The ECDIS has its own definition for dangerous target limits, thus an ARPA radar may show a target as
dangerous while ECDIS shows it as safe and vice versa. You can set CPA and TCPA limits used by the ECDIS in
the Danger Targets page of Voyage Recording dialog box. For more information, see the paragraph “Setting
conditions of viewing and logging danger targets” on page 23-7.

20.1.2 Lost ARPA radar targets

A lost ARPA radar target is displayed on the ECDIS as a blinking target symbol in green and dark yellow
alternately.

20-1
20. ARPA Target Functions

20.1.3 Displaying true or relative speed vectors

Targets vector can be displayed relative to own ship's heading (relative vector) or with reference to the North (true
vector). Both presentation modes can be used with relative motion or true motion.

Ground stabilised True Vect (G)) Sea stabilised True Vect (S) Relative vector presentation

Vector time (or the length of vectors) and presentation mode can be set on the status bar. Place the cursor on the
item you wish to change, spin the thumbwheel to choose setting and then push the thumbwheel. See the figure
below for location of vector-related items.

North Up TM

20-2
 20. ARPA Target Functions

20.2 Displaying ARPA Target Data

20.2.1 Viewing ARPA data of normal targets
On the ECDIS display, place the cursor on a desired ARPA radar target and then push the thumbwheel.

ARPA Radar target on ECDIS display ARPA target display window ARPA target display with details

The basic target display dialog for an ARPA radar target consists of the following information:
• Target’s number
• Bearing (BRG) and distance (RNG) of the target from own ship
• True speed (SPD) and true course (CSE) of the target
• CPA and TCPA. Note that if TCPA has a negative value, this means that you have already passed the closest
point and the ARPA target is going away from own ship.
• Bow Closest Range (BCR) and Bow Closest Time (BCT)
The detailed target display dialog for an ARPA radar target displays the contents of the basic ARPA target display
plus the following information. To display detailed information, push the left mouse button.

• Status of target. Status can be Query, Tracking or Lost. “Query” indicates a new target for which there is not yet
enough tracking history to have target speed, course, CPA and TCPA available.

• Position of target (Lat, Lon)

User can set Closest Point of Approach (CPA), and Time for CPA (TCPA) to define dangerous ARPA targets. CPA
and TCPA limits are common for ECDIS display and danger target log function of ARPA and AIS targets. On the
ECDIS display, a dangerous ARPA target blinks in green and red color alternately.
Note that the CPA and TCPA limits are only for
ECDIS. ARPA radar has its own setting for dangerous
targets and thus a target which is dangerous on the
ARPA display can be safe on ECDIS and vice versa.
If an ARPA target is within the CPA and TCPA
settings, it is shown as a dangerous ARPA target on
the ECDIS display. Log interval defines time period
for logging.

20-3
20. ARPA Target Functions

20.3 Source of ARPA Radar Targets

To find the source of ARPA radar targets, place the cursor on Radar in the status bar.
North Up TM

To change the source of ARPA radar targets, place the cursor on Radar in the status bar, spin the thumbwheel to
choose desired item and then push the thumbwheel.

20.3.1 ARPA-related alarms

The alarm “2055 ARPA Radar comm error” indicates failure to receive data from connected ARPA radars. The
alarm “2071 Source ARPA Radar changed” informs that the system has automatically changed the source of
ARPA radar targets from current source to a new source. The reason for automatic change is that the communication
with current source is in failure state.

20-4
 20. ARPA Target Functions

20.4 Displaying ARPA Target Past Positions

To display ARPA target past tracks, do the following:
1. Spin the thumbwheel to display Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area, and then push
the left mouse button.
2. Click an arrow tab in the dialog box until the Tracking page appears if it is not already open. Click the Oth or Std
radio button of the item Targets to display ARPA target past positions on the ECDIS.

3. Set the length of track (in minutes) and define number of points to display past track of targets.

Display of ARPA target past track using 1 minute labels

20-5
20. ARPA Target Functions

20.5 ARPA Target Recording Functions

Target recording is used to record ARPA targets information to danger targets log. For more information about
recording a dangerous target, see paragraph 23.3.3 “Dangerous targets log”.

20.6 Using ARPA Targets for Chart Align

Targets can be used for chart alignment. For more information, see paragraph 19.8.3 “Position alignment by using
ARPA radar”.

20-6
21. AIS Target Functions

21.1 Introduction
An AIS transponder can be connected to the ECDIS to display AIS targets received from the AIS transponder. The
ECDIS can store up to 1,000 AIS targets in its storage buffer. When this buffer becomes full of AIS targets, the
Alarm 3501 is generated to alert you to full storage buffer. The storage buffer contains automatic dead reckoning for
all AIS targets, which is based on reported Speed Over Ground (SOG), Course Over Ground (COG), Rate Of Turn
(ROT) and heading. The storage buffer also contains calculation of range, bearing, CPA, TCPA, etc. The CPA and
TCPA limits set for dangerous targets are common for ARPA and AIS targets.

ECDIS can display AIS targets which are within the user-defined range. The maximum number of targets which can
be displayed is 200 and the user may choose the number of targets to display. Alarm 3500 is generated when there
are more than the user-specified amount of AIS targets within the user-chosen range.

The frequency for update of AIS transponder-sent data depends on speed and course of tracked AIS target. The
current reporting rate of each AIS target is available by using the Help/Info feature. The table below shows the IMO
standardized reporting rates for the AIS transponder. Based on the table below, the ECDIS defines which AIS
targets are in tracking, lost or deleted.

Type of Ship IMO nominal Lost target Automatic

reporting indication dead
interval (reporting reckoning of
interval >) target
(reporting
interval >)

Ship at anchor or moored and not moving faster than 3 knots 3 min 15 min 30 min

Ship at anchor or moored and moving faster than 3 knots 10 s 50 s 1 min 40 s

Ship with a speed of between 0 - 14 knots 10 s 50 s 1 min 40 s

Ship with a speed of between 0 - 14 knots and changing course 3 1/3 s 17 s 33 s

Ship with a speed of between 14 - 23 knots 6s 30 s 1 min

Ship with a speed of between 14 - 23 knots and changing 2s 10 s 20 s

course

Ship with a speed of greater than 23 knots 2s 10 s 20 s

Ship with a speed of greater than 23 and changing course 2s 10 s 20 s

An AIS transponder “sees” all ships fitted with an AIS transponder. There can be several hundreds or several
thousands of AIS targets, and of those only a few will be significant for own ship. To remove unnecessary AIS
targets from the ECDIS display, the feature “active and sleeping AIS targets” is available. Initially any new AIS
target received by an AIS transponder is not-active (=“sleeping”). Such non-active targets are shown with a small
triangle. User can pick any AIS target and change it from non-active to active. Active AIS targets are shown with a
large triangle with speed vector, headline, rot indicator, etc. Further, the user can pick active AIS targets and change
their status to non-active.

ECDIS generates AIS-related alarms and these are “Alarm 3502: Dangerous AIS target” and “Alarm 3503: Lost AIS
target”. Only active AIS targets generate alarms. The user can enable or disable AIS target alarms as desired. The
feature “active and sleeping AIS targets” is very effective for focusing on only those AIS targets which need
supervision. The ECDIS further eases the task of the user by automatically changing non-active targets to active
targets, if they meet the dangerous target limits set by CPA and TCA.

21-1
21. AIS Target Functions

21.2 Displaying AIS Targets

Targets which are being tracked by an AIS transponder can also be
displayed on the ECDIS display. To do this;

1. Display Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse

functions area and then push the left mouse button.

2. Click an arrow tab in the Chart Display dialog box until the Targets
page appears, if it is not already displayed.

3. Click the radio button Std or Other of the item Symbol in the AIS
Targets window to display AIS targets.

Note: AIS and ARPA targets viewing limitations are as follows:

• AIS and ARPA targets are displayed on top of chart 1:1,000,001 for S57 charts.

• AIS and ARPA targets are displayed on top of chart 1:1,900,001 for ARCS charts. This allows display
of AIS and ARPA targets on top of the largest scale ocean charts (original scale 1:3,500,000) when
they are zoomed to “overscale”.

See the AIS target examples below where the example at left shows targets’ call sign and the right example shows
targets’ name.

See the examples below where the example at left is a presentation of AIS targets with “true scale symbol” and the
one at right is a presentation with “point symbols”. Note that own ship and AIS targets are displayed as true scale
symbol if the displayed chart scale is larger than set with “Ship true symbol scale” limit on the Tracking page in the
Chart Display dialog box and if the size of the true scale symbol is larger than 6 mm on the chart display.

21-2
 21. AIS Target Functions

21.2.1 Dangerous AIS targets

A dangerous AIS target is displayed as a blinking target symbol, in green and red alternately. You can set CPA and
TCPA limits used by the ECDIS in the Danger Targets page of the Voyage Recording dialog box. For further
details, see “Setting conditions of viewing and logging danger targets” on page 21-6.

21.2.2 Lost AIS targets

A lost AIS target is displayed as a blinking target symbol, in green and dark yellow alternately. Timeout for
displaying AIS target as 1st AIS target:
Vessel speed (kt) Period of time out
At anchor 18 min
0-14 60 sec
14-23 36 sec
>23 12 sec
Lost AIS target symbol will be automatically removed from display if the state “Lost AIS target” for the AIS target
has been in effect 430 seconds. Exception is if the vessel is at anchor, then the time is 36 minutes.

21.2.3 Displaying true or relative speed vectors

AIS targets vector can be displayed relative to own ship's heading (RelVect) or with reference to the North
(TrueVect).

Vector time (or the length of vectors) and presentation mode can be set on the status bar, at the locations circled in
the illustration below.

North Up TM

Note that the above indications are black (or white depending on color scheme) or red depending on chosen display
mode of own ship:

• If the display mode is true motion, the indication TrueVect is displayed in black (or white depending on color
scheme), and the indication RelVect is displayed in orange.

• If the display mode is relative motion the indication TrueVect is displayed in orange, and the indication RelVect
is displayed in black (or white depending on color scheme).

21-3
21. AIS Target Functions

21.2.4 Maximum number and range for displaying AIS targets on

ECDIS
You can choose maximum number of AIS targets to display on the
ECDIS. Further, you can also define the range within which to show
AIS targets on the ECDIS. These items are available on the Targets
page in the Chart Display dialog box.

In this example the max number of AIS targets to display is 200 and
they must be within 24 nm of own ship.

21.2.5 Source of AIS target related alarms

The alarm “3500 AIS Target Overflow” warns that the maximum number of AIS targets set to display on the ECDIS
has exceeded the user-specified maximum range. It is possible that some of the AIS targets are not displayed on the
ECDIS. To display all AIS targets, increase maximum number of AIS targets or decrease value of maximum range.
This can be done on the Tracking page in the Chart Display dialog box.

The alarm “3501 AIS Target storage full” warns that the maximum number of AIS targets which can be stored for
displaying on ECDIS has been exceeded.

The alarm “4037 AIS receive error” warns that data from an AIS transponder is not correctly received.

21-4
 21. AIS Target Functions

21.3 Displaying AIS Target Data

Place the cursor on a desired AIS target and then push the thumbwheel. The AIS Target Dialog window appears,
similar to the one shown below.

AIS target dialog window

AIS target on ECDIS display

The Target Dialog window displays the following information for an AIS target:

AIS Target Name or Call Sign SPD: True speed of the target

BRG: True bearing from own ship CPA and TCPA

RNG: Distance from own ship BCR, BCT: Bow Closest Range, Bow Closest Time

CSE: True course of the target

If more detailed information is needed, place the cursor

in the Target Dialog window and then push the left
mouse button to get the Target Details window.

Note: Availability of data in the Target Details window

is subject to the content the AIS transponder reports.

21-5
21. AIS Target Functions

The operator can set Closest Point of Arrival (CPA), and Time for CPA (TCPA) to define dangerous AIS targets.
CPA and TCPA limits are common for ECDIS display and danger target log function of ARPA and AIS targets. The
ECDIS display shows a dangerous AIS target with its symbol blinking, in green and red alternately.
Note that the CPA and TCPA limits are only for ECDIS. ARPA
radar has its own setting for dangerous targets and thus a target
which is dangerous on the ARPA display can be safe on ECDIS
and vice versa. If an ARPA target is within the CPA and TCPA
settings, it is shown as a dangerous ARPA target on the ECDIS
display. Log interval defines time period for logging.

If an AIS target locates within the CPA and TCPA values, it is shown as a dangerous AIS target on the ECDIS
display. Note that the same situation occurs with ARPA targets.

Note1: If own ship position is based on Dead Reckoning, then CPA/TCPA and BCR/BCT values are not calculated
and not displayed.

Note2: If TCPA has a negative value it means that you have already passed the closest point and the AIS target is
going away form own ship.

21-6
 21. AIS Target Functions

21.4 Displaying AIS Target Past Positions

To display AIS target past tracks, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to display Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area, and then push
the left mouse button.

2. Click an arrow tab in the dialog box until the Tracking page appears if it is not already open. Click the Oth or
Std radio button of the item Targets to display AIS target past positions on the ECDIS.

3. Set the length of track (in minutes) and define number of points to display past track of targets.

Presentation of AIS target past track. ARPA targets have same kind of presentation for past track.

21-7
21. AIS Target Functions

21.4.1 Displaying name or call sign of AIS target

You can display either the name or call sign of AIS targets on the ECDIS display. Place the cursor in the Target
Dialog window and then push the right mouse button to display name and call sing alternately. See the figure below
for display appearance when changing from call signs to names and vice versa.

21-8
 21. AIS Target Functions

21.5 Displaying AIS Interface Status

You can verify the status of the AIS interface on the Other page in the Sensors dialog box. The lower part of this
page is reserved for AIS interface monitoring.

• Received Data: Whether

data from AIS transponder is
correctly received or not
(Status: OK or Error).

• Display: Whether maximum

number of AIS targets set for
display on the ECDIS has
been exceeded within the
defined maximum range or
not (Status: OK or
Overflow).

• Storage: Whether maximum

number of AIS targets for
storage has been exceeded or
not (Status: OK or
Overflow).

Further, you can enable or disable the alarms “Alarm 3502: Dangerous AIS target” and “Alarm 3503: Lost AIS
target” on this page. Check Danger & Lost Alms on the Other page in the Sensors dialog box if you want alarms for
dangerous and lost AIS targets.

21-9
21. AIS Target Functions

21.6 AIS Safety Message

21.6.1 Introduction
You may send and receive messages via the VHF link, to a specified destination (MMSI) or all AIS-equipped ships
in the area. Messages can be sent to warn of safety of navigation, for example, an iceberg sighted. Routine messages
are also permitted. Short safety related messages are only an additional means to broadcast safety information. They
do not remove the requirements of the GMDSS.

To open the Safety message dialog box, which is where all phases of AIS safety messages are initiated, do the
following:

1. Display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push
the left mouse button to open the Main menu.

2. Choose Safety Message from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

The Safety Message dialog box contains the following items:

Filter: Choose category of messages to show in the Safety Message dialog box.

Name: Each message has an individual name based on time of creation or time of receiving of message.

Status: Display status of selected safety message.

Original Name: If selected safety message is reply for received message, original message name is displayed here.

Vessel: AIS target related information is displayed in this field.

Address: Choose how to send a safety message.

Msg Type: Choose message type.

Channel: Specify channel for transmitting.

21-10
 21. AIS Target Functions

21.6.2 Creating a new safety message

You can create a safety message on the ECDIS for transmission by the AIS transponder. This can be done as
follows:
1. Display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push
the left mouse button to open the Main menu.
2. Choose Safety Message from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.
3. The Safety message dialog box appears. Place the cursor on the triangle in
the dialog box to show the submenu.

4. Choose Create Message from the menu and push the thumbwheel.

5. Check Enable changes.

6. Place the cursor in the Address box. Spin the thumbwheel to choose
Addressed t or Broadcast to All as appropriate and then push the
thumbwheel. Choose Broadcast to All to send to all nearby AIS
transponder-equipped ships. To send to a specific vessel, enter MMSI of
ship, in the MMSI input box.
7. Use the Msg Type box to choose message type; Safety Message for safety
message, Binary Message for routine message.
8. At the Channel box, choose channel over which to broadcast your message.
Four choices are available.
9. Enter the text of your message in the box below Channel. Up to 100
alphanumeric characters may be entered but actual number depends on
characters used.
10. To send the message, place the cursor on the triangle to show the sub menu,
choose Send Message and then push the thumbwheel.

11. If message is sent successfully, status is changed from Unsent to Sent.

21-11
21. AIS Target Functions

How to get vessel information for an addressed safety message

You can find vessel information for an addressed safety message. This is useful when you want to send a Safety
message to a specific vessel. To get vessel information, proceed as follows:

1. Display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse button to open the
Main menu.

2. Choose Safety Message from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Place the cursor on a desired AIS target on the ECDIS chart and then push the thumbwheel to get MMSI
number, call sign and ship name of the target. Call sign and MMSI of the vessel selected are shown in the
Vessel field in the Safety Message dialog box.

4. To send a message to the vessel, select Addressed from the Address box and then set other items as appropriate,
referring to the procedure on the preceding page.

21.6.3 Reading a received safety message

When a message is received by AIS, it is indicated on the ECDIS with the alarm “3504 AIS message received”. To
read the message, do the following:

1. Display Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push
the left mouse button to open the Main menu.

2. Choose Safety Message from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. The Safety Message dialog box shows the message received by the AIS
transponder.

21-12
 21. AIS Target Functions

21.6.4 Replying to a safety message

To reply to a safety message, proceed as follows:

1. Display the Safety Message dialog box.

2. Check Enable changes.

3. In the Filter field, choose Received from the upper box and the message to
reply to from the lower box.

4. Choose Message Type and Channel as appropriate referring to paragraph

21.5.2.

5. Enter your reply in the text window.

6. Place the cursor on the triangle to open the sub menu.

7. Choose Send Message and then push the thumbwheel.

21-13
21. AIS Target Functions

This page intentionally left blank.

21-14
22. Radar Overlay

22.1 Introduction
The radar overlay is optionally available. This means that the radar echo image can be output from the radar unit and
shown on the ECDIS chart display.

Radar overlay video can be received by two methods by ECDIS:

1. Through Radar overlay card fitted in the ECDIS

2. Through LAN from FAR-2x07 Radars, which are capable to send radar video to LAN

This ECDIS has many features to support exact match in scale and orientation of the chart and radar echo image.
Exact match of the radar echo image and chart is an essential security feature. If the radar echo image and the chart
display match, then the mariner can rely on what he sees and the mariner also gets a very good confirmation that his
navigation sensors (such as gyro and position receivers) operate properly and accurately. However, if the mariner is
unable to achieve exact match, it is a very strong indication that something is wrong and he should not rely on what
he sees.

This ECDIS can use radar echo image in several user selectable modes. The “ECDIS only” mode operates without
the radar echo image. The “ECDIS and radar” mode operates using rules for the type-approved ECDIS to visualize
the radar echo image. The “radar over chart” mode draws radar echo image on top of the chart. This mode should
only be used temporarily because legally the equipment is not an ECDIS which can legally replace paper chart when
operating with “Radar over chart”. The “radar video only” mode should only be used temporarily to check radar
echo presentation, because the equipment is not an ECDIS which can legally replace paper chart when operating
with the “radar video only” mode.

The radar echo image is output directly from the radar transceiver so the range used in a connected ARPA radar
display does not change the scale in the ECDIS. This ECDIS is nearly independent of the ARPA radar display
settings. The only ARPA radar display setting which affects the radar echo image on the ECDIS is pulse length; the
ARPA radar display controls the radar transmitter and chooses the pulse length. All other controls such as Gain,
STC, FTC, interference rejector, echo stretch and echo trails may be controlled from the ECDIS.

Chosen scale of displayed chart also defines scale of radar overlay. When you change the chart scale, the scale of the
radar overlay is automatically changed. The maximum range of the radar overlay is 24 nautical miles. Radar overlay
can be displayed even if the own ship is not located in the displayed chart area if the range is less than 24 nm.

The thumb rule for range of displayed area:

• Chart scale 1:10,000 is almost equal to traditional radar range of 0.75 nm

• Chart scale 1:20,000 is almost equal to traditional radar range of 1.50 nm

22-1
22. Radar Overlay

22.2 Activating Radar Overlay on the ECDIS

Radar overlay can be output to the ECDIS and shown on its display. Like details on Vector charts (S57), the radar
overlay can be displayed or removed from the chart display. The Mariner page in the Chart Details dialog box
enables or disables the radar overlay. You can choose how to display the radar overlay with the Radar selector on
the status bar. To activate the radar overlay, do the following:

2.

1.
Clean OFF X

3.

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area and then push
the left mouse button. Click an arrow tab in the dialog box until the Mariner page is displayed. Click the radio
button Std or Oth in the Radar Overlay window.

2. Place the cursor on Radar in the status bar and then push the left mouse button.

3. In the Mode window, choose “ECDIS only” to show ECDIS only, or choose “ECDIS and Radar” to overlay
radar image on ECDIS.

4. Adjust radar echo image as appropriate.

22-2
 22. Radar Overlay

22.3 Choosing Source of Radar Overlay

22.3.1 Radar overlay through LAN from FAR-2x07 radars
Place the cursor on Radar in the status bar, and the Radar Selection window appears. If there is more than one Radar
video source available, you can change radar overlay source by spinning thumbwheel.

Radar overlay source indicates source radar overlay. In the example display above the source is MAST X.

22.3.2 Radar overlay through radar overlay card inside ECDIS

If there is more than one Radar video source available and connected to ECDIS, you can use external switch to
select desired source of Radar video overlay. Selected source is displayed on Radar Overlay dialog box and on
upper status bar:

Clean OFF X

22-3
22. Radar Overlay

22.3.3 Radar overlay display modes

You can choose from the following presentation modes with the radar overlay:

ECDIS only:

Only chart is displayed on the ECDIS.

ECDIS and radar:

With S57 chart material, the radar echo image is mixed into the chart so that some chart features lie above or
beneath the radar image. This presentation follows the drawing rules of the Standard S52ed3.1 of IHO. If you use
the ARCS chart material, the radar image is drawn on top of the chart.

Radar over chart:

Radar echo image is drawn on top of the chart.

ECDIS and radar presentation Radar over chart presentation

Radar video only:

Only radar echo image is drawn on the ECDIS display.

22-4
 22. Radar Overlay

22.4 Adjusting Radar Overlay (Radar Overlay dialog

box)
The Radar Overlay dialog box has controls for adjustment of the radar image - gain, sea clutter, rain clutter, echo
trail, interference rejector, echo stretch, and noise rejector.

Note 1: Sea clutter and rain clutter controls are not available in Radar Overlay dialog box if radar video is received
through LAN from FAR-2x07 radars. Sea clutter and rain clutter are controlled on ARPA display which controls
transmitter.

Note 2: Gain, sea clutter and rain clutter are independent

from the same controls of any radar display. Therefore,
their optimum position may be different from those on
No Headline
the radar display.

Note 3: If the ECDIS fails to receive heading, trigger or

azimuth signal from the radar transceiver, it is indicated
in the Radar Overly dialog box. In the right-hand figure
the indication “No Headline” is displayed, indicating no
heading signal.

Note 4: When the source of the radar image is LAN, sea Clean OFF X Clean OFF X

clutter and rain clutter cannot be adjusted.

22.4.1 Radar overlay source

Indicates source of current radar overlay.

22.4.2 Gain
Gain control is used to set the sensitivity of the radar echo image. When you adjust the gain, “Noise” is
automatically switched ON in order to display low-level radar images.

Note: After adjusting the gain, check and readjust the sea clutter because these two controls affect one another.

22.4.3 Sea clutter

The sea clutter control removes sea clutter from the radar echo image.

Note: After adjusting the sea clutter, check and readjust the gain because these two controls affect one another.

When you adjust the sea clutter, “Noise” is automatically switched ON in order to display low-level radar images.

If you have radar overlay video through LAN from FAR-2x07 radar, use control of sea clutter on radar.

22-5
22. Radar Overlay

22.4.4 Rain clutter

The rain clutter control removes rain clutter from the radar echo image.

When you adjust the rain clutter, “Noise” is automatically switched ON in order to display low-level radar images.

If you have radar overlay video through LAN from FAR-2x07 radar, use control of rain clutter on radar.

22.4.5 Controlling video processing

Echo average:

You can turn echo averaging on or off. Scan-to-scan correlation averages echoes over successive picture frames to
distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter. The choices are EAV1, EAV2, EAV3 and OFF.

EAV1: Helps distinguish targets from sea clutter and suppress brilliance of unstable echoes.
EAV2: Distinguishes small stationary targets such as navigation buoys.
EAV3: Stably displays distant target.

Interference rejector:

The interference rejector suppresses mutual radar interference which may occur in the vicinity of another shipborne
radar operating in the same frequency band. Three options are available: OFF, IR1 and IR2. Choose suitable level to
reduce interference from other radars. Choose OFF when no noise exists, so as not to miss weak targets.

Echo stretch:

Echo stretch emphasizes radar echo to increase detectability of targets. “ES1” emphasise both noise and target level
echoes while “ES2” emphasizes only target level echoes.

Echo stretch ES2 Echo stretch OFF

Clean:

Removes noise from the screen. Choose LOW or HIGH according to amount of noise. Choose OFF when no noise
exists.

22-6
 22. Radar Overlay

22.4.6 Echo trail time and trail presentation mode

Echo trails are artificial afterglow of radar echo image on the ECDIS display, created by maintaining the echo
intensity once it has been seen, and then removing it after the set time has passed. Echo trails represent movements
relative to own ship (relative trails) or true movements with respect to land (true trails). Echo trails are shown in
dark green, when Noise in the Radar Overlay dialog box is turned OFF. Note that this feature is not available with
software version 5.20.

Permanent indication of chosen echo trail presentation mode appears on the status bar; TrueTrail or RelTrail.

North Up TM

Note: The echo trail indication changes its color between black (or white depending on color scheme) and red
depending on chosen display mode of own ship: If the display mode is true motion, the indication TrueTrail is
displayed in black (or white depending on color scheme), and the indication RelTrail is displayed in orange.
If the display mode is relative motion, the indication TrueTrail is displayed in orange, and the indication RelTrail is
displayed in black (or white depending on color scheme) text.

To choose echo trail time and to choose True or Relative echo trail presentation mode, do the following:

1. Place the cursor on Radar in the status bar and then push the left mouse button to show the Radar Overlay dialog
box. (If you are using the keyboard-equipped control unit, you may press the RADAR key).

2. Choose TRUE or RELATIVE from the Echo trail list box.

3. Set desired time for echo trail time in Echo trail field; place the cursor in the trail time field, spin the thumbwheel
to choose desired time and then push the thumbwheel to confirm. If set time for trails is more than is available in
the ECDIS that moment, the length of the current trail is displayed in the field indicating that trail is shorter than
requested. When current trail disappears from the field length of trails are as requested.

Clean OFF X

Relative trail presentation mode

22-7
22. Radar Overlay

22.4.7 Echo overload condition

When the capacity of the CPU is exceeded and there are many targets and sea clutter on the screen, the CPU can no
longer process the entire radar image. When this happens, visual distortion like that shown below occurs and the
warning “OVERLOAD” appears in red at the top of the screen. To restore the display, see the procedure on the next
page.

22-8
 22. Radar Overlay

When the overload condition occurs, do the following:

1. Adjust controls (gain, sea clutter, rain clutter, interference rejector, etc) on the radar to obtain proper radar
image.
2. On the radar overlay dialog box, do the following:
a) Set IR to IR1.
b) Set Clean to LOW.
c) Adjust the Gain control to properly set gain.
Note: The condition of the radar echo changes with adjustment of range, etc. on the radar. When the overload
condition occurs, adjust the gain on the radar obtain proper picture.

Adjust Gain.

IR1 Set IR to IR1.

LOW Set Clean to LOW.

22.4.8 Transparency
Transparency controls “see through” behavior of the radar overlay. The option “Opaque” superimposes radar echoes
on the chart display without modifying their color. “25%” displays radar echoes somewhat faintly, and “75%”
displays radar echoes very faintly. It is recommended to use 25% or 50% when navigating narrow channels, so as
not to conceal landmasses.

22-9
22. Radar Overlay

22.5 Adjusting Radar Overlay to Match Positions of

Chart Features
22.5.1 Error sources of radar echo image and chart display
mismatch
There are several reasons why the radar echo image and chart display do not match exactly. The mismatch is a
combination of several reasons and removing one reason doesn't solve the mismatch perfectly. There is a
fundamental difference between the radar echo image and corresponding chart feature. The radar echo is a reflection
from the real life target and the actual position of the real life target is the front edge of the radar echo. Therefore,
the radar echo should start from the chart feature and extend as far as the radar pulse length goes.

Bearing error sources:

1. Gyro
2. Inaccurate chart
3. Improper installation parameters (radar overlay bearing offset)
Position error sources
1. Inaccurate position
2. Position offset
3. Inaccurate chart
4. Wrong datum
5. Datum offset with ARCS material
6. Improper installation parameters (conning position offset, position receiver antenna offset, radar overlay range
offset, datum chosen for position receiver)

22.5.2 Error sources for radar echo image and ARPA target
mismatch
There are several reasons why the radar echo image and ARPA target symbols do not match exactly.

1. Different gyro value at ARPA radar display and at ECDIS.

2. Improper installation parameters (radar overlay bearing offset, radar overlay range offset, conning position
offset).

The example below shows how different gyro value set at ARPA radar display and at ECDIS affect the display of
the ECDIS.

Different gyro value at ARPA and ECDIS Equal gyro value at ARPA and ECDIS

22-10
 22. Radar Overlay

22.5.3 Compensating for bearing error

There are two ways to compensate for gyro-induced bearing error:

1) Manual

• Adjust value of manual gyro correction.

2) Table-based gyro speed/latitude correction (Note that the ECDIS’s built-in correction facility doesn't correct
dynamic error, settling time after course change, etc.)

• Turn On Gyro speed/latitude correction in the Ship and Route Parameters dialog box.

No manual gyro correction (left-hand figure)

• ARPA targets and radar overlay match perfectly.
• Chart features and radar overlay have some mismatch.
Manual gyro correction in use (right-hand figure)
• ARPA targets and radar overlay match perfectly.
• Chart features and radar overlay match perfectly.

22.5.4 Compensating for position error

Verifying position and alignment

See paragraph 19.8.1 “Position alignment by means of ECDIS”.

Verifying correct datum used in positioning

It is very important that output co-ordinates of a position device is the same as the ECDIS expects to receive,
otherwise you may get incorrect position in the ECDIS. Verify in position device configurations that output of co-
ordinates is WGS-84 and also check in the installation parameters of the ECIDS that it is set to receive position in
WGS-84 datum.

22-11
22. Radar Overlay

22.6 Radar Overlay related Alarms

Alarms generated by Radar Overlay are related to ECDIS workstation where Radar overlay card is located. This
means that Radar overlay related alarms on first ECDIS workstation starts with alarm number 6100 and Radar
overlay related alarms on second ECDIS starts with alarm number 6200.

Alarm number 6100: RADOV NO HEADLINE 6/13

------------------------------------
NO HEADLINE AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND
CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6101: RADOV NO AZIMUTH 6/13

------------------------------------
NO AZIMUTH AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND
CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6102: RADOV NO TRIGGER 6/13

------------------------------------
NO TRIGGER AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND
CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6103: RADOV NO VIDEO /14

------------------------------------
NO VIDEO AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK ADJUSTMENT OF GAIN ON
ON RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS
AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6104: RADOV NO GYRO 6/13

------------------------------------
NO HEADING REFERENCE AVAILABLE FOR
ARPA PROCESSOR WHICH IS SOURCE FOR
RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK ARPA PROCESSOR

22-12
 22. Radar Overlay

Alarm number 6105: RADOV HW FAILURE 6/13

------------------------------------
RADAR OVERLAY HARDWARE FAILURE.
SWITCH POWER ON/OFF. REINSTALL
ECDIS SW.

Alarm number 6106: LAN RADAR CONNECT STATE 5/12

------------------------------------
INDICATION WHILE LAN CONNECTION FOR
ARPA FEATURES IS ESTABLISHED BETWEEN
ECDIS PROCESSOR AND ARPA PROCESSOR

Alarm number 6107: LAN RADAR CONNECT FAILURE 5/12

------------------------------------
FAILURE TO ESTABLISH LAN CONNECTION
FOR ARPA FEATURES BETWEEN ECDIS
PROCESSOR AND ARPA PROCESSOR.
CHECK LAN CONNECTORS AND CABLES
POWER ON/OFF AND REINSTALL ECDIS SW.

Alarm number 6108: LAN RADAR DLL FAILURE 5/12

------------------------------------
FAILURE INSIDE ECDIS PROCESSOR
BETWEEN DLL INTERFACE SW AND ECDIS
SOFTWARE. SWITCH POWER ON/OFF AND
REINSTALL ECDIS SW.

Alarm number 6110: RADOV CONNECT STATE 6/13

------------------------------------
INDICATION WHILE LAN CONNECTION FOR
RADAR ECHO DATA IS ESTABLISHED
BETWEEN ECDIS PROCESSOR AND ARPA
PROCESSOR

Alarm number 6111: RADOV NO ECHODATA 7/14

------------------------------------
FAILURE TO RECEIVE RADAR ECHO DATA

22-13
22. Radar Overlay

This page intentionally left blank.

22-14
23. Recording Functions

23.1 Introduction
The ECDIS records various voyage-related items like movement and position of own ship and dangerous radar
targets (from ARPA radar). These items are recorded in the following logs:

Voyage log: Records entire voyage, i.e., a sailing of a route from first point to the last.

Details log: Records position, speed and course once every minute.

Danger Targets log: Records ARPA target data.

Chart Usage log: Records information of used charts in display.

Alarms log: Records alarms generated by the system.

The user may print the contents of any log.

23.2 Events and Man Overboard Functions

The Events and Man Overboard (MOB) functions are accessed with the mouse. Spin the thumbwheel to display
Event/Info/MOB in the mouse functions area and then push the left or right mouse button as appropriate.

Left mouse button (Event): Records an event to the logbook. You can also write a comment for this event. It is
displayed only in the electronic chart area if Events is chosen for display in the Tracking page of the Chart Display
dialog box.

Right mouse button (MOB): Records MOB position to the logbook. Position of this event is also displayed on the
chart as a red mark, as shown below.

The ECDIS can display Events and MOB. These events are also recorded into
the Voyage log.

23-1
23. Recording Functions

23.3 Voyage Records

23.3.1 Details log
The details log contains voyage information of the last 12 hours. Various information is recorded in the details log
once per minute.
• Date and time
• Position of own ship as output by chosen navigator.
• Alignment (range, bearing) values, if used.
• Speed over ground and course over ground.
• Heading.
• Gyro correction value, if used.

Viewing the details log

To open the details log, do as follows:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse

functions area and then push the left mouse button.

2. Choose Record from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Choose Details Log from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

4. The following window appears. Confirm that you want to open the log by
clicking the OK button. Otherwise click the Cancel button.

The system will start viewing program of log.

You may print the entire log or a desired part. To change print font size, place
the cursor on the triangle and choose desired font size. To print the log, click the
Print Log button. To print whole log, select Print All from the menu.

First 1000 Prev 1000 Last 449

Use First 1000, Prev 1000, Next 1000 and Last xxx (xxx=number, in above example it is 449) buttons to select
desired time to be listed in the log viewer.

Note: For how to make a user chart from this log, see paragraph 23.3.8 “Making a user chart from the log (past
track)”.

23-2
 23. Recording Functions

23.3.2 Voyage log

The voyage log holds data for the entire voyage. Recorded events are:
• Changes of course and speed. User can define limits for course change and speed change of own ship to be
recorded. This data is filed in the log as type “Ship”.
• User is able to define time period, how often there is a recording regardless of course or speed changes. (For
example, once per 4 hours). This data is filed in the log as type “Auto”.
• Man Over Board event. This data is filed in the log as type “MOB”.
• Standard event. This data is filed in the log as type “User”.
• Alarms generated by the system. User is able to choose alarms, which are recorded into the Voyage log. This
data is filed in the log as type “Alarm”.
• Positions. This data is filed in the log as type “Posdev”.
Each log entry also contains wind speed and direction, depth information and distance counter value.

Viewing the voyage log

To open the voyage log, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse

functions area and then push the left mouse button

2. Choose Record from the menu and then push the thumbwheel. Choose
Voyage Log from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. The following window appears. Confirm that you want to open the log by
clicking the OK button. Otherwise click the Cancel button.

The system will start viewing program of log.

You may print the entire log or a desired part. To change print font size, place
the cursor on the triangle and choose desired font size. To print the log, click the
Print Log button. To print whole log, select Print All from the menu.

First 1000 Prev 1000 Last 449

Use First 1000, Prev 1000, Next 1000 and Last xxx buttons to select desired time to be listed in the log viewer.

Note 1: You can add a description to a log entry. Check Enable changes and then enter description desired in the
text box, using the thumbwheel.
Note 2: For how to make a user chart from this log, see paragraph 23.3.8 “Making a user chart from the log (past
track)”.

23-3
23. Recording Functions

Setting conditions of logging

The operator can define limits for course change and speed change of own ship to be recorded and also time period
for automatic logging. To set them, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse

functions area and then push the left mouse button

2. Choose Record from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Choose Settings from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

4. If the Voyage page is not already open, click the Voyage tab to open it.

Set desired limits for speed and course and also logging interval, using the
thumbwheel. When the speed or course changes by the amount set here, a
log entry is made.

5. Choose alarms (alarm numbers) to record, in the Alarms window. For alarm
numbers and their meanings, see the chapter on alarms.

Resetting voyage log for next voyage

For how to empty the voyage log, see paragraph 23.3.7 “Resetting voyage and danger target logs”. You should
empty the voyage log at least twice a year. A backup copy of the voyage log can be made. See paragraph 23.3.6
“Making backup copy from details, voyage or danger target log” for details.

23-4
 23. Recording Functions

Recording positions
The operator may manually save positions to the voyage log in various ways. These are:

• Direct sensor position

• Positions calculated by the system (in example below such are Kalman filter and Dead reckoning)

• User observations. (Visual, astronomical and MFDF. MFDF is Medium Frequency Direction Finder.)

An example of saving direct position or position calculated by the system

FURUNO

An example of saving position based on user observation

First you should locate the position of your observation on the ECDIS chart. Use, for example, the two separate EBL
and VRM available in the Nav Marks dialog box. Open the Sensors dialog box and then click the Record tab.
Choose appropriate method from the Device list box. Place the cursor on the desired location on the ECDIS display
and then press the left mouse button. The latitude/longitude position of the cursor is then copied to the Lat and Lon
fields. If you are satisfied, then click the Record button to save the position observation into the voyage log. If you
wish you can also enter Lat and Lon values manually.

23-5
23. Recording Functions

23.3.3 Danger target log

The danger target log stores information about targets which are received from an ARPA radar (ARPA targets)
and/or targets which are received from an AIS transponder (AIS targets).

If an ARPA target or AIS target is within the set CPA and TCPA, information of all tracked targets (including non-
dangerous targets) are recorded into the danger targets log. This data is as follows:
• Date and time, index of target (number of tracked target on ARPA radar or IMO MMSI number from AIS
transponder).
• CPA and TCPA of both AIS and ARPA targets
• Position (Lat, Lon), speed (Spd) and course (Cse) of both AIS and ARPA targets.
• Heading (Hdg) information of AIS target.

Viewing danger targets log

To open the Danger Targets log, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse

functions area and then push the left mouse button.

2. Choose Record from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Choose Danger Target Log from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

4. The following window appears. Confirm that you want to open the log by
clicking the OK button. Otherwise click the Cancel button.

The system will start viewing program of log.

You may print the entire log or a desired part. To change print font size, place
the cursor on the triangle and choose desired font size. To print the log, click the
Print Log button. To print whole log, select Print All from the menu.

First 1000 Prev 1000 Last 449

Use First 1000, Prev 1000, Next 1000 and Last xxx buttons to select desired time to be listed in the log viewer.

Note: For how to make a user chart from this log, see paragraph 23.8 “Making a user chart from the log (past
track)”.

23-6
 23. Recording Functions

Setting conditions for viewing and logging of danger targets

The operator may set Closest Point of Arrival (CPA), Time for CPA (TCPA) and Log interval for viewing
dangerous ARPA and AIS targets on the ECDIS display. A dangerous ARPA or AIS target is blinking and its color
is green and red alternately. User can also alternatively log only information of a single chosen ARPA or AIS target.

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse

functions area and then push the left mouse button.

2. Choose Record from the menu and Settings from the submenu.

3. If the Danger Targets page is not already open, click the Danger Targets tab
to open it.

Set desired limits for CPA, TCPA and log interval. Note that these limits are only for ECDIS; an ARPA radar has its
own setting for dangerous targets and thus a target which is dangerous at an ARPA display can be safe on the
ECDIS and vice versa. If an ARPA target is inside the CPA and TCPA, it is shown as a dangerous ARPA target on
the ECDIS display. Log interval defines time period for logging.

Note: The operator may choose logging of the track of a single AIS and/or ARPA target, if he chooses in the Log
Single Target window the desired number from the ARPA and/or AIS box. If this option is chosen, only information
of the target(s) selected is recorded.

Saving past track of a chosen ARPA or AIS target

To save past track of chosen ARPA or AIS target, do the following:
1. Find number of ARPA target or name of AIS target, by placing the cursor on the target and pushing the
thumbwheel.
2. Choose Settings from the Record menu and then open the Danger Targets page.
3. In the Log Single Target window, choose ARPA target number and/or AIS target name from the ARPA and
AIS boxes.
4. You can make a user chart from the danger target log. For further details see paragraph 23.3.8 “Making a user
chart from the log (past track)”.
Note: By choosing a single target only the chosen target's information is recorded. If you want to record information
of all danger targets, remove selection from the boxes in the Log Single Target window.

23-7
23. Recording Functions

23.3.4 Chart usage log

The chart usage log stores which charts were displayed on the ECDIS chart display area or which were used for
chart alarms. The following information is recorded in the chart usage log:
• Chart ID
• Chart edition
• The latest update included to chart
• Displayed Updates Until
• Approved Updates Until
• Center position of display (Lat, Lon).
• Scale of chart display
• Details of chart chosen for display

23.3.5 Printing details, voyage or danger targets log

This procedure is the same if you make User Chart from Details, Voyage or Danger Targets log.

Printing entire log

1. Open the Main menu, choose Record and then choose appropriate Log item. The example below shows the
Details Log.

First 1000 Prev 1000 Last 449

2. Place the cursor on the triangle to show Log File menu and select Print Log.

3. To print a log, click the Print Log button. To print whole log, select Print All from the menu.

4. A Print dialog box appears, click the OK button. The entire log will be printed.

23-8
 23. Recording Functions

Printing specific portion of a log

1. Open desired log.

2. Click left button to choose portion of log to print.

First 1000 Prev 1000 Last 449

3. Place the cursor on the triangle and left-click Print Log.

4. Click the OK button to print.

Changing font size for paper copy of logs

In each log (Details, Voyage or Danger Targets log) you can choose font size for printed version. To change font
size, do the following:

1. Open desired log.

2. Place the cursor on the triangle on the upper left corner and select Print Font.
[Print Font]
Go Back
Print Font Size: 8
Print Font Size: 9
Print Font Size: 10
Print Font Size: 11

First 1000 Prev 1000 Last XXX

23-9
23. Recording Functions

23.3.6 Making backup copy from details, voyage or danger targets

log
If necessary you can make a backup copy of ECDIS logs onto a floppy disk as follows:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse

functions area and then push the left mouse button.

2. Choose Record from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Choose Backup and Restore from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

4. The Backup and Restore dialog box appears.

5. Choose desired log and drive for backup copy. Then, click the Backup
button.

23-10
 23. Recording Functions

23.3.7 Resetting (emptying) voyage and danger targets logs

It may be useful to reset (empty) the voyage and danger targets logs when you are starting a new voyage. If
necessary, make a backup copy before resetting. To reset a log, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse

functions area and then push the left mouse button.

2. Choose Record from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Choose Reset from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

4. Choose the log to reset from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

5. The system will ask you if you are sure to reset chosen log. Click the OK
button to reset the chosen log.

23.3.8 Making a user chart from a log (past track)

You may create a user chart from any log among details, voyage and danger target. The past track of the Danger
Log target is useful for making a use chart from a single target.
1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the left mouse
button. Choose Record from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.
2. Choose the log (Details, Voyage, Danger Target) from which you want to make a user chart and then push the
thumbwheel.

3. Click the OK button to continue.

4. Choose the log entries which you want to use to create a user chart.

First 1000 Prev 1000 Last 978

5. Click the triangle and select “Save as User Chart” to show log.

23-11
23. Recording Functions

6. The User Chart Conversion dialog box appears.

This dialog box contains the following fields:

User chart name: Enter name for the user chart.
Select points with distance > 0.3 NM: Check to have the system filter the chosen log so that the minimum
distance between points in the user chart is 0.3 nm.
Elements will be displayed on radar: Check to display the chart on the radar screen.

7. Click the Save button.

8. Confirm creating of user chart by clicking the OK button.

Note: If your chosen range for conversion from log to user chart contains periods of invalid own ship positions, then
the user chart has a gap in the line for these periods.

23.3.9 Alarms log

The alarm log collects and records alarms generated by the system. You may view a list of generated alarms using
the Alarms Log.

23-12
 23. Recording Functions

To open the log, proceed as follows:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse

functions area and then push the left mouse button. Choose Record from the
menu and then push the thumbwheel.

2. Choose Alarms Log from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

The Alarms Log appears on the display. See below for an example.

Printing latest alarm

1. Open the Record menu following step 1 in the above procedure.

2. Choose Alarms Log from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

1. Click the Print Text button.

2. A Print dialog box appears; click the OK button to print (complete log).

23-13
23. Recording Functions

23.4 Distance and Trip Counters

Distance and trip counters have separate
fields for both through water and over
ground distances. This information is
available on the Record page of the
Sensors dialog box, shown right. To reset
the distance and/or trip counter, see the
paragraph which follows.

23.4.1 Resetting distance and trip counters

It is useful to reset the distance counter when you are starting a new voyage.

To reset the distance and trip counters, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse

functions area and then push the left mouse button. Choose Record from the
menu and then push the thumbwheel.

2. Choose Reset from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Choose Distance Counter from the submenu and then push the thumbwheel.

4. You are asked if you are sure to reset the distance and trip counters; click
the OK button to reset those counter.

To reset only the trip counter, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse

functions area and then push the left mouse button. Choose Record from the
menu and then push the thumbwheel.

2. Choose Reset from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Choose Trip Counter from the submenu and then push the thumbwheel.

4. You are asked if you are sure to reset the trip counter; click the OK button
to reset the trip counter.

23-14
24. Datum

24.1 General
Datum is a mathematical model of the earth based on which a sea chart is produced. If the datum of a position
sensor and that of a sea chart are different, a transformation has to be made somewhere in the system. Not doing so
can result in errors of several sea miles. The difference between two datums is never constant, but depends on
position. This means that the difference between WGS 84 and local datum, generally used in paper charts, is not
generally valid with electronic sea charts.

24.2 Paper Charts

Datums used in paper charts have been traditionally national datums for historical reasons. Many paper charts do not
have a marked datum, therefore compatibility with electronic charts may be complicated. In some paper charts, the
correction terms are printed in lieu of datum, for correction of the WGS 84 system satellite locations. The correction
terms are usable but only with the paper chart in question.

24.3 Electronic Sea Charts

Until now, electronic sea charts have generally been based on rasterizing or vectorizing of paper charts, resulting in
the respective transfer of the local datum.

Exceptions:

• The ARCS (raster) material includes polynomials for each chart, making it possible for the ECS system to solve
the difference between the WGS 84 datum and the local datum with an accuracy sufficient for authority
responsibility. In some charts, the mentioned difference is not known with sufficient accuracy, resulting in
displaying a permanent warning window when displayed in ARCS compatible systems.

• ENC vector material which according to S57 standard has to be produced by a National Hydrographic Office in
the WGS-84 datum.

24.4 Positioning Devices and Datum

In early days of electronic positioning devices, datums received little attention because the commonly used systems
utilised special charts (like Decca charts). Later on, data output was added to these systems, but still no attention was
paid to datums and the position errors were considered as an inaccuracy of the system. With the spread of the GPS,
however, datum has become better known. An accurate position is of no value if co-ordinates are in a wrong datum.
GPS satellites utilize the WGS-84 datum. However, the WGS-84 datum is not a general solution for all positioning
systems, due to differences between electronic sea chart system and the chart material displayed.

24-1
24. Datum

24.5 ECDIS and Datum

The real ECDIS uses ENC material, produced to standards using WGS-84 datum. Positioning devices connected to
the ECDIS must work in the WGS-84 datum. IMO requires that the ECDIS must give an alarm if the datum of a
positioning device is not the WGS-84. In practice this is impossible, because the standard used by positioning
devices (IEC 61162, previously NMEA 0183) does not include a datum message. Consequently, the classification
societies only approve a positioning device interfaced with the ECDIS in which datum cannot be changed (i.e., is
always WGS-84).

Note: The ability to check datum of position is a relatively new feature for position receivers. It was introduced in
standard IEC 61162-1 Ed2, published in July 2000. Only an EPFS (for example GPS or DGPS) which has “IEC
61162-1 Ed 2 (2000-7)” indicated in its type approval certificate can support the ECDIS to detect datum mismatch.

24.6 ECDIS and User Chooseable Local Datum

The ECDIS allows the user to change viewed datum. This selection of the datum does not change anything inside
the ECDIS for navigation calculation processes or for electronic sea chart display processes. But it changes the
numerical values of positions displayed on the ECDIS display into the user-chosen datum. This is very useful,
especially if you like to plot positions from the ECDIS on a traditional paper chart.

24-2
25. Parameters Setup

25.1 Parameters
The Initial Settings menu in the Initial Settings dialog box contains the installation parameters, navigation
parameters and optimization parameters which define the configuration of the ECDIS and operative parameters
which are either used to control steering and navigation calculation or used during route planning.

To open the Initial Settings menu, do the following:

1. Place the cursor on the text SINGLE, PLAN, SLAVE, MULTI or MASTER (whichever is shown) on the lower
right corner of the information area, confirm that Initial Settings appears in the mouse functions area, and then
push the right mouse button to open the Initial Settings dialog box.

2. Place the cursor on the triangle in the Initial Settings dialog box to show the Initial Settings menu.

3. Click the Print Text button.

4. A Print dialog box appears; click the OK button to print (complete log).

2.
1.

25-1
25. Parameters Setup

25.1.1 Parameter-related menus

Set time
Place the cursor on the date and time presentation on right-hand side of ECDIS display.

• Use the left mouse button to display UTC time and local time alternately.

• Use the right mouse button to change time zone and/or time.

In order to set the time, the following conditions must be met:

• Set time on workstation chosen as the sensor source.

• Kalman filter should be OFF.

• Turn off any track steering mode (Goto WP or Goto Track).

Parameter backup
User can make backup copy of parameters. See Chapter 17 for details.

Installation parameters
The ECDIS system parameters are set by the installation parameters. Note: Access to the installation parameters
requires a key disk, which is delivered by the manufacturer. For details see the installation manual.

Navigation parameters
Parameters for your ship and routes. For more information about setting navigation parameters, see “Ship and route
parameters” on page 25-2.

Optimization parameters
This function is used to define parameters for speed and fuel consumption. For further details, see “Optimization
parameters setting” on page 25-7.

Print navigation parameters

Prints navigation parameters to default printer.

Print optimization parameters

Prints optimization parameters to default printer.

25-2
 25. Parameters Setup

25.1.2 Accessing installation parameters

The installation parameters command is used to set installation parameters for the system. These parameters are
concerned with hardware configurations and setup. They need only be set during installation and if sensor
configuration changes. Installation parameters are described in detail in the Installation Manual.

25.1.3 Choosing datum

Datum is used to choose between different models of the earth. It is essential that you use Datum in a consistent
way. See also “ECDIS and Datum” on page 24-2.

If you use paper charts together with electronic chart material, it is recommended that you use the same datum as
your current paper chart to avoid misalignment between your electronic system and points taken or plotted on your
current paper chart.

Once you have chosen a datum, all numerical latitude-longitude position values are presented in your chosen datum.

Note: If you use ARCS raster chart material, rasterized charts contain some rasterized position information. These
positions, like scales in the edges of ARCS charts, are true only if you have chosen native datum of that ARCS
chart. Normally this is the natural situation, because you use ARCS together with matching official paper chart and
because you have chosen as datum the datum of your matching official paper chart.

To choose datum do the following:

1. Place the cursor on the datum indication at the upper right corner of the display.

2. Spin the thumbwheel to choose appropriate datum and then push the thumbwheel.

25-3
25. Parameters Setup

25.1.4 Navigation parameters setting

The purpose of navigation parameters is set the basic parameters for the ship. These parameters are relative to ship
steering and they are very important to get correct function of the integrated navigation system. They must be
maintained carefully. Modification requires a good knowledge of the parameters’ importance.

In order to edit Ship and Route parameters, do the following:

1. Place the cursor on the text SINGLE, PLAN, SLAVE, MULTI or MASTER (whichever is shown) on the lower
right corner, then push the right mouse button to open the Initial Settings dialog box.

2. Choose Navigation parameters and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Choose Ship and Route parameters from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.
Ship parameters
Max. speed: Maximum speed the ship can do.

Max. height: Max. height of ship above sea level.

Max draught: Max. draught of ship.

Gyro correction:

Source: Choose method of gyro error correction, auto,

manual or off.

Spd/lat corr.: Choose On or Off

Max corr.: enter max. value for correction

Man corr.: enter value for manual gyro correction.

Route parameters
Max r.o.t.: Indicates the maximum rate of turn of the
ship.

Turn end tol: This defines the window for the detection
of the end of turn. Typical values are between 2 to 4
degrees.

WP app: Set the alarm time before approaching the wheel

over point.

WP prewarn: Set the alarm time before approaching the

wheel over point. It should be well in advance of the WP
approach alarm time.

Start limit: Set the maximum approach angle against

planned course in order to accept start of automatic route
steering.

Def. line rad: Used to define the default value of radius

between waypoints during automatic route steering.

Drift comp.: Enables/disables the drift compensation

during automatic route steering.

Gyro error: Enables/disables the gyro error compensation

of set course during automatic route steering.

25-4
 25. Parameters Setup

Forwarding distances
The forwarding distance is the distance the ship travels straight after the steering command is given to the autopilot.
This distance may vary with a different required radius of turn. The logic to verify the correct distance is to perform
a manuever of 90 degrees (Port and Starboard), with a SMALL RADIUS (0.3 nm), and verify from the radar, using
the curved EBL, if the turn goes “long” or is too “sharp”. The parameter should also be verified with a different
radius. (Most important radius values are between 0.3 to 1.0 nm). You can define set of Forwarding Distances both
for “Go To Track” and “Go To WP” steering modes.

How to set Forwarding distances for FAP 2000 or EMRI SEM200 trackpilot
You can define set of Forwarding Distances both for “Go To Track” and “Go To WP” steering modes.

In order to edit forwarding distances parameters, do the

following:

1. Place the cursor on the text SINGLE, PLAN,

SLAVE, MULTI or MASTER (whichever is
shown) on the lower right corner, then push the
right mouse button to open the Initial Settings
dialog box.

2. Place the cursor on the triangle in the Initial settings

dialog box, choose Navigation parameters and then
push the thumbwheel.

3. Choose Forwarding distance and then push the

thumbwheel.

4. Insert “Authorizing key disk” in floppy disk drive.

5. Check Enable changes to modify desired set of

Forwarding Distances.

Normally these parameters are entered during sea trial but can also be modified later on. See the next page.

How to set forwarding distances for Yokogawa PT-500A

In order to edit forwarding distances parameters, do the
following:

1. Place the cursor on the text SINGLE, PLAN,

SLAVE, MULTI or MASTER (whichever is
shown) on the lower right corner, then push the
right mouse button to open the Initial Settings
dialog box.

2. Place the cursor on the triangle in the Initial settings

dialog box, choose Navigation parameters and then
push the thumbwheel.

3. Choose Forwarding distance and then push the

thumbwheel.

4. Insert “Authorizing key disk” in floppy disk drive.

5. Check “Enable changes” to modify desired set of

Forwarding Distances.

25-5
25. Parameters Setup

Normally these parameters are entered during sea trial but can also be modified later on. See figures below:

Wheel Over Point (WOP)

Forwarding
distance = 1

Radius
Next course

How forwarding distance is defined

Theoretical turn

Forwarding distance is too short -

ship turns too late

Forwarding distance is too long -

ship turns too early

Influence of forwarding distance to ship's turn

25-6
 25. Parameters Setup

25.1.5 Optimization parameters setting

The optimization parameters are used in optimization calculation. Therefore these parameters must be defined
before calculation.
In order to modify optimization parameters, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart

Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the
left mouse button.

2. Choose Initial Settings and push the thumbwheel.

3. Place the cursor on the triangle in the Initial Settings

dialog box to show the Initial Settings menu.

4. Choose Optimization parameters from the menu and

then push the thumbwheel.

5. Choose Planning parameters from the menu and

then push the thumbwheel.

6. Modify optimization parameters by placing the

cursor in the desired edit box and using the
thumbwheel to set value. Push the thumbwheel to
confirm.

Note 1: HFO: Heavy fuel oil, DO: Diesel oil

Note 2: It is not necessary to enter leading zero (“0”).

This is a very important data table which contains ship's fuel consumption with the different speeds. There are 11
different speeds available to define fuel consumption on those specific speeds. Prior to entering data in the form,
prepare the following graphic in order to find those 11 points.

Set 11 points on the graphic as explained above. Transfer those 11 points to the table in the ECDIS. Use more points
where the curve bends more.

Example: 3.5 KN = 0.72 Ton / Hour HFO

Use the second graphic for diesel oil, if diesel oil consumption is relative to the speed.

25-7
25. Parameters Setup

This page intentionally left blank.

25-8
26. Color Calibration

26.1 Color Calibration Settings

Note: Use of the brilliance control (with FURUNO-supplied monitor) may adversely affect the visibility of
information on the night display.

26.1.1 Color test for ARCS charts

You may want to adjust brilliance. You have a tool to check that you can clearly see all details of the charts. For
ARCS chart this tool is Colors.

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area, and then push the right mouse
button.

2. Choose System from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Choose Colors from the submenu and then push the thumbwheel.

In the ARCS Colors window, you can see if individual colors can be distinguished when viewing. This lets you see
how light levels may affect the visibility of the chart.

26-1
26. Color Calibration

26.1.2 Color differentiation test for S57 charts

You may want to adjust brilliance. You have a tool to check that you can clearly see all details of the charts. For
ARCS chart this tool is Colors. For S57 charts this tool is the color differentiation test diagram.

The color differentiation test diagram is a part of ECDIS chart 1 and you can use it as follows:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right
mouse button.

2. Choose ECDIS Chart 1 from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

ECDIS Chart1

Overview
Info abcut the
chart display
Share features,
Pons
Depth, Currents
Seabeds,
Obstructions
Routes
Special areas
Lights, services,
radar, small craft
Buoys, Beacons
Mariner's
symbols
Color
differentiation

3. Choose “Color differentiation” from the submenu and then push the thumbwheel.

4. A diagonal line should be present in each of the twenty (1-20) boxes if color differentiation is proper.

Color differentiation diagram

5. Press each button in the Return dialog at the left side of the screen to display corresponding symbol.

6. Click the X mark to quit.

26-2
 26. Color Calibration

26.1.3 Gray scale test

Set brilliance and contrast to calibrated positions. Use the gray scale test to visually inspect neutral shades of grey.

Note: During any selftest, the ECDIS becomes inoperative and this is indicated by sounding the buzzer and flashing
the lamp in the SYSTEM FAILURE key on the keyboard-equipped control unit.

To activate the grey scale test, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right
mouse button.

2. Choose Initial Settings from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box, choose Selftest from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

4. Click the OK button. The system will end normal operation and start the Selftest mode.

5. Choose Display and then push the left mouse button.

26-3
26. Color Calibration

6. Click the Gray Scale button at the upper left-hand corner of display with the left mouse button, and the
following display appears:

Grey scale test pattern

7. Check for proper display of gray shades. If the menu at the left side has disappeared, roll the trackball rightward
to display it.

8. Click the Exit button with the left mouse button to close the display.

9. Click the Exit Test button to exit the test mode. The system will then start normal operation.

26-4
27. Conning Display

27.1 System Configuration

The ECDIS can receive data from various sensors. It can adopt information output by the sensors in either analog or
digital format, make navigation calculations from the data display and show the results on the conning display
(option).

The ECDIS can be connected to up to16 sensors (two LAN adapters, eight sensors/adapter) which output analog
data and up to eight sensors which output serial data.

Data displayed on the conning display depends on the settings in the ECDIS and the conning display configuration
set in the installation parameters, where you can arrange the layout of the conning display.

There are six predefined places on the conning display where you can specify data to display. The center of the
conning display is fixed to show information defined by the manufacturer. For more information about how to
process these windows, see the description of the installation parameters in the installation manual.

The figure below shows the locations of user-defined windows. The content of the windows are defined in the
installation parameters.

Conning display

27-1
27. Conning Display

27.2 Display Interpretation

The conning display shows collected data from different sensors, and the data below is available for display.
However, this depends on which sensors are installed and connected on board the ship.

Typically information which is displayed on the conning display are received from following sensors:

• Position sensors

• Wind sensor

• Gyro

• Rate of turn gyro

• Log

• Dual-axis log

• Rudder

• Propellers

• Thrusters

Typical layout of conning display in navigate mode

27-2
 27. Conning Display

27.2.1 ROT window

The ROT window monitors actual ROT, which is displayed in digital format in
the upper center box and analog format in the center of the window. The text
CALC” appears if ROT is calculated by the system. The scale is available from
35 to 90 degrees, and is set at installation, with installation parameters. For
further details, see the chapter on navigation sensors.

27.2.2 Heading window

The heading window shows the following information:

• Gyro course, both in digital and analog formats.

• Diamond figure shows heading in graphical format.

:
For further details, see the chapter on navigation sensors.

27.2.3 Speed window

The speed window shows the following information:

• Bow speed

• Longitudinal speed

• Stern speed

• Direction of true wind relative to own ship. (True wind must be chosen on
the menu to get true wind.)

• Source of speed indicator (BOTTOM in example)

This window shows center speed, single speed readout.

For further details, see the chapter on navigation sensors.

Speed window shows speed trough water (SPD) and Speed Over Ground SOG

Source of SPD is shown upper left corner and source of SOG is shown upper
right corner.

This window shows center speed, dual speed readout.

Note: There are two different sizes in the vertical direction for the Speed
window. The size of the Speed window depends on of Rudder window selected.

27-3
27. Conning Display

27.2.4 Rudder window

The rudder window shows the following information:

First rudder and source of the first rudder. In this example the source is actual
rudder (ACT).

Second rudder and source of the second rudder. In this example the source is
ordered rudder (ORD).

In this example only one rudder is connected.

Double rudder window for actual and order rudder.

Note when using this window, size of Speed window will be smaller.

This the “small size speed window with dual speed indications. Small size with
dual speed indication also available.

Double rudder window for actual and order rudder in smaller window.
Numerical value for ordered rudder position available.

27.2.5 Position window

The position window shows the following information:

• LAT and LON of own ship position

• Source of own ship position. See the chapter on navigation sensors.

• Datum of own ship position. See the chapter “Datum”.

• Local date and time. Current date and time used in the ECDIS.

27.2.6 Drift and radius window

The drift and radius window shows the following information:

• SET RADIUS: Current set radius on Trackpilot.

• ACT RADIUS: Current radius of turn.

• HDG: Current heading

• DRIFT: Direction and angle of drift.

• COG: Course Over Ground and source of it.

27-4
 27. Conning Display

27.2.7 Trackpilot window

The trackpilot window displays the following information:

• SET R.O.T.: Current set rate of turn based on current speed and set turning
radius.

• SET COURSE: Current set course.

• MODE: Indicates chosen steering mode.

• PLAN SPEED: Planned speed in current leg of the monitored route.

• ACKN WARNING: Steering-related alarms displayed in lower status bar

of ECDIS are also displayed on the conning display.

This is called the trackpilot extended window, where the following additional
information is available:

• SET RADIUS: Indicates chosen radius for turn.

• PROG CRS: Course after turn designed by program course change or

program track steering mode.

• SET HDG: Calculated heading for ship based on SET COURSE and
DRIFT. This information is available when the program track steering is in
use.

Trackpilot order window for DNV specification

SET COURSE xxx.x deg

SET RADIUS x.x nm
SET R.O.T. xxx.x deg/min
SET SPEED xx.x kt
MODE (steering mode)
ACKN. WARNING (steering related warning)

27-5
27. Conning Display

27.2.8 Route window

When you have chosen a route to monitor, the route window shows the
following information:

To WP: The waypoint your ship is approaching.

Route: Calculated set course to follow the monitored route including off track,
drift and gyro error compensation.

DIST WOP: Distance to Wheel Over Point (WOP)

TIME: Time left to reach WOP

Route window
OFF TRACK: Distance to center line of route

An example of a route with a next leg window, where the following additional
information is available:

• NEXT: Planned course to steer after “To WP”.

Note: The text “(corr)” in red color is displayed beside NEXT to indicate
that the value of the planned course to steer after “To WP” is compensated
for gyro error correction. This condition exists if “Gyro error correction”
Route with next leg has been enabled in the Navigation parameters, gyro value is compensated
for gyro error correction and gyro error compensation have been enabled in
Navigation parameters.

• RADIUS: Planned turning radius of “To WP”.

Route windows for DNV specification (Norwegian ship classification body)

(1) OR (2)

(3) OR (4)
(1) Route present leg
(2) Route present leg B
(3) Route next leg
(4) Route next leg B - 4

27-6
 27. Conning Display

27.2.9 Weather and wind window

REL Kt The weather and wind window shows
WIND
Kt

40
- Wind direction, true or relative
1020
32
1008
24
- Wind speed
996
16
984
8
- Air pressure (optional)
972

Weather conditions of last 12 hours are shown.

Kt

Kt

40
1020
32
1008
24
996
16
984
8
972

27.2.10 Depth window

The depth window shows, in digital and
analog formats, the latest 30 minutes of
depth data fed from an echo sounder.
Three depth scales are available: 50 m,
100 m and 200 m. Depth alarm limit is
also shown.

27.2.11 Combined wind, depth and destination window (for DNV

specification)

27-7
27. Conning Display

27.2.12 Fuel consumption window

The fuel consumption window displays three sets of indications which show
ship’s speed, fuel consumption per hour and fuel consumption per nautical mile.
Each indication has two vertical bars. The bar on the left shows planned speed
or fuel consumption and the bar at right shows actual situation.

27.2.13 Thruster window

Two types of thruster windows are available and one is chosen during the installation. The content of this window is
defined with Thrusters 1-4 in the Installation parameters.

27.2.14 Propellers window

Propulsion RPM and pitch
Three different types of propellers windows are available and one is chosen during the installation. The content of
this window is defined with Propellers 1-4 in the Installation parameters.

27-8
 27. Conning Display

Propulsion with main engine (for DNV specification)

Four different types of propellers windows are available and one is chosen during the installation. The content of
this window is defined with Propellers 1-4 in the Installation parameters.

Single Single CPP

Dual Dual CPP

27.2.15 Azimuth propulsion window

Two different types of azimuth propulsion windows are available and one is chosen during the installation. The
content of this window is defined with Azimuth in the Installation parameters.

27-9
27. Conning Display

27.2.16 Speedpilot window

The speedpilot window displays the following data:

• ROUTE: Optimization type for monitored route.

• PLAN LEG: Planned speed for current leg (based on plan).

• SUGGESTED: If optimization type is “timetable”, then this indicates

suggested speed to keep the timetable. For other optimization types this is
blank.

• SPEEDPILOT: Chosen mode in Speed Pilot, OFF, SET or PLAN.

• ACTUAL: Speed and source of the speed used by the speedpilot.

• SET: Set position of handle and set speed of speedpilot during operation
mode SET of the speedpilot. Blank during other operation modes.

• PLAN: Set position of handle and set speed of speedpilot during operation
mode PLAN of the speedpilot. Blank during other operation modes.

The last row is reserved for alarm indication. The speedpilot display shows
alarms as ALnn, where nn is the number of the alarm. The conning display
shows the speedpilot alarm as self-explanatory text.

27.2.17 Message window

The message window is available with connection of a central alarm unit
(option), and it shows various alarms generated by the central alarm unit.

27-10
 27. Conning Display

27.2.18 Main engine start air pressure window

This window shows engine starting air pressure.

27.2.19 Alarm messages window

This window shows all active or pending alarms in priority order. For more
information, see paragraph 30.8 “List of Alarms”.

27.2.20 Propulsion and thruster window (for DNV specification)

PORT PROPULSION XXX RPM

PITCH XXX%
PORT PROPULSION XXX RPM
PITCH XXX%
BOW THRUSTER XXX%
STERN THRUSTER XXX%

27-11
27. Conning Display

27.3 Modes for Conning Display

The conning display shows data collected from different sensors and also data from ECDIS and trackpilot
processors. There are four different conning display modes; Harbour 1 mode, Harbour 2 mode, Navigate 1 mode and
Navigate 2 mode, and one of these modes may be selected from a dialog box. The parameters for each display mode
are chosen during the installation, on the Installation parameters.

27.3.1 Choosing mode for conning display

You may choose the conning display mode from the Conning Display dialog box. Spin the thumbwheel to display
Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area, push the left mouse button, choose Conning Display from the
menu, choose conning display mode from the Conning mode list box and then push the thumbwheel.

The conning display window appears in where

you can choose desired conning mode.

27.3.2 Choosing background color of conning display

You may choose the background color for the conning display. Spin the thumbwheel to display Menu/Info/Chart
Menu in the mouse functions area, push the left mouse button, choose Conning Display from the menu, choose
conning display mode from the Background list box and then push the thumbwheel.

Choose the background color from the

Background list box.

27.3.3 Changing color palette of conning display

The conning display is using the same color palette as the ECDIS. When you change color palette of the ECDIS you
also change the palette of the conning display.

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Chart Display/Info/Standard Display in the mouse functions area.

2. Push the left mouse button to show the Chart Display dialog box.

3. If the Chart page is not active, click an arrow tab in the dialog box several times to display it.

4. Choose palette scheme from the Palette list box; spin the thumbwheel to choose a palette and push the
thumbwheel to confirm.

27-12
28. Trackpilot
(FAP-2000+FEA-2x07)

28.1 Introduction
This chapter describes steering functions (trackpilot) available with connection of the optional FURUNO Autopilot
FAP-2000. This Trackpilot receives position, heading and speed data, compares this with the track section to be
steered, and applies the ship model to calculate and command the necessary rudder angle.

28.2 Steering Modes

Note that all steering-related functions are available only if the ECDIS system is also connected to the optional
Trackpilot.

Hand Trackpilot
Steering Steering

Steering

Go to Go to
Waypoint Track

Steering modes of the ECDIS together with the trackpilot

28-1
28. Trackpilot

28.2.1 Hand steering

Manual steering modes are:

• Steering wheel

• Wing steering control

• Override tiller

While in a manual steering mode, the ECDIS system is displaying the rudder angle and indication of hand steering
mode.

28.2.2 Trackpilot steering

• Operator sets the required heading of the ship.

• Turning radius is also set by operator (or in Heading Control mode the rudder angle limit).

• Turn is initiated by operator.

The ECDIS displays required heading, radius, rate of turn and predicted turn. (Curved EBL can also be displayed,
but not in Heading Control mode.)

28.2.3 Waypoint mode

The ECDIS system will follow the planned track to a next waypoint but with moderate accuracy in order to have
more economical sailing (sailing in ocean areas).

When approaching a next waypoint, the ECDIS alerts the operator both well before the turn and just before the turn.

The ECDIS system performs turns using planned radius.

28.2.4 Track mode

In the track mode, the planned track is followed at the maximum accuracy between waypoints and also in the turn
(position-controlled turn).

Like at the approach to a waypoint, the ECDIS alerts the operator both well before the turn and just before the turn
when approaching a waypoint.

28-2
 28. Trackpilot

28.3 Trackpilot Control Panel

Below is short description of the Trackpilot control panel.

FURUNO FAP2000

1-6: Steering mode selection

• PROGRAM TRACK: Programmed track-controlled heading change using set radius. Also for steering
with chosen ARPA models.

• GOTO TRACK: Track-controlled automatic route steering

• GOTO WAYPOINT: Course-controlled automatic route steering

• HEADING CONTROL: Immediate heading-controlled course change using set rudder angle limit

• RADIUS CONTROL: Immediate radius-controlled course change using set radius

• PROGRAM HEADING CHANGE: Programmed heading-controlled course change using set radius

7: Loading condition indicator: Loading conditions, Light, Medium or Loaded

8: Performance indicator: Performance status, Economy, Medium or Precise

28-3
28. Trackpilot

9: Trackpilot status indicator: Shows chosen mode and state of readiness.

• Trackpilot in operation: READY

• Trackpilot control mode: HEADING/TRACK

• Trackpilot automatic route steering: ROUTE

• Trackpilot track controlled turn: TURN

10: Trackpilot alarm indicator and buzzer cancel

• ALARM lamp for other Trackpilot-related alarms and errors

• RESET button for acknowledging other Trackpilot-related alarms and errors.

11: Special function keypad

• Selection of manual speed

• Adjustment of panel dimmer

• Set-up of manual speed value, auto speed, rudder limit function, performance and condition

12: Tiller

• Used to set course and radius.

• PORT and STBD lamps show when tiller can be used to set course.

• INCREASE. and DECREASE. lamps show when tiller can be used to set radius or set rudder angle limit.

13: Gyro reading and a bar graph showing rate of turn

14: Set Heading display includes:

• Off course alarm

• Turn side

• Rudder-on limit indication

15: Displays:

• Radius set-point in Radius Control mode

• Rudder limit in Heading Control mode

• AUTO LIMIT lamp lights to indicate selection of automatic rudder limit function.

16: Displays:

• ROT in Radius Control mode

• Speed in Heading Control mode

• Speed warning indicator (LOG FAILURE or LOW)

28-4
 28. Trackpilot

28.4 Manual Steering

28.4.1 Heading control
The heading control steering mode can be used always; it doesn't require any position source.

• Mode selection: HEADING CONTROL

• The HEADING CONTROL and HEADING lamps are lit.

• Immediate course change when tiller is used to set heading.

• Course change is defined as heading controlled with set rudder angle limit.

28.4.2 Radius control

The radius control steering mode can be used always; it doesn't require any position source.

• Mode selection: RADIUS CONTROL

• RADIUS CONTROL and HEADING lamps are lit

• Immediate course change when tiller is used to set heading.

• Course change is radius controlled with set radius

• If wind, current, etc. affect the ship, the ship will drift away (inside or outside) from planned designed turn. This
is displayed on the radar screen.

28.4.3 Program heading change

Program heading change steering mode can be used always, it doesn't require any position source.

• Mode selection: PROGRAM HEADING CHANGE

• PROGRAM COURSE CHANGE and HEADING lamps are lit.

• Tiller is first used to set new heading and radius, which are also displayed on the radar screen.

• “START HEADING CHANGE” flashes if newly set heading is different from currently used set heading.

• Course change is activated by pushing START HEADING CHANGE.

• After activation, control is returned to RADIUS CONTROL.

• If wind, current, etc. affect the ship, the ship will drift away (inside or outside) from planned designed turn. This
is displayed on the radar screen.

28-5
28. Trackpilot

28.4.4 Program track

Program track steering mode can be used with Kalman filter and a high-precision sensor such as DGPS:

• Mode selection: PROGRAM TRACK

• PROGRAM TRACK, TRACK and TURN lamps are lit.

• Tiller is first used to set new heading and radius, which are also displayed on the radar screen.

• “START HEADING CHANGE” flashes if newly set heading is different from currently used set heading.

• Course change is activated by pushing START HEADING CHANGE.

• After activation, the mode becomes PROGRAM TRACK.

• Course change is track controlled with set radius.

• If wind, current, etc. affect the ship, the ship will drift away (inside or outside) from planned designed turn. This
is displayed on the radar screen.

The following alarms may be released in the Program Track mode:

• Alarm “2488 Steering:Stop-system fail”: Internal failure - Program Track mode is cancelled.

• Alarm “2493 ProgTrack: Needs Filter ON”: Kalman filter is not used with program track. This alarm will be
repeated every four minutes for next ten minutes and if the condition continues, the alarm “2496 ProgTrack:
Stop - Sensor Fail” is generated and the steering mode is automatically changed to “radius control”.

• Alarm “2494 ProgTrack: Needs Log sens.”: Kalman filter is used with program track but without including an
independent speed source (separate log sensor or two position sensors). This alarm will be repeated every four
minutes for next ten minutes and if the condition continues, the alarm “2496 ProgTrack: Stop - Sensor Fail” is
generated and the steering mode is automatically changed to “radius control”.

• Alarm “2495 ProgTrack: Needs diff Pos.”: Kalman filter is used with program track but without a high-
precision sensor (for example, DGPS). This alarm will be repeated every four minutes for next ten minutes and if
the condition continues, the alarm “2496 ProgTrack: Stop - Sensor Fail” is generated and the steering mode is
automatically changed to “radius control”.

• Alarm “2496 ProgTrack: Stop - Sensor Fail”: No gyro data or if conditions of alarm 2493, 2494, 2495 or 2503
has been valid for last ten minutes.

• Alarm “2498 Use manual rudder control”: Generated every 2 minutes to alert the operator to control rudder
manually, when the trackpilot has lost gyro and thus cannot control rudder.

• Alarm “2503 ProgTrack:Need higher Spd”: Kalman filter is used with program track but speed is below limit
set for track steering in the installation parameters. This will be repeated every four minutes for next ten minutes
and if the condition continues, the alarm “2496 ProgTrack: Stop - Sensor Fail” is generated and the steering
mode is automatically changed to “radius control”.

• Alarm “2504 ProgTrack: Use Radius ctrl.”: Informs the user to change steering mode to “radius control”. This
alarm is generated if there are not sufficient conditions to continue program track (i.e. alarm 2493, 2494, 2495 or
2503 has been valid 2 minutes). This alarm is repeated every four minutes.

• Alarm “2509 ProgTrack:Need sog/cog ref”: Appears if there is no Speed Over Ground (SOG) and Course Over
Ground (COG) available from position sensor(s) or from bottom track from dual-axis log. This alarm will be
repeated every four minutes for next ten minutes and if the condition continues, the alarm “2496 ProgTrack:
Stop - Sensor Fail” is generated and the steering mode is automatically changed to “radius control”.

28-6
 28. Trackpilot

28.4.5 Summary of manual steering modes

HEADING RADIUS PROGRAM PROGRAM
CONTROL CONTROL COURSE TRACK
CHANGE
Set heading Yes Yes Yes Yes
Set radius No Yes Yes Yes
Radius control No Yes Yes Yes
Design before execution No No Yes Yes
Full curved EBL on radar screen No Yes Yes Yes
Wind, current, etc. compensation No No No Yes
Needs gyro Yes Yes Yes Yes
Needs log No Yes Yes Yes
Needs high-precision position No No No Yes
Needs direct SOG/COG sensor No No No Yes

28-7
28. Trackpilot

28.5 Automatic Route Steering

In automatic route steering you can use either the Go to Waypoint mode or the Go to Track mode. Automatic route
steering can be used with a predefined monitored route.

Go to WP and Go to Track modes can be activated when your ship is located inside a channel of a monitored route.

See the figure below for description of difference between “Go to WP” and “Go to Track”. As shown, the ship will
always make way toward the waypoint in Go to WP, and return to course set in Go to Track.

“Go to Waypoint” “Go to Track”

WP WP

WP WP

WP WP

Note: If the off track error is more than 100 meters in the “Go to Track” mode, the system cannot increase the
approach angle towards the center line of the route.

28-8
 28. Trackpilot

See the figure below to find how location of dynamic WP is defined when the “Go to Waypoint” mode is used.

Originally planned
turn
Originally planned
WP

DYNAMIC WP

Wheel over line Wheel over line

for non-dynamic for dynamic WP
WP used by
"Go To Track"

28.5.1 “Goto waypoint” mode

• Mode selection: GO TO WAYPOINT

• GO TO WAYPOINT and ROUTE lamps are lit.

• Tiller can be used to set radius, but not course, which is set automatically.

• Steering is course controlled with set radius.

• If wind, current, etc. affect the ship between waypoints, the system tries to prevent the ship from drifting from
the planned route. The system has three means to prevent drifting from the planned route, and they are most
effective when used together. If cross-track error is used alone, the own ship stabilizes typically in a constant
off-track position. The means are:

• Measured cross-track error from the center line, which is always active

• Drift compensation available from route parameters

• Gyro error compensation available from route parameters

• If wind, current, etc. affect the ship during turns, the ship will drift (inside or outside) from planned turn, which
is displayed on the radar screen. This kind of turn is called an “assisted turn”.

• Can be used when the ship has accurate position source available.

• Normally, the Goto Waypoint mode uses dynamic location of waypoint. However, if alarm 2013 is active, a
non-dynamic waypoint is used.

28-9
28. Trackpilot

28.5.2 “Goto track” mode

• Mode selection GO TO TRACK

• GO TO TRACK button and ROUTE and TRACK lamps are lit.

• Tiller can be used to set radius, but not heading, which is set automatically.

• Steering is track-controlled with set radius.

• If wind, current, etc. affect the ship between waypoints, the system tries to prevent the ship from drifting from
the planned route. The system has three means to prevent drifting from the planned route, and they are most
effective when used together. If cross-track error is used alone, the own ship stabilizes typically in a constant
off-track position. The means are:

• Measured cross-track error from the center line, which is always active

• Drift compensation available from route parameters

• Gyro error compensation available from route parameters

• Can be used when the ship has high-precision position source available.

• Goto Track mode uses non-dynamic waypoint.

28.5.3 Summary of automatic route steering modes

GO TO WAYPOINT GO TO TRACK
Set course Automatic Automatic
Set radius Automatic / Manual Automatic / Manual
Radius control Yes Yes
Dynamic waypoint location Yes No
Design before execution Yes Yes
Full curved EBL on radar screen Yes Yes
Wind, current, etc. compensation in linear parts between wpt. Low gain High gain
Wind, current, etc. compensation in turns No Yes
Needs gyro Yes Yes
Needs log Yes Yes
1
Precision of position equipment Good Highi
Needs direct sog/cog sensor No Yes
1
Precision of position is good with LORAN and GPS.
1
Precision of position is high with DGPS and SYLEDIS.

28-10
 28. Trackpilot

28.5.4 Preconditions for automatic route steering

General preconditions
Goto WP and Goto Track modes can be activated when your ship is located inside a channel of a monitored route.

The difference between actual heading and planned course to approach “To WP” must be less than the limit set in
the route steering parameters in order to initiate automatic route steering. For further details, see paragraph 25.1.4
“Navigation parameters setting”.

Route steering requires activation of the Kalman filter. If you try to activate any of the route steering modes without
the filter, you get the alarm “2470 Disabled: Needs filter on”.

If you try to activate any of the route steering modes without an independent speed source, you get the alarm “2490
Disabled: Needs log sensor”. Route steering requires that you have at least either one log and position receiver or
two position receivers available and in use.

Alarm “2499 Disabled: Needs good Pos” appears if the filter did not have high-precision position sensor for route
steering, and position discrepancy limit between primary and secondary sensors is exceeded.

Alarm “2502 Disabled: Need higher Spd” appears if the speed used by the Kalman filter calculation is below the
limit set for track steering in the installation parameters.

It is recommended to activate position discrepancy detection (i.e., set position discrepancy limit > 0). This lets the
Kalman filter exclude from position calculation a sensor which has large position discrepancy. This also influences
the Goto WP, Goto Track and Program Track steering modes.

• If position discrepancy limit is set very small (0.01 nm), the system will quickly alarm you about discrepancy,
but you may also experience unwanted alarms.

Goto track mode preconditions

Route steering with the Goto Track mode requires that you have at least one high-precision position receiver and
directSOG/COG reference available and in use.

At least one high-precision position is available and in use when the permanent indication FILTER HIGH appears
at the upper right corner of the ECDIS display. DGPS, etc. are considered as high-precision position receivers. Note
that a standard GPS or a DGPS without differential position available are not accepted as high-precision position
receivers.

It is also required that Speed Over Ground (SOG) reference is available either from position sensor(s) or bottom
track of dual-axis log.

If any of the conditions described above is lost during the Goto Track mode, the system automatically changes
within 10 minutes to the Goto WP mode and you get the alarm “2489 Route: Changed to Go to WP”.

28-11
28. Trackpilot

28.5.5 How to activate automatic route steering

Route steering can be activated by pushing the GOTO WAYPOINT or GOTO TRACK button on the Trackpilot
panel. The lamp of the pushed button will start to flash and if the ECDIS accepts the requested route steering mode,
the lamp will then light to indicate the used route steering mode.

Go to WP

If a Go to WP is activated, the indication “Goto WP” appears in

the route monitor window.

If the planned course to approach a “To WP” is defined using

Great Circle, the indication “Goto WP Great circle” appears in
the route monitor window.

Go to Track

If Go to Track is activated, the indication “Goto Track” appears

in the route monitor window.

If the planned course to approach a “To WP” is defined using

Great Circle, the indication “Track Great circle” appears in the
route monitor window.

When route steering is not used or if the ECDIS did not accept
the requested route steering mode, there is no indication of
route steering in the route monitor window, as shown right.

28-12
 28. Trackpilot

Alarms when automatic route steering cannot be accepted

There are several reasons why the requested route steering mode could not be accepted:

Alarm “2467 Disabled: Steering off”, which informs you that the ECDIS didn't have steering controlling
permission at the time of request. Check that you have properly enabled the Trackpilot for steering.

Alarm “2470 Disabled: Needs filter on”, which informs you that you didn't have the Kalman filter operative at the
time of request. Route steering requires that you use the Kalman filter, because the filter eliminates sudden jumps of
the position and thus prevents unpredictable manuevers of own ship. Check your selection of sensors.

Alarm “2490 Disabled: Needs log sensor”, which informs you that the Kalman filter did not have an independent
speed source. You need either a log, a dual-axis log or two position receivers. Check your selection of sensors.

Alarm “2491 Disabled: Needs diff Pos”, informs you that the Kalman filter did not have high-precision position
sensor for “Goto track” steering mode. Chosen sensors must include at least one high-precision sensor.

Alarm “2477 Disabled: Out of channel”, which informs you that the current location of your ship is not inside
channel of a monitored route.

Alarm “2468 Disabled: Out of course”, which informs you that the difference between current heading of own ship
and the required set course to start the route steering is greater than set by the user in the route start limit angle of
Route Parameters.

Alarm “2464 Route: No chosen route”, which informs you that there is no route chosen for Route Monitoring.

Alarm “2465 Route: Illegal WP”, which informs you that there is a route chosen for route monitoring, but the
selection of the next or final waypoint is missing or illegal.

Alarm “2499 Disabled: Needs good Pos”, which appears if the Kalman filter did not have a high-precision position
sensor for route steering, and position discrepancy limit between primary and secondary sensors is exceeded.

Alarm “2502 Disabled: Need higher Spd”, which appears if the speed used by the Kalman filter calculation is
below the limit set for track steering in the installation parameters.

Alarm “2508 Disabled: Need sog/cog ref”, which appears if neither Speed Over Ground (SOG) nor Course Over
Ground COG) is available from position sensor(s) or bottom track of dual-axis log.

Alarm “2510 Disabled: Out of turn”, which appears if Goto WP or Goto Track button was pressed when the
route monitoring of the system detects that vessel is turning, but own ship location is out of turn. Check and reset
correct “To WP” for route monitoring.

28-13
28. Trackpilot

28.5.6 Arriving to a waypoint

Automatic route steering navigation tries to keep the ship always inside the channel limits and go to a next
waypoint. At the “pre-warning point”, the visual indication “2485 Route: WP prewarning” appears on the ECDIS
display and the ACKN. WARNING button on the Trackpilot lights.

At the “approach point”, the operation that will occur depends on if you acknowledged the preceding
acknowledgeable visual indication “2485 Route: WP prewarning”.

If you acknowledged the alarm 2485 then, at the approach point, the acknowledgeable visual indication “2451
Route: WP approach alarm” appears on the ECDIS display and the ACKN. WARNING button on the Trackpilot's
control panel lights. If you do not acknowledge alarm 2451 before wheel over point, the alarm 2451 will be changed
from an acknowledgeable visual indication to an audible alarm.

If you did not acknowledge the alarm 2485 at the approach point, the alarm “2451 Route: WP approach alarm”
appears on the ECDIS display and the ACKN. WARNING button on the Trackpilot’s control lights and the buzzer
sounds.

TURN IS ALWAYS ENABLED. THE ONLY WAY TO DISABLE THE AUTOMATIC TURN IS TO CHOOSE
ANOTHER STEERING MODE.

Note that these alarms are programmable (the time before you reach a turn) and it is relative to the starting point of
the manuever). See the figure below for description.

Prewarning Approach Wheel Over Point

point Point WOP
Waypoint
WP

WP prewarn forwarding
alarm time distance = f
WP approach end of turn
alarm time
radius

As soon as the ship arrives to the wheel over point, the ECDIS sends a new course command to the Trackpilot and
the corresponding manuever is initiated. During a manuever, both the radar display and the ECDIS display show the
Curved EBL, indicating the planned radius for manuever.

Go to WP

When the “pre-warning point” is passed in the “Go to WP”

mode and the acknowledgeable visual indication “2485 Route:
WP prewarning” is acknowledged at the control panel of the
Trackpilot, the text “Ass. Appr. Enabled” appears in the route
monitor window of the ECDIS display.

Go to Track

When the “pre-warning point” is passed in the “Go to Track”

mode and the acknowledgeable visual indication “2485 Route:
WP prewarning” is acknowledged at the control panel of the
Trackpilot, the text “Track Appr. Enabled” appears in the route
monitor window of the ECDIS display.

28-14
 28. Trackpilot

If acknowledgeable visual indication 2485 is not

acknowledged, the text in the route monitor window will
remain the same as it was before the prewarning point (Goto
Track or Goto WP).

Go to WP

When the “approach point” is passed and acknowledgeable

visual indication or alarm “2451 Route: WP approach alarm” is
acknowledged, the text “Ass. Turn enabled” appears in the
route monitor window of the ECDIS display.

Go to Track

When the “approach point” is passed and acknowledgeable

visual indication or alarm “2451 Route: WP approach alarm” is
acknowledged, the text “Track Turn enabled” appears in the
route monitor window of the ECDIS display.

Go to WP

During the turn the text “Assisted Turn” appears in the route
monitor window of the ECDIS display.

Go to Track

During the turn the text “Track Turn” appears in the route
monitor window of the ECDIS display.

Note: Approaching the last waypoint will give the acknowledgeable visual indication or alarm “2458 Route: Last
WP approach”. When you acknowledge the alarm 2458, the route steering is automatically terminated and the
Trackpilot goes into the Radius Control mode.

28-15
28. Trackpilot

28.5.7 Automatic route steering alarms

There are two types of alarms relevant to route steering, permanent and intermittent.

Permanent alarms are available regardless of the steering mode

used:

• Outside channel is indicated by displaying the text “Off

track” in orange and its value in red.

• The text “Out of Gate” is orange. Out of gate indicates that,

if the ship continues using the current course, the ship will be
outside of the channel at wheel over point.

Intermittent audio/visual alarms appear as follows:

• Alarm number and text are visible at lower right corner of the ECDIS display (see example below).

• The ACKN. WARNING button of the Trackpilot control panel lights to provide visual alarm (see example
below).

• Buzzer sounds from the Trackpilot’s panel.

You acknowledge an intermittent alarm by pressing the ACKN. WARNING button on the Trackpilot’s panel.

FURUNO FAP2000

28-16
 28. Trackpilot

Typical intermittent alarms not described in other chapters are:

Alarm “2010 Filter: Pos source change” appears if differential GPS used in filter positioning has changed its
operation mode either from differential mode to normal mode or normal mode to differential mode. If the steering
mode is “Goto Track” alarm “2492 Route: Needs diff Pos” also appears, if DGPS has changed its mode to normal
mode.

Alarm “2013 SOG&COG unreliable” appears when the system finds out that SOG and COG from sensors are
inaccurate. Speed/Course sensors and position sensors can be source of SOG and COG.

Alarm “2457 Route: Outside chl limits” appears when own ship goes outside the planned channel.

Alarm “2455 Route: off course”, appears if the system needs more than a set limit (the limit is available in
Installation parameters) to keep the track. This alarm is repeated every five minutes, if the condition continues.

Alarm “2456 Route: WP approach error” appears if own ship speed is decreased more than waypoint approach
alarm time + 100 seconds away from the wheel over point after the user has already acknowledged alarm “2451
Route: WP approach alarm” to enable the next automatic turn. After the alarm 2456, the next turn is not enabled and
the system will generate a new alarm “2451 Route: Wp approach alarm” when appropriate.

Alarm “2460 Pilot: ROT will be exceed” appears if the set radius value in the Trackpilot panel together with the
current speed of the ship request rate of turn which is over the limit set for Max. rate of turn in the route
parameters.

Alarm “2461 Route: ROT will be exceed” appears if the planned radius for next waypoint together with the current
speed of the ship request rate of turn which is over the limit set for Max. rate of turn in the Route parameters. This
alarm is activated if the own ship is within value WP approach alarm time set in Route Parameters from the wheel
over point.

Alarm “2469 Trackpilot: off course” appears if the trackpilot needs more than a set limit (the limit is available in
Installation parameters for Go To Waypoint mode. Go To Track mode uses fixed value of 30 degrees) to keep the
track. This alarm is repeated every five minutes, if the condition continues.

Alarm “2488 Steering: Stop-System fail” appears if the system has internal failure, which prevents continuation of
Goto Waypoint or Goto Track.

Alarm “2497 Route: Stop - Sensor Fail” appears if no gyro data is received or if conditions of alarm 2475, 2476,
2478, 2492 or 2501 has been valid for last ten minutes.

Typical guidance alarms not described in other chapters are:

Alarm “2475 Route: Needs filter on”, which appears if the position from the Kalman filter is not available. Alarm
2475 will be repeated every four minutes for next ten minutes and if condition still exists, alarm “2497 Route: Stop
- Sensor Fail” is generated and steering mode is automatically changed to Radius Control.

Alarm “2476 Route: Needs log sensor” appears if the position from the Kalman filter cannot be compared against
an independently operating log. Alarm 2476 will be repeated every four minutes for next ten minutes and if
condition still exists, alarm “2497 Route: Stop - Sensor Fail” is generated and steering mode is automatically
changed to Radius Control.

Alarm “2478 Route: Needs good Pos” appears if the Kalman filter did not have high precision position sensor for
route steering and position discrepancy limit between primary and secondary position or between own ship and any
position is exceeded. Alarm is repeated every 2 minutes for 10 minutes after which alarm “2497 Route: Stop -
Sensor Fail” appears.

Alarm “2492 Route: Needs diff Pos” appears for any use of Goto Track with Kalman filter but without a high
precision sensor (an example is DGPS). Alarm 2492 will be repeated every four minutes for next ten minutes and if
condition still exists, alarm “2489 Route: Changed to Goto WP” is generated and steering mode is automatically
changed to Goto WP.

Alarm “2498 Use manual rudder control” appears every two minutes to advise the operator to use manual control
of rudder, when the trackpilot has lost gyro and thus cannot control rudder.

28-17
28. Trackpilot

Alarm “2501 Route: Needs higher Speed” appears for any use of Goto Track with Kalman filter but speed below
limit set for track steering in Installation Parameters. Alarm 2501 will be repeated every four minutes for next ten
minutes and if condition still exists, alarm “2497 Route: Stop - Sensor Fail” is generated and steering mode is
automatically changed to Radius Control.

Alarm “2505 Route: Use Goto WP” is instruction for the operator to change steering mode to Goto WP. This alarm
is generated if there are not sufficient conditions to continue Goto Track (i.e. alarm 2492 or 2507 has been valid two
minutes). This alarm is repeated every four minutes.

Alarm “2506 Route: Use Radius control” is instruction for the operator to change steering mode to Radius Control.
This alarm is generated if there are not sufficient conditions to continue Goto Track (i.e. alarm 2475, 2476 or 2501
has been valid 2 minutes). This alarm is repeated every four minutes.

Alarm “2507 Route: Need sog/cog ref.” appears if any use of Goto Track with Kalman filter but without direct
Speed Over Ground (SOG) and Course Over Ground (COG) available from position sensor(s) or from bottom track
of dual-axis log. If condition still exists after ten minutes, alarm “2489 Route: Changed to Goto WP” is generated
and steering mode is automatically changed to Goto WP.

28.5.8 Collision avoidance manuever during automatic route

steering
Often route steering is interrupted by a collision avoidance manuever, but there are also several other reasons to
interrupt route steering. You have several options with which to set the collision avoidance or any other manuever:

• Use override tiller, direct rudder pump operation button or non-follow-up rudder control.

• Use follow-up rudder control.

• Use Trackpilot HEADING CONTROL.

• Use Trackpilot RADIUS CONTROL.

• Use Trackpilot Program Track.

To use any of the above Trackpilot modes, push the desired mode button and follow normal instructions. See
paragraph 28.4.5 “Summary of manual steering modes”.

Now the route steering is disabled until the GO TO WAYPOINT or GO TO TRACK button is pushed again. Note
that in order to return to route steering the ship heading must point to the next waypoint, otherwise the alarm “2468
Disabled: Out of course” is generated.

28.5.9 Stopping or modifying pre-enabled route turn

There are two cases where the automatic route turn must be stopped or modified:

• Because the turn cannot be performed up to the final value.

• Because the turn which your ship will perform is outside of the planned turn. ( Too fast or too slow.)

You can also during turns use all methods described in the above-mentioned paragraph “Collision avoidance
manuever during automatic route steering”. However, you may interrupt an automatic route steering turn and
continue it in the manual steering mode.

28-18
 28. Trackpilot

Interrupted turn
• If the turn has already started, the set course display on the Trackpilot shows the new course value.

• Push the RADIUS CONTROL button on the Trackpilot control panel.

• Now the manual steering is enabled and your turn continues with previously set values of course and radius.

• Using the tiller, set the new intended course.

Example:

Actual course = 45°, new course = 120°, route turn was enabled. At the moment the ship’s heading is 60°, the
helmsman wishes to change the course to 90°. The set course already shows 120°. Push the RADIUS CONTROL
button on the Trackpilot control panel and then use the tiller to set the new course to 90°. The turn will be finished
to that value.

Too fast or too slow turn

This is used in case the ship is not performing the planned radius and the radius must be modified.

1. If the actual turning is too fast, use tiller on the Trackpilot control panel to increase radius.

2. With some chosen radar models you can also use the RADIUS INCR button. Push the button once.

New situation is shown on the radar screen.

The same logic applies for a too slow turning.

28.5.10 Accuracy of automatic route steering

Accurate route steering is defined as a small cross-track error when automatically following a route. Two of the
route parameters - Drift compensation and Gyro error compensation - have a significant effect on accuracy of route
steering. If you need most accurate route steering, then both of these parameters should be enabled. Before
activating the Gyro error compensation, see paragraph 19.9 “Gyro Error Correction” to find the available methods
for gyro error compensation.

28-19
28. Trackpilot

28.6 Additional Information About Steering Modes

Use of multiple Trackpilot control panels
The Trackpilot system may incorporate several control panels. In this case:

• The active panel is indicated by a light in one of the steering mode buttons (RADIUS CONTROL, COURSE
CONTROL, GOTO WAYPOINT, GOTO TRACK and PROGRAM TRACK).

• Both active and non-active panels indicate steering mode in use by lamps and displays. See the table below.

• You can transfer control from active panel to non-active panel by pushing one of the steering mode buttons
(RADIUS CONTROL, COURSE CONTROL, GOTO WAYPOINT, GOTO TRACK and PROGRAM
TRACK). This action lets you change the steering mode or continue with previous one. To continue with the
previous steering mode, push the steering mode button corresponding to previous steering mode. Note that you
can observe lamp indications to know the current steering mode.

Steering mode Lamp indication Radius/Rudder limit display

Heading Control Course Rudder limit

Radius Control Course Radius

Program Track Track Radius

Goto WP Route Radius

Goto Track Route and Track Radius

28-20
 28. Trackpilot

Details of programmed turns

The Trackpilot allows the user to design a turn beforehand and to begin execution of the turn when the START
COURSE CHANGE button is pushed. The table below summaries properties of each applicable steering mode.

Steering Rule Turn Change of Change of Change of Curved EBL Curved EBL
mode applicable control Set course Radius rudder
limit “Start course “Start course
change” does change”
not flash flashes

Heading Turn or Rudder Immediate Not applicable Immediate Not applicable Not applicable
control linear angle limit action

PHC + Turn or Rudder No action Not applicable Immediate Not applicable Not applicable
Heading linear angle limit until click of
control Start (*)

Radius Turn or Radius Immediate Immediate Not If displayed Not applicable

control linear control action applicable indicates
ongoing turn

PHC + Linear (**) Radius No action Immediate Not If displayed Display

Radius (***) control until click of applicable indicates planned turn
control Start (*) ongoing turn

PHC + Turn (**) Radius No action Not available Not Displays Display
Radius (***) control until click of applicable ongoing turn planned turn
control Start (*)
(executing a
turn)

PTT Linear (**) Not No action Immediate Not If displayed Display

applicable until click of applicable indicates planned turn
Start (*) ongoing turn

PTT Turn (**) Position No action Not available Not Displays Display
(executing a controlled until click of applicable ongoing turn planned turn
turn) radius Start (*)

(*) “Start course change” flashes as indication of no immediate execution of the changed set course.

(**) “Increase” and “Decrease” lamps indicate “Linear” and “Turn”. If those lamps are on, then it is Linear. If the
lamps are off, then it is Turn.

(***) If the difference between heading and set course is less than 10 degrees, then the situation is interpreted as
Linear.

PHC = Program Heading Change

PTT = Program Track

28-21
28. Trackpilot

28.7 Important Information About Steering Mode

Changes
When the Trackpilot is not used for steering
In addition to the Trackpilot, a ship may have a steering selection unit of some kind which minimally incorporates
“HAND” and “TRACKPILOT” functions. “HAND” can function to override the tiller, direct rudder pump operation
buttons, non-follow-up rudder control or follow-up rudder control. While in the “HAND” mode, the Trackpilot
always sets course equal to gyro course.

User can change to “HAND” mode from any of the Trackpilot steering modes.

Steady as she goes

If you want the ship to go “steady as she goes” while in the middle of any Trackpilot operation, switch from any
Trackpilot steering mode to the “HAND” mode (and back again to switch back to Trackpilot control).

About mode changes when using Trackpilot for steering

The user can change from any steering mode to any other steering mode. For example, it is possible to leave
automatic route steering and return to automatic route steering during both linear parts and turns.

The new steering mode continues from the previously displayed course, shown on the set course display. The only
exceptions are pending program modes (PROGRAM HEADING CHANGE and PROGRAM TRACK), when the
new mode continues from currently used set course. These pending modes are indicated by flashing the lamp in the
START HEADING CHANGE button.

The diagram below shows all other possible steering mode changes, but not activation of Goto WP, Goto Track or
Program Track.

Program Course
Change
&
Radius Press
Program Goto WP
Control course change

Press Press
Start
Radius
course change
control

Radius
Goto Track
Control

Press
Heading
control

Heading
Control
Program Track
Press
Program
Press
course change
Start
course change

Program Course
Change
&
Heading
Control

28-22
 28. Trackpilot

28.8 Expected Steering Performance Under Various

Conditions
The system has many available steering modes. Below is a summary of effect of various environmental conditions.

28.8.1 Expected steering performance for going ahead

Environment Heading control Program track Goto Waypoint Goto Track
conditions
Radius control
Program
heading change

Calm sea, no COG is about the Drift compensation ON Drift compensation ON Drift compensation ON
wind, no same as Set or OFF: or OFF: or OFF:
current Course in
Trackpilot. - COG is equal to - Ship follows - Ship follows
course set on monitored route. monitored route.
Trackpilot.
- Ship accurately
follows imaginary line
over ground.

Moderate Ship has a Drift compensation ON Drift compensation Drift compensation ON

wind and/or tendency to drift. or OFF: ON: or OFF:
current
- COG is equal to course - Ship follows - Ship follows
set on Trackpilot. monitored route. monitored route.
- Ship accurately
follows imaginary line
over ground. Drift compensation set
as OFF:
- Ship follows
monitored route in an
off-track position
inside the channel
limit.
High wind Ship is drifting. Drift compensation Drift compensation Drift compensation
and/or current ON: ON: ON:
- COG is equal to course - Ship follows - Ship follows
set on Trackpilot. monitored route. monitored route
- Ship follows nicely
imaginary line over
ground.

Drift compensation OFF: - Drift compensation Drift compensation

OFF: OFF:
- COG is equal to course
set on Trackpilot. - Ship may have - Ship may have
trouble in following trouble in following
- Ship has trouble in monitored route monitored route
following imaginary inside the channel inside the channel
line over ground. limit. limit

28-23
28. Trackpilot

Environment Heading control Program track Goto Waypoint Goto Track

conditions
Radius control
Program
heading change
Slow change There is no Drift compensation Drift compensation Drift compensation
of wind compensation for ON: ON: ON:
and/or current change
- COG is equal to course - Ship follows - Ship follows
set on Trackpilot. monitored route, but monitored route.
may need full
- Ship follows channel limit area.
imaginary line over
ground.
Drift compensation OFF: Drift compensation Drift compensation
OFF: OFF:
- COG is equal to course - Ship may have - Ship may have
set on Trackpilot. trouble in following trouble in following
monitored route monitored route
- Ship has trouble in inside the channel inside the channel
following imaginary limit. limit
line over ground.

Sudden There is no Drift compensation Drift compensation Drift compensation

change of compensation for ON: ON: ON:
wind and/or change
current - COG is equal to course - Ship follows - Ship may go outside
set on Trackpilot. monitored route, but channel limit and
(For example may need full return back inside
sudden - Ship follows channel limit area. channel limit.
change from imaginary line over
no current to ground, but may drift - Ship may go outside
5 kt current away from imaginary channel limit and
perpendicular line and then return to return back inside
to track) it. channel limit.

Drift compensation Drift compensation Drift compensation

OFF: OFF: OFF:
- COG is equal to course - Ship may have - Ship may have
set on Trackpilot. trouble in following trouble in following
monitored route monitored route
- Ship has trouble in inside the channel inside the channel
following imaginary limit. limit.
line over ground.

28-24
 28. Trackpilot

Environment Heading control Program track Goto Waypoint Goto Track

conditions
Radius control
Program
heading change
Slow change There is no Drift compensation ON Drift compensation Drift compensation ON
of speed compensation for or OFF: ON: or OFF:
change
- COG is equal to course - Ship follows - Ship follows
set on Trackpilot. monitored route. monitored route.
- Ship follows
imaginary line over
ground. Drift compensation set
as OFF:
- ship may have
troubles to follow
monitored route
inside the channel
limit
Fast change of There is no Drift compensation ON Drift compensation Drift compensation
speed compensation for or OFF: ON: ON:
change
(For example - COG is equal to course - Ship follows - Ship follows
speed set on Trackpilot. monitored route, but monitored route, but
decrease from may need full may need full
20 to 7 kt) - Ship follows channel limit area. channel limit area.
imaginary line over
ground, but may drift - Ship may go outside
away from imaginary channel limit and
line and then return to return back inside
it. channel limit.

Drift compensation Drift compensation Drift compensation

OFF: OFF: OFF:
- COG is equal to course - Ship may have - Ship may have
set on Trackpilot. trouble in following trouble in following
monitored route monitored route
- Ship may have trouble inside the channel inside the channel
in following imaginary limit. limit.
line over ground.

28-25
28. Trackpilot

28.8.2 Expected steering performance for turns

Environment Heading control Program track Goto Waypoint Goto Track
conditions
Radius control (assisted turn)
Program
heading change
Calm sea, no Ship follows Drift compensation ON Drift compensation Drift compensation ON or
wind, no curved EBL. or OFF: ON or OFF: OFF:
current
- Ship follows curved - Ship follows - Ship follows monitored
EBL. monitored route. route.

Moderate Ship goes inside Drift compensation ON Drift compensation Drift compensation ON or
wind and/or or outside of turn. or OFF: ON: OFF:
current
- Ship follows curved - Ship follows - Ship follows monitored
EBL monitored route, but route.
may need full
channel limit area.

Drift compensation set

as OFF:
- Ship goes inside or
outside of turn.
High wind Ship goes fast Drift compensation Drift compensation Drift compensation
and/or current inside or outside ON: ON: ON:
of turn.
- Ship follows curved - Ship follows - Ship follows monitored
EBL. monitored route, but route.
may go outside
channel limit area.
Drift compensation Drift compensation Drift compensation
OFF: OFF: OFF:
- Ship goes inside or - Ship goes fast inside - Ship goes inside or
outside of turn. or outside of turn. outside of turn.

Slow change Ship goes inside Drift compensation ON Drift compensation Drift compensation
of wind or outside of turn. or OFF: ON or OFF: ON:
and/or current
- Ship follows curved - Ship goes inside or - Ship follows monitored
EBL. outside of turn. route

Drift compensation OFF:

- Ship may have troubles
in following monitored
route inside the channel
limit.

28-26
 28. Trackpilot

Environment Heading control Program track Goto Waypoint Goto Track

conditions
Radius control (assisted turn)
Program
heading change
Sudden Ship goes fast Drift compensation Drift compensation Drift compensation
change of inside or outside ON: ON or OFF: ON:
wind and/or of turn.
current - Ship follows curved - Ship goes fast inside - Ship may go outside
EBL, but may drift or outside of turn. channel limit and return
(For example from curved EBL back inside channel
sudden and then return back limit.
change from to curved EBL.
no current to
5 kt current
perpendicular Drift compensation Drift compensation
to track) OFF: OFF:
- Ship goes inside or - Ship goes inside or
outside of turn. outside of turn.
Slow change Ship follows Drift compensation ON Drift compensation Drift compensation ON or
of speed curved EBL. or OFF: ON or OFF: OFF:
- Ship follows curved - Ship follows - Ship follows monitored
EBL. monitored route, but route.
may need full
channel limit area.

Fast change of Ship goes inside Drift compensation Drift compensation Drift compensation ON or
speed or outside of turn. ON: ON or OFF: OFF:
(For example - Ship follows curved - Ship goes inside or - Ship follows monitored
speed EBL, but may drift outside of turn. route, but may need full
decrease from from curved EBL channel limit area.
20 to 7 kt) and then return back
to curved EBL.

Drift compensation
OFF:
- Ship drifting away
from curved EBL
and may not return
back to curved EBL.

Note: Drift compensation is turned on or off in the Ship and Route parameters in the Navigation Parameters dialog
box. For further details, see paragraph 25.1.4 “Navigation parameters setting”.

28-27
28. Trackpilot

28.9 Expected Steering Performance Under Critical

Failure
Below is a summary of system behavior in various failures when Program Track, Goto Waypoint or Goto Track
steering mode is in use.

Note: Backup navigator alarm is activated if alarm is not acknowledged within 30 seconds. For more information
about this alarm, see paragraph 9.7 “Description of Backup Navigator Alarm”.

28.9.1 Lost heading from Trackpilot (ECDIS may also have lost
heading)
Associated alarms Expected system performance What end user should do

Immediately • Sensor alarm “4055: Gyro • If ship is in linear part, Rudder • Change immediately
error (Trackpilot)” is order is frozen for last value in to manual control of
generated at ECDIS. order to approximately rudder.
continue ahead.
• Alarm 10 is generated at • Acknowledge alarms.
Trackpilot control panel. • If ship is turning, rudder order
is frozen for last value in order • Study situation.
to approximately continue rate
of turn.

Within few • Alarm “2496 ProgTrack • Change immediately

seconds Stop-Sensor fail” or “2497 to manual control of
Route Stop-Sensor fail. rudder.

• Acknowledge alarms.

• Study situation.

Repeat • Alarm “2498 Use manual • Reminder • Change immediately

every 2 rudder control” is generated to manual control of
minutes at ECDIS. rudder.

28.9.2 Lost heading from ECDIS (Trackpilot still has heading)

Associated alarms (generated Expected system performance What end user should do
at ECDIS

• Sensor alarm, for example • Acknowledge alarms.

Alarm “4005: Gyro error”
or “4006: Gyro error.” • Study situation.

Within few • Alarm “2002 No heading • Automatic change of steering • Acknowledge alarms.
seconds available.” mode to Radius Control mode.
• Study situation.
• Alarm “2496 ProgTrack • If ship is in linear part, actual
Stop-Sensor fail” or “2497 heading is used as set heading.
Route Stop-Sensor fail”. If ship is turning, last-set
heading and radius remain.

28-28
 28. Trackpilot

28.9.3 Lost speed

Associated alarms (generated Expected system performance What end user should do
at ECDIS)
• Sensor alarm, for example • Acknowledge alarms.
Alarm “4008: Log error”,
“4012…4016: Position • Study situation.
equipment error”, etc.
Within 30 • Alarm “2476 Route Needs • Acknowledge alarms.
seconds log sensor” or “2494
Progtrack: Needs log sens.” • Study situation.

After 2 • Alarm “2506 Route: Use • Guidance for navigator • Change immediately
minutes and Radius control” or “2504 to local autopilot
then every 4 Progtrack: Use Radius control.
minutes Ctrl.”
• Acknowledge alarms.
After 4 • Alarm “2476 Route Needs • Reminder • Acknowledge alarms.
minutes and log sensor” or “2494
then every 4 Progtrack: Needs log sens.” • Study situation.
minutes
Within 10 • Alarm “2496 ProgTrack • Automatic change of steering • Acknowledge alarms.
minutes Stop-Sensor fail” or “2497 mode to Radius Control mode.
Route Stop-Sensor fail.” • Study situation.
• If ship is in linear part, actual
heading is used as set heading.
If ship is turning, last-set
heading and radius remain.

28-29
28. Trackpilot

28.9.4 Low speed

Associated alarms (generated Expected system performance What end user should do
at ECDIS)

• Alarm “2008 Filter: Speed • Acknowledge alarms.

below xx.”
• Study situation.
Within 90 • Alarm “2010 Filter: Pos • Acknowledge alarms.
seconds source change.”
• Study situation.
Within 30 • Alarm “2503 ProgTrack: • Acknowledge alarms.
seconds Needs higher Speed” or
“2501 Route: Needs higher • Study situation.
Speed.”
After 2 • Alarm “2506 Route: Use • Guidance for navigator • Change immediately
minutes and Radius control” or “2504 to local autopilot
then every 4 Progtrack: Use Radius control.
minutes Ctrl.”
• Acknowledge alarms.
After 4 • Alarm “2503 ProgTrack: • Reminder • Acknowledge alarms.
minutes and Needs higher Speed” or
then every 2 “2501 Route: Needs higher • Study situation.
minutes Speed.”

Within 10 • Alarm “2496 ProgTrack • Automatic change of steering • Acknowledge alarms.

minutes Stop-Sensor fail” or Alarm mode to Radius Control mode.
“2497 Route Stop-Sensor • Study situation.
fail.” • If ship is in linear part, actual
heading is used as set heading.
If ship is turning, last-set
heading and radius remain.

28-30
 28. Trackpilot

28.9.5 Lost SOG/COG reference

Goto track steering mode
Associated alarms (generated Expected system performance What end user should do
at ECDIS)
• •
Alarm “2507 Route: Need • Acknowledge alarms.
sog/cog ref.”
• Study situation.
• Change to Goto WP
After 2 • Alarm “2505 Route: Use • Instruction for navigator
minutes and steering mode.
Goto WP.”
then every 4 • Acknowledge alarms.
minutes

After 4 • Alarm “2507 Route: Need • Reminder • Acknowledge alarms.

minutes and sog/cog ref.”
then every 4 • Study situation.
minutes

Within 10 • Alarm “2489 Route: • Automatic change of steering • Acknowledge alarms.

minutes Changed to Goto WP.” mode to Goto WP mode.
• Study situation.

Program track steering mode

Associated alarms (generated Expected system performance What end user should do
at ECDIS)

• Alarm “2509 Progtrack: • Program Track mode requires • Acknowledge alarms.

Needs sog/cog ref.” differential position.
• Study situation.
• Change immediately
After 2 • Alarm “2504 Progtrack: • Guidance for navigator
minutes and to local autopilot
Use Radius Ctrl.”
then every 4 control.
minutes • Acknowledge alarms.

After 4 • Alarm “2509 Progtrack: • Reminder • Acknowledge alarms.

minutes and Needs sog/cog ref.”
then every 2 • Study situation.
minutes

Within 10 • Alarm “2496 ProgTrack: • Automatic change of steering • Acknowledge alarms.

minutes Stop-Sensor fail.” mode to Radius Control mode.
• Study situation.
• If ship is in linear part, actual
heading is used as set heading.
If ship is turning, last-set
heading and radius remain.

28-31
28. Trackpilot

28.9.6 Total lost position

Associated alarms (generated Expected system performance What end user should do
at ECDIS)

• Alarm “4012…4016: • Acknowledge alarms.

Position equipment error”
• Study situation.
OR

• Kalman filter detects jump,

etc.

Within 30 • Alarms “2000 Filter: • Kalman Filter is switched Off • Acknowledge alarms.
seconds Position unreliable” and and system uses dead
“2006 Route: Course jump reckoning for positioning. • Study situation.
possible.”
• If you have log or dual-axis
log, then dead reckoning is
based on them and gyro.

• If you have log or dual-axis

log, then dead reckoning is
based on last plausible speed
from position sensors. This is
indicated by showing own ship
position, SOG and COG in red.
The source indication for SOG
and COG is “(LAST)”.
• Change immediately
After 2 • Alarm “2506 Route: Use • Guidance for navigator
minutes and to local autopilot
Radius control” or “2504
then every 4 control.
Progtrack: Use Radius
minutes Ctrl.” • Acknowledge alarms.

After 4 • Alarm “2475 Route Needs • Reminder • Acknowledge alarms.

minutes and filter ON”, or “2493
then every 4 Progtrack: Needs filter • Study situation.
minutes ON.”

Within 10 • Alarm “2496 ProgTrack: • Automatic change of steering • Acknowledge alarms.

minutes Stop-Sensor fail” or Alarm mode to Radius Control mode.
“2497 Route Stop-Sensor • Study situation.
• If ship is in linear part, actual
fail.” heading is used as set heading.
If ship is turning, last-set
heading and radius remain.

28-32
 28. Trackpilot

28.9.7 Lost differential position

Goto track steering mode
Associated alarms (generated Expected system performance What end user should do
at ECDIS)
• Alarm “4027…4031: Lost • Acknowledge alarms.
DGPS” or “4012…4016:
• Study situation.
Position equipment error.”
Within 90 • Alarm “2010 Filter: Pos • Acknowledge alarms.
seconds source changed.”
• Study situation.
Within 30 • Alarm “2492 Route: Needs • Goto Track requires • Acknowledge alarms.
seconds diff pos.” differential position.
• Study situation.
After 2 • Alarm “2505 Route: Use • Guidance for navigator • Change to Goto WP
minutes and Goto WP.” steering mode.
then every 4
• Acknowledge alarm.
minutes
After 4 • Alarm “2492 Route: Needs • Reminder • Acknowledge alarms.
minutes and diff pos.”
then every 4 • Study situation.
minutes
Within 10 • Alarm “2489 Route: • Automatic change of steering • Acknowledge alarms.
minutes Changed to Goto WP.” mode to Goto WP mode.
• Study situation.

Program track steering mode

Associated alarms (generated Expected system performance What end user should do
at ECDIS)
• Alarm “4027…4031: Lost • Acknowledge alarms.
DGPS” or “4012…4016:
• Study situation.
Position equipment error.”
Within 90 • Alarm “2010 Filter: Pos • Acknowledge alarms.
seconds source changed.”
• Study situation.
Within 30 • Alarm “2495 Progtrack: • Program Track mode requires • Acknowledge alarms.
seconds Needs diff pos.” differential position.
• Study situation.
After 2 • Alarm “2504 Progtrack: • Guidance for navigator • Change immediately
minutes and Use Radius Ctrl.” to local autopilot
then every 4 control.
minutes
• Acknowledge alarm.
After 4 • Alarm “2503 ProgTrack: • Reminder • Acknowledge alarms.
minutes and Needs diff pos.”
then every 2 • Study situation.
minutes
Within 10 • Alarm “2496 ProgTrack: • Automatic change of steering • Acknowledge alarms.
minutes Stop-Sensor fail.” mode to Radius Control mode.
• Study situation.
• If ship is in linear part, actual
heading is used as set heading.
If ship is in turn, last-set
heading and radius remain.

28-33
28. Trackpilot

28.9.8 Lost differential position and position discrepancy

Associated alarms (generated Expected system performance What end user should do
at ECDIS)

Precondition If sensors in Filter calculation • Acknowledge alarms.

are NOT inside user chosen
position discrepancy limit. • Study situation.
• Alarm “2007 Position
discrepancy”

• Alarm “4027…4031: Lost • Acknowledge alarms.

DGPS” or “4012…4016:
Position equipment error” • Study situation.

Within 90 • Alarm “2010 Filter: Pos • Acknowledge alarms.

seconds source changed”
• Study situation.

Within 30 • Alarm “2478 Route: Needs • Acknowledge alarms.

seconds good Pos”
• Study situation.
• Change to local
After 2 • Alarm “2506 Route: Use • Guidance for navigator
minutes and autopilot control.
Radius control”
then every 4 • Acknowledge alarms.
minutes

After 4 • Alarm “2478 Route: Needs • Reminder • Acknowledge alarms.

minutes and good Pos”
then every 2 • Study situation.
minutes

Within 10 • Alarm “2497 Route Stop- • Automatic change of steering • Acknowledge alarms.
minutes Sensor fail” mode to Radius Control mode.
• Study situation.
• If ship is in linear part, actual
heading is used as set heading.
If ship is in turn, last-set
heading and radius remain.

28.9.9 Lost communication between ECDIS and Trackpilot

Associated alarms Expected system performance What end user should do

Within 15 • Alarm “2488 Steering: • Automatic change of steering • Acknowledge alarms.

seconds Stop-system fail” generated mode to Radius Control mode.
at ECDIS. • Study situation.
• If ship is in linear part, actual
• Alarm 12 is generated at heading is used as set heading.
the Trackpilot. If ship is in turn, last-set
heading and radius remain.

28-34
 28. Trackpilot

28.9.10 Lost communication between Trackpilot and ECDIS

Associated alarms Expected system performance What end user should do

Within 15 • Alarm “2488 Steering: • Automatic change of steering • Acknowledge alarms.

seconds Stop-system fail” and mode to Radius Control mode.
“2480 Trackpilot Receive • Study situation.
error” is generated at the • If ship is in linear part, actual
ECDIS. heading is used as set heading.
If ship is in turn, last-set
• Alarm 05 is generated at heading and radius remain.
the Trackpilot.

28.10 Other Operations with Trackpilot

28.10.1 Speed used by Trackpilot
• The Trackpilot uses the speed from its own log input interface or from the serial line coming from an integrated
computer, and one is chosen during the installation. This speed is called the “internal speed reference”.

• The operator may choose internal speed reference or manual speed with the MANUAL SPEED button.

28.10.2 Control strategy used by Trackpilot

• The operator may choose among ECONOMY, MEDIUM and PRECISE by using the FUNC. SETUP button
and the ARROW buttons.

• Control strategy (economy, medium, precise) chooses course-keeping accuracy.

28.10.3 Load conditions used by Trackpilot

• The operator may choose among LIGHT, MEDIUM and LOADED by using the FUNC. SETUP button and the
ARROW buttons.

• Load condition (light, medium, loaded) chooses rudder gain.

28-35
28. Trackpilot

28.11 Description of Alarms Generated by Trackpilot

28.11.1 Alarms

Trackpilot operation related alarms

• ALARM lamp on the Trackpilot control panel goes on.

• Alarm is displayed on the Trackpilot control panel as OFF COURSE/SPEED WARNING or as an alarm
number “AL: NN”, where NN is the number of an alarm.

• Alarm is acknowledged by pushing the RESET button on the Trackpilot control panel.

• List of typical alarms:

OFF COURSE The ship is not following set course.

SPEED WARNING The speed is below 20% or above 120% of MCR speed (max. cruising speed). For
further details, see the Autopilot’s operator’s manual.

Another reason is that the trackpilot has lost speed data from the ECDIS. In this case,
the trackpilot uses its backup speed source or last plausible speed.

ON LIMIT Trackpilot uses rudder up to its set limit value. Normally this is only an indication, but if
it continues for a long period and the heading of the ship doesn't turn, it is an indication
of failure of the steering system. For further details, see the Autopilot’s operator’s
manual.

AL 04 Rudder servo: Leak detected or no movement when valve is on.

AL 05 Navigation computer has cancelled a remote mode.

AL 06 24VDC alarm system supply failure.

AL 07 Navigation computer didn't accept a request to go for a remote mode.

AL 10 Missing working gyro.

AL 11 Compass comparison alarm or reference gyro missing.

AL 12 Messages from the navigation computer were missing while Trackpilot was in remote
mode.
The central alarm system outputs these and other alarms: low voltage alarm, stop alarm (track control), position
differential alarm, heading differential alarm, course error alarm, cross-track error alarm, sensor alarm, low speed
alarm, destination arrival alarm, track control loss alarm, etc. For more information about the alarms the central
alarm system displays see its Operator’s Manual.

28-36
 28. Trackpilot

Integrated operation related alarms

• ACKN. WARNING lamp of the Trackpilot control panel flashes.
• Type of alarm is displayed on the ECDIS display as number and text.
• Alarm is acknowledged by pushing the ACKN. WARNING button on the Trackpilot control panel.
• List of typical alarms:
2451 Route: WP approach alarm
2452 Route: Turning disabled
2455 Route: Off course
2456 Route: WP approach error
2458 Route: Last WP approach
2460 Pilot: ROT will be exceed
2461 Route: ROT will be exceed
2467 Disabled - steering off
2468 Disabled - out of course
2469 Trackpilot: Off course
2470 Disabled - Need filter ON
2475 Route: Need filter ON
2476 Route: Need log sensor
2478 Route: Need good Posit.
2485 Route: WP prewarning
2488 Steering: Stop-system fail
2489 Route: Changed to Goto WP
2490 Disabled: Need log sensor
2491 Disabled: Need diff pos
2492 Route: Need diff pos
2493 ProgTrack: Need Filter ON
2494 ProgTrack: Need diff pos.
2495 ProgTrack: Need log sens
2496 ProgTrack: Stop - Sensor Fail
2497 Route: Stop - Sensor Fail
2498 Use manual rudder control
2499 Disabled: Need good Pos.
2501 Route: Need higher Speed
2502 Disabled: Need higher Speed
2503 ProgTrack: Need higher Speed
2504 ProgTrack: Use Radius ctrl.
2505 Route: Use Goto WP
2506 Route: Use Radius control
2507 Route: Need sog/cog ref.
2508 Disabled: Need sog/cog ref.
2509 ProgTrack: Need sog/cog ref.
2510 Disabled: Out of Turn

28-37
28. Trackpilot

28.11.2 Errors
Errors should not happen during normal operation. They are related to internal problems.

Trackpilot operation related errors

• ALARM lamp on the Trackpilot control panel lights.

• Error is displayed on the Trackpilot control panel as error number type ERR NN, where NN is the number of an
error.

• Error is acknowledged by pushing the RESET button on the Trackpilot control panel.

• List of typical errors:

ERR 12 Trackpilot processor failure

Integrated operation related errors

• The ALARM ACK lamp on the ECDIS lights.

• The type of alarm is displayed on the display ECDIS display as number and text.

• Alarm is acknowledged by pushing the ECDIS control panel’s ALARM button.

• List of typical alarms:

2480 Trackpilot receive error

28-38
 28. Trackpilot

28.12 Using the Curved EBL

The curved EBL is a design and control tool which functions to start a turn at the correct position and to monitor
behavior of own ship during the turn. The curved EBL is available on the ECDIS display and on some ARPA radar
displays.

Before you make a turn, you can use the curved EBL to choose best position to initiate the intended turn. In this so-
called design phase, own ship pushes curved EBL in front of the ship. This design phase is available in the following
conditions:

• Program track of the Trackpilot

• Program course change of the Trackpilot

• Radar steering (available on some ARPA radars)

The curved EBL is locked to its position when own ship initiates a turn by

• Automatic route steering: Goto WP or Goto Track

• Program track of the Trackpilot

• Program course change of the Trackpilot

• Radar steering: New set course from ARPA radar (available on some ARPA radars)

During the turn you can monitor how your ship performs the intended manuever against the plan by comparing the
Curved EBL position and your current own ship position.

Curved EBL designed before the wheel over point

28-39
28. Trackpilot

Curved EBL at the wheel over point

Curved EBL locked during turn

28-40
 28. Trackpilot

28.12.1 Structure of the curved EBL

The curved EBL consists of a straight part at its beginning called “forwarding distance”. Then an arc with chosen
radius and finally an EBL in the direction of the newly requested set course. See the figure below.

Wheel Over Point

WOP

forwarding
distance = f

radius
next course

You may adjust forwarding distances to suit your ship’s characteristics. For further details see the chapter on
parameter setup.

28.12.2 Use of curved EBL to design a new turn while ship is turning
Program Course Change and Program Track steering modes allow you to design turns before you execute them. The
system displays only one curved EBL. A newly designed turn takes priority over the currently displayed turn. If turn
design is available from the Program Heading Change or Program Track steering mode, the curved EBL shows it. If
no turn design is available, the curved EBL shows current turn.

28-41
28. Trackpilot

28.13 Using the Predictor

The Predictor is a tool for estimating own ship’s future positions and behavior, and it is available on the status bar.
Place the cursor on the text “Predictor” and then use left mouse button to toggle the predictor ON/OFF. The current
setting is shown in the mouse functions area. To set the time for the predictor, place the cursor on the time indication
next to Predictor, spin the thumbwheel to choose a time and then push the thumbwheel. The time from current
position to the last of the predicted position may be chosen by the between 30 and 180 seconds, in 30 second
intervals. The on-screen Predictor graphic consists of five pieces of own ships drawn in true scale to successive
future positions.

North Up TM UChart

The predictor is calculated using current:

• Docking speed components:

• Transversal bow speed

• Transversal stern speed

• Longitudinal center speed

• Rate of turn

These components are assumed to be stable during the prediction period.

The predictor can be used in every steering-state, even when steering without the Trackpilot.

Predictor shows drift Predictor in a turn

28-42
29. Steering with
Yokogawa PT-500A

29.1 Introduction
This chapter describes steering functions available with the optional Yokogawa PT-500A Autopilot.

29.2 Steering Control Unit

Below is layout of Yokogawa PT-500A autopilot steering control unit.

29-1
29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.3 Steering Modes of the System

Note that all steering related functions are available only if the ECDIS system is also connected to an optional
Yokogawa PT-500A autopilot processor.

With Yokogawa PT-500A autopilot following steering modes are available:

• Hand steering (Mode selector: HAND)

• Autopilot steering (Mode selector: AUTO)

• Track mode automatic Route steering (Mode selector: NAVI)

Note: to use any of above steering modes SYSTEM STEERING SWITCH must be switched as FU (Follow Up).

29.3.1 Hand steering (Mode selector: HAND)

Switch Steering mode selector to “HAND”.

While in hand steering mode the ECDIS system displays the rudder angle and indication of steering mode.

29.3.2 Autopilot steering (Mode selector: AUTO)

Autopilot steering mode:

• Operator sets the required heading of the vessel using “Heading Setting Dial”.

• Turns are controlled by the rudder limit

• Turn is initiated by operator

While in Autopilot steering mode the ECDIS system displays the rudder angle and indication of steering mode. The
Curved EBL is not available because the use of it requires radius controlled turns.

29.3.3 Track mode automatic route steering (Mode selector: NAVI)

The ECDIS system will follow the planned track to next waypoint but with a moderate accuracy in order to have
more economic sailing (sailing in ocean areas).

When approaching the next waypoint the system is pre alerting operator well before the turn and just before the turn
a second acknowledge is required.

The ECDIS system performs turns using planned radius.

29-2
 29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.4 Automatic Route Steering

Automatic route steering can be used with predefined monitored route. It can be activated when vessel is located
inside a channel of monitored route.

WP

WP

Figure above demonstrate performance of the automatic route steering.

ORIGINAL
PLANNED TURN

ORIGINAL
PLANNED WP

DYNAMIC WP

WHEEL OVER WHEEL OVER

LINE FOR NON LINE FOR
DYNAMIC WP USED DYNAMIC WP
BY “GOTO TRACK”

Figure above to understand how location of Dynamic WP is defined when “NAVI” steering mode is used.

29-3
29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.4.1 Characteristics of automatic route steering

Steering is course controlled with set radius between waypoints, if wind, current etc. effects the ship, the system
tries to prevent the ship from drifting away from planned route. The system has three means to prevent drifting away
from the planned route. They are most effective when used together. If cross track error is used alone, then the own
ship stabilises typically in a constant off track position. The means are:

• Measured cross track error from the center line, which is always active

• Drift compensation available from Route Parameters

• Gyro error compensation available from Route Parameters

During turns, if wind, current etc. effects the ship, the ship will drift away (inside or outside) from planned designed
turn which is displayed on radar screen.

29.4.2 Summary of route steering

GO TO WAYPOINT
Set heading automatic
Set radius automatic
Radius control yes
Dynamic waypoint position yes
Design before execution yes
Full curved EBL on radar screen yes
Wind, current etc. compensation in linear parts between low gain
wp. no
Wind, current etc. compensation in turns
Needs gyro yes
Needs log yes
Precision of position equipment good2

29.4.3 Preconditions for route steering

Route steering requires that the position filter is used. See more in chapter Filter Operations.

If you try to activate any of the route steering modes without the filter, you get alarm “2470 Disabled: Needs filter
on” and “2471 AP mode Conflict - Use AUTO”. First change mode selector back to “AUTO” or “HAND” in
Yokogawa autopilot panel and then switch Kalman filter “ON”. After that try again select “NAVI” mode.

Ship heading must point to the next waypoint and vessel must be located inside the channel limits of route,
otherwise an alarm “2468 Disabled - out of course” or “2477 Disabled: Out of channel” is given.

If you loose the filter position while you perform automatic route steering, you get first alarm “2475 Route: Needs
filter on” and then alarm “2506 Use Heading Control”

2
Precision of position is good with LORAN and GPS.

29-4
 29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.4.4 Activating route steering

Activate route steering by selecting mode “NAVI” in the Yokogawa autopilot panel.

Track

If “NAVI” is selected, indication “Track” appears in Route

Monitor window of ECDIS display.

If the ECDIS did not accept the requested route steering mode,
then there is an “Autopilot Conflict” indication in Route
Monitor window of the ECDIS Display.

Also alarms “2470 Disabled: Needs filter on” and “2471 AP

mode Conflict - Use AUTO” appear.

In Yokogawa steering control unit text “Caution-01 CHANGE

TO AUTO” appears with buzzer sound.

When route steering is not used, there is an empty indication in

Route Monitor window of the ECDIS Display

There are several reasons why the requested route steering mode cannot be accepted:

Alarm “2470 Disabled: Needs filter on,” which tells that you didn't have the Kalman filter operative and selected in
ON position at the time of request. Route steering requires that you use Kalman filter, because the filter eliminates
sudden jumps of the position and thus prevents unpredictable maneuvers of the own ship. Check your selection of
the sensors. See more information at Filter Operation

Alarm “2490 Disabled: Needs log sensor”, which tells that the Kalman filter did not have an independent speed
source. You need either a log, a dual axis log or two position receivers. Check your selection of the sensors. See
more information at Filter Operation

Alarm “2468 Disabled: Out of course”, which tells that the current heading of the own ship and the required set
heading to start the route steering has more difference than set by the user in the Route start limit angle of Route
Parameters.

Alarm “2471 AP mode Conflict - Use AUTO”, which tells that ECDIS and Yokogawa autopilot cannot perform
route steering mode. First change mode from “NAVI” to “AUTO” and then check that preconditions for route
steering are fulfilled.

Alarm ”2477 Disabled: Out of channel”, which tells that the current location of ship is not inside channel of
Monitored route.

Alarm “2464 Route: No selected route”, which tells that there is no route selected for Route Monitoring.

Alarm “2465 Route: Illegal WP”, which tells that the there is a route selected for Route Monitoring, but the
selection of the next or final waypoint is missing or illegal.

29-5
29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.4.5 Arrival to a waypoint

Automatic route steering navigation tries to keep the ship always inside the channel limits and going to next
waypoint. Well before the next waypoint, there will be an alarm 2485 ROUTE WP PREWARING. As soon as the
alarm appears verify that the maneuver is safe and there are no dangerous targets. If the maneuver can be performed
press the ALARM ACK pushbutton on the ECDIS control unit. If the maneuver is impossible you can leave the
automatic route steering changing “NAVI” to “AUTO” or to “HAND” mode in Yokogawa autopilot control unit.

TURN IS ALWAYS ENABLED. THE ONLY WAY TO DISABLE THE AUTOMATIC TURN IS TO SELECT
ANOTHER STEERING MODE EXCEPT “NAVI” FROM YOKOGAWA AUTOPILOT

Note that alarm 2485 is programmable (the time before turn) and it is relative to the starting point of the maneuver.
See Figure.

At the moment the next waypoint is about to be reached, there will be a second alarm “2451 Route: WP approach
alarm”.

Note that also alarm 2451 is programmable (the time before turn) and it is relative to the starting point of the
maneuver. See Figure below:

Prewarning Approach Wheel Over Point

point Point WOP
Waypoint
WP

WP prewarn forwarding
alarm time distance = f
WP approach end of turn
alarm time
radius

As soon as the ship arrives to the wheel over point the ECDIS sends a new course command to the autopilot and the
maneuver is started. During a maneuver the radar display and ECDIS display shows the CURVED EBL indicating
the planned radius for maneuver.

After acknowledge of the waypoint approach alarm the text

“Ass. Turn enabled” appears in Route Monitor window of
ECDIS display.

During the turn the text “Assisted Turn” appears in Route

Monitor window of ECDIS display.

Note: Approaching the last waypoint will give an alarm “2458 Route: Last WP approach”. With Yokogawa
autopilot one should leave “NAVI” mode of the Yokogawa autopilot before performing acknowledge of the alarm
2458. This will terminate the route correctly. If one acknowledge alarm 2458, when Yokogawa autopilot is still in
“NAVI” mode, then the route steering is automatically terminated and system generates alarm “2471 AP mode
Conflict - Use AUTO”.

29-6
 29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.4.6 Route steering alarms

The alarms relevant to the Steering are of two types (permanent and intermittent).

Permanent alarms below are available regardless of the used

steering mode:

Outside Channel

red color of the “Off track” value

orange color text “Outside Channel”

Out of Gate is indicated by orange text. Out of gate indicates

that, if the vessel continues using the current course, then the
vessel will be outside of the channel at wheel over point.

Permanent alarm below is available only during route steering

mode:

Rate of Turn Limit is indicated by orange text

Intermittent audio/visual alarms appear as follows:

• visual alarm and buzzer is located in ECDIS control unit.

• alarm number and text is visible on the lower right corner of the ECDIS display (see example below)

Typical intermittent alarms not described in other chapters are:

Alarm “2457 Route: Outside chl limits”, which appears if the own ship is outside the planned channel.
Alarm “2455 Route: off course”, which appears, if the system needs more than a set limit (the limit is available in
Installation parameters) to keep the track. This alarm is repeated every 5 minutes, if the condition continues.
Alarm “2456 Route: WP approach error”, which appears, if because of for example decreasing speed the own
ship is more than waypoint approach alarm time + 100 seconds away from the wheel over point after the user have
already acknowledged alarm “2451 Route: WP approach alarm” to enable the next automatic turn. After the alarm
2456 the next turn is not enabled and the system will generate a new alarm “2451 Route: Wp approach alarm” when
appropriate.
Alarm “2460 Pilot: ROT will be exceed”, which appears, if the set radius value together with the current speed of
the ship request rate of turn which is over the limit set in Route Parameter Max. rate of turn.
Alarm “2461 Route: ROT will be exceed”, which appears, if the planned radius for next waypoint together with the
current speed of the ship request rate of turn which is over the limit set in Route Parameter Max. rate of turn. This
alarm is activated if the own ship is within value WP approach alarm time set in Route Parameters from the wheel
over point.

29-7
29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

Alarm “2469 Autopilot: off course”, which appears, if the autopilot needs more than a set limit (the limit is
available in Installation parameters for Track mode). This alarm is repeated every 5 minutes, if the condition
continues.

Alarm “2471 AP mode Conflict - Use AUTO”, which tells that ECDIS and Yokogawa autopilot cannot perform
Track steering mode. First change mode from “NAVI” to “AUTO” and then check that preconditions for route
steering are fulfilled.
Alarm “2475 Route: Needs filter on”, which appears, if the position from the Kalman filter is not available. This
alarm is repeated every 15 seconds, if the condition continues.
Alarm “2476 Route: Needs log sensor”, which appears, if the position from the Kalman filter cannot be compared
against an independently operating log. This alarm is repeated every 15 seconds, if the condition continues.
Alarm “2488 Integrated Steering lost”, which appears, if the connection to the autopilot is lost during automatic
Route Steering and the used integrated steering mode cannot be continued. NOTE: Normally you get first alarm
“2480 Autopilot Receive error”
Alarm “2497 Route: Stop - Sensor Fail”, if no gyro data is received or if conditions of alarm 2475 or 2476 has
been valid for last minute.
Alarm “2506 Route:Use AUTO control” is instruction for user to change steering mode to AUTO. This alarm is
generated if there are not sufficient conditions to continue Track mode (i.e. alarm 2475 or 2476 has been valid 10-15
seconds).
Alarm “2511 Route:Auto resume disable”, if alarm 2471 has been generated and later condition for alarm 2471
disappears without changing steering mode from “NAVI” to “AUTO” or “HAND”. First change steering mode to
“AUTO” or “HAND” and then check that preconditions for route steering are fulfilled.
Alarm “2512 Use NFU rudder control”, if rudder servo unit cannot be controlled by Yokogawa steering control
unit, this alarm is generated to request a change to Non Follow Up control of rudder(s). First change using System
Selector Switch from “FU” to “NFU” and then use Non-Follow Up steering lever to control rudder(s).
Alarm “2514 Route:Complete turn”, this alarm is generated if there are not sufficient conditions to continue Track
mode during turn (i.e. alarm 2475 or 2476 has been valid 10-15 seconds). Vessel will complete the turn with
planned conditions.
Alarm “2515 Conflict - NAVI Compl. turn” which tells that ECDIS and Yokogawa autopilot cannot perform
Track steering mode after turn. Autopilot uses planned radius to complete the turn. After turn is completed, first
change mode from “NAVI” to “AUTO” and then check that preconditions for route steering are fulfilled to start
Track steering mode again.
Alarm “2516 Autopilot: Drift limit”, which appears, if the autopilot needs more than a set limit to compensate
drift(the limit is available in Installation parameters for Track mode (max drift compensation)). This alarm is
repeated every 5 minutes, if the condition continues.

29.4.7 Collision avoidance maneuver during automatic route

steering
Often the route steering is interrupted by a collision avoidance maneuver, but there are also several other reasons to
interrupt the route steering.

There are several possibilities to set the collision avoidance or any other maneuver:

• Use Non Follow Up steering lever to control directly rudder pumps

• Use Follow Up rudder control (Change mode from “NAVI” to “HAND”).

• Use local Autopilot Heading control (Change mode from “NAVI” to “AUTO”).

Now the route steering is disabled until mode “NAVI” in Yokogawa Autopilot panel is selected again. Note that for
going back to route steering the ship heading must point to the next waypoint and vessel must be located inside the
channel limits, otherwise an alarm is given.

29-8
 29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.4.8 How to stop or modify already enabled route turn

There are two cases that the automatic route turn must be stopped or modified.

• because the turn cannot be performed up to the final value.

• because the turn which ship perform goes outside of the planned turn. (Too fast or too slow).

Stop the turn

To stop turn, change steering mode from “NAVI” to “AUTO” on Yokogawa Steering control unit.

Modify turn
What do you want to do How to do

Use value different from Problem is that radius control is only available in steering mode NAVI. As soon as you
set course change steering mode to something else the vessel stop following radius. Below is
what you can do

Change from “NAVI” to “AUTO”. This stops turning completely as current gyro
heading is selected as new set course for Autopilot. Then, set new final value of set
course and select suitable max. rudder angle to prevent too fast turning.

Set steering wheel to suitable angle to continue approximately radius (i.e. equal rudder
angle than before). Then change from “NAVI” to “HAND”. Continue manual steering.

Change from “NAVI” to NFU. Then, use NFU steering lever. Continue manual
steering.

Compensate too fast As soon as you change steering mode to something other than “NAVI” the vessel stop
turning following radius. Below is what you can do:

Change from “NAVI” to “AUTO”. This stop turning completely as current gyro
heading is selected as new set course for Autopilot. Then set final value of set course
and select suitable max. rudder angle to prevent too fast turning.

Set steering wheel to suitable angle to continue approximately larger radius (i.e.
smaller rudder angle than before). Then, change from “NAVI” to “HAND”. Continue
manual steering.

Change from “NAVI” to NFU. Continue manual steering.

Compensate too slow As soon as you change steering mode to something other than “NAVI” the vessel stop
turning following radius. Below is what you can do

Set steering wheel to suitable angle to continue approximately smaller radius (i.e.
higher rudder angle than before). Then, change from “NAVI” to “HAND”. Continue
manual steering.

Change from “NAVI” to NFU. Continue manual steering.

29.4.9 Notes

Accuracy of route steering

Accurate route steering is defined as small cross track error when automatically following the route. Two of the
Route Parameters - Drift compensation and Gyro error compensation - have a significant effect for accuracy of route
steering. If you need most accurate route steering, then both of these parameters should be enabled. Before
activating the Gyro error compensation read chapter Gyro error correction to understand the possible methods for
gyro error compensation.

29-9
29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.5 Other Operations with Yokogawa PT-500A

Autopilot
29.5.1 Speed used by autopilot
The Autopilot uses the speed from its own log input interface during AUTO mode. The operator may choose its own
log input or manual speed with the SPEED button.

When NAVI mode is selected, Autopilot switches automatically to the speed from the serial line coming from an
integrated computer. This speed is called the “internal speed reference”.

29.5.2 Control strategy used by autopilot

The operator may choose among ECONOMY, PRECISION 1 and PRECISION 2 by using the OPERATION
MODE button.

Control strategy (ECONOMY, PRECISION 1 and PRECISION 2) chooses course-keeping accuracy

29.5.3 Load conditions used by autopilot

The operator may choose among BALLAST, MIDDLE and FULL by using the DRAFT MODE button.

Load condition (BALLAST, MIDDLE and FULL) chooses rudder gain.

29-10
 29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.6 Description of Alarms with Yokogawa PT-500A

29.6.1 Alarms
• The ECDIS control unit ALARM ACK lamp goes on.

• Type of alarm is displayed on the display ECDIS display as number and text.

• Alarm is acknowledged by pushing the ECDIS control unit's ALARM ACK button.

• List of typical alarms:

2451 Route: WP approach alarm
2452 Route: Turning disabled
2455 Route: Off course
2456 Route: WP approach error
2458 Route: Last WP approach
2460 Pilot: ROT will be exceed
2461 Route: ROT will be exceed
2468 Disabled - out of course
2469 Autopilot: Off course
2470 Disabled: Needs filter ON
2471 AP mode Conflict - Use AUTO
2475 Route: Needs filter ON
2476 Route: Needs log sensor
2485 Route: WP prewarning
2497 Route: Stop - Sensor Fail
2506 Route: Use AUTO control
2511 Route: Auto resume disable
2512 Use NFU rudder control
2514 Route: NAVI complete turn
2515 Conflict - NAVI complete turn
2516 Autopilot: Drift limit

29.6.2 Errors
Errors should not happen during normal operation. They are related to internal problems.

Integrated operation related alarms

The ECDIS control unit's ALARM ACK lamp goes on, type of alarm is displayed on the ECDIS display as number,
and text alarm is acknowledged by pushing the ECDIS control unit's ALARM ACK button.

List of typical alarms:

2480 Auto pilot receive error

2488 Integrated steering lost

29-11
29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.7 Expected Steering Performance Under Various

Conditions
The system has many available steering modes. Below is a summary of effect of various environmental conditions

29.7.1 Expected steering performance for going ahead

Environment conditions Heading control = “AUTO” Track = “NAVI”
Calm sea, no wind, no current COG is about the same as Set Drift compensation set as ON or OFF:
Course in Auto Pilot vessel follows monitored route
Moderate wind and/or current Vessel has a tendency to drift Drift compensation set as ON:
vessel follows monitored route

Drift compensation set as OFF:

vessel follows monitored route in an offtrack
position inside the channel limit
High wind and/or current Vessel is drifting Drift compensation set as ON:
vessel follows monitored route

Drift compensation set as OFF:

vessel may have troubles to follow monitored route
inside the channel limit
Slow change of wind and/or current There is no compensation for Drift compensation set as ON:
change vessel follows monitored route, but may need full
channel limit area

Drift compensation set as OFF:

vessel may have troubles to follow monitored route
inside the channel limit
Sudden change of wind and/or There is no compensation for Drift compensation set as ON:
current change vessel follows monitored route, but may need full
(For example sudden change from no channel limit area
current to 5 kt current perpendicular vessel may go outside channel limit and return back
to track) inside channel limit

Drift compensation set as OFF:

vessel may have troubles to follow monitored route
inside the channel limit
Slow change of speed There is no compensation for Drift compensation set as ON:
change vessel follows monitored route

Drift compensation set as OFF:

vessel may have troubles to follow monitored route
inside the channel limit
Fast change of speed There is no compensation for Drift compensation set as ON:
(For example speed decrease from 20 change vessel follows monitored route, but may need full
to 7 kt) channel limit area
vessel may go outside channel limit and return back
inside channel limit

Drift compensation set as OFF:

vessel may have troubles to follow monitored route
inside the channel limit

29-12
 29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.7.2 Expected steering performance for turns

Environment conditions Heading control Track

Calm sea, no wind, no current There is no position control of turn. Drift compensation set as ON or OFF:
Turn is controlled by rudder angle
limit vessel follows monitored route

Moderate wind and/or current There is no position control of turn. Drift compensation set as ON:
Turn is controlled by rudder angle
limit vessel follows monitored route, but may need
full channel limit area

Drift compensation set as OFF:

Vessel goes inside or outside of turn

High wind and/or current There is no position control of turn. Drift compensation set as ON:
Turn is controlled by rudder angle
limit vessel follows monitored route, but may go
outside channel limit area

Drift compensation set as OFF:

Vessel goes fast inside or outside of turn

Slow change of wind and/or current There is no position control of turn. Drift compensation set as ON or OFF:
Turn is controlled by rudder angle
limit Vessel goes inside or outside of turn

Sudden change of wind and/or There is no position control of turn. Drift compensation set as ON or OFF:
current Turn is controlled by rudder angle
limit Vessel goes fast inside or outside of turn
(For example sudden change from no
current to 5 kt current perpendicular
to track)

Slow change of speed There is no position control of turn. Drift compensation set as ON or OFF:
Turn is controlled by rudder angle
limit vessel follows monitored route, but may need
full channel limit area

Fast change of speed There is no position control of turn. Drift compensation set as ON or OFF:
Turn is controlled by rudder angle
(For example speed decrease from 20 limit Vessel goes inside or outside of turn
to 7 kt)

NOTE; Drift Compensation is set ON/OFF in Ship and Route Parameters of Navigation Parameters setting. For
more information, see chapter “Navigation parameters setting”.

29-13
29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.8 Expected Steering Performance Under Critical

Failure
Below is a summary of system behaviour in various failures when “NAVI” steering mode is selected to be used.

29.8.1 Lost heading from autopilot (ECDIS may also have lost
heading)
Associated alarms Expected system performance What end user should do

Immediately Autopilot Alarm If ship is in linear part, Rudder order Change immediately to
“EMERGENCY-05 Gyro is frozen for last value in order to manual control of rudder.
Compass” is generated on Auto approximately continue ahead.
pilot control panel Acknowledge alarms.
If ship is turning, rudder order is
Sensor alarm “4055: Gyro error frozen for last value in order to Study situation.
(Trackpilot)” is generated at approximately continue rate of turn.
ECDIS.

Within few Alarm “2497 Route Stop-Sensor Change immediately to

seconds fail. manual control of rudder.

Alarm “2471 AP mode conflict - Acknowledge alarms.

Use AUTO” on ECDIS”
Study situation.

Repeat Alarm “2498 Use manual rudder Reminder Change immediately to

every 2 control” is generated at ECDIS. manual control of rudder.
minutes

29-14
 29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.8.2 Lost heading from ECDIS (Autopilot still has heading)

Associated alarms Expected system performance What end user should do

Sensor alarm, for example Acknowledge alarms.

Alarm “4005: Gyro error” or
“4006: Gyro error.” Study situation.

Within few Alarm “2002 No heading Acknowledge alarms.

seconds available” and alarm “2000
Filter: position Unreliable”. Study situation.

Alarm “2497 Route Stop-Sensor

fail”

After Alarm If vessel is in linear part of route If ship is in linear part, actual Acknowledge alarms
“2497 Route alarm “2471 AP mode conflict - heading is used as set heading.
Stop-Sensor Use AUTO” in ECDIS and Study situation.
fail.” alarm “CAUTION-01 CHANGE If ship is turning, last-set heading
TO AUTO” on Autopilot control and radius are used to complete the If vessel is in linear part
panel turn as long as Autopilot mode then Change steering mode
selector is kept in position “NAVI”. to AUTO.
If vessel is in turning part of
route alarm “2515 Conflict- If vessel is in turning state,
NAVI compl. Turn” in ECDIS then either keep steering
and alarm “CAUTION-01 NAVI mode NAVI to complete
COMPL TURN” in Autopilot the turn or change to
control panel. After the turn is steering mode AUTO to
completed the alarm changes in stop turning.
ECDIS as “2471 AP mode
conflict - Use AUTO” and in
Autopilot control panel as
“CAUTION-01 CHANGE TO
AUTO “

29-15
29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.8.3 Lost speed

Associated alarms Expected system performance What end user should do
Sensor alarm, for example Alarm Acknowledge alarms.
“4008: Log error”, “4012…4016:
Study situation.
Position equipment error”, etc.
Within 30 Alarm “2476 Route Needs log Acknowledge alarms.
seconds sensor”
Study situation.
After 2 If vessel is in linear part of route Guidance for navigator Acknowledge alarms.
minutes and alarm “2506 Route: Use AUTO
then every 4 control” Study situation.
minutes If vessel is in turning state,
If vessel is in turning part of route then either keep steering
alarm “2514 Route: NAVI mode NAVI to complete the
complete turn” turn or change to steering
mode AUTO to stop turning.
After 4 Alarm “2476 Route Needs log Reminder Acknowledge alarms.
minutes and sensor”
then every 4 Study situation.
minutes If vessel is in turning state,
then either keep steering
mode NAVI to complete the
turn or change to steering
mode AUTO to stop turning.
Within 10 Alarm “2497 Route Stop-Sensor Acknowledge alarms.
minutes fail.”
Study situation.
After Alarm If vessel is in linear part of route If ship is in linear part, actual Acknowledge alarms
“2497 Route alarm “2471 AP mode conflict - heading is used as set heading.
Stop-Sensor Use AUTO” in ECDIS and alarm Study situation.
fail.” “CAUTION-01 CHANGE TO If ship is turning, last-set
AUTO “ on Autopilot control heading and radius are used to If vessel is in linear part then
panel complete the turn as long as Change steering mode to
Autopilot mode selector is kept AUTO.
If vessel is in turning part of route in position “NAVI”..
alarm “2515 Conflict-NAVI If vessel is in turning state,
compl. Turn” in ECDIS and alarm then either keep steering
“CAUTION-01 NAVI COMPL mode NAVI to complete the
TURN” in Autopilot control turn or change to steering
panel. After the turn is completed mode AUTO to stop turning.
the alarm changes in ECDIS as
“2471 AP mode conflict - Use
AUTO” and in Autopilot control
panel as “CAUTION-01
CHANGE TO AUTO “

29-16
 29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.8.4 Low speed

Associated alarms Expected system What end user should do
performance

Alarm “2008 Filter: Speed below Acknowledge alarms.

xx.”
Study situation.
Within 90 Alarm “2010 Filter: Pos source Acknowledge alarms.
seconds change.”
Study situation.
Within 30 Alarm “2501 Route: Needs higher Acknowledge alarms.
seconds Speed.”
Study situation.
After 2 If vessel is in linear part of route Guidance for navigator Acknowledge alarms.
minutes and alarm “2506 Route: Use AUTO
then every 4 control” Study situation.
minutes If vessel is in turning state, then
If vessel is in turning part of route either keep steering mode
alarm “2514 Route: NAVI complete NAVI to complete the turn or
turn” change to steering mode AUTO
to stop turning.
After 4 Alarm “2501 Route: Needs higher Reminder Acknowledge alarms.
minutes and Speed.
then every 4 Study situation.
minutes If vessel is in turning state, then
either keep steering mode
NAVI to complete the turn or
change to steering mode AUTO
to stop turning.
Within 10 Alarm “2497 Route Stop-Sensor Acknowledge alarms.
minutes fail.”
Study situation.
After Alarm If vessel is in linear part of route If ship is in linear part, Acknowledge alarms
“2497 Route alarm “2471 AP mode conflict - Use actual heading is used as set
Stop-Sensor AUTO” in ECDIS and alarm heading. Study situation.
fail.” “CAUTION-01 CHANGE TO
AUTO “ on Autopilot control panel If ship is turning, last-set If vessel is in linear part then
heading and radius are used Change steering mode to
If vessel is in turning part of route to complete the turn as long AUTO.
alarm “2515 Conflict-NAVI compl. as Autopilot mode selector
Turn” in ECDIS and alarm is kept in position “NAVI”.. If vessel is in turning state,
“CAUTION-01 NAVI COMPL then either keep steering mode
TURN” in Autopilot control panel. NAVI to complete the turn or
After the turn is completed the change to steering mode
alarm changes in ECDIS as “2471 AUTO to stop turning.
AP mode conflict - Use AUTO” and
in Autopilot control panel as
“CAUTION-01 CHANGE TO
AUTO “

29-17
29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.8.5 Total lost position

Associated alarms Expected system performance What end user should do

Alarm “4012…4016: Acknowledge alarms.

Position equipment error”
Study situation.
OR

Kalman filter detects jump,

etc.

Within 30 Alarms “2000 Filter: Position Kalman Filter is switched Off and Acknowledge alarms.
seconds unreliable” and “2006 Route: system uses dead reckoning for
Course jump possible.” positioning. Study situation.

If you have log or dual-axis log,

then dead reckoning is based on
them and gyro.

If you have log or dual-axis log,

then dead reckoning is based on
last plausible speed from position
sensors. This is indicated by
showing own ship position, SOG
and COG in red. The source
indication for SOG and COG is
“(LAST)”.

After 2 If vessel is in linear part of Guidance for navigator Acknowledge alarms.

minutes and route alarm “2506 Route:
then every 4 Use AUTO control” Study situation.
minutes If vessel is in turning state, then
If vessel is in turning part of either keep steering mode NAVI
route alarm “2514 Route: to complete the turn or change to
NAVI complete turn” steering mode AUTO to stop
turning.
After 4 Alarm “2475 Route Needs Reminder Acknowledge alarms.
minutes and filter ON”
then every 4 Study situation.
minutes If vessel is in turning state, then
either keep steering mode NAVI
to complete the turn or change to
steering mode AUTO to stop
turning.
Within 10 Alarm “2497 Route Stop- Acknowledge alarms.
minutes Sensor fail.”
Study situation.
<CONTINUED>

29-18
 29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

<Continued from previous page>

After Alarm If vessel is in linear part of route If ship is in linear part, Acknowledge alarms
“2497 Route alarm “2471 AP mode conflict - Use actual heading is used as set
Stop-Sensor AUTO” in ECDIS and alarm heading. Study situation.
fail.” “CAUTION-01 CHANGE TO
AUTO “ on Autopilot control panel If ship is turning, last-set If vessel is in linear part then
heading and radius are used Change steering mode to
If vessel is in turning part of route to complete the turn as long AUTO.
alarm “2515 Conflict-NAVI compl. as Autopilot mode selector
Turn” in ECDIS and alarm is kept in position “NAVI”.. If vessel is in turning state,
“CAUTION-01 NAVI COMPL then either keep steering mode
TURN” in Autopilot control panel. NAVI to complete the turn or
After the turn is completed the change to steering mode
alarm changes in ECDIS as “2471 AUTO to stop turning.
AP mode conflict - Use AUTO” and
in Autopilot control panel as
“CAUTION-01 CHANGE TO
AUTO “

29-19
29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.8.6 Lost differential position and position discrepancy

Associated alarms Expected system performance What end user should do

Precondition If sensors in Filter Acknowledge alarms.

calculation are NOT inside
user chosen position Study situation.
discrepancy limit.
Alarm “2007 Position
discrepancy”

Alarm “4027…4031: Lost Acknowledge alarms.

DGPS” or “4012…4016:
Position equipment error” Study situation.

Within 90 Alarm “2010 Filter: Pos Acknowledge alarms.

seconds source changed”
Study situation.

Within 30 Alarm “2478 Route: Needs Acknowledge alarms.

seconds good Pos”
Study situation.

After 2 If vessel is in linear part of Guidance for navigator Acknowledge alarms.

minutes and route alarm “2506 Route:
then every 4 Use AUTO control” Study situation.
minutes If vessel is in turning state, then
If vessel is in turning part of either keep steering mode NAVI
route alarm “2514 Route: to complete the turn or change to
NAVI complete turn” steering mode AUTO to stop
turning.
After 4 Alarm “2478 Route: Needs Reminder Acknowledge alarms.
minutes and good Pos”
then every 4 Study situation.
minutes If vessel is in turning state, then
either keep steering mode NAVI
to complete the turn or change to
steering mode AUTO to stop
turning.
Within 10 Alarm “2497 Route Stop- Acknowledge alarms.
minutes Sensor fail.”
Study situation.
<CONTINUED>

29-20
 29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

<Continued from previous page>

Associated alarms Expected system What end user should do

performance

After Alarm If vessel is in linear part of route If ship is in linear part, actual Acknowledge alarms
“2497 Route alarm “2471 AP mode conflict - Use heading is used as set
Stop-Sensor AUTO” in ECDIS and alarm heading. Study situation.
fail.” “CAUTION-01 CHANGE TO
AUTO “ on Autopilot control panel If ship is turning, last-set If vessel is in linear part then
heading and radius are used Change steering mode to
If vessel is in turning part of route to complete the turn as long AUTO.
alarm “2515 Conflict-NAVI compl. as Autopilot mode selector is
Turn” in ECDIS and alarm kept in position “NAVI”.. If vessel is in turning state,
“CAUTION-01 NAVI COMPL then either keep steering mode
TURN” in Autopilot control panel. NAVI to complete the turn or
After the turn is completed the change to steering mode
alarm changes in ECDIS as “2471 AUTO to stop turning.
AP mode conflict - Use AUTO” and
in Autopilot control panel as
“CAUTION-01 CHANGE TO
AUTO “

29.8.7 ECDIS lost messages from Autopilot

Associated alarms Expected system What end user should do
performance

Within 15 Alarm “2488 Steering: Stop- Acknowledge alarms.

seconds system fail” generated at
Study situation.
ECDIS.
After Alarm If vessel is in linear part of If ship is in linear part, actual Acknowledge alarms
“2488 Route route alarm “2471 AP mode heading is used as set heading.
Stop-Sensor conflict - Use AUTO” in Study situation.
fail.” ECDIS and alarm If ship is turning, last-set
“CAUTION-01 CHANGE heading and radius are used to If vessel is in linear part then
TO AUTO “ on Autopilot complete the turn as long as Change steering mode to AUTO.
control panel Autopilot mode selector is kept
in position “NAVI”.. I If vessel is in turning state, then
If vessel is in turning part of either keep steering mode NAVI to
route alarm “2515 Conflict- complete the turn or change to
NAVI compl. Turn” in steering mode AUTO to stop
ECDIS and alarm turning.
“CAUTION-01 NAVI
COMPL TURN” in
Autopilot control panel.
After the turn is completed
the alarm changes in ECDIS
as “2471 AP mode conflict -
Use AUTO” and in Autopilot
control panel as “CAUTION-
01 CHANGE TO AUTO “

29-21
29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.8.8 Autopilot lost messages form ECDIS

Associated alarms Expected system performance What end user should do

Within 15 Alarm “2488 Steering: Stop- . Acknowledge alarms.

seconds system fail” and “2480
Trackpilot Receive error” is Study situation.
generated at the ECDIS.
After Alarm If vessel is in linear part of If ship is in linear part, actual Acknowledge alarms
“2488 Route route alarm “2471 AP mode heading is used as set heading.
Stop-Sensor conflict - Use AUTO” in Study situation.
fail.” ECDIS and alarm If ship is turning, last-set heading
“CAUTION-01 CHANGE TO and radius are used to complete the If vessel is in linear part then
AUTO” on Autopilot control turn as long as Autopilot mode Change steering mode to
panel selector is kept in position “NAVI”.. AUTO.

If vessel is in turning part of If vessel is in turning state,

route alarm “2515 Conflict- then either keep steering
NAVI compl. Turn” in ECDIS mode NAVI to complete the
and alarm “CAUTION-01 turn or change to steering
NAVI COMPL TURN” in mode AUTO to stop turning.
Autopilot control panel. After
the turn is completed the alarm
changes in ECDIS as “2471
AP mode conflict - Use
AUTO” and in Autopilot
control panel as “CAUTION-
01 CHANGE TO AUTO”

29-22
 29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.9 How to Use the Curved EBL with Yokogawa

PT-500A Autopilot
Curved EBL is a control tool to monitor automatic operation of GotoWaypoint (=“NAVI”) steering mode. The
Curved EBL is available on ECDIS display and on some selected ARPA radar displays.

After the WP Approach but before start of turn the curved EBL display next intended turn. When the own ship starts
a turn initiated by Automatic Route steering the Curved EBL is locked to its position.

During the turn you can monitor how your ship performs the intended maneuver against the plan by comparing the
Curved EBL position and your current own ship position.

Curved EBL at the wheel over point.

Locked Curved EBL during turn.

29-23
29. Steering With Yokogawa PT-500A

29.10 Using the Predictor

The Predictor is a tool for estimating own ship’s future positions and behaviour, and it is available on the status bar.
Place the cursor on the text “Predictor” and then use left mouse button to toggle the predictor ON/OFF. The current
setting is shown in the mouse functions area. To set the time for the predictor, place the cursor on the time indication
next to Predictor, spin the thumbwheel to choose a time and then push the thumbwheel. The time from current
position to the last of the predicted position may be chosen by the between 30 and 180 seconds, in 30 second
intervals. The on-screen Predictor graphic consists of five pieces of own ships drawn in true scale to successive
future positions.

North Up TM UChart

The predictor is calculated using current:

Docking speed components:

Transversal bow speed

Transversal stern speed

Longitudinal center speed

Rate of turn

These components are assumed to be stable during the prediction period.

The predictor can be used in every steering-state, even when steering without the Trackpilot.

Predictor shows drift Predictor in a turn

29-24
30. Alarms

30.1 Overview
Alarms are displayed on the ENC screen at the lower right corner, indicated with “1” in the figure below. “2” in the
figure below is the alarm area, where you acknowledge alarms and display the Alarm Queue window which shows
alarms generated. To acknowledge an alarm or display the Alarm Queue window, place the cursor in the alarm area
and then push the left mouse button to acknowledge an alarm or push the right mouse button to display the Alarm
Queue window.
North Up RM

1.
2.
There are three kind of alarms generated by the ENC. To see a list of alarms, see “List of Alarms” on page 29-3.

30-1
30. Alarms

30.2 Alarms Generated by Navigation Calculation

Navigation calculation generates the following alarms:

• Error detected in any sensor

• Radar communication error

• Software alarms, etc.

30.3 Alarms Generated by Chart Calculation

Chart calculation generates the following alarms:

• New pilot data notebook page available

• Chart alarms based on S57 charts

• Chart alarms based on user chart’s dangerous symbols, lines and areas

30.4 Alarms Generated by Steering Calculation

Note that all steering-related functions are available only if the ECDIS processor is also connected to the optional
Trackpilot processor. Some of the alarms such as Outside Channel limit are also available without the optional
Trackpilot processor. Without the Trackpilot processor, all alarms generated by steering calculation appear in the
same alarm queue as alarms generated by navigation calculation.

30.5 Alarms Generated by Radar Overlay

Alarms generated by Navigation Calculation, Chart Calculation and Steering calculation are common for each
workstation (i.e. they can be seen on each workstation’s alarm queue with same alarm number). Alarms generated
by Radar overlay are generated locally on workstation where failure happens (i.e. they can only be seen on
workstation where it happens). Each workstation has own alarm numbers for alarms generated by radar overlay.

Alarm range is Alarm 6x00 - Alarm 6x11, x indicates ECDIS workstation number 1-4.

It is possible to view alarm queue of ECDIS system on Conning display. Window on Conning Display is called
Alarm message window, where all active or pending alarms of system are shown in priority order. If in the system
there are more than one ECDIS workstation and more than one Radar overlay installed, to distinguish which Radar
overlay is source of alarm they have own set of alarm in use.

For example: “6100 RadOv No Headline” for 1st workstation

“6200 RadOv No Headline” for 2nd workstation

30-2
 30. Alarms

30.6 Description of the Alarm Priority System

The permanently visible alarm is the top most urgent alarm at any moment. Alarms have priority from 1 to 10 to
control urgency. Priority 1 is the highest. The list of alarms chapters show these priorities for each alarm with
following syntax: “/1” at the end first line means priority = 1, “/1/8” at the end of first line means that priority is = 1,
if unacknowledged and priority = 8, if acknowledged but the state of alarm still exists. Unacknowledged alarm is
shown in black text (or white depending on color scheme) on red background and acknowledged alarm which still
exists is shown in orange text on white background.

You may view the alarms in the Alarm Queue. Place the cursor on the alarm text and then push the right mouse
button. See the example below.

How to read the Alarm Queue (first row as an

example):

• First digit “2” indicates alarm priority.

• Second four digits “5100” indicate alarm number.

• Text indicates reason of alarm “Safety Contour”.

In the top alarm queue example, alarm priority changes

from 1 to 8 after it is acknowledged. Then alarm 5100 is
assigned highest priority.

In the bottom alarm queue example, the priority of alarm

5100 is changed to 10 after it is acknowledged. Then
alarm 5103 is assigned highest priority.

30-3
30. Alarms

30.7 Description of Backup Navigator Alarm

Track Control System (=TCS) standard IEC 62065 require “Backup Navigator Alarm”. It is intended to be
connected to a Central Alarm System. The idea behind the IEC 62065 requirement for “Backup Navigator Alarm” is
that if the navigator on duty cannot handle the situation (i.e. he does not have time enough to check and to
acknowledge all track control related alarm) then more person(s) are called automatically to the bridge. Alarm
Transfer System included into Central Alarm System will then transfer “Backup Navigator Alarm” to intended
person(s).

If during Track Control (= Program track, Goto Track, Goto WP etc.) any of alarms listed below is unacknowledged
for more than 30 seconds then “Backup Navigator Alarm” closed contact relay is activated. Note that “Backup
Navigator Alarm” is not activated, if any of above alarms happens when the ship is not performing any Track
Control mode.

“Backup Navigator Alarm” is related to following alarms:

Alarm “2000 Filter: Position unreliable”

Alarm “2008 Filter: speed below xx KN”

Alarm “2010 Filter: Pos source change”

Alarm “2451 Route: WP approach alarm”

Alarm “2458 Route: Last WP approach”

Alarm “2488 Steering:Stop-System fail”

Alarm “2489 Route: Changed to Goto WP”

Alarm “2496 ProgTrack: Stop - Sensor Fail”

Alarm “2497 Route: Stop - Sensor Fail”

Alarm “4005: Gyro error”

Alarm “4006: Gyro error”

Alarm “4008: Log error”

Alarm “4008: Dual axis log (WT) error”

Alarm “4009: Dual axis log (BT) error”

Alarm “4012…4016: Position equipment error”

Alarm “4027…4031: Lost DGPS”

Alarm “4033: ARPA radar spd/crs error”

Alarm “4055: Gyro error (Trackpilot)”

If ECDIS is a part of a Track Control System, the “Backup Navigator Alarm” should be connected. If ECDIS is
NOT part of Track Control System, then “Backup Navigator Alarm” is not generated.

30-4
 30. Alarms

30.8 List of Alarms

30.8.1 List of navigation alarms

Alarm number 1101: REFTGT: NO FILE CHOSEN /7

------------------------------------
USE 'REFERENCE TARGET' BUTTON TO
CHOOSE VALID REFERENCE TARGET FILE

Alarm number 1102: REFTGT: NEED 8 TARGETS /7

------------------------------------
FILE MUST CONTAIN AT LEAST 8 TARGETS
IN ORDER TO UTILIZE REFERENCE
TARGETS USE 'REFERENCE TARGET'
BUTTON TO CHOOSE ANOTHER REF. TARGET

Alarm number 1200: DEPTH BELOW LIMIT /5/13

------------------------------------
ECHO SOUNDER INDICATES WATER DEPTH
BELOW TRANSDUCER TO EXCEED SPECIFIED
SAFE LIMIT.

Alarm number 2000: FILTER: POSITION UNRELIABLE /1

------------------------------------
ECDIS IS NOT ABLE TO ESTIMATE A
RELIABLE POSITION. VERIFY AND CHOOSE
SPEED AND POSITION SENSORS THROUGH
'SENSORS’ FUNCTION .

Alarm number 2001: NO SPEED AVAILABLE /1/8

------------------------------------
NO VALID SPEED SENSOR HAS BEEN FOUND.
VERIFY AND CHOOSE SPEED SEN SORS IN
'SENSORS' BUTTON

Alarm number 2002: NO HEADING AVAILABLE /1/8

------------------------------------
NO VALID HEADING SENSOR HAS BEEN
FOUND. VERIFY AND CHOOSE HEADING
SENSORS IN 'SENSORS’ FUNCTION.

30-5
30. Alarms

Alarm number 2004: GYRO DATA UNRELIABLE /1/8

------------------------------------
IF YOU HAVE BOTH GYRO1 AND GYRO2
CHOSEN AND IF THEY VALUE DIFFERS
MORE THAN 5 DEGREES ALARM IS
GENERATED. VERIFY AND CHOOSE HEADING
SENSORS IN 'SENSORS’ FUNCTION.

Alarm number 2005: LOG DATA UNRELIABLE /1/8

------------------------------------
LOG GIVES 0 KN SPEED, WHICH DOES NOT
CORRESPOND WITH OTHER SPEED SENSORS.
VERIFY AND CHOOSE SPEED SENSORS IN
'SENSORS’ FUNCTION.

Alarm number 2006: ROUTE:COURSE JUMP POSSIBLE /1

------------------------------------
SYSTEM HAS AUTOMATICALLY CHANGED TO
DEAD RECKONING. IF YOU NOW CHOOSE
“ON” A POSITION SENSOR YOU MAY GET A
JUMP FOR COURSE. CHANGE FROM ROUTE
STEERING TO MANUAL STEERING OR CHECK
POSITION VERY CAREFULLY BEFORE
CHOOSING “ON”.

Alarm number 2007: POSITION DISCREPANCY /2/9

------------------------------------
SYSTEM HAS DETECTED MORE DIFFERENCE
THAN SET LIMIT BETWEEN OWN SHIP
PRIMARY AND SECONDARY POSITIONS OR
BETWEEN OWN SHIP AND ANY SENSOR
POSITION. CHECK POSITION SENSORS

30-6
 30. Alarms

Alarm number 2008: FILTER: SPEED BELOW xx KN /1/8

------------------------------------
KALMAN FILTER REQUIRED THAT THE
SPEED OF THE OWN SHIP IS MORE THAN
SPEED LIMIT SET IN ECDIS
INSTALLATION PARAMETERS. IF ROUTE
STEERING WAS NOT USED, THEN KALMAN
FILTER HAS BEEN SET AUTOMATICALLY
OFF BY THE SYSTEM.

Alarm number 2009: POSITION SOURCE CHANGED /1

------------------------------------
POSITION SOURCE OF OWN SHIP PRIMARY
POSITION HAS BEEN CHANGED
AUTOMATICLLY TO ANOTHER SOURCE THAN
BEFORE. VERIFY NEW SOURCE.

Alarm number 2010: FILTER:POS SOURCE CHANGE /2

------------------------------------
DGPS POSITION SENSOR USED IN FILTER
POSITIONING HAS CHANGED ITS
OPERATION MODE FROM NORMAL TO
DIFFERENTIAL OR FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO
NORMAL

Alarm number 2011: CHARTALIGN:OVER 30 MINUTES /2

------------------------------------
IF POSITION ALIGNMENT IS USED THEN
USER IS REMINDED OF IT EVERY 30 MIN.

Alarm number 2013: SOG&COG DATA UNRELIABLE /1/8

-------------------------------------------------------------
SOG AND/OR COG DATA FROM SENSORS IS
UNRELIABLE. VERIFY AND CHOOSE
SPEED/COURSE AND POS SENSORS IN
'SENSORS’ FUNCTION. IF REASON IS
FAST MANOUEVRE, LIMIT CAN BE
INCREASED BY SETTING “MAX RATE OF
TURN” LIMIT OVER 150 DEG/MIN.

30-7
30. Alarms

Alarm number 2052: ROUTE:ILLEGAL ETA WAYPOINT /7

------------------------------------
ETA WAYPOINT DOESN'T EXIST IN ROUTE
FILE OR ETA WAYPOINT IS NOT BETWEEN
NEXT AND FINAL WAYPOINT.
VERIFY IN 'ROUTE MONITOR' THAT A
VALID ROUTE IS CHOSEN.

Alarm number 2053: ROUTE:ILLEGAL NEXT WAYPOINT /7

------------------------------------
NEXT WAYPOINT DOESN'T EXIST IN ROUTE
FILE. VERIFY IN 'ROUTE MONITOR'
THAT A VALID ROUTE IS CHOSEN.

Alarm number 2054: ROUTE:ILLEGAL FINAL WAYPOINT /7

------------------------------------
FINAL WAYPOINT DOES NOT EXIST IN
ROUTE FILE. VERIFY IN 'ROUTE MONI-
TOR' THAT A VALID ROUTE IS CHOSEN.

Alarm number 2055: ARPA RADAR COMMUNICATION ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH ARPA 1
VERIFY THAT
'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INS ON' ARE
DECLICKED ON THE ARPA RADARS.

Alarm number 2056: ARPA RADAR COMMUNICATION ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH ARPA 2
VERIFY THAT
'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INS ON' ARE
DECLICKED ON THE ARPA RADARS.

Alarm number 2057: ARPA RADAR COMMUNICATION ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH ARPA 3
VERIFY THAT
'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INS ON' ARE
DECLICKED ON THE ARPA RADARS.

30-8
 30. Alarms

Alarm number 2058: ARPA RADAR COMMUNICATION ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
ECDIS CANNOT COMMUNICATE WITH ARPA 4
VERIFY THAT
'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INS ON' ARE
DECLICKED ON THE ARPA RADARS.

Alarm number 2060: ROUTE: WP CHANGE DISABLED /7

------------------------------------
NEXT WAYPOINT CANNOT BE CHANGED
DURING ROUTE STEERING. CHANGE FROM
ROUTE STEERING MODE BEFORE CHOOSING
A NEW NEXT WAYPOINT.

Alarm number 2061: CHART ALIGN: EXECUTING /7

------------------------------------
IF CHART ALIGNMENT IS DONE BY MEANS
OF SELESMAR ARPA RADAR, ALARM IS
DISPLAYED WHEN YOU DEFINE ALIGNMENT.

Alarm number 2063: ROUTE:CHOOSE DISABLED /7

------------------------------------
A NEW ROUTE CANNOT BE CHOSEN DURING
ROUTE STEERING. USE 'RADIUS CONTROL'
TO OVERRIDE ROUTE STEERING BEFORE
CHOOSING A NEW ROUTE.

Alarm number 2064: ROUTE:CANCEL DISABLED /7

------------------------------------
A ROUTE CANNOT BE CANCELED DURING
ROUTE STEERING. USE 'RADIUS CONTROL'
TO OVERRIDE ROUTE STEERING BEFORE
CANCELING THE ROUTE.

30-9
30. Alarms

Alarm number 2067: MANUAL DRIFT DISABLED /7

------------------------------------
MANUAL DRIFT VALUE CAN ONLY BE
INSERTED WHEN NO SENSORS PROVIDE
SPEED OVER GROUND DATA.
USE 'SENSORS' BUTTON TO VERIFY
AND CHOOSE SENSORS TO BE USED.

Alarm number 2071: SOURCE ARPA RADAR CHANGED /1

------------------------------------
MASTER RADAR FOR ECDIS HAS BEEN
CHANGED. VERIFY NEW SOURCE OR
TRACKED ARPA TARGETS

Alarm number 2072: CHARTALIGN: NO LINE AVAIL /1

------------------------------------
TO PERFORM CHART ALIGN WITH AN ARPA
RADAR THERE MUST BE TRANSFERRED USER
CHART'S LINES IN THE ARPA RADAR.
CHECK THAT YOUR CURRENT USER CHART
HAS LINES AND THAT THEY ARE VISIBLE
ON ARPA RADAR DISPLAY

Alarm number 2100: USERCHART: FILE READ ERR /7

------------------------------------
CANNOT READ USER CHART IN MONITOR
MODE. MOVE USER CHART TO PLAN MODE
TO MAKE POSTPROCESSING AGAIN FOR
USER CHART.

Alarm number 2101: USER CHART: NEED POINTS /7

------------------------------------
USER CHART HAS MORE THAN 60 LINES OR
20 SYMBOLS AND IT DOES NOT CONTAIN
ANY POINTS. USE 'USER CHART' MENU
TO CHOOSE A VALID USER CHART OR ADD
POINTS TO CURRENT USER CHART

30-10
 30. Alarms

Alarm number 2102: USERCHART: FILE NOT FOUND /7

------------------------------------
CANNOT READ USER CHART IN MONITOR
MODE. MOVE USER CHART TO PLAN MODE
TO MAKE POSTPROCESSING AGAIN FOR
USER CHART.

Alarm number 2150: ROUTE: FILE READ ERROR /7

------------------------------------
CANNOT OPEN ROUTE IN MONITOR MODE.
OPEN ROUTE IN PLAN MODE TO MAKE SOME
MODIFICATION OF WP DATA IN WP PAGE.
FOR EXAMPLE CHANGE RADIUS OF ANY WP.

Alarm number 2151: ROUTE: FILE READ ERROR /7

------------------------------------
CANNOT READ ROUTE IN MONITOR MODE.
MOVE ROUTE TO PLAN MODE TO MAKE SOME
MODIFICATION OF WP DATA IN WP PAGE.
FOR EXAMPLE CHANGE RADIUS OF ANY WP.

Alarm number 2152: ROUTE: FILE NOT FOUND /7

------------------------------------
CANNOT READ ROUTE IN MONITOR MODE.
MOVE ROUTE TO PLAN MODE TO MAKE SOME
MODIFICATION OF WP DATA IN WP PAGE.
FOR EXAMPLE CHANGE RADIUS OF ANY WP.

Alarm number 2454: ROUTE: END REACHED /1

------------------------------------
YOU HAVE PASSED THE FINAL WAYPOINT
OF YOUR MONITORED ROUTE. CURRENT
MONITORED ROUTE HAS AUTOMATICALLY
CANCELLED

Alarm number 2457: ROUTE: OUTSIDE CHANNEL LIMITS /3/10

------------------------------------
SHIP IS OUTSIDE CHANNEL LIMITS
SPECIFIED FOR CURRENT LEG OF ROUTE.
CHECK SHIP POSITION AND ROUTE

30-11
30. Alarms

Alarm number 2459: STEERING PARAMETER ERROR /7

------------------------------------
TRACKPILOT PARAMETER HAS AN ERROR IN
ITS CONTENTS. CHECK AGAIN
INSTALLATION PARAMETERS OF ECDIS.

Alarm number 2480: TRACKPILOT RECEIVE ERROR /2/9

------------------------------------
ECDIS CANNOT RECEIVE ANY DATA FROM
TRACKPILOT. CHANGE “MAIN STEERING”
-CHOOSEOR TO ANY OTHER POSITION THAN
AUTOP. CHECK AND VERIFY TRACKPILOT
OPERATION BEFORE NEW TRY

Alarm number 2488: STEERING:STOP-SYSTEM FAIL /2

------------------------------------
CONNECTION TO THE TRACKPILOT HAS
BEEN LOST WHILE THE SYSTEM PERFORMED
ONE OF THE INTEGRATED STEERING MODES:
- GOTO TRACK
- GOTO WAYPOINT
- PROGRAM TRACK
CURRENT STEERING MODE CANNOT CONTINUE
CHECK NEW STEERING SITUATION

Alarm number 3000: PARAM CHANGE DISABLED /3

------------------------------------
INSTALLATION PARAMETERS CANNOT BE
CHANGED IF THE ROUTE STEERING IS ON
OR THE KALMAN FILTER IS IN USE.
CHECK THE SITUATION AND TRY AGAIN.

Alarm number 3300: SENSOR DATAFLOW ERROR /1

-----------------------------------
ECDIS HAS INTERNAL SENSOR MANAGEMENT
ERROR ALL CONNECTION TO SENSOR DATA
IS LOST

30-12
 30. Alarms

Alarm number 3500: AIS TARGET OVERFLOW /2/9

------------------------------------
MAXIMUM COUNT OF AIS TARGETS SET TO
BE DISPLAYED ON ECDIS HAS BEEN
EXCEEDED WITHIN DEFINED MAXIMUM
RANGE. IT IS POSSIBLE THAT SOME OF
AIS TARGETS ARE NOT DISPLAYED ON
ECDIS. TO GET ALL AIS TARGETS TO BE
DISPLAYED, INCREASE MAXIMUM COUNT OF
AIS TARGETS OR DECREASE VALUE OF
MAXIMUM RANGE.

Alarm number 3501: AIS TARGET STORAGE FULL /2/9

------------------------------------
MAXIMUM COUNT OF AIS TARGETS WHICH
CAN BE STORED FOR DISPLAYING ON
ECDIS HAS BEEN EXCEEDED. IT IS
POSSIBLE THAT SOME OF AIS TARGETS
ARE NOT DISPLAYED ON ECDIS.

Alarm number 3502: DANGEROUS AIS TARGET /3/10

------------------------------------
AIS TARGET HAS MET DANGEROUS TARGET
LIMIT SET BY CPA AND TCPA

Alarm number 3503: LOST AIS TARGET /3

------------------------------------
NO Update INFORMATION RECEIVED FROM
TRACKED AIS TARGET WITHIN DEFINED
REPORTING INTERVAL OF SHIP TYPE

Alarm number 4000: NO SENSOR PARAMETERS /2

------------------------------------
SENSOR PARAMETER FILES ARE MISSING.
LOAD INSTALLATION PARAMETERS OF
ECDIS. IF REQUIRED USE BACKUP COPY
OF PARAMETERS.

30-13
30. Alarms

Alarm number 4001: B-ADAPTER ERROR /4/11

------------------------------------
B-ADAPTER DOES NOT OPERATE DUE TO A
SYSTEM FAULT. SWITCH OFF MAIN
CIRCUIT BREAKER AND THEN ON AGAIN.
CALL SERVICE IF FAILURE STILL EXISTS

Alarm number 4002: ENGINE CONTROL COMM ERROR /6/13

------------------------------------
CONNECTION TO ENGINE CONTROL HAS
BEEN LOST. CHECK THAT CONNECTION IS
OK.

Alarm number 4005: GYRO ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
GYRO1 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY
USE 'INITIAL SETTINGS' MENU TO SET
GYRO AGAIN. IF FAILURE STILL
EXISTS, USE 'SENSORS' SPEED/POSITION
PAGE TO CHOOSE VALID SENSORS.

Alarm number 4006: GYRO ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
GYRO2 DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY
USE 'SENSORS' SPEED/POSITION PAGE TO
CHOOSE VALID SENSORS.

Alarm number 4008: LOG ERROR /3/10

-----------------------------------
LOG DATA IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY.
USE 'SENSORS' SPEED/COURSE
TO CHOOSE VALID SENSORS

Alarm number 4008: DUAL AXIS LOG (WT) ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
DUAL AXIS LOG DATA IS NOT RECEIVED
CORRECTLY. USE SPEED/COURSE PAGE
TO CHOOSE VALID SPEED SENSORS.

30-14
 30. Alarms

Alarm number 4009: DUAL AXIS LOG (BT) ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
DUAL AXIS LOG DATA IS NOT RECEIVED
CORRECTLY. USE SPEED/COURSE PAGE
TO CHOOSE VALID SPEED SENSORS.

Alarm number 4010: ECHO SOUNDER ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
ECHO SOUNDER DATA IS NOT RECEIVED
CORRECTLY.
VERIFY ECHO SOUNDER OPERATION.

Alarm number 4011: WIND SENSOR ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
WIND SENSOR DATA IS NOT RE CEIVED
CORRECTLY.
VERIFY WIND SENSOR OPERATION.

Alarm number 4012: POSITION EQUIPMENT ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
POSITION EQUIPMENT 1 DATA IS NOT
RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE 'SENSORS'
POSITION TO CHOOSE VALID POS SENSOR.

Alarm number 4013: POSITION EQUIPMENT ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
POSITION EQUIPMENT 2 DATA IS NOT
RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE 'SENSORS'
POSITION TO CHOOSE VALID POS SENSOR.

Alarm number 4014: POSITION EQUIPMENT ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
POSITION EQUIPMENT 3 DATA IS NOT
RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE 'SENSORS'
POSITION TO CHOOSE VALID POS SENSOR.

30-15
30. Alarms

Alarm number 4015: POSITION EQUIPMENT ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
POSITION EQUIPMENT 4 DATA IS NOT
RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE 'SENSORS'
POSITION TO CHOOSE VALID POS SENSOR.

Alarm number 4016: POSITION EQUIPMENT ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
POSITION EQUIPMENT 5 DATA IS NOT
RECEIVED CORRECTLY. USE 'SENSORS'
POSITION TO CHOOSE VALID POS SENSOR.

Alarm number 4018: ROT GYRO ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
ROT GYRO DATA IS NOT RECEIVED
CORRECTLY. VERIFY ROT GYRO DEVICE.

Alarm number 4019: PITCH&ROLL SENSOR ERROR 3/10

------------------------------------
PITCH&ROLL DATA IS NOT RECEIVED
CORRECTLY. VERIFY SENSOR FOR
PITCH&ROLL DATA.

Alarm number 4021: ARPA RADAR SYSTEM ERROR /6/13

------------------------------------
RADAR FROM CHANNEL 1 REPORT RADAR
SYSTEM FAILURE OR ECDIS CANNOT
COMMUNICATE WITH THE RADAR. VERIFY
THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INC ON'
ARE DECLICKED ON THE RADAR.

Alarm number 4022: ARPA RADAR SYSTEM ERROR /6/13

------------------------------------
RADAR FROM CHANNEL 2 REPORT RADAR
SYSTEM FAILURE OR ECDIS CANNOT
COMMUNICATE WITH THE RADAR. VERIFY
THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INC ON'
ARE DECLICKED ON THE RADAR.

30-16
 30. Alarms

Alarm number 4023: ARPA RADAR SYSTEM ERROR /6/13

------------------------------------
RADAR FROM CHANNEL 3 REPORT RADAR
SYSTEM FAILURE OR ECDIS CANNOT
COMMUNICATE WITH THE RADAR. VERIFY
THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INC ON'
ARE DECLICKED ON THE RADAR.

Alarm number 4024: ARPA RADAR SYSTEM ERROR /6/13

------------------------------------
RADAR FROM CHANNEL 1 REPORT RADAR
SYSTEM FAILURE OR ECDIS CANNOT
COMMUNICATE WITH THE RADAR. VERIFY
THAT 'AUTOTRACKING ON' AND 'INC ON'
ARE DECLICKED ON THE RADAR.

Alarm number 4027: DGPS POS. SOURCE CHANGE /3/10

------------------------------------
DGPS POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL
NUMBER 1 HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION
MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR
FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL. CHECK
SENSORS AND IF REQUIRED CHOOSE MORE
SUITABLE POSITION SENSOR.

Alarm number 4028: DGPS POS. SOURCE CHANGE /3/10

------------------------------------
DGPS POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL
NUMBER 2 HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION
MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR
FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL. CHECK
SENSORS AND IF REQUIRED CHOOSE MORE
SUITABLE POSITION SENSOR.

30-17
30. Alarms

Alarm number 4029: DGPS POS. SOURCE CHANGE /3/10

------------------------------------
DGPS POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL
NUMBER 3 HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION
MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR
FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL. CHECK
SENSORS AND IF REQUIRED CHOOSE MORE
SUITABLE POSITION SENSOR.

Alarm number 4030: DGPS POS. SOURCE CHANGE /3/10

------------------------------------
DGPS POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL
NUMBER 4 HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION
MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR
FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL. CHECK
SENSORS AND IF REQUIRED CHOOSE MORE
SUITABLE POSITION SENSOR.

Alarm number 4031: DGPS POS. SOURCE CHANGE /3/10

------------------------------------
DGPS POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL
NUMBER 5 HAS CHANGED ITS OPERATION
MODE FROM NORMAL TO DIFFERENTIAL OR
FROM DIFFERENTIAL TO NORMAL. CHECK
SENSORS AND IF REQUIRED CHOOSE MORE
SUITABLE POSITION SENSOR.

Alarm number 4033: ARPA RADAR SPD/CRS ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
ARPA RADAR CHOSEN AS SPD AND CRS
SOURCE IS NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY
USE 'SENSORS' SPEED/COURSE TO CHOOSE
VALID SPD/CRS SENSORS

Alarm number 4034: SPEEDPILOT RECEIVE ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
DATA FROM SPEEDPILOT IS NOT RECEIVED
CORRECTLY. CHECK CONNECTION OF
SPEEDPILOT.

30-18
 30. Alarms

Alarm number 4035: B-ADAPTER INTERFACE ERROR /1/8

------------------------------------
B-ADAPTER DATA IS NOT RECEIVED
CORRECTLY DUE TO INTERNAL SOFTWARE
ERROR IN COMMUNICATION PROGRAM.
TO RESTART COMMUNICATION PROGRAM,
OPEN INSTALLATION PARAMETERS OF
ECDIS AND CLICK OK WITHOUT CHANGING
ANY PARAMETERS. OR RESTART ECDIS.

Alarm number 4036: AMWSS COMM ERROR /6/13

------------------------------------
COMMUNICATION WITH AMWSS FAILS.
CHECK CONNECTION TO AMWSS

Alarm number 4037: AMWSS RECEIVE ERROR /6/13

------------------------------------
DATA FROM AMWSS IS NOT RECEIVED
CORRECTLY. CHECK CONNECTION TO
AMWSS

Alarm number 4038: DATUM MISMATCH /3/10

------------------------------------
POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 1
OUTPUTS POSITION ANOTHER DATUM AS
SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS
CHECK, THAT SENSOR OUTPUTS POSITION
IN WGS 84 DATUM.

Alarm number 4039: DATUM MISMATCH /3/10

------------------------------------
POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 2
OUTPUTS POSITION ANOTHER DATUM AS
SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS
CHECK, THAT SENSOR OUTPUTS POSITION
IN WGS 84 DATUM.

30-19
30. Alarms

Alarm number 4040: DATUM MISMATCH /3/10

------------------------------------
POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 3
OUTPUTS POSITION ANOTHER DATUM AS
SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS
CHECK, THAT SENSOR OUTPUTS POSITION
IN WGS 84 DATUM.

Alarm number 4041: DATUM MISMATCH /3/10

------------------------------------
POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 4
OUTPUTS POSITION ANOTHER DATUM AS
SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS
CHECK, THAT SENSOR OUTPUTS POSITION
IN WGS 84 DATUM.

Alarm number 4042: DATUM MISMATCH /3/10

------------------------------------
POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 5
OUTPUTS POSITION ANOTHER DATUM AS
SET IN ECDIS INSTALLATION PARAMETERS
CHECK, THAT SENSOR OUTPUTS POSITION
IN WGS 84 DATUM.

Alarm number 4044: DATUM CHANGE /1

------------------------------------
POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 1
HAS CHANGED OUTPUT POSITION FROM
ANOTHER DATUM TO WGS 84 DATUM.

Alarm number 4045: DATUM CHANGE /3

------------------------------------
POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 2
HAS CHANGED OUTPUT POSITION FROM
ANOTHER DATUM TO WGS 84 DATUM.

30-20
 30. Alarms

Alarm number 4046: DATUM CHANGE /3

------------------------------------
POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 3
HAS CHANGED OUTPUT POSITION FROM
ANOTHER DATUM TO WGS 84 DATUM.

Alarm number 4047: DATUM CHANGE /3

------------------------------------
POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 4
HAS CHANGED OUTPUT POSITION FROM
ANOTHER DATUM TO WGS 84 DATUM.

Alarm number 4048: DATUM CHANGE /3

------------------------------------
POSITION SENSOR IN CHANNEL NUMBER 5
HAS CHANGED OUTPUT POSITION FROM
ANOTHER DATUM TO WGS 84 DATUM.

Alarm number 4050: ARPA ANTENNA ID ERROR /6/13

-----------------------------------
ECDIS CANNOT RECEIVE ANTENNA ID
FROM RADAR IN CHANNEL 1

Alarm number 4051: ARPA ANTENNA ID ERROR /6/13

-----------------------------------
ECDIS CANNOT RECEIVE ANTENNA ID
FROM RADAR IN CHANNEL 2

Alarm number 4052: ARPA ANTENNA ID ERROR /6/13

-----------------------------------
ECDIS CANNOT RECEIVE ANTENNA ID
FROM RADAR IN CHANNEL 3

Alarm number 4053: ARPA ANTENNA ID ERROR /6/13

-----------------------------------
ECDIS CANNOT RECEIVE ANTENNA ID
FROM RADAR IN CHANNEL 4

30-21
30. Alarms

Alarm number 4055: GYRO ERROR(TRACKPILOT) /3/10

------------------------------------
GYRO DATA ON TRACKPILOT IS MISSING.
AL 10 IS ALSO ACTIVE ON TRACKPILOT'S
CONTROL PANEL. STUDY SITUATION ON
TRACKPILOT.

Alarm number 4063: ECDIS IP ERROR FOR LANADA /3/10

------------------------------------
IF ECDIS IP-ADDRESS FOR LAN ADAPTERS
IS DIFFERENT BETWEEN WINDOWSXP CONTROL
PANEL AND ECDIS

Alarm number 4064: LAN FAIL FOR LANADAPTER /3/10

------------------------------------
UNEXPEXTED LAN ERROR -> MAYBE LAN
CABLE OR HUB BROKEN/DISCONNECTED.
ECDIS CONTINUE OPERATION WITHOUT
INTERFACES. FIX THE PROBLEM AND
RESTART THE ECDIS. CHECK IP ADDRESSES

Alarm number 4065: NO LAN ADATER INSTALLED /3/10

------------------------------------
INSTALLATION MISTAKE. “NO LAN
ADAPTER(S) DEFINED. INSTALL ECDIS
SW AGAIN.

Alarm number 4066: LAN ADATER 1 PARAM ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
INSTALLATION MISTAKE. INSTALL ECDIS
SW AGAIN.

Alarm number 4067: LAN ADATER 2 PARAM ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
INSTALLATION MISTAKE. INSTALL ECDIS
SW AGAIN.

30-22
 30. Alarms

Alarm number 4068: LAN ADATER 3 PARAM ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
INSTALLATION MISTAKE. INSTALL ECDIS
SW AGAIN.

Alarm number 4069: LAN ADATER 4 PARAM ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
INSTALLATION MISTAKE. INSTALL ECDIS
SW AGAIN.

Alarm number 4070: ECDIS IP ERROR FOR ARPA /3/10

------------------------------------
IF ECDIS IP-ADDRESS FOR LAN RADAR IS
DIFFERENT BETWEEN WINDOWSXP CONTROL
PANEL AND ECDIS. CHECK IP ADDRESSES.

Alarm number 4071: LAN FAIL FOR ARPA /3/10

------------------------------------
UNEXPEXTED LAN ERROR -> MAYBE LAN
CABLE BROKEN/DISCONNECTED.
FIX THE PROBLEM AND RESTART THE ECDIS.

Alarm number 4072: LAN ARPA 1 CONN ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
ECDIS FAILED TO COMMUNICATE WITH LAN
RADAR 1. CHECK IP ADDRESSES BOTH FOR
LAN RADAR ON ECDIS AND ON RADAR.

Alarm number 4073: LAN ARPA 2 CONN ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
ECDIS FAILED TO COMMUNICATE WITH LAN
RADAR 2. CHECK IP ADDRESSES BOTH FOR
LAN RADAR ON ECDIS AND ON RADAR.

Alarm number 4074: LAN ARPA 3 CONN ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
ECDIS FAILED TO COMMUNICATE WITH LAN
RADAR 3. CHECK IP ADDRESSES BOTH FOR
LAN RADAR ON ECDIS AND ON RADAR.

30-23
30. Alarms

Alarm number 4075: LAN ARPA 4 CONN ERROR /3/10

------------------------------------
ECDIS FAILED TO COMMUNICATE WITH LAN
RADAR 4. CHECK IP ADDRESSES BOTH FOR
LAN RADAR ON ECDIS AND ON RADAR.

Alarm number 4083: LAN ADATER PARAM CONFLICT /3/10

------------------------------------
ID OF LAN ADAPTER ON ECDIS IS INCORRECT
OR PARAMETER “F” ON LAN ADAPTER IS
INCORRECT. CHECK THE PARAMETERS.

Alarm number 4201: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ. ERROR /6

------------------------------------
NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN
ALARM INPUT 1 HAS INTERNAL FAILURE

Alarm number 4202: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ. ERROR /6

------------------------------------
NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN
ALARM INPUT 2 HAS INTERNAL FAILURE

Alarm number 4203: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ. ERROR /6

------------------------------------
NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN
ALARM INPUT 3 HAS INTERNAL FAILURE

Alarm number 4204: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ. ERROR /6

------------------------------------
NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN
ALARM INPUT 4 HAS INTERNAL FAILURE

Alarm number 4205: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ. ERROR /6

------------------------------------
NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN
ALARM INPUT 5 HAS INTERNAL FAILURE

30-24
 30. Alarms

Alarm number 4206: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ. ERROR /6

------------------------------------
NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN
ALARM INPUT 6 HAS INTERNAL FAILURE

Alarm number 4207: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ. ERROR /6

------------------------------------
NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN
ALARM INPUT 7 HAS INTERNAL FAILURE

Alarm number 4208: EXT. NAVIGATION EQ. ERROR /6

------------------------------------
NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT CONNECTED IN
ALARM INPUT 8 HAS INTERNAL FAILURE

30.8.2 List of chart alarms

Alarm number 5001: NEW PILOT DATA /2/10

Alarm number 5100: SAFETY CONTOUR /2/10

Alarm number 5101: AREAS TO BE AVOIDED /2/10

Alarm number 5102: SPECIALLY PROTECTED AREAS/2/10

Alarm number 5103: USER CHART DANGER AREA /2/10

Alarm number 5104: TRAFFIC SEPARATION ZONE /2/10

Alarm number 5105: TRS CROSSING/ROUNDABOUT /2/10

Alarm number 5106: TRS PRECAUTIONARY AREA /2/10

Alarm number 5107: TWO WAY TRAFFIC ROUTE /2/10

Alarm number 5108: DEEP WATER ROUTE /2/10

Alarm number 5109: RECOMMEND TRAFFIC LANE /2/10

Alarm number 5110: INSHORE TRAFFIC ZONE /2/10

30-25
30. Alarms

Alarm number 5111: FAIRWAY /2/10

Alarm number 5112: RESTRICTED AREA /2/10

Alarm number 5113: CAUTION AREA /2/10

Alarm number 5114: OFFSHORE PRODUCTION AREA /2/10

Alarm number 5115: MILITARY PRACTICE AREA /2/10

Alarm number 5116: SEAPLANE LANDING AREA /2/10

Alarm number 5117: SUBMARINE TRANSIT LANE /2/10

Alarm number 5118: ICE AREA /2/10

Alarm number 5119: CHANNEL /2/10

Alarm number 5120: FISHING GROUND /2/10

Alarm number 5121: FISHING PROHIBITED /2/10

Alarm number 5122: PIPELINE AREA /2/10

Alarm number 5123: CABLE AREA /2/10

Alarm number 5124: ANCHORAGE AREA /2/10

Alarm number 5125: ANCHORAGE PROHIBITED /2/10

Alarm number 5126: DUMPING GROUND /2/10

Alarm number 5127: SPOIL GROUND /2/10

Alarm number 5128: DREDGED AREA /2/10

Alarm number 5129: CARGO TRANSSHIPMENT AREA /2/10

Alarm number 5130: INCINERATION AREA /2/10

30-26
 30. Alarms

30.8.3 List of steering alarms with EMRI Trackpilot

Alarm number 2451: ROUTE: WP APPROACH ALARM /1/8

------------------------------------
WAYPOINT IS NOW BEING APPROACHED.
CLICK 'ACKN. WARNING' TO ACCEPT THE
TURN.

Alarm number 2452: ROUTE: TURNING DISABLED /1

------------------------------------
WHEELOVER POINT HAS BEEN PASSED
WITHOUT 'ACKN. WARNING* 'RADIUS
CONTROL' MODE HAS THEN AUTOMATICALLY
BEEN INITIATED

Alarm number 2455: ROUTE: OFF COURSE /4/11

------------------------------------
REQUIRED 'SET COURSE' FOR NEXT
WAYPOINT EXCEEDS THE 'LOWER
OFFCOURSE' OR 'HIGHER OFF COURSE'
LIMIT OF PLANNED COURSE. ACCEPT THE
SITUATION BY CLICKING 'ACKN. WARNING'

Alarm number 2456: ROUTE: WP APPROACH ERROR /1

------------------------------------
'TIME TO WOP' HAS CHANGED SINCE 'WP
APPROACH' ALARM WAS ACKNOWLEDGED,
POSSIBLY DUE TO A POSITION JUMP.
VERIFY POSITION AND SPEED SEN SORS
IN 'SENSORS' PAGE

Alarm number 2458: ROUTE: LAST WP APPROACH /1/8

------------------------------------
FINAL WAYPOINT OF THE ROUTE IS
REACHED. AUTOMATICALLY INITIATE
'RADIUS CONTROL' MODE, AND CANCEL
THE ROUTE.

30-27
30. Alarms

Alarm number 2460: PILOT: ROT WILL BE EXCEEDED /4/11

------------------------------------
THE RADIUS SENT TO AUTOPILOT IS
EXCEEDING THE MAXIMUM LIMIT FOR
TURNRATE. INCREASE THE RADIUS, OR
REDUCE SPEED.

Alarm number 2461: ROUTE:ROT WILL BE EXCEEDED /4/11

------------------------------------
WAYPOINT IS BEING APPROACHED WITH
TOO HIGH SPEED FOR THE PLANNED
RADIUS, CAUSING MAX. TURNRATE TO BE
EXCEEDED. REDUCE THE SPEED OR
INCREASE RADIUS BY OVERDRIVING WITH
'MAN. SET COURSE'.

Alarm number 2464: ROUTE: NO CHOSEN ROUTE /7

------------------------------------
NO ROUTE HAS BEEN CHOSEN, AND
ROUTE STEERING CANNOT BE INITIATED.
CHOOSE A ROUTE AND NEXT WAYPOINT
THROUGH 'ROUTE MONITOR' PUSHBUTTON.

Alarm number 2465: ROUTE: ILLEGAL WAYPOINT /7

------------------------------------
ROUTE STEERING CANNOT START FROM
WAYPOINT 1. USE 'ROUTE MONITOR'
PUSHBUTTON TO CHOOSE “TO WP” TO BE 2
OR HIGHER.

Alarm number 2467: DISABLED: STEERING OFF /1

------------------------------------
TRACKPILOT IS IN 'STEERING OFF'
MODE, AND STEERING COMMANDS CANNOT
BE EXECUTED. STEERING MUST BE ENA-
BLED AT THE MAIN STEERING CHOOSEOR

30-28
 30. Alarms

Alarm number 2468: DISABLED: OUT OF COURSE /1

------------------------------------
ROUTE STEERING CAN ONLY BE INITIATED
WHEN SHIPS COURSE IS WITHIN THE
'GOTO WP LIMIT' FOR 'GOTO WP' OR
WITHIN THE 'GOTO TRACK LIMIT' FOR
'GOTO TRACK'. USE 'RADIUS CONTROL'
MODE TO STEER WITHIN THE LIMITS.

Alarm number 2469: TRACKPILOT: OFF COURSE /4/11

------------------------------------
TRACKPILOT DOES NOT STEER WITHIN
LIMITS OF 'COURSE TO STEER' COMMAND'.
VERIFY TRACKPILOT FUNCTIONS.

Alarm number 2470: DISABLED: NEEDS FILTER ON /1

------------------------------------
'ROUTE STEERING' MODE CAN BE USED
ONLY WHEN 'FILTER' IS ON AND THERE
ARE ENOUGH SPEED, HEADING AND
POSITION SENSORS. VERIFY AND CHOOSE
POSITION SENSORS IN 'SENSORS’ PAGE

Alarm number 2475: ROUTE: NEEDS FILTER ON /2/9

------------------------------------
THIS IS A WARNING THAT YOU ARE USING
ROUTE STEERING WITHOUT FILTERED
POSITION AVAILABLE. VERIFY AND
CHOOSE POSITION SENSORS IN 'SENSORS'

Alarm number 2476: ROUTE: NEEDS LOG SENSOR /2/9

------------------------------------
THIS IS A WARNING THAT YOU ARE USING
ROUTE STEERING WITH ONE POSITION
DEVICE AND WITHOUT ANY LOG DEVICE.
VERIFY AND CHOOSE SENSORS IN'SENSORS'

30-29
30. Alarms

Alarm number 2477: DISABLED: OUT OF CHANNEL /1

------------------------------------
'GOTO WP' OR 'GOTO TRACK' CAN ONLY
BE INITIATED WHEN SHIP IS WITHIN
CHANNEL LIMIT OF MONITORED ROUTE.

Alarm number 2478: ROUTE: NEEDS GOOD POSIT. /2/9

------------------------------------
THIS IS WARNING THAT YOU ARE USING
GOTO WP STEERING MODE WITHOUT
DIFF. POSITION AND POSITION
DISCREPANCY LIMIT BETWEEN PRIMARY
AND SECONDARY SENSORS IS EXCEEDED.
THIS IS REPEATED EVERY 2 MINUTES
UNTIL AFTER 10 MINUTES “ALARM 2497”
APPEARS.

Alarm number 2485: ROUTE: WP PREWARNING ALARM /2/9

------------------------------------
WAYPOINT IS SOON BEING APPROACHED.

Alarm number 2489: ROUTE: CHANGED TO GOTO WP /3

------------------------------------
SYSTEM CANNOT CONTINUE GOTO TRACK
MODE BECAUSE KALMAN FILTER POSITION
IS LOST OR NO LOG SENSOR IS
AVAILABLE KALMAN FILTER

Alarm number 2490: DISABLED: NEEDS LOG SENSOR /1

------------------------------------
'ROUTE STEERING' MODE CAN BE USED
ONLY WHEN THERE IS AN INDEPENDENT
SPEED SOURCE. ALTERNATIVES ARE A
LOG OR TWO POSITION RECEIVERS

Alarm number 2491: DISABLED: NEEDS DIFF POS. /1

------------------------------------
'GOTO TRACK' MODE CAN BE USED ONLY
IF A HIGH-PRECISION POSITION SENSOR
IS IN USE WITH KALMAN FILTER.

30-30
 30. Alarms

Alarm number 2492: ROUTE: NEEDS DIFF POS. /2

------------------------------------
'GOTO TRACK' MODE CANNOT CONTINUE
WITHOUT A HIGH-PRECISION POSITION
SENSOR. STEERING MODE IS
AUTOMATICALLY CHANGED “GOTO WP” WITH
ALARM 2489:ROUTE: CHANGED TO GOTO WP

Alarm number 2493: PROGTRACK: NEEDS FILTER ON /2/9

------------------------------------
A WARNING THAT YOU ARE USING PROGRAM
TRACK WITHOUT FILTERED POSITION
AVAILABLE.

Alarm number 2494: PROGTRACK: NEEDS LOG SENS. /2/9

------------------------------------
A WARNING THAT YOU ARE USING PROGRAM
TRACK WITHOUT A LOG SENSOR OR
WITHOUT TWO POSITION SENSORS

Alarm number 2495: PROGTRACK: NEEDS DIFF POS. /2/9

------------------------------------
A WARNING THAT YOU ARE USING PROGRAM
TRACK WITHOUT A HIGH-PRECISION
POSITION SENSOR

Alarm number 2496: PROGTRACK: STOP-SENSOR FAIL /1

------------------------------------
GYRO, SPEED AND/OR POSITION DATA IS
NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY.
Alarm number 2497: ROUTE: STOP-SENSOR FAIL /1
------------------------------------
GYRO, SPEED AND/OR POSITION DATA IS
NOT RECEIVED CORRECTLY.

30-31
30. Alarms

Alarm number 2498: USE MANUAL RUDDER CONTROL /1

------------------------------------
CHANGE IMIDIATELY TO DIRECT CONTROL
OF RUDDER. THIS ALARM IS REMINDER
THAT TRACKPILOT HAS LOST GYRO
HEADING. IT IS REPEATED EVERY TWO
MINUTES.

Alarm number 2499: DISABLED: NEEDS GOOD POS /1

------------------------------------
'ROUTE STEERING' MODE CANNOT BE
ACTIVATED WITHOUT DIFF. POSITION AND
IF POSITION DISCREPANCY LIMIT IS
EXCEEDED.

Alarm number 2501: ROUTE: NEED HIGHER SPEED /2/9

------------------------------------
THIS IS WARNING THAT SPEED IS BELOW
LIMIT SET FOR KALMAN FILETER. IT IS
AVAILABLE TOGETHER “ALARM 2008”.
“ALARM 2501” IS REPEATED EVERY 2
MINUTES UNTIL AFTER 10 MINUTES
“ALARM 2497” APPEARS.

Alarm number 2502: DISABLED: NEED HIGHER SPD /1

------------------------------------
THIS IS WARNING THAT SPEED IS BELOW
LIMIT SET FOR KALMAN FILETER. IT IS
AVAILABLE TOGETHER “ALARM 2008”
TO ACTIVATE ROUTE STEERING USE
HIGHER SPEED .

Alarm number 2503: PROGTRACK: NEED HIGHER SPD /2/9

------------------------------------
THIS IS WARNING THAT SPEED IS BELOW
LIMIT SET FOR KALMAN FILETER. IT IS
AVAILABLE TOGETHER “ALARM 2008”.
“ALARM 2501” IS REPEATED EVERY 2
MINUTES UNTIL AFTER 10 MINUTES
“ALARM 2496” APPEARS.

30-32
 30. Alarms

Alarm number 2504: PROGTRACK: USE RADIUS CTRL. /2/9

------------------------------------
THIS IS INSTRUCTION TO CHANGE
STEERING MODE. THIS ALARM IS
GENERATED IF THERE ARE NOT
SUFFICIENT SENSORS AVAILABLE TO
CONTINUE PROGRAM TRACK

Alarm number 2505: ROUTE: USE GOTO WP /2/9

------------------------------------
THIS IS INSTRUCTION TO CHANGE
STEERING MODE. THIS ALARM IS
GENERATED IF THERE ARE NOT
SUFFICIENT SENSORS AVAILABLE TO
CONTINUE GOTO TRACK

Alarm number 2506: ROUTE: USE RADIUS CTRL. /2/9

------------------------------------
THIS IS INSTRUCTION TO CHANGE
STEERING MODE. THIS ALARM IS
GENERATED IF THERE ARE NOT
SUFFICIENT SENSORS AVAILABLE TO
CONTINUE GOTO WP OR GOTO TRACK

Alarm number 2507: ROUTE: NEED SOG/COG REF. /2/9

------------------------------------
'GOTO TRACK' MODE CANNOT CONTINUE
WITHOUT SOG/COG REFERENCE AVAILABLE
FROM POSITION SENSOR OR BOTTOM TRACK
OF DUAL AXIS LOG.

Alarm number 2508: DISABLED: NEED SOG/COG REF. /2

------------------------------------
GOTO TRACK STEERING MODE CANNOT BE
ACTIVATED WITHOUT SOG/COG REFERENCE
AVAILABLE FROM POSITION SENSOR OR
BOTTOM TRACK OF DUAL AXIS LOG

30-33
30. Alarms

Alarm number 2509: PROG TRACK: NEED SOG/COG REF. /2/9

------------------------------------
'PROGRAM TRACK' MODE CANNOT CONTINUE
WITHOUT SOG/COG REFERENCE AVAILABLE
FROM POSITION SENSOR OR BOTTOM TRACK
OF DUAL AXIS LOG.

Alarm number 2510: DISABLED: OUT OF TURN /2

------------------------------------
GOTO TRACK OR GOTO WP STEERING MODE
CANNOT BE ACTIVATED IF THE ROUTE
MONITORING OF THE SYSTEM DETECTS
THAT ROUTE MONITOR IS in TURN, BUT
OWN SHIP LOCATION IS OUT OF TURN.
CHECK AND SET CORRECT “TO WP” AGAIN
FOR ROUTE MONITORING.

Alarm number 2516: AUTOPILOT: DRIFT LIMIT /4/11

------------------------------------
IF THE AUTOPILOT NEEDS MORE THAN A
SET LIMIT TO COMPENSATE DRIFT(THE
LIMIT IS AVAILABLE IN INSTALLATION
PARAMETERS FOR TRACK MODE (MAX DRIFT
COMPENSATION)). THIS ALARM IS
REPEATED EVERY 5 MINUTES, IF THE
CONDITION CONTINUES.

30-34
 30. Alarms

30.8.4 List of steering alarms only with Yokogawa Autopilot

Alarm number 2471: 2471 AP MODE CONFLICT - USE AUTO/2/9
------------------------------------
YOU HAVE TRIED TO ACTIVATE TRACK
STEERING OR YOU HAVE REACHED THE END
OF THE ROUTE, BUT YOU HAVE NOT LEFT
'TRACK' MODE CHANGE IMMEDIATELY TO
'AUTO' MODE

Alarm number 2506: ROUTE:USE AUTO CONTROL /2/9

------------------------------------
THIS IS INSTRUCTION TO CHANGE
STEERING MODE. THIS ALARM IS
GENERATED IF THERE ARE NOT
SUFFICIENT SENSORS AVAILABLE TO
CONTINUE TRACK MODE

Alarm number 2511: ROUTE:AUTO RESUME DISABLE /1

------------------------------------
IF ALARM 2471 HAS BEEN GENERATED
AND LATER CONDITION FOR ALARM 2471
DISAPPEARS WITHOUT CHANGING STEERING
MODE FROM “NAVI” TO “AUTO” OR “HAND”.
FIRST CHANGE STEERING MODE TO “AUTO”
OR “HAND” AND CHECK THAT PRECONDITIONS
FOR ROUTE STEERING ARE FULFILLED.

Alarm number 2512: USE NFU RUDDER CONTROL /1/8

------------------------------------
RUDDER SERVO UNIT CANNOT BE
CONTROLLED BY YOKOGAWA STEERING
CONTROL UNIT, THIS ALARM IS GENERATED
TO CHANGE NON FOLLOW UP CONTROL OF
RUDDER(S). FIRST CHANGE USING SYSTEM
SELECTOR SWITCH FROM “FU” TO “NFU” AND
THEN USE NON-FOLLOW UP STEERING LEVER
TO CONTROL RUDDER(S).

30-35
30. Alarms

Alarm number 2514: ROUTE: NAVI COMPLETE TURN /2/9

------------------------------------
THIS IS INSTRUCTION TO CHANGE
STEERING MODE. THIS ALARM IS
GENERATED IF THERE ARE NOT
SUFFICIENT SENSORS AVAILABLE TO
CONTINUE TRACK MODE AFTER TURN.

Alarm number 2515: CONFLICT-NAVI COMPL. TURN /2/9

------------------------------------
THIS IS INSTRUCTION TO CHANGE
STEERING MODE FROM NAVI TO AUTO.
THIS ALARM IS GENERATED IF AUTOPILOT
CANNOT CONTINUE TRACK MODE. TURN IS
COMPLETED WITH PLANNED RADIUS.
CONTINUE AUTO MODE AFTER TURN.

Alarm number 2516: AUTOPILOT: DRIFT LIMIT /4/11

------------------------------------
IF THE AUTOPILOT NEEDS MORE THAN A
SET LIMIT TO COMPENSATE DRIFT(THE
LIMIT IS AVAILABLE IN INSTALLATION
PARAMETERS FOR TRACK MODE (MAX DRIFT
COMPENSATION)). THIS ALARM IS
REPEATED EVERY 5 MINUTES, IF THE
CONDITION CONTINUES.

30-36
 30. Alarms

30.8.5 List of radar overlay related alarms

Alarm number 6100: RADOV NO HEADLINE 6/13
------------------------------------
NO HEADLINE AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND
CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6101: RADOV NO AZIMUTH 6/13

------------------------------------
NO AZIMUTH AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND
CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6102: RADOV NO TRIGGER 6/13

------------------------------------
NO TRIGGER AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND
CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6103: RADOV NO VIDEO /14

------------------------------------
NO VIDEO AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK ADJUSTMENT OF GAIN ON
ON RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS
AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6104: RADOV NO GYRO 6/13

------------------------------------
NO HEADING REFERENCE AVAILABLE FOR
ARPA PROCESSOR WHICH IS SOURCE FOR
RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK ARPA PROCESSOR

Alarm number 6105: RADOV HW FAILURE 6/13

------------------------------------
RADAR OVERLAY HARDWARE FAILURE.
SWITCH POWER ON/OFF. REINSTALL
ECDIS SW.

30-37
30. Alarms

Alarm number 6106: LAN RADAR CONNECT STATE 5/12

------------------------------------
INDICATION WHILE LAN CONNECTION FOR
ARPA FEATURES IS ESTABLISHED BETWEEN
ECDIS PROCESSOR AND ARPA PROCESSOR

Alarm number 6107: LAN RADAR CONNECT FAILURE 5/12

------------------------------------
FAILURE TO ESTABLISH LAN CONNECTION
FOR ARPA FEATURES BETWEEN ECDIS
PROCESSOR AND ARPA PROCESSOR.
CHECK LAN CONNECTORS AND CABLES
POWER ON/OFF AND REINSTALL ECDIS SW.

Alarm number 6108: LAN RADAR DLL FAILURE 5/12

------------------------------------
FAILURE INSIDE ECDIS PROCESSOR
BETWEEN DLL INTERFACE SW AND ECDIS
SOFTWARE. SWITCH POWER ON/OFF AND
REINSTALL ECDIS SW.

Alarm number 6110: RADOV CONNECT STATE 6/13

------------------------------------
INDICATION WHILE LAN CONNECTION FOR
RADAR ECHO DATA IS ESTABLISHED
BETWEEN ECDIS PROCESSOR AND ARPA
PROCESSOR

Alarm number 6111: RADOV NO ECHODATA 7/14

------------------------------------
FAILURE TO RECEIVE RADAR ECHO DATA
FROM ARPA PROCESSOR OVER LAN
CONNECTION CHECK LAN CONNECTORS AND
CABLES. SWITCH POWER ON/OFF AND
REINSTALL ECDIS SW.

30-38
 30. Alarms

Alarm number 6200: RADOV NO HEADLINE 6/13

------------------------------------
NO HEADLINE AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND
CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6201: RADOV NO AZIMUTH 6/13

------------------------------------
NO AZIMUTH AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND
CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6202: RADOV NO TRIGGER 6/13

------------------------------------
NO TRIGGER AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND
CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6203: RADOV NO VIDEO /14

------------------------------------
NO VIDEO AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK ADJUSTMENT OF GAIN ON
ON RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS
AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6204: RADOV NO GYRO 6/13

------------------------------------
NO HEADING REFERENCE AVAILABLE FOR
ARPA PROCESSOR WHICH IS SOURCE FOR
RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK ARPA PROCESSOR

Alarm number 6205: RADOV HW FAILURE 6/13

------------------------------------
RADAR OVERLAY HARDWARE FAILURE.
SWITCH POWER ON/OFF. REINSTALL
ECDIS SW.

30-39
30. Alarms

Alarm number 6206: LAN RADAR CONNECT STATE 5/12

------------------------------------
INDICATION WHILE LAN CONNECTION FOR
ARPA FEATURES IS ESTABLISHED BETWEEN
ECDIS PROCESSOR AND ARPA PROCESSOR

Alarm number 6207: LAN RADAR CONNECT FAILURE 5/12

------------------------------------
FAILURE TO ESTABLISH LAN CONNECTION
FOR ARPA FEATURES BETWEEN ECDIS
PROCESSOR AND ARPA PROCESSOR.
CHECK LAN CONNECTORS AND CABLES
POWER ON/OFF AND REINSTALL ECDIS SW.

Alarm number 6208: LAN RADAR DLL FAILURE 5/12

------------------------------------
FAILURE INSIDE ECDIS PROCESSOR
BETWEEN DLL INTERFACE SW AND ECDIS
SOFTWARE. SWITCH POWER ON/OFF AND
REINSTALL ECDIS SW.

Alarm number 6210: RADOV CONNECT STATE 6/13

------------------------------------
INDICATION WHILE LAN CONNECTION FOR
RADAR ECHO DATA IS ESTAB. BETWEEN
ECDIS PROCESSOR AND ARPA PROCESSOR

Alarm number 6211: RADOV NO ECHODATA 7/14

------------------------------------
FAILURE TO RECEIVE RADAR ECHO DATA
FROM ARPA PROCESSOR OVER LAN
CONNECTION CHECK LAN CONNECTORS AND
CABLES. SWITCH POWER ON/OFF AND
REINSTALL ECDIS SW.

Alarm number 6300: RADOV NO HEADLINE 6/13

------------------------------------
NO HEADLINE AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND
CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

30-40
 30. Alarms

Alarm number 6301: RADOV NO AZIMUTH 6/13

------------------------------------
NO AZIMUTH AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND
CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6302: RADOV NO TRIGGER 6/13

------------------------------------
NO TRIGGER AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND
CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6303: RADOV NO VIDEO /14

------------------------------------
NO VIDEO AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK ADJUSTMENT OF GAIN ON
ON RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS
AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6304: RADOV NO GYRO 6/13

------------------------------------
NO HEADING REFERENCE AVAILABLE FOR
ARPA PROCESSOR WHICH IS SOURCE FOR
RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK ARPA PROCESSOR

Alarm number 6305: RADOV HW FAILURE 6/13

------------------------------------
RADAR OVERLAY HARDWARE FAILURE.
SWITCH POWER ON/OFF. REINSTALL
ECDIS SW.

Alarm number 6306: LAN RADAR CONNECT STATE 5/12

------------------------------------
INDICATION WHILE LAN CONNECTION FOR
ARPA FEATURES IS ESTABLISHED BETWEEN
ECDIS PROCESSOR AND ARPA PROCESSOR

30-41
30. Alarms

Alarm number 6307: LAN RADAR CONNECT FAILURE 5/12

------------------------------------
FAILURE TO ESTABLISH LAN CONNECTION
FOR ARPA FEATURES BETWEEN ECDIS
PROCESSOR AND ARPA PROCESSOR.
CHECK LAN CONNECTORS AND CABLES
POWER ON/OFF AND REINSTALL ECDIS SW.

Alarm number 6308: LAN RADAR DLL FAILURE 5/12

------------------------------------
FAILURE INSIDE ECDIS PROCESSOR
BETWEEN DLL INTERFACE SW AND ECDIS
SOFTWARE. SWITCH POWER ON/OFF AND
REINSTALL ECDIS SW.

Alarm number 6310: RADOV CONNECT STATE 6/13

------------------------------------
INDICATION WHILE LAN CONNECTION FOR
RADAR ECHO DATA IS ESTABLISHED
BETWEEN ECDIS PROCESSOR AND ARPA
PROCESSOR
Alarm number 6311: RADOV NO ECHODATA 7/14
------------------------------------
FAILURE TO RECEIVE RADAR ECHO DATA
FROM ARPA PROCESSOR OVER LAN
CONNECTION CHECK LAN CONNECTORS AND
CABLES. SWITCH POWER ON/OFF AND
REINSTALL ECDIS SW.

Alarm number 6400: RADOV NO HEADLINE 6/13

------------------------------------
NO HEADLINE AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND
CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6401: RADOV NO AZIMUTH 6/13

------------------------------------
NO AZIMUTH AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND
CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

30-42
 30. Alarms

Alarm number 6402: RADOV NO TRIGGER 6/13

------------------------------------
NO TRIGGER AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS AND
CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6403: RADOV NO VIDEO /14

------------------------------------
NO VIDEO AVAILABLE FOR RADAR
OVERLAY. CHECK ADJUSTMENT OF GAIN ON
ON RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK CONNECTORS
AND CABLING FOR RADAR OVERLAY

Alarm number 6404: RADOV NO GYRO 6/13

------------------------------------
NO HEADING REFERENCE AVAILABLE FOR
ARPA PROCESSOR WHICH IS SOURCE FOR
RADAR OVERLAY. CHECK ARPA PROCESSOR

Alarm number 6405: RADOV HW FAILURE 6/13

------------------------------------
RADAR OVERLAY HARDWARE FAILURE.
SWITCH POWER ON/OFF. REINSTALL
ECDIS SW.

Alarm number 6406: LAN RADAR CONNECT STATE 5/12

------------------------------------
INDICATION WHILE LAN CONNECTION FOR
ARPA FEATURES IS ESTABLISHED BETWEEN
ECDIS PROCESSOR AND ARPA PROCESSOR

Alarm number 6407: LAN RADAR CONNECT FAILURE 5/12

------------------------------------
FAILURE TO ESTABLISH LAN CONNECTION
FOR ARPA FEATURES BETWEEN ECDIS
PROCESSOR AND ARPA PROCESSOR.
CHECK LAN CONNECTORS AND CABLES
POWER ON/OFF AND REINSTALL ECDIS SW.

30-43
30. Alarms

Alarm number 6408: LAN RADAR DLL FAILURE 5/12

------------------------------------
FAILURE INSIDE ECDIS PROCESSOR
BETWEEN DLL INTERFACE SW AND ECDIS
SOFTWARE. SWITCH POWER ON/OFF AND
REINSTALL ECDIS SW.

Alarm number 6410: RADOV CONNECT STATE 6/13

------------------------------------
INDICATION WHILE LAN CONNECTION FOR
RADAR ECHO DATA IS ESTABLISHED
BETWEEN ECDIS PROCESSOR AND ARPA
PROCESSOR
Alarm number 6411: RADOV NO ECHODATA 7/14
------------------------------------
FAILURE TO RECEIVE RADAR ECHO DATA
FROM ARPA PROCESSOR OVER LAN
CONNECTION CHECK LAN CONNECTORS AND
CABLES. SWITCH POWER ON/OFF AND
REINSTALL ECDIS SW.

30-44
31. Maintenance and
Troubleshooting
Periodic checks and maintenance are important for proper operation of any electronic system. This chapter contains
maintenance and troubleshooting instructions to be followed to obtain optimum performance and the longest
possible life of the equipment. Before attempting any maintenance or troubleshooting procedure please review the
safety information below. If you cannot restore normal operation after following the troubleshooting procedures do
not attempt to check inside any unit; there are no user-serviceable parts inside. Any repair work should be referred to
a qualified technician.

WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD
Do not open the equipment.

Only qualified personnel

should work inside the
equipment.

31.1 Maintenance
Regular maintenance is essential to good performance. A regular maintenance program should be established and
should at least include the items shown in the table below.
Interval Check point Check and measures Remarks
When needed FURUNO-supplied Dust and dirt may be removed Do not use chemical-based cleaners to
LCD monitor and from these units with a soft clean either unit. They can remove
processor unit cloth. paint and markings.
The LCD will in time
accumulate a layer of dust
which can dim the picture.
Wipe the LCD carefully to
prevent scratching, using tissue
paper and an LCD cleaner. To
remove stubborn dirt, use an
LCD cleaner, wiping slowly
with tissue paper so as to
dissolve the dirt. Change paper
frequently so the dirt will not
scratch the LCD.
Filter on processor Clean the filter at the rear of the
unit processor unit if it becomes
dusty.
3 to 6 months Cabling Check that all cabling is firmly
connected and is not damaged.

31-1
31. Maintenance and Troubleshooting

31.2 Replacing the Fuse

The 5A fuse located at the back of the processor unit protects the system from overcurrent and internal fault. If the
power cannot be turned on, check if the fuse has blown. If it has blown, find out the cause before replacing the fuse.
If it blows again after replacement, contact your dealer for advice.

Name Type Code No.

Fuse (5A) FGB0-A 5A AC125V 000-549-064

WARNING
Use the proper fuse.

Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage

to the equipment or cause fire.
Fuse (5A)

31.3 Replacing the Battery

The PCI-951 circuit board in the processor unit contains a lithium battery which preserves data when the power is
turned off. When the voltage of the battery is low the time is wrong, all default settings are restored, etc. When this
occurs, have the battery replaced by a qualified technician, at your earliest convenience.

31-2
 31. Maintenance and Troubleshooting

31.4 Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting table below provides common faults and the remedy with which to restore normal operation. If
you cannot restore normal operation do not check inside the equipment - there are no user-serviceable parts inside.

Troubleshooting

If… Then… Remedy

the power cannot be turned on • power connector may have • Check connector.
loosened.
• ship’s mains is off. • Check ship’s mains.
• fuse has blown. • Replace fuse.
nothing appears on the display • brilliance is too low. • Adjust brilliance.

ECDIS program doesn’t start. “No • dongle connected to printer port • Check connection of dongle
connection to dongle. Have nice may have loosened.
day” message appears
monitored route is not displayed • route has not been selected. • Select route as monitored.
• monitor route has not been • Open Route page of Chart Display
selected visible top on chart. dialog box and select Monitor
route parts to Std or Other.
planned route is not displayed • route has not been selected. • Select route as planned.
• planned route has not been • Open Route page of Chart Display
selected visible top on chart. dialog box and select planned
route parts to Std or Other.
symbol of user chart cannot be • “Enable changes” is not selected. • Select “Enable changes” in User
erased Chart dialog box.
• symbols may be superimposed by • Click Delete button on Symbol
one another. page several times.
position cannot be found • sensors are not selected in Sensor • Check sensor selections in Sensors
dialog box. dialog box.
• LAN adapter cable may have • Connect LAN adapter cable.
loosened.
(Continued on next page)

31-3
31. Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting (continued from previous page)

If… Then… Remedy
ARCS chart cannot be displayed • ARCS display mode is not • Activate ARCS charts display
activated. mode: Open Chart menu and select
Activate ARCS Charts from the
menu.
• license has expired. • Renew ARCS license.
S57 chart cannot be displayed • S57 chart display mode is not • Activate S57 charts display mode:
activated. Open Chart menu and select
Activate S57 Charts from the
menu..
cannot convert CMAP charts • if ECDIS software has been • Define correct subscription of
“permit missing” updated then C-MAP permit CMAP charts again by selecting
information has been lost. correct zones or areas.
past track is not displayed • past track is not selected visible. • Open Tracking page of Chart
Display dialog box and select Past
track of System to either Std or
Oth.
monitored user chart is not displayed • user chart is not selected visible. • Open Mariner page of Chart
on ECDIS display Display dialog box and select User
Chart’s parts to either Std or Oth.
• user chart display is selected for • Unselect user chart in planning
planning mode. mode.
user chart is not displayed on radar • user chart is not selected in • Select user chart in monitoring
display monitoring mode. mode.
• ECDIS has failed to post process • Close User Chart dialog box to
chart for radar. activate post processing for user
• LAN Adapter cable may have chart.
loosened. • Connect LAN adapter cable.

31-4
 31. Maintenance and Troubleshooting

31.5 Keyboard Test

In addition to the color calibration tests mentioned in Chapter 26, the ECDIS provides a keyboard test which the
operator may use to check keyboard of the RCU-018. (Other diagnostic tests are also provided, on the self test
menu, however these are intended for service technicians. For further details, see the service manual.)

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area, and then push the left mouse
button.

2. Choose Initial Settings and push the left mouse button.

3. Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box to show the Initial Settings menu.

4. Choose Selftest and then push the left mouse button. You are asked if it is OK to leave ECDIS and start the self
test.

5. Click the OK button to show the self test menu. As the message on the screen says move the cursor leftward and
upward and then push the left mouse button.

31-5
31. Maintenance and Troubleshooting

6. Click the Control Head button to show the control head checking screen.

7. Push each key, mouse button and thumbwheel. The perimeter of the on-screen key, button or thumbwheel
blackens if the pushed item is functioning normally. (For the Control Unit RCU-015, push the hot keys; their on-
screen location is in the Control Head window.)

8. Operate radar-related controls (EBL and VRM rotary encoders, A/C RAIN, A/C SEA and GAIN). The figure in
the corresponding on-screen location becomes larger or smaller with control operation.

9. Operate the trackball. The trackball’s X and Y location is shown in the X and Y boxes.

10. Spin the thumbwheel. Confirm that the figure in the box above the thumbwheel’s on-screen location becomes
larger or smaller with thumbwheel operation.

11. Click the ALARM BUZZER ON button. Confirm that the buzzer sounds. Click the button again to silence the
buzzer.

12. Click the SYSTEM FAILURE OFF button. Thirty seconds after the button is clicked the buzzer sounds and
the SYSTEM FAILURE key flashes. Click the button again to stop the flashing and silence the buzzer.

13. Click the Exit Test button to quit the test.

31.6 Consumable Parts

The table below lists all the consumable parts in the processor unit. Replace these parts before their expected
expiration.

Consumable parts
Part Type Code No. Expected life
Processor cooler assy. 117492 000-151-567 7 years
Fan AD0812LB-A73GL 000-151-580 7 years
Lithium battery (on CPU board) CR2032 000-159-662-10 3 years
Power supply UPF250-AA-B 000-151-575 10 years
Hard disk MHV2040AC 000-159-044-10 20,000 hours

31-6
Appendix 1: Glossary of Terms
APPROACHING POINT (AP)

A user-chosen point where a turning alarm is initiated.

AUTOMATIC RADAR PLOTTING AID (ARPA)

A system wherein radar targets are automatically acquired, tracked and collision situations computer assessed and
warning given.

CHANNEL LIMIT (CHL)

During route planning a channel limit is defined for each leg. This limit can also be the border line of the chart
shown on the radar display. For further details, see Figure 1 on page 30-4.

COURSE

Course is the horizontal direction in which a craft is steered or intended to be steered, expressed as angular distance
from north, usually from 000º at north, clockwise through 360º. Strictly, course applies to direction through the
water, not the direction intended to be made good over the ground.

COURSE OVER GROUND (COG)

The direction of the path over ground actually followed by a craft. For more information, see Figure 1 on page AP-
4.

CLOSEST POINT OF APPROACH (CPA)

The Closest Point of Approach of another ship to your ship. A user can set CPA limit.

DATUM

A set of parameters specifying the reference surface or the reference co-ordinate systems used for geodetic control
in the calculation of co-ordinates of points on the earth. Commonly, datum is defined as horizontal and vertical
datum separately.

ELECTRONIC CHART DISPLAY AND INFORMATION SYSTEM (ECDIS)

The navigation information system which is considered equivalent to the nautical paper chart, displaying chosen
information from the chart data Base (see ENC) integrated with data from positional, and optionally other sensors.
By displaying chart contents and other chart related and navigational information, ECDIS assists the mariner in
route planning and, with on-line position indication, in route monitoring.

AP-1
Appendix 1: Glossary of Terms

ELECTRONIC NAVIGATIONAL CHART (ENC)

The database held on the ship for use with ECDIS. The ENC is equivalent to new editions of paper charts, and may
contain additional supplementary nautical information in addition to that contained in the paper chart.

FORWARDING DISTANCE (F)

The distance which the ship moves straight after a rudder command. For further details, see Figure 2 on page AP-4.

“FROM WP”

The last passed waypoint. For further details, see Figure 1 on page AP-4.

HEADING (HDG)

The horizontal direction in which the longitudinal axis of a ship actually points or heads at any instant, expressed as
angular units from a reference direction, usually from 000º at the reference direction, clockwise through 360º (true,
magnetic or compass heading). For further details, see Figure 1 on page AP-4.

GREAT CIRCLE

The intersection of the surface of a sphere and a plane through its center.

MAGNETIC VARIATION

The angle between the magnetic and geographic meridians at any place, expressed in degrees and minutes east or
west to indicate the direction of magnetic north from true north.

“NEXT WP”

The waypoint after “TO WP”.

OFF TRACK

Cross-track error (XTE) distance from intended track. For more information, see Figure 1 on page AP-4.

PLAN

The direction “From WP” to “To WP”, a constant course on a rhumb line track or a varying course on a Great Circle
track. For further details, see Figure 1 on page AP-4.

AP-2
 Appendix 1: Glossary of Terms

POSITION

The display indicates which position-fixing instruments are giving information for the position calculation.

RENC

Regional Electronic Nautical Chart center. RENC is defined by IMO and IHO as the source of SOLAS compliant
Electronic Nautical Charts (ENC), which use S57ed3 coding. An example of such an RENC is the PRIMAR in
Stavanger, Norway.

RANGE RING

A range ring is a circle with a defined radius located with its center at the position of the own ship.

RHUMB LINE

A line on the surface of the earth making the same oblique angle with all meridians. A rhumb line is a straight line
on a rhumb (or Mercator) projection.

ROUTE

The system’s internal algorithm calculates course to eliminate off track. For further details, see Figure 1 on page
AP-4.

SYSTEM ENC (SENC)

The manufacturer’s own storage formats or data structure for the database.

SPEED OVER GROUND (SOG)

The speed of a craft along the actual path of travel over the ground. For further details, see Figure 1 on page AP-4.

“TO WP”

The waypoint which the ship is approaching. For further details, see Figure 1 on page AP-4.

VARIABLE RANGE MARKER (VRM)

The VRM is a range ring, the radius of which is continuously adjustable.

WAYPOINT (WP)

The crossing point between two legs in a route.

WHEEL OVER POINT (WOP)

The point where the rudder command is given. For further details, see Figure 2 on page AP-4.

AP-3
Appendix 1: Glossary of Terms

WORLD GEODETIC SYSTEM (WGS)

A consistent set of parameters describing the size and shape of the earth, the positions of a network of points with
respect to the center of mass of the Earth, transformations from major geodetic datums, and the potential of the
Earth.

PLAN=
Center line of TO WP
monitored route

ROUTE=
Calculated course
to minimize off track
FROM WP

OFF TRACK COG, SOG=

Course Over Ground
Speed Over Ground
Set and Drift
HDG=Heading

Figure 1

Approach Wheel Over Point

Point WOP
Waypoint
WP

forwarding
distance = f
WP approach end of turn
alarm time
radius
next course

Figure 2

AP-4
Appendix 2: IHO ECDIS Chart 1

A.2.1 IHO ECDIS Chart 1

International Hydrographic Organization (IHO) has published a set of charts where you can find examples of
symbology used in S57 charts. You can study them by using the “Info/Help” feature and by switching different
layers ON and OFF in the Chart Display dialog box. Everything is visible if you set all layers for “Standard” or
“Other” in the Other 1 and Other 2 pages in the Chart Display dialog box.

To open the IHO ECDIS Chart 1 on the display, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right mouse
button.

2. Roll the wheel to choose ECDIS Chart 1 from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Choose Overview from the menu and then click the left mouse button.

4. Spin the thumbwheel to choose desired item and then push the thumbwheel.

See the next several pages for the display associated with each dialog box item.

AP-5
Appendix 2: IHO ECDIS Chart 1

Information about the chart features

Shore features, Ports

AP-6
 Appendix 2: IHO ECDIS Chart 1

Depths, currents

Seabed, obstructions, pipelines

AP-7
Appendix 2: IHO ECDIS Chart 1

Routes

Special areas

AP-8
 Appendix 2: IHO ECDIS Chart 1

Lights, radars, services, small crafts

Buoys, beacons

AP-9
Appendix 2: IHO ECDIS Chart 1

Mariners symbols

Color differentiation diagram

AP-10
Appendix 3: Interpreting S57 Charts

A3.1 Interpreting S57 Charts

The following examples gives you a short introduction to the features of S57 charts.

Paper chart or simplified symbols

Two color or multi-color depth

AP-11
Appendix 3: Interpreting S57 Charts

Plain or symbolized boundaries

Limited or full light sectors

AP-12
 Appendix 3: Interpreting S57 Charts

Shallow, safety and deep contours

Shallow = 2m, Safety = 5m and Deep = 10m Shallow = 5m, Safety = 10m and Deep = 20m

Safety depth = 6m Safety depth = 10m

AP-13
Appendix 3: Interpreting S57 Charts

Shallow pattern

Items on Standard page of Chart Display dialog box

Unknown object or presentation

Chart data coverage

AP-14
 Appendix 3: Interpreting S57 Charts

Land features

Water and seabed features

Traffic routes

AP-15
Appendix 3: Interpreting S57 Charts

Cautionary areas

Information areas

Buoys and beacons

Lights

AP-16
 Appendix 3: Interpreting S57 Charts

Fog signals

Radars

Services

AP-17
Appendix 3: Interpreting S57 Charts

Items on Other page in Chart Display dialog box

Information about chart data

Land features

Soundings

AP-18
 Appendix 3: Interpreting S57 Charts

Depth contours, current magnetic

Seabed and obstructions

Services and small craft facilities

AP-19
Appendix 3: Interpreting S57 Charts

Special areas

Additional information available

Important text

AP-20
 Appendix 3: Interpreting S57 Charts

Text on Other page in Chart Display dialog box

Names for position reporting

Light descriptions

Nature of seabed

AP-21
Appendix 3: Interpreting S57 Charts

Geographic names, etc.

Swept depths, magnetics

Berth and anchorage numbers

AP-22
Appendix 4:
C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts
A4.1 C-MAP Cartographic Service
Your ECDIS system has the capability of using and displaying the latest CMAP CM-93/3 worldwide vector chart
database. These charts are fully compliant with the latest IHO S-57 3.1 specifications.

In order to prepare the system for use with the C-MAP CM-93/3 database, there are a number of things that must be
done.

A4.1.1 Registration of the system at C-MAP Norway

Your system that has the capability to use the CM-93/3 database. To do so an Aladdin eToken (supplied by C-MAP)
must be connected to the system (if the system has and supports USB). The eToken provides the system with a
unique System ID that enables C-MAP to issue correct licenses. The actual System ID can be found on the eToken
itself, on the back of the installation CD box or on a sticker placed on the equipment. This ID must be provided on
all chart orders, either by email (license@C-MAP.no) or by fax +4751 464701

A4.1.2 Ordering charts

A chart order may be sent together with system registration as described above. It is essential that the required
information be sent to C-MAP when ordering charts for a system. C-MAP issues order forms specifying the
information that is required, and contains vital information that will allows C-MAP to monitor and maintain your
licenses throughout the lifetime of the system. Charts can be ordered by Zone, Area or Cell and these can be seen on
our Internet pages at www.C-MAP.no or by downloading the Chart Product Catalogue also available on the web
site. Price quotations can be obtained via your chart dealer or direct from your local C-MAP office. Once the license
order has been prepared it should be emailed to license@C-MAP.no or faxed to C-MAP Norway AS (+47 51
464701).

A4.1.3 Applying licenses

Once the order has been received at C-MAP, a license will be generated and transmitted back to the user. This may
be in the form of a single alphanumerical string (16 characters), or in the form of a file called PASSWORD.USR.
Once this license has been received it should be input using the License Administrator software designed and
supplied by the ECDIS/ECS manufacturer. There are two types of licenses, purchase and subscription. Purchase
licenses are valid indefinitely while subscription licenses need to be renewed every 12 months from the start of the
subscription. Failure to renew a subscription will result in the charts becoming unavailable.

A4.1.4 Troubleshooting
If you are having problems installing your software or charts please check the following before contacting C-MAP:
That you have registered the WORLD database in the GDBADMIN application.
That the registered WORLD database is available.
That you have correctly typed the license string.
Contact Information: For information or help please call you're nearest C-MAP Office (details can be found
on the reverse side of the C-MAP chart CO box) or contact C-MAP Norway:
C-MAP Norway AS Post Box 212 Hovlandsveien 52 4379 Egersund Norway
Tel. +4751464700 Fax.+4751464701
Email: technical@C-MAP.no

AP-23
Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

A4.2 Chart Subscription Service

A4.2.1 C-MAP service
There are three different services available through C-MAP Cartographic service which can be used in FURUNO
ECDIS FEA-2x07. Two of them are using CM-93/3 format. These data sets contain two databases:

Global Chart Database, which is available on CM93/3 professional CD-ROM. This database contains chart
data originally produced both by C-MAP and Hydrographic Office.

CM-ENC, Official Electronic Navigational Charts distributed by C-MAP on DVD.

Note: If you change CD ROM service to DVD service, you need to also have a new license for the DVD service.
Contact your chart agent or C-MAP for details.

Additionally, the previous CM-93/2 Global Chart Database is compatible for use with the FEA-2x07.

When using any C-MAP chart, the indication “Non ENC Data” appears at the upper right corner on the ECDIS
display.

AP-24
 Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

A4.2.2 RENC service

RENC service produced by Primar or IC-ENC is considered to legally fulfil SOLAS requirements as primary aid of
navigation. National Hydrographic Organization (NHO) may have arranged similar subscription service as RENC
on its own waters.

Chart data distributed through the service is S57 ed.3.0 or ed. 3.1 coded ENC.

When using charts loaded and updated using RENC or NHO service, there will be no indications at the upper right
corner on the ECDIS display.

AP-25
Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

A4.3 CM93/3 Chart Display

A4.3.1 Introduction
CM93/3 charts are vector charts displayed together with ENC (S57) and CM93/2 charts. These charts have the
priority order shown below.

1. ENC

2. CM93/3

3. CM93/2

If identical navigational purpose charts exist for a given area, priority is as shown above. Areas where ENC is not
available and CM93/3 and CM93/2 are available, CM 93/3 is displayed. Areas where ENC and CM93/3 are not
available, CM93/2 is displayed.

The chart legend, which provides various data about the chart currently displayed, can be toggled on and off by
placing the cursor in the sidebar, clicking the right mouse button, choosing Chart Legend from the menu and then
pushing the thumbwheel.

This system is capable of showing more than one S57 chart at a time. This feature is called the multi-chart display.
If one S57 chart does not cover the whole display, the system will open more S57 chart cells for display, if
appropriate cells for the displayed area are available. The chart legend shows information about S57 charts
displayed on the electronic chart display area. The information is displayed with reference to own ship position if
automatic TM reset is active, or with reference to the current position of the cursor if automatic TM Reset is OFF.

Cell name:

Name of chart.

Navigational purpose:

S57 charts are compiled for a variety of navigational purposes.

The navigational purpose, for which an individual S57 chart
has been compiled by a Hydrographic Office, is indicated in
this field. Alternatives are Overview, General, Coastal,
Approach, Harbour and Berthing.

Issue date:

Issue date of the Base cell of the chart.

Edition number:

Edition number of the chart.

Last displayed update:

Number of last update, which is visible on the chart screen.

Update issue date:

Date to which the last update, which is visible on the chart

screen, is effective.

Last update appl. date:

Issue date of last update, which is visible on the chart screen.

Projection:

Projection of the chart. The projection is always Mercator.

AP-26
 Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

Horizontal datum:

Horizontal datum of the chart data as published by the chart producer. By definition this must be WGS 84.

Vertical datum:

Vertical datum of the chart.

Sounding datum:

Datum used for soundings.

Quality of data:

Quantitative estimate of the accuracy of chart features, given by the chart producer.

Magnetic var.:

Amount of magnetic variation. A positive value indicates a change in an easterly direction and a negative value
indicates a change in a westerly direction.

Depth:

Unit of measurement for depth.

Height:

Unit of measurement for height above sea level (for example, clearance height).

A4.3.2 Choosing CM93/3 chart material to use

To activate S57 chart material onto the display, do the following:

1. Place the cursor just above the chart scale indication in the information area.

2. Activate S57 Chart appears in the mouse functions area; push the left mouse button.

A4.3.3 Choosing charts for viewing

Choosing a chart from a catalogue

To choose a chart for viewing from a catalogue, do the following:

1. Choose Chart Catalogue from the Chart menu.

2. From the Chart Catalogue dialog box, use the cursor to choose desired chart.

3. Click the Open button.

Browsing your charts

You may view S57 charts using different positions and different scales. The basic tools for browsing charts are
Range -, Range+, Set Chart Center, ShipOffcenter and TM Reset.

Set Chart Center allows you to look ahead from a place other than own ship’s current position. Spin the
thumbwheel to display Set Chart Center/Info/Activate Scroll in the mouse functions area and then push the left
mouse button. The dialog box shown below appears. Turn off automatic true motion reset by displaying and clicking
TM Reset (in the mouse functions area). When true motion reset is off, the indication “Ship out of dsp” appears in
the information area.

AP-27
Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

Use the thumbwheel to set the latitude and longitude

position for chart center and then click the Set Center
button.

To restore own ship’s position to the screen center, display TM Reset/Info/ShipOffcenter in the mouse functions
area and then push the left mouse button.

Range - and Range+ change the chart scale. If true motion reset is active, ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT keep the
relative position of the own ship with respect to the display. If true motion reset is on, ZOOM IN and ZOOM OUT
keep the relative position pointed by the cursor with respect to the display.

The system automatically chooses next larger or smaller scale. If a chart with larger compilation scale available at
your current viewing position, the message “Larger Scale Data Exists” appears.

Looking for charts around own ship

You can use either true motion or relative motion. In the true motion mode, own ship moves until it reaches the true
motion reset borderline, where it jumps back to an opposite position on the screen based on ship’s course. In the
relative motion mode, own ship stays in a fixed position, while the chart moves on screen.

If, in the true motion mode, you reset own position with TM Reset, own ship will immediately jump to the true
motion reset position.

If, in the true motion mode, you use ShipOffcenter, your ship will go to that position on screen and continue true
motion movement from that position. When it reaches the true motion reset borderline, it will automatically jump to
the true motion reset position.

If, in the relative motion mode, you reset own position with TM Reset, your ship will immediately jump to the true
motion reset position and use that position as fixed position to stay on screen.

If you use relative motion, you can choose a new fixed position for your ship by using ShipOffcenter.

Use Range - and Range+ to choose desired chart scale.

AP-28
 Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

A4.3.4 Chart catalogue of C-MAP charts

You can use the chart catalogue to graphically view content of loaded C-MAP database(s) into ECDIS.

1. Open the Chart menu and select Catalogue.

2. Select “Source of Chart Catalogue” as C-MAP. Use Navigation purpose selection to view desired charts.

3. Charts for which you possess a valid license are marked in green. Charts for which you have no license or the
license has expired are shown as red border lines.

1. Source of Chart Catalogue

• CD ROM: Display charts available in a named “CD ROM”.
• RENC: Display charts available from an RENC.
• SENC: Display charts stored in your hard disk in SENC format.
• C-MAP: Display charts of CM93 ed. 3 chart database stored on ECDIS.
2. View Filters
• Name: Display also cell names in graphical coverage display.
• Permit: Display only charts for which you have permit.
• RENC Cancelled Charts: Display charts which are cancelled in an RENC.
• Group: Display charts which are member of selected group.
• Navigation purpose: Display charts for chosen navigation purpose (overview, general, coastal, approach,
harbour, berthing).
3. Selected Chart

• Cell: Name of the chart

• Open: Opens selected chart to ECDIS display.

4. The chart limit boxes are color-coded as follows:

Green You can view chart on ECDIS.

Red You cannot view chart on ECDIS, because license is missing or license has expired for the chart

AP-29
Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

A4.4 S57 Managing C-MAP charts

A4.4.1 Licensing system used by the C-MAP
The licensing system used with CM-93/3 professional charts is based on the serial number of eToken.

The eToken is connected to USB port on the ECDIS and it identifies ECDIS for CM-93/3 professional charts. It
must be connected to ECDIS always when using CM-93/3 professional charts.

The following information is needed to apply for subscription of CM-93/3 professional charts:

• Company Name:

• User Name:

• Dongle ID (available on tag of eToken):

• Reason for License (sale, development, demo)

• Coverage required (World, Zone x, Area x, cell x)

• Duration of license (3 month or 1 year)

• Database version (available on CD ROM label):

Based on this information, C-MAP is able to process a code which is delivered onboard as a text string or a file
called “password.usr”.

A4.4.2 Introduction
Below are the steps necessary for ordering CM-93/3 professional charts.

1. Find eToken ID. See “System ID for C-MAP”.

2. Define your subscription and deliver this information to your chart agent together with System ID information.

3. You will receive C-MAP database(s) on CD-ROM or DVD. Load Database(s) into ECDIS. See “Load of
CM93/3 database to ECDIS”.

4. You will receive License(s) for C-MAP database(s) either in file or character string. See “License of CM93/3”.

A4.4.3 System ID for C-MAP

Each ECDIS has individual eToken connected to USB. Find eToken ID in the following sequence:
Menu → Chart Menu → C-MAP Ed3 → Licenses

It is indicated as System ID.

AP-30
 Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

A4.5 CM93/3 Database

There are three different CM93/3 Databases which can be loaded into ECDIS:

• CM93/3 Professional, available on CD-ROM

• CM93/3 Professional +, available on DVD

• CM-ENC, available on DVD

A4.5.1 Load of CM93/3 database to ECDIS

Charts are available on CM93/3 professional CD ROM. To load them from CD to ECDIS, proceed as follows:

1. Menu → Chart Menu → C-MAP Ed3 → Load and register for use
Following dialog box appears, insert CD ROM.

2. Click the Copy database to HD button and select drive M:\

3. Click the OK button. If there is no folder available, the following dialog box appears.

AP-31
 Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

4. Click the Yes button. ECDIS will copy database.

5. After successful loading the following dialog box appears

6. Click the OK button. Close this window by clicking X in upper right corner.

A4.5.2 Use of multiple databases

It is possible to use CM93/3 Professional, CM93/3 Professional + and CM-ENC databases at the same time at the
same workstation. You can load databases to ECDIS, as introduced in “Load of CM93/3 database to ECDIS”.

By selecting one of databases as a default, you select one database as lowest priority database to be displayed areas
where no other CM93/3 databases are available.

Above is an example where CM-ENC and CM93/3 Professional databases are loaded into ECDIS.

AP-32
 Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

A4.6 License of CM93/3

To view charts of C-MAP database(s), you need to load the license for the database. For each database (CM93/3
Professional, CM93/3 Professional + and CM-ENC) C-MAP generates own license.

A4.6.1 Add license from file

To get access to CM93/3 professional chart database, you have to enter a code which is received from C-MAP
directly or through Chart agent. The code defines coverage of charts you can display on ECDIS.

To enter code proceed as follows:

1. Menu -> Chart Menu -> C-MAP Ed3 -> Licenses.

2. Click “Add Licenses from file”.

3. Select desired drive (A:\).

AP-33
Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

4. Click the OK button. Then, you have to confirm loading of new code.

5. Click the Yes button. Code will be read.

6. Successful loading is indicated with following dialog box.

7. Click the Close button.

If you will have dialog box shown above, it indicates that there is mismatch between chart database and
password.usr. Check that you have password.usr which is delivered to you to be used together with CM-93/3
professional CD-ROM.

8. You can see your licenses listed in the License Adm dialog box.

License for Zone 0 has been loaded in this system.

9. Click X to close dialog box.

AP-34
 Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

A4.6.2 Add license manually

If you receive license as a “License string,” you can enter this string manually into ECDIS, using the service
keyboard. To connect the keyboard, turn off the power, open the lid on the processor unit, connect the keyboard to
the location shown below and then turn the power on again.

KEYBOARD
connector

1. Menu -> Chart Menu -> C-MAP Ed3 -> Licenses.

2. From the service keyboard, enter string received from C-MAP in the “License string” field and then click the
Add License button.

3. Click the License list button to see entered licenses.

4. Close the “LicenseAdm” dialog box by clicking the X sign in upper right corner.

5. Turn off the power, disconnect the service keyboard, and then turn on the power again.

AP-35
Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

A4.6.3 Renewal of license

You will receive a notice 2 months prior to expiration of the licenses. This notice is repeated on a regular basis until
the expiration date is reached. You need to renew license to view chart database after the expiration date.

When warning of license(s) expiration appears, contact your chart agent to renew your C-MAP license(s).

After expiration, charts of expired license(s) are displayed for a short period. The following Permanent Warning
dialog box is displayed.

AP-36
 Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

A4.7 How to Keep Charts up to date

During period of subscription, you will receive CM-93/3 Professional CD ROM three times. To keep up-to-date
between CD issuing periods, you can use Real Time Updating service.

ECDIS users cannot connect to the internet directly from the ECDIS. You create an update order file from the
ECDIS and send this by email directly to updates@C-MAP.no. This automatic email server will process the update
request, prepare the updates and automatically send them. The end user can then copy these updates to a floppy disk,
USB memory stick or CD-ROM and apply them to the ECDIS.

A4.7.1 Creating update order file

You can create an update order file as follows:

1. Open the Chart menu and select C-MAP Ed 3 from the menu. Select Update Charts in C-MAP Ed 3 menu.

AP-37
Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

2. Select Zones (or Areas) to be updated.

3. Click the Create button and then select the drive where to save the Chart Update Order file.

4. When Chart Update Order file is generated and saved to destination, the following dialog box appears:

5. Click the OK button. Update order file to address updates@C-MAP.no

6. You will receive updates for your request automatically.

AP-38
 Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

A4.7.2 Loading chart updates from the file

When you have received an update file via e-mail, then you can load it to ECDIS.

1. Open the Chart menu and select C-MAP Ed 3 in the menu. Select Update Charts in C-MAP Ed 3 menu and
Apply Updates from the e-mail in Update charts menu.

2. In C-MAP RTU Update dialog box, click the Apply Chart Update from Files button.

AP-39
Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

3. In C-MAP Chart Update dialog box, select desired drive and click the Apply Updates button.

4. When completed, the following dialog box appears. Click the OK button.

AP-40
 Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

A4.7.3 Review of chart updates

You can see a list of changes for every updated chart as follows:

1. Open the Chart menu and select C-MAP Ed 3 in the menu. Select Update Charts in C-MAP Ed 3 menu and
Apply Updates from e-mail in Update charts menu

2. Review updates in text mode and click the Review updates button.

AP-41
Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

3. Select from the list shown below.

4. Select a chart from the list.

5. Click the X button.

6. In RTU dialog box, click the X button.

AP-42
 Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

A4.8 Removing CM93/3 Charts

You can remove CM93/3 charts from ECDIS using Unregister. This will remove license and entire database from
ECDIS.

1. Open the Chart menu and select C-MAP Ed 3 from the menu. Select Load and register for use from the C-MAP Ed
3 menu.

2. The CM-93/3 Database Administrator dialog box appears. Select desired database.

3. Confirm your action by clicking the OK button.

4. Close CM-93/3 Database Administrator dialog box by clicking X sign in upper right corner.

AP-43
Appendix 4: C-MAP CM-93/3 Charts

This page intentionally left blank.

AP-44
Appendix 5:
C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

A5.1 C-MAP Charts

A5.1.1 Introduction
This electronic chart system is also compatible with C-MAP vector chart format CM-93 charts, available from C-
MAP Norway A/S. This material is used like Hydrographic Offices S57ed3 charts, but it doesn't have ENC status as
defined by IMO, IHO and IEC and thus it cannot be used to replace paper charts.

CM-93 format is encrypted to prevent unauthorised use, therefore the operator needs an authorisation code to view
any CM-93 chart. This authorisation code is entered manually.

Before any CM-93 chart can be used in the ECDIS, it is loaded into your hard disk and converted into the system’s
own internal format (SENC). CM-93 charts can be updated only by loading a newer complete set of CM-93 charts.
CM-93 chart material is stored into two CD ROMs.

For further details on CM-93 charts, see the chapter on vector chart material in this manual.

Note: SENC conversion must be done in the single workstation mode. For how to switch from multi-mode to single
mode, see the procedure on page 18-2. Further, turn the radar overlay off, referring to page 22-2.

A5.1.2 S57 chart legend with C-MAP charts

An example of chart legend with C-MAP chart

AP-45
Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

A5.2 Managing C-MAP charts

A5.2.1 Licensing system used by the C-MAP
The licensing system used with C-MAP is based on serial numbered CD ROMs and authorisation codes received
from C-MAP Norway A/S. You choose either required C-MAP areas or zones and your electronic chart system
generates a user code based on your selection, the serial number of the serial numbered C-MAP CD ROM and the
hardware identifier of your electronic chart system. You send the user code to C-MAP Norway A/S and they send to
you an authorisation code. You enter the received authorisation code into the system and then you can load and
convert the CM-93 charts into your system.

A5.2.2 Getting started with C-MAP charts

1. Choose automatic conversion into the SENC and setting of Display and Approve update dates automatically. See
paragraph A5.2.9 “Converting into SENC and setting display date automatically”.

2. Define your subscription of C-MAP charts. See paragraph A5.2.4 “Defining subscription of C-MAP charts”.

3. Load C-MAP charts by CD ROM catalogue. See paragraph A5.2.5 “Loading C-MAP charts from a CD ROM
into the system”.

A5.2.3 Keeping C-MAP charts up to date

At regular intervals C-MAP will reissue its charts to keep them up-to-date. There are neither edition number nor
update number in C-MAP charts, so the system recognises changed charts using issue date of the chart.

The procedure for loading the reissue is the same as loading of the C-MAP charts for the first time. If loaded chart is
already in the hard disk with older issue date, the system loads chosen newer chart automatically. Other possible
messages when loading C-MAP charts are explained in the paragraph A5.2.5 “Loading C-MAP charts from a CD
ROM into the system”.

If you get a new release of a C-MAP CD ROM, do the following:

1. On the Chart menu, turn off automatic SENC conversion and turn on Automatic Display Until.

2. Load C-MAP charts by CD ROM catalogue. See paragraph A5.2.5 “Loading C-MAP charts from a CD ROM
into the system”.

AP-46
 Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

A5.2.4 Defining subscription of C-MAP charts

Before you can be an authorized user of C-MAP charts you must do the following:

1. Purchase CD ROM(s) of C-MAP from your chart agent.

2. Load serial number of C-MAP into the ECDIS.

3. Choose charts which you want to use in the ECDIS, by zones or areas.

4. Generate user code. This code is used to identify your chart folio for the producer of C-MAP.

5. Send user code to your chart agent.

Based on user code information, the producer of C-MAP charts is able to generate permission for the charts you
have chosen. You will receive an authorization code from the producer of C-MAP charts.

After receiving an authorization code, do the following:

1. Enter authorization code into the ECDIS.

2. Use the function “Load by CD ROM catalogue” to choose which chart to load.

3. Build a group of required C-MAP charts.

4. Load C-MAP charts using the function “View loaded CD ROM catalogue”.

AP-47
Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

Loading serial number of CD ROM

Each CD ROM has an individual serial number which is used to identify the user of C-MAP charts. In order to load
the serial number into the ECDIS, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions

area and then push the right mouse button.

2. Choose Chart Permits from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Click the Non-HO button to show the following window..

4. In the NON-HO User/Auth Code window, click the Load CD Ser no. button.

5. Insert your C-MAP CD ROM in the CD ROM-drive and choose desired drive.

6. The CD ROM serial number is shown in SerNo field.

AP-48
 Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

Defining subscription by zones

The contents of the CD ROM are divided into nine zones (1/0 - 9/0) and each zone has been divided in various
numbers of areas (1/1 - 1/16…9/1 - 9/2). A various number of charts are included into each area. You can specify
the charts you want to have in your chart folio either by zones or by areas.

To define subscription by zones, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right
mouse button.

2. Choose Chart Permits from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Click the Non-HO button to show the following window.

4. Click the Zones radio button.

5. Highlight desired zones in the Not Selected box and then click << button to move them into the Selected list box.

6. To create user code for chosen zones, click the Create User Code button. The ECDIS generates a user code
which is sent to the producer of the C-MAP charts.

User / Auth Code

Load CD Ser No XXXX

Create user Code

YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

Enter Auth Code

0000000000000000

7. The user code is shown in the Create User Code field.

AP-49
Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

Defining subscription by areas

The contents of a CD ROM are divided into nine zones (1/0 - 9/0) and each zones has divided various number of
areas (1/1 - 1/16 … 9/1 - 9/2). The various number of charts are included by Area. You can define a chart you would
like to have in your chart folio either by zones or by areas.

To define subscription by areas, do the following:

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions

area and then push the right mouse button.

2. Choose Chart Permits from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Click the Non-HO button to show the following window.

4. Click the Areas radio button.

5. Highlight desired zones in the Not Selected box and then click << button to move them into the Selected list box.

6. To create user code for chosen zones, click the Create User Code button. The ECDIS generates a user code
which is sent to the producer of the C-MAP charts.

7. The user code is shown in the Create User Code field.

AP-50
 Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

Entering authorisation code

An authorisation code allows you to define your subscription to C-MAP. Based on your user code you receive an
authorisation code from C-MAP. You have to enter this string into the ECDIS, following the procedure below.

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions

area and then push the right mouse button.

2. Choose Chart Permits from the menu and then push the thumbwheel.

3. Click the Non-HO button to show the following window.

4. Click the Enter Auth Code button.

5. Enter the string you received from C-MAP.

6. After entering authorisation code, you are ready to load and view desired charts into the ECDIS.

AP-51
Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

A5.2.5 Loading C-MAP charts from a CD ROM into the system

When you load C-MAP charts by CD ROM catalogue, the system first loads a CD ROM catalogue, which stores
certain information into your hard disk such as cells ID, their position and edition number, from your LAN (Local
Area Network) connection, floppy disk or CD ROM. After that the system asks which charts you want to load from
the CD ROM.

To load by CD ROM catalogue do the following:

1. Insert CD ROM or floppy disk to drive. Spin the thumbwheel to
show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and
then push the right mouse button.
2. Choose Load and Update Charts from the menu and “from CD
ROM” from the sub menu (see figure below).
3. The ECDIS loads content summary, publisher notes and Product
List from the CD ROM and then opens the Load or Update
Charts loaded from CD ROM dialog box.
4. Uncheck “Missing only” and then click the Load button. The
system automatically copies all text and pictures files associated
with charts from the CD ROM catalogue.
5. Charts are loaded into ECDIS and then automatically converted
to SENC format and the SENC Convert window appears.

AP-52
 Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

6. If an error is detected during conversion from ENC to SENC, the

following window appears. To find the reason click the Details button.

7. When conversion is completed, the following window appears.

AP-53
Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

Interpretation of Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM window

1.

2.

3.
7.

4.

5.
6.

1. The source and edition date of the CD is displayed here.

2. A list of charts stored in the CD ROM, edition number of the chart and the number of updates included in the
chart.

3. In the Load Selector field, you can choose how to pick desired charts from the list:
• Name: ECDIS will display chart names on graphical presentation if selected.
• Permit: ECDIS will highlight the charts which are available in the CD ROM and for which you have
permits.
• RENC Canceled Charts: ECDIS will display charts on display which are canceled on RENC and normally
on CD-ROM.
• Group: If you have predefined a group of charts, ECDIS will highlight those charts in the group which are
available in the CD ROM.
• Manual Selection: You can highlight desired charts from the list.
• Missing only, loads and displays on graphical presentation only charts and their updates which are not
already loaded into the ECDIS
4. View CD ROM Publisher Notes button is used to view important notices published by chart producer, View
CD ROM content Summary button is used to list charts available on CD-ROM and Load History and Conv.
History button check what is loaded and converted from the CD ROM. The Remove button is used to remove
the CD ROM catalogue permanently from the ECDIS.

5. The Edit Group button is used to create and modify group. For more information, see “A5.2.7
Grouping S57 chart cells“ on page AP-60.

6. The Load button is used to start loading.

Note: The system can make conversion into the SENC and set the “Display Until” date automatically. This is the
recommended way. For how to do this, see paragraph 8.4.2 “Choosing automatic SENC conversion and displaying
until date”.

AP-54
 Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

Viewing CD ROM contents summary

You can view the Summary of the contents of the CD ROM. It contains information about charts you are going to
load.

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right mouse
button.

2. Choose Load and Update Charts from the menu and “from CD ROM” from the sub menu. Click the Load
button.

3. Click the View CD ROM content Summary button.

A viewer shows information about the chosen “CD ROM”.

Each row contains:

• Cell ID: Name of the chart
• Edition: Edition number of the chart
• Base: Included update number and issue date of Base cell of the chart
• First Update: Update number and issue date of the first update included
• Last Update: Update number and issue date of the last update included

4. If you want to make a hard copy of the Publisher Notes, click the Print Text button.

5. To close this window, click the X in the upper right corner.

Viewing load history of CD ROM

You can view what is loaded from a CD ROM using the Load History in Load or Update Charts from CD ROM.

1. Spin the thumbwheel to show Menu/Info/Chart Menu in the mouse functions area and then push the right mouse
button.

2. Choose Load and Update Charts from the menu and “from CD ROM” from the sub menu. Choose desired CD
ROM from the list of CD ROMs.

3. Click the Load and Conv. History button.

4. A window which looks something like the one below appears.

5. You can verify which charts are already loaded from the CD ROM.

AP-55
Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

A5.2.6 Catalogue of S57 cells with C-MAP charts

A S57 catalogue is used to view your cells stored into your hard disk or named “CD ROM catalogues”. You view
limits of cells in the S57 catalogue window. It is possible to pick any cell to see information for it (cell, update’s
number) by going over its limit with the cursor.

1. Source of Chart Catalogue

• CD ROM: Display charts available in a named “CD ROM”.
• RENC: Display charts available from an RENC.
• SENC: Display charts stored in your hard disk in SENC format.
2. View Filters
• Name: Display also cell names in graphical coverage display.
• Permit: Display only charts for which you have permit.
• RENC Cancelled Charts: Display charts which are cancelled in an RENC.
• Group: Display charts which are member of selected group.
• Navigation purpose: Display charts for chosen navigation purpose (overview, general, coastal, approach,
harbour, berthing).
3. Selected Chart

• Cell: Name of the chart

• Cell Status: Opens Cell Status window.

• Open: Opens selected chart to ECDIS display.

4. Group: For further details, see paragraph 8.5.3 “Grouping S57 chart cells”.

AP-56
 Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

A5.2.7 Grouping S57 chart cells

You can define groups of S57 charts. This means you can collect related charts, for example, all cells which cover a
route from Liverpool to New York or all cells available from a National Hydrographic Office.

You can make a group and define charts included to group using either “Chart Catalogue” or “Load or Update
Charts from loaded CD ROM” window.

Using Load or Update Charts from loaded CD ROM window

When you load or update S57 charts from CD ROM, you are able to define a group in “Load or Update Charts from
loaded CD ROM” window. To do this, proceed as follows:

1. Select Load or Update charts>From CD ROM in Chart menu. A “Load or Update Charts from loaded CD
ROM” window appears

2. Press the Edit Group button.

3. Press the New button.

4. Enter group name.

5. Press the Add Frame button.

AP-57
Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

6. Use the trackball to define frame and then push the left button.

7. Click the Done button.

AP-58
 Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

7. Press the Close Edit button to finish.

8. Choose the group to load.

10. Press the Load button to load chart.

AP-59
Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

Using Chart catalogue window

Chart Catalogue can be used to define a group as follows:

1. Select “Chart Catalogue” from Chart menu window

2. Press the Edit Group button and then press the New button.

3. Enter name for Group.

AP-60
 Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

4. Press the Add Frame button.

5. Define frame using left mouse button in “Select” mode and then press the Done button.

6. Select Group to view content of group in Chart Catalogue window.

AP-61
Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

Removing S57 chart cells from a group

You can remove chart cells from a defined group as follows:

Select “Group” to activate a

Group selecion. Select desired
group

Press “Edit Group”

Use “Remove Frame” button, if you

like to use Graphical gatalogue or
pick individual cell using left
mouse button “Select” and then click
“>>“ button.

AP-62
 Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

Deleting a group
You can delete a defined group as follows:

Use “Remove” button to delete

a group

Viewing active group with catalogue

To view active group do the following:

Select “Group” to activate a

Group selecion. Select desired
group

AP-63
Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

A5.2.8 Automatic display until setting

Display data may be set to system data automatically.

1. Open the Chart menu and choose SENC Convert Settings to show the following window.

2. Check Automatic Display Until.

A5.2.9 Removing C-MAP charts from the system

To remove C-MAP charts from the system, do the following:

1. Open the Chart menu.

2. Choose Remove Charts from the menu and then

push the thumbwheel. The window shown right
appears.

3. Choose desired chart cells to remove them from the

system. You can remove native data (A, B, CD
ROM; E, F or Z) or SENC format (snc).

4. Click the Remove button to remove selected C-

MAP charts from your hard disk.

AP-64
 Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

A5.2.10 Viewing status and date dependency of S57 chart cells and
their updates
When you load S57 chart cell(s) and/or their updates, the system sets Display Until of S57 chart cell(s) as current
date of the system. To set Approve Until as current date of the system, you must open the Set Chart viewing dates
window and set it there. You can view status and date dependency of S57 chart cells and their updates as follows:

1. Open the Chart menu, choose Set Chart viewing dates from the menu and
then push the thumbwheel.

2. The Set Chart viewing date window appears.

Recommended settings in this window are:

• Sync Manual Update Dates: ON position

• All SENCs: ON position

RENC edt / upd: The “RENC” column contains edition/update status from Product List.

SENC edt / upd: The “SENC” column contains edition/update status from “SENC”, i.e., loaded and converted in
the ECDIS.

Updates displ. until: View the date until updates is displayed. You can enter desired date by using the Display
Until input box. The number after date shows the number of updates done for the displayed cell (number of
displayed updates/number of updates in SENC format).

Updates approv. until: View the date until updates is approved. You can enter desired date by using the Approve
Until input box (number of approved updates/number of updates in SENC format).

AP-65
Appendix 5: C-MAP CM-93/2 Charts

This page intentionally left blank.

AP-66
Appendix 6: Route Backup

A6.1 Route Backup & Restore in ASCII Format

Sometimes it is useful to save some information about a route as an ASCII text file for use with some other
application, or use some ASCII format-generated route in the ECDIS. ECDIS can generate an ASCII text file from a
route. ECDIS can also generate a route from an ASCII text file. The following formats for route backup & restore
are available:

ASCII PROPRIETARY

ASCII POSITION: List of Latitude/Longitude values

ASCII WPNAME POSITION: List of WP names and Latitude/Longitude

ASCII POSITION WPNAME: List of Latitude/Longitude and WP names

ASCII FULL: All route related information

ORION WEATH. ROUTING: compatible to import-export route information from/to Orion Pro

To make backup from a route in ASCII format, do the following:

1. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar and then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box.

2. Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box, choose Backup and Restore from the menu and then push the
thumbwheel.

3. In the Hard Disk field, choose desired file from the list box and desired backup format with Backup Format.

4. Choose backup drive from Drive in the Backup Device field. Click the Backup button to create backup file.

To restore a route, do the following:

1. Follow steps 1 and 2 above to open the Backup and Restore dialog box.

2. Choose desired Backup Format.

3. Choose backup drive in the Backup Device field and choose desired file with the list box in the same field.

4. Click the Restore button.

5.

AP-67
Appendix 6: Route Backup

A6.1.1 Exporting ECDIS route data into an Excel file

Below is an example of how to export waypoints' name and latitude/longitude values to a Microsoft Excel table.

1. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar and then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box.
Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box, choose Backup and Restore from the menu and then push the
thumbwheel.

2. In the Hard Disk field, choose desired route and then choose desired Backup Format (ASCII WPNAME
POSITION).

3. Choose backup drive (A:\) from the Backup Device field and then insert floppy disk in the processor unit of the
ECDIS. Click the Backup button.

4. Move floppy disk to computer where you can run Notepad and MS Excel applications.

5. Open the Notepad software and then open the route chosen at step 2.

Content of Notepad looks something like this.

6. Copy text to the clipboard: Edit>Choose All and then Edit>Copy.

7. Open the MS Excel software. Open a new Excel file and then copy text from the clipboard to the MS Excel:
Edit>Paste.

Content of MS Excel looks something like the one above.

4.

AP-68
 Appendix 6: Route Backup

A6.1.2 Importing route data from Excel file into ECDIS

Below is an example of how to import waypoints' name and latitude/longitude values from a Microsoft Excel table
into ECDIS.

1. 1. Open the MS Excel which contains the route data you want to import to the ECDIS. Copy desired columns
to the clipboard: Highlight data in MS Excel and then choose >Copy.

Content of MS Excel may look something like this.

You can paste text to Notepad (First activate Notepad then select Edit>Paste)

Content of Notepad looks something like this.

3. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar and then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box.
Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box, choose Backup and Restore from the menu and then push the
thumbwheel.

4. In the Backup Device field, choose desired Restore Format (ASCII WPNAME POSITION).

5. Insert floppy disk into disk drive in the processor unit. Choose backup drive (A:\) from the Backup Device field.
Choose desired route from the list box in the Backup Device field and then click the Restore button.

6. ECDIS generates new route which has same name as text file.

AP-69
Appendix 6: Route Backup

Steering mode: default = Rhumb line

From text file Channel limit: default = 185 m

Speed Min: default = 0 Kt

Above is an example where you can see which fields are from text file and which fields are using default values
generated by the ECDIS.

AP-70
 Appendix 6: Route Backup

A6.2 Route Backup & Restore in Orion Pro Weather

Routing Format
A6.2.1 Exporting Route from ECDIS to Orion Pro
To make backup from a route in format which can then be imported to Orion Pro weather routing program, do the
following:

1. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar and then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box.

2. Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box, choose Backup and Restore from the menu and then push the
thumbwheel.

3. In the Hard Disk field, choose desired file from the list box and Orion weath. routing format with Backup
Format.

4. Choose backup drive from Drive in the Backup Device field. Click the Backup button to create backup file.

Note that following information is transferred with route:

• WP number

• Latitude

• Longitude

• Steering mode (Rhumb Line or Great Circle)

AP-71
Appendix 6: Route Backup

A6.2.2 Importing Route from Orion Pro

To restore a route in format of Orion Pro weather routing program to ECDIS, do the following:

1. Place the cursor on Route in the status bar and then click the Plan button to open the Plan Route dialog box.
Place the cursor on the triangle in the dialog box, choose Backup and Restore from the menu and then push the
thumbwheel.

2. In the Backup Device field, choose desired Restore Format (ORION WEATH. ROUTING).

3. Insert floppy disk into disk drive in the processor unit. Choose backup drive (A:\) from the Backup Device field.
Choose desired route from the list box in the Backup Device field and then click the Restore button.

4. ECDIS generates new route which has same name as text file.

Note that following information is transferred with route:

• WP number

• Latitude

• Longitude

• Steering mode (Rhumb Line or Great Circle)

AP-72
Appendix 7: Menu Overview

A7.1 Hierarchic Menu Tree

This appendix introduces menus available with the ECDIS.

A7.1.1 Menu
The Main menu contains various functions and menus which control the ECDIS. To show the Main menu, press the
MENU key on the keyboard-equipped control unit or spin the thumbwheel to show Menu in the mouse functions
area (see figure below) and then push the left mouse button.

Place cursor here

and press left
mouse button

The Main menu

AP-73
Appendix 7: Menu Overview

Help window
Use Help to call the Help window on the ECDIS display.

Set Standard Display

Use Set Standard Display to call IMO-defined Standard display on the ECDIS and restore monitor brilliance to
calibrated state.

For detailed information, see paragraph 9.5.7 “Controlling visible navigation features”.

AP-74
 Appendix 7: Menu Overview

Man Over Board (MOB)

Use MOB to inscribe Man Over Board mark on the ECDIS and log that position to the Voyage log.

For detailed information, see paragraph 23.2 “Events and Man Over Board Functions”.

Event
Use Event to record a textual description to the Voyage log.

For detailed information, see paragraph 23.2 “Events and Man Over Board functions”.

AP-75
Appendix 7: Menu Overview

Record
Record provides access to the ECDIS’s various logs.

For detailed information, see Chapter 23 “Recording Functions”.

Safety Message
Safety Message handles AIS transponder related messages.

For detailed information, see Chapter 21 “AIS Target Functions”.

AP-76
 Appendix 7: Menu Overview

Chart Menu
Chart Menu maintains chart database for both vector and Raster charts (ARCS).

This is the menu for vector (S57) charts.

For detailed information, see Chapter 8 “Vector Chart Material”.

This is the menu for ARCS charts.

For detailed information, see Chapter 9 “Raster Chart Material”.

AP-77
Appendix 7: Menu Overview

Chart Display
Chart Display mainly controls visibility of chart related objects.

Display - ALL ON *

For detailed information, see paragraph 8.10 “Vector Chart Display” and paragraph 9.5 “ARCS Chart Display”.

AP-78
 Appendix 7: Menu Overview

Set Chart Center

Chart Center lets you specify the center of the chart display, with manually entered latitude and longitude values.

Initial Settings
Initial Settings mainly provides for set up of equipment parameters.

For detailed information, see chapters “Datum” and “Parameters Setup”

AP-79
Appendix 7: Menu Overview

Sensors
Sensors sets up the various sensor connected to the ECDIS.

For detailed information, see Chapter 19 “Navigation Sensors”.

AP-80
 Appendix 7: Menu Overview

Conning Display
Conning Display sets up the conning display, which may be shown in the sidebar.

For detailed information, see chapter 27 “Conning Display”.

Route
Route lets you select the planned and monitored routes to use.

For detailed information, see chapter 13 “Route Planning” and chapter 14 “Route Monitoring”.

AP-81
Appendix 7: Menu Overview

User Chart
User Chart lets you select the planned and monitored routes to use for the user chart.

For detailed information, see Chapter 15 “User Chart Control”.

Pilot Data
Pilot Data processes pilot data, information for use in navigation.

For further details, see Chapter 16 “Pilot Data”.

AP-82
 Appendix 7: Menu Overview

Radar
Radar provides radar functions.

Clean OFF X

For further details, see chapter 22 “Radar Overlay”.

AP-83
Appendix 7: Menu Overview

This page intentionally left blank.

AP-84
Appendix 8: Digital Interface

A8.1 Data Sentences

A8.1.1 Input sentences
DBT, DPT, DTM, GGA, GLL, HDT, MTW, MWV, OSD, ROT, RSA, TTM, VBW, VDM, VTG, ZDA,

A8.1.2 Output sentences

DTM, GLL, MWV, RTE, WPT

A8.1.3 Data reception

Data is received in serial asynchronous form in accordance with the standard referenced in
IEC 61162-2.

The following parameters are used:

Baud rate: 38,400 bps: HDT, !AIVDM, !AIVDO and $AIALR. All other sentences: 4800 bps
Data bits: 8 (D7 = 0), Parity: none, Stop bits: 1

D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7

Start Stop
bit Data bits bit

AP-85
Appendix 8: Digital Interface

A8.1.4 Sentence structure

Input sentences
DBT – Depth below transducer

$--DBT,x.x,f,x.x,M,x.x,F*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 4
| | | | +--+----------- 3
| | +--+----------------- 2
+--+----------------------- 1

1. Water depth, feet

2. Water depth, m
3. Water depth, fathoms
4. Checksum

DPT - Depth

$--DPT,x.x,x.x,x.x*hh<CR><LF>
| | | |
| | | +----- 4
| | +--------- 3
| +------------ 2
+---------------- 1

1. Water depth relative to trancsducer, in meters

2. Offset from transeducer, in meters(see notes 1 and 2)
3. Maximum range scale in use
4. Checksum

NOTE1 "positive"=distance from transeduser to water-line.

"-"=distance from transducer to keel.
NOTE2 For IEC applications the offset should always be applied
so as to provide depth relative to the keel.

AP-86
 Appendix 8: Digital Interface

DTM - Datum reference

$--DTM,ccc,a,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,ccc*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | +--- 7
| | | | | | | +------ 6
| | | | | | +---------- 5
| | | | +--+------------- 4
| | +---+------------------- 3
| +------------------------- 2
+---------------------------- 1

1. Local datum W84 - WGS84

W72 - WGS72
S85 - SGS85
P90 - PE90
999 - User defined
IHO datum code
2. Local datum subdivision code
3. Lat offset, min, N/S
4. Lon offset, min, E/W
5. Altitude offset, m
6. Reference dattum W84 - WGS84
W72 - WGS72
S85 - SGS85
P90 - PE90
7. Checksum

AP-87
Appendix 8: Digital Interface

GGA - Global positioning system (GPS) fix data

$--GGA,hhmmss.ss,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,x,xx,x.x,x.x,M,x.x,M,x.x,xxxx*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +-- 11
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +---- 10
| | | | | | | | | | | | +--------- 9
| | | | | | | | | | +---+------------ 8
| | | | | | | | +---+------------------ 7
| | | | | | | +------------------------- 6
| | | | | | +---------------------------- 5
| | | | | +------------------------------- 4
| | | +----+--------------------------------- 3
| +---+--------------------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------------------------------- 1

1. UTC of position
2. Latitude, N/S
3. Longitude, E/W
4. GPS quality indicator (see note)
5. Number of satllite in use,00-12, may be different from the number in view
6. Horizontal dilution of precision
7. Antenna altitude above/below mean sealevel, m
8. Geoidal separation, m
9. Age of differential GPS data
10. Differential reference station ID, 0000-1023
11. Checksum
NOTE
0 = fix not available or invalid
1 = GPS SPS mode, fix valid
2 = differential GPS, SPS mode, fix valid
3 = GPS PPS mode, fix valid
4 = Real Time Kinetic. Satellite system used in RTK mode with fixed integers
5 = Float RTK. Satellite system used in RTK mode with floating fingers
6 = Estimated (dead reckoning) mode
7 = Manual input mode
8 = Simulator mode
The GPS quality indicator shall not be a null field.

AP-88
 Appendix 8: Digital Interface

GLL - Geographic position - latitude/longitude

$--GLL,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,hhmmss.ss,A,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | +------- 6
| | | | | | +--------- 5
| | | | | +----------- 4
| | | | +---------------- 3
| | +------+----------------------- 2
+---+----------------------------------- 1

1. Latitude, N/S
2. Longitude, E/W
3. UTC of position
4. Status: A=data valid, V=data invalid
5. Mode indicator(see note)
6. Checksum

NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
E = Estimated (dead reckoning)
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid

The Mode indicator field supplements the Status field. The Status field shall be
set to V=invalid for all values of Operating Mode except for A=Autonomous and
D=Differential. The positioning system Mode indicator and Status field shall not
be null fields.

HDT – Heading, True

$--HDT,x.x,T*hh<CR><LF>
| | |
| | +--------- 2
+----+----------- 1

1. Heading, degrees true

2. Checksum

MTW - Water temperature

$--MTW,x.x,C*hh<CR><LF>
| | |
| | +--------- 2
+--+----------- 1

1. Temperature, degrees C
2. Checksum

MWV - Wind speed and angle

$--MWV,x.x,a,x.x,a,A*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +--------- 6
| | | | +------------ 5
| | | +--------------- 4
| | +----------------- 3
| +--------------------- 2
+------------------------ 1

1. Wind angle, 0 to 359 (degrees)

2. Reference, R=relative, T=true
3. Wind speed
4. Wind speed units, K/M/N
5. Status, A=data valid, V=data invalid
6. Checksum

AP-89
Appendix 8: Digital Interface

OSD - Own ship data

$--OSD,x.x,A,x.x,a,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | +--------- 10
| | | | | | | | +----------- 9
| | | | | | | +-------------- 8
| | | | | | +------------------ 7
| | | | | +--------------------- 6
| | | | +------------------------ 5
| | | +--------------------------- 4
| | +------------------------------ 3
| +--------------------------------- 2
+------------------------------------ 1

1. Heading, degrees true

2. Heading status: A=data valid, V=data invalid
3. Vessel course, degrees true
4. Course reference, B/M/W/R/P(see note)
5. Vessel soeed
6. Speed refereence, B/M/W/R/P(see note)
7. Vessel set, degrees true---Manually entered
8. Vessel drift(speed) ---Manually entered
9. Speed units, K(km/h) / N(Knots) / S(statute miles/h)
10. Checksum

NOTES - Reference systems(speed/course):

B = bottom tracking log
M = manually entered
W = water referenced
R = radar tracking(of fixed target)
P = positioning system ground reference

ROT - Rate of turn

$--ROT,x.x,A*hh<CR><LF>
| | |
| | +--- 3
| +----- 2
+-------- 1

1. Rate of turn, deg/min, "-"=bow turns to port

2. Status: A=data valid, V=data invalid
3. Checksum

RSA – Rudder sensor angle

$--RSA,x.x,A,x.x,A*hh&ltCR>&ltLF>
| | | | |
| | | | +--------- 3
| | +--+----------- 2
+--+---------------- 1

1. Starboard(or single) rudder sensor, Status: A=data valid, V=data invalid

2. Port rudder sensor, Status: A=data valid, V=data inva
3. Checksum

AP-90
 Appendix 8: Digital Interface

TTM - Tracked target message

$--TTM,xx,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,x.x,x.x,a,c--c,a,a,hhmmss.ss,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | +----- 14
| | | | | | | | | | | | | | +------- 13
| | | | | | | | | | | | | +-------------- 12
| | | | | | | | | | | | +------------------- 11
| | | | | | | | | | | +--------------------- 10
| | | | | | | | | | +------------------------ 9
| | | | | | | | | +---------------------------- 8
| | | | | | | | +------------------------------- 7
| | | | | | | +----------------------------------- 6
| | | | | +--+-------------------------------------- 5
| | | | +--------------------------------------------- 4
| | +--+------------------------------------------------ 3
| +------------------------------------------------------- 2
+---------------------------------------------------------- 1

1. Target number, 00 to 99
2. Target distance from own ship
3. Bearing from own ship,degrees, true/relative(T/R) *
4. Target speed
5. Target course,degrees true/relative(T/R)
6. Distance of closet pointof approach
7. Time to CPA, min., "-"increasing
8. Speed/distance units, K/N/S
9. User data(e.g. target name)
10. Target status(see note)
11. Reference target = R, null otherwise
12. Time of data(UTC)
13. Type of acquisition A=automatic, M=manual, R=reported
14. Checksum

NOTE - Target status:

L = lost, tracked target has been lost
Q = query, target in the process of acquisition
T = tracking

VBW - Dual ground/water speed

$--VBW,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,x.x,A,x.x,A,x.x,A*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | +--- 11
| | | | | | | | | +----- 10
| | | | | | | | +-------- 9
| | | | | | | +----------- 8
| | | | | | +-------------- 7
| | | | | +----------------- 6
| | | | +-------------------- 5
| | | +------------------------ 4
| | +--------------------------- 3
| +------------------------------ 2
+---------------------------------- 1

1. Longitudial water speed, knots

2. Transverse water speed, knots
3. Status: water speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
4. Longitudial ground speed, knots
5. Transverse ground speed, knots
6. Status: ground speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
7. Stern transverse water speed, knots
8. Status: stern water speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
9. Stern transverse ground speed, knots
10. Status: stern ground speed, A=data valid V=data invalid
11. Checksum

AP-91
Appendix 8: Digital Interface

VTG - Course over ground and ground speed

$--VTG,x.x,T,x.x,M,x.x,N,x.x,K,a*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | +------- 6
| | | | | | | | +--------- 5
| | | | | | +--+----------- 4
| | | | +--+----------------- 3
| | +--+----------------------- 2
+--+----------------------------- 1

1. Course over ground, degrees true

2. Course over ground, degrees magnetic
3. Speed over ground, knots
4. Speed over ground, km/h
5. Mode indicator(see note)
6. Checksum

NOTE Positioning system Mode indicator:

A = Autonomous
D = Differential
E = Estimated (dead reckoning)
M = Manual input
S = Simulator
N = Data not valid

The positioning system Mode indicator field shall not be a null field.

ZDA - Time and date

$--ZDA,hhmmss.ss,xx,xx,xxxx,xx,xx*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 7
| | | | | +----------- 6
| | | | +-------------- 5
| | | +------------------ 4
| | +---------------------- 3
| +------------------------- 2
+--------------------------------- 1

1. UTC
2. Day, 01 to 31(UTC)
3. Month, 01 to 12(UTC)
4. Year(UTC)
5. Local zone hours, 00h to +-13h
6. Local zone minutes, 00 to +59
as local hours
7. Checksum

AP-92
 Appendix 8: Digital Interface

Output sentences
DPT, DTM, GLL, MWV, OSD – See input sentences.
RTE – Routes
$--RTE,x.x,x.x,a,c--c,c--c,.....,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | +--------- 7
| | | | | +------------ 6
| | | | +----------------------- 5
| | | +---------------------------- 4
| | +-------------------------------- 3
| +----------------------------------- 2
+--------------------------------------- 1

1. Total number of messages being transmitted

2. Message number
3. Message mode:
c=complete route, all waypoints
w=working route, first listed waypoint is "FROM",
second is "TO" and remaining reset of route
4. Route identifier
5. Waypoint identifier
6. Waypoint "n" identifier
7. Checksum
WPL - Waypoint location

$--WPL,llll.lll,a,yyyyy.yyy,a,c--c*hh<CR><LF>
| | | | | |
| | | | | +--------- 4
| | | | +------------ 3
| | +-----+---------------- 2
+-----+---------------------------- 1

1. Waypoint latitude, N/S

2. Waypoint longitude, E/W
3. Waypoint identifier
4. Checksum

AP-93
Appendix 8: Digital Interface

A8.1.5 Serial interface: input ports

Heading, log, wind, depth and navigation sensors
Photo Coupler
330k
RD-A

HCPL061N

RD-B

AIS transponder
Photo Coupler
82k
RD-A

HCPL061N

RD-B

Absolute maximum rating

Input
Forward current: 50mA
Reverse voltage: 3V

Output
Supply voltage: 7V
High level output voltage: 7V
Low level output current: 50mA

AP-94
 Appendix 8: Digital Interface

A8.1.6 Serial interface: input/output ports

Input port (RD-A, RD-B)

Isolated RS485 Transceiver
RD-A

SP487 RD-B

GND

Logical High: A-B> +0.2V

Logical Low: A-B< -0.2V

Output port (TD-A, TD-B)

Isolated RS485 Transceiver
TD-A

SP487 TD-B

GND

Logical High: A-B> +4.0V

Logical Low: A-B> -4.0V

AP-95
Appendix 8: Digital Interface

This page intentionally left blank.

AP-96
Appendix 9: Parts List and
Parts Location

A9.1 Parts List

FURUNO Model FEA-2807/FEA-2107/FEA-2107-BB
Unit Processor Unit EC-1000C
Control Unit RCU-018
Control Unit RCU-015

ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST Ref.Dwg.

Blk.No.
2006/10
SYMBOL PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD/ CODE NO. REMARKS
ASSY. TYPE

PROCESSOR UNIT EC-1000C

AC Filter FN 2080-6/06 000-151-576
DVD-ROM Drive DVI650V 000-165-009
Floppy Disc Drive FD-235HF 000-165-010
Hard Disk Drive MHV2040 AC 000-159-044-10
DDR SDRAM DIMM Board KVR400X64C3A/512 000-161-671-10
MOTHER Board PCI-5S 000-151-569
Power Supply UPF250-AA-B 000-151-575
PROCESSOR Board PCG-820GV −
PWR ON Board 24P0092 000-165-013
CONTROL UNIT RCU-018
PNL Board 03P9343 008-544-420
BUZ Board 03P9362 008-535-600
Trackball Assy. TA4726N 000-147-139-01
CONTROL UNIT RCU-015
PNL Board 03P9344 008-536-380
Trackball Assy TA4726N 000-147-139-01

AP-97
Appendix 9: Parts List and Parts Location

A9.2 Parts Location

A9.2.1 Processor unit EC-1000C

Power Supply
(UPF250-AA-B)
Hard Disk
(MHV2040 AC)

DVD-ROM Drive
AC Filter (DV1650V), and
(FN 2080-6/06) Floppy DIsc Drive
(FD-235HF)

PWR ON Board
(24P0092)

MOTHER Board
(PCI-5S)
DDR SDRAM DIMM Board
(KVR400X64C3A/512)

PROCESSOR Board (PCG-820GV)

AP-98
 Appendix 9: Parts List and Parts Location

A9.2.2 Control unit RCU-018

Trackball
BUZ Board
Assy.
(03P9362)
(TA4726N)

PNL Board
(03P9343)

A9.2.3 Control unit RCU-015

Trackball Assy.
(TA4726N)

PNL Board
(03P9344)

AP-99
Appendix 9: Parts List and Parts Location

This page intentionally left blank.

AP-100
FURUNO FEA-2107

SPECIFICATIONS OF
Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS)
FEA-2107

This system is designed with up-to-date computer technology to comply with the IMO/IHO
performance standards for Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS). It displays
selected information from SENC (System Electronic Navigational Chart) with positional information
from navigation sensors to assist the operator in route planning and monitoring. Additionally, it
displays navigation-related information.

This system consists of

1) ECDIS processor (including floppy disk and CD-ROM drives)
2) Control unit (type according to system configuration)
3) 20.1-inch Monitor
4) LAN Adapter (serial interface), and
5) ECDIS B Adapter (analog signal interface, option)

One single ECDIS processor can be used for route planning and monitoring.
An additional identical ECDIS processor, which is used for route planning, can be separately
installed to fulfill backup arrangements for replacing of the paper charts. It will be connected to the
principal processor with Local Area Network (LAN) of Ethernet type.

1 MONITOR UNIT CHARACTERISTICS

1.1 Display type 20.1-inch LCD
1.2 Pixel 1,280 x 1,024 pixel (SXGA)
1.3 Video Interface
Analog RGB 0.7Vpp, 75 ohm
DVI-D/I pixel clock: 25-162MHz
1.4 Control I/O RS-232C, Dsub-9pin, 9.6Kbps (for digitizer)

2 DISPLAY ITEMS
2.1 Chart materials - IHO/IMO S57 edition-3 ENC vectorized material
- BA ARCS rasterized material
- C-MAP CM-93/2 vectorized material
- C-MAP CM-93/3 vectorized material
2.2 Own ship indication Own ship’s mark and numeral position in lat/lon, speed and course
2.3 ARPA target display Range, bearing, speed, course, CPA/TCPA
2.4 Radar overlay picture Option (standard supply for FAR-2117/2817 ser.)
2.5 Others information Waypoint, route monitoring and chart Information, several alarms

3 DISPLAY MODE
3.1 True motion North up, Course up
3.2 Relative motion North up, Course up, Route up

4 OTHER DISPLAY FEATURES

4.1 Chart zoom Zoom-in / zoom-out indication
4.2 Cursor EBL, VRM, parallel cursor
4.3 One touch activation Single action to activate standard display
4.4 Chart information Electronic chart information, selection of symbol, etc.

SP-1 E4122S01D
FURUNO FEA-2107

5 USER INTERFACE
5.1 Position calculation Navigation by result of positioning found with external sensor
Dead reckoning with gyro and log
Highly accurate position with combination of gyro, log, external
sensor and Kalman filter
5.2 Navigation planning Planning by rhumb line, great circle
Route creation
Route data may be transferred to radar
5.3 Navigation recording Latest 12 hours of navigation data may be recorded
(Time, position, bearing, speed, etc.)
5.4 Automatic navigation Trackpilot (option) required
5.5 Route monitoring Off-track display
Waypoint arrival alarm
Shallow depth alarm
5.6 User chart User chart creation (2000 lines max. 1000 symbols max.)
User chart is overlaid on electronic map
User chart may be transferred to radar screen
5.7 Pilot data Creation and display of pilot data
Pilot data may be transferred to radar (radar must be display)
5.8 MOB (Man Overboard) Position and other data at time of man overboard are recorded
MOB mark is displayed on the screen

6 DATA INTERFACE
6.1 LAN adapter
Gyro HDT (IEC 61162-1)
Speed log VBW (IEC 61162-1)
Navigational E/S DBT, DPT (IEC 61162-1)
Position sensor GLL, GGA, VTG, ZDA, DTM (IEC 61162-1)
Wind data MWV (IEC 61162-1)
AIS ABM, BBM, etc. (IEC 61162-2)
Radar/ARPA Two units
Alarm output 3ch: relay contact (normal close)
6.2 B-adapter (option)
Gyro sync/step
Speed log 200p/m
Alarm output 8ch: relay contact (normal close)
Analog sensors 8ch: Rudder, ROT, RPM, PITCH, etc.

7 POWER SUPPLY
7.1 Processor unit 100-230 VAC: 1.5-0.5A, 1 phase, 50-60Hz
7.2 Monitor unit 100-230 VAC: 0.6-0.4A, 1 phase, 50-60Hz
7.3 LAN adapter 24 VDC: 0.15A
7.4 B-adapter 24 VDC: 0.21A

8 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
8.1 Ambient temperature -15°C to +55°C
8.2 Relative humidity 95% at +40°C
8.3 Waterproofing
Monitor unit (panel) IPX5
Other units IPX0
8.4 Bearing vibration IEC 60945

SP-2 E4122S01D
FURUNO FEA-2107

9 COATING COLOR
9.1 Monitor unit N3.0
9.2 Console N3.0
9.3 Processor unit N3.0
9.4 LAN adapter N3.0
9.5 B adapter N3.0

SP-3 E4122S01D
FURUNO FEA-2107

This page intentionally left blank.

SP-4 E4122S01D
Index
A Approve until date ...................................8-82
Access server ARCS details page ...................................9-41
human interface log ........................... 18-12 ARCS navigator
log....................................................... 18-11 chart permit loading.............................9-14
monitoring............................................ 18-4 description ............................................9-12
troubleshooting .................................. 18-10 ARCS skipper
chart permit loading.............................9-15
AIS description ............................................9-12
alarms .................................................. 21-4 Area page ...............................................15-13
CPA and TCPA..................................... 21-6 ARPA
CPA and TCPA for AIS targets............ 21-6 alarms...................................................20-4
dangerous targets ................................ 21-3 ARPA targets........................................20-1
interface status .................................... 21-9 CPA and TCPA .....................................20-3
introduction.......................................... 21-1 dangerous targets .................................20-1
lost targets ........................................... 21-3 displaying target data ..........................20-3
maximum number of targets ............... 21-4 lost targets............................................20-1
range for detection ............................... 21-4 past positions........................................20-4
safety message ................................... 21-10 saving past target track........................23-7
safety message, creating .................... 21-11 source of ARPA targets.........................20-4
safety message, reading ..................... 21-12 vector mode...........................................20-2
safety message, replying .................... 21-13 Automatic route steering
saving past target track ....................... 23-7 Kalman filter and ...............................19-18
target call sign ..................................... 21-8 Autopilot sidebar....................................... 3-9
target data............................................ 21-5
B
target dialog box................................... 21-8
Backup operations
target name.......................................... 21-8
ASCII file, saving route as....................17-6
targets, displaying ............................... 21-2
chart material.......................................17-7
vector mode .......................................... 21-3
danger targets log backup ..................23-10
Alarms
details log backup...............................23-10
AIS ....................................................... 21-4
file backup ............................................17-3
alarms log........................................... 23-12
file copy.................................................17-2
ARPA.................................................... 20-4
file deletion ...........................................17-3
chart calculation .................................. 30-1
file reading............................................17-5
COG.................................................... 19-12
file renaming ........................................17-2
drift .................................................... 19-12
file restoration ......................................17-3
gyro .................................................... 19-16
former vector system format files,
heading............................................... 19-12
backing up.........................................17-5
Kalman filter...................................... 19-18
loading files of former vector system
list of navigation alarms ...................... 30-4
format................................................17-5
list of steering alarms ........................ 30-26
route backup......................................AP-71
navigation calculation.......................... 30-1
route restoration from ASCII file .........17-6
non-acceptance of route steering........ 28-13
voyage log backup...............................23-10
position discrepancy............................. 19-8
priority ................................................. 30-2 C
program track mode............................. 28-6 Cancel conv. button..................................8-21
ROT.................................................... 19-12 CD history button ....................................8-21
route steering (trackpilot) .................. 28-16 Cell status button.....................................8-22
sensor related..................................... 19-29 Cells button..............................................8-26
SOG.................................................... 19-12 Chart alarms
steering calculation.............................. 30-2 alarms by category .............................11-12
trackpilot............................................ 28-36 alarms leg by leg.................................11-11
Alarms log highlighting ..........................................11-5
printing .............................................. 23-12 objects for use in ...................................11-3
viewing ............................................... 23-12 route montoring..................................11-13

IN-1
Index

route planning for .............................. 11-10 mode of workstations............................18-9

safety contour....................................... 11-2 sensor source for system.......................18-8
symbols, lines, areas, inserting............ 11-6 shared alarm management ..................18-2
with ARCS charts .............................. 11-14 usage rights ..........................................18-5
Chart catalogue of cells ........................... 8-29 Conning display
Chart center alarm message window ......................27-11
raster charts (ARCS)............................ 9-34 azimuth propulsion window .................27-9
vector charts (S57) ............................... 8-68 background color ................................27-12
Chart legend color pallette .......................................27-12
C-MAP CM-93/2................................ AP-45 depth window .......................................27-7
raster charts (ARCS).............................. 9-1 drift and radius window .......................27-4
vector charts (S57) ................................. 8-3 fuel consumption window .....................27-8
Chart legend sidebar ................................. 3-9 heading window....................................27-3
Chart menu interpretation of ...................................27-2
raster chart .......................................... 9-11 introduction ..........................................27-1
vector chart .......................................... 8-27 main engine start air pressure
Chart page............................................... 9-38 information .....................................27-11
Chart points (user charts) ....................... 15-4 message window .................................27-10
Chart usage log........................................ 23-8 mode ...................................................27-12
C-MAP CM-93/2 position window....................................27-4
catalogue of S57 cells ........................ AP-58 propellers window ................................27-8
CD ROM contents summary ............. AP-56 propulsion and thruster window ........27-11
chart legend ...................................... AP-45 route window ........................................27-6
conversion history of CD ROM.......... AP-57 ROT window .........................................27-3
defining subscription by areas .......... AP-50 rudder window......................................27-4
defining subscription by zones.......... AP-49 speed window........................................27-3
deleting cells from a group................ AP-67 speedpilot window ..............................27-10
deleting group ................................... AP-67 thruster window ...................................27-8
deleting subscription of..................... AP-47 trackpilot window.................................27-5
entering authorization code .............. AP-51 weather window ...................................27-7
grouping S57 cells ............................. AP-59 wind window.........................................27-7
licensing system................................ AP-46 Control unit RCU-015
load history of CD ROM.................... AP-56 control description ..................................4-3
loading charts from a CD ROM ........ AP-52 hot keys ..................................................4-4
loading serial no. of CD ROM ........... AP-48 layout......................................................4-3
removing from system....................... AP-68 Control unit RCU-018
viewing active group ......................... AP-67 control description ..................................4-2
C-MAP CM-93/3 hot keys ..................................................4-4
catalog of charts ................................ AP-29 layout......................................................4-1
chart ordering ................................... AP-23 Conv. history button ................................8-21
choosing............................................. AP-27 Conv. log button .......................................8-22
license entry...................................... AP-33 Convert button .........................................8-26
license renewal.................................. AP-35 Course
licensing system................................ AP-23 alarm ..................................................19-12
loading............................................... AP-31 source....................................................19-9
multiple databases............................ AP-32 Current page............................................16-5
removing ........................................... AP-43 Curved EBL
RENC service.................................... AP-25 introduction ........................................28-39
subscription service........................... AP-24 structure of .........................................28-41
system registration ........................... AP-23 use of...................................................28-41
troubleshooting ................................. AP-23 use with Yokogawa PT-500 ................29-24
update creation ................................. AP-37
D
update loading .................................. AP-39
Danger target log
Color calibration for ARCS charts........... 26-1
backup copy ........................................23-10
Color differentiation for S57 charts......... 26-2
conditions for ........................................23-7
Color palette .............................................. 3-4
creating a user chart from..................23-11
Common reference access server............. 18-5
resetting .............................................23-11
Common reference system
viewing .................................................23-6
access server ........................................ 18-4
Datum
controlling ............................................ 18-2
choosing ................................................25-3

IN-2
 Index

ECDIS and ........................................... 24-2 Group

electronic sea charts and...................... 24-1 active vector chart group, viewing........8-39
paper charts and .................................. 24-1 active, choosing.....................................9-30
positioning devices and ........................ 24-1 ctive group removal from system .........9-31
user charts ........................................... 15-6 raster chart addition.............................9-28
verifying ............................................... 6-10 raster chart removal from ....................9-29
Depth sensor.......................................... 19-28 raster charts .........................................9-27
Details log Gyro
backup copy........................................ 23-10 alarm ..................................................19-16
creating a user chart from ................. 23-11 error correction ...................................19-24
viewing ................................................. 23-2 indication of source.............................19-14
Dialog boxes on-screen indication............................19-14
activating ............................................. 3-10
H
additional menus with ......................... 3-11
Heading
Display mode ........................................... 12-1
alarm ..................................................19-12
Display until date.................................... 8-82
source....................................................19-9
Distance counter.................................... 23-13
Hot keys .................................................... 4-4
Docking sidebar ......................................... 3-9
Human interface log ..............................18-12
Double gyro interface ............................ 19-13
Drift I
alarm.................................................. 19-12 IHO ECDIS Chart 1................................AP-5
source ................................................... 19-9 Information area ................................ 3-1, 3-5
E K
EBL operation ......................................... 12-3 Kalman filter
ECDIS display alarm ..................................................19-18
electronic chart area .............................. 3-2 automatic route steering with ............19-18
information area .................................... 3-5 use of...................................................19-17
overview ................................................. 3-1
L
palette .................................................... 3-4
Line page................................................15-11
sidebar.................................................... 3-6
Load history button..................................8-21
user interface ......................................... 3-4
Loading
Echo trails ............................................... 22-7
chart permits for ARCS navigator
Edit record page ...................................... 16-7
license................................................9-14
Event recording ....................................... 23-1
chart permits for ARCS skipper
F license................................................9-15
Files messages for vector charts....................8-14
backing up............................................ 17-3 new raster charts by chart permit........9-17
copying ................................................. 17-2 non-compliant vector charts .................8-17
deleting ................................................ 17-3 raster charts by active group................9-18
former vector system format files, raster charts, manually ........................9-19
loading .............................................. 17-5 vector charts (S57) from CD,
former vector system format files, floppy disk or LAN ............................. 8-8
saving................................................ 17-5
M
reading ................................................. 17-5
Maintenance....................................31-1, 31-2
renaming .............................................. 17-2
Manual updates
restoring............................................... 17-3
chart object position, editing ..............10-23
Forwarding distance
chart objects, deleting.........................10-14
FAP-2000, EMRI SEM2000 ................. 25-5
chart objects, inserting new................10-16
Yokogawa PT-500A .............................. 25-6
chart objects, modifying......................10-15
Fuse replacement .................................... 31-2
chart viewing dates, controlling ...........10-3
G history of manual updates..................10-25
Glossary.................................................. AP-1 manual update editor ...........................10-4
GOTO track mode manually updated chart objects
description.......................................... 28-10 properties, editing ...........................10-22
preconditions for route steering ......... 28-11 orange symbols, deleting ......................10-9
GOTO waypoint mode orange symbols, editing position ........10-10
description............................................ 28-9 orange symbols, inserting as ................10-6
preconditions for route steering ......... 28-11 orange symbols, inserting using...........10-8
Gray scale test ......................................... 26-3 planning................................................10-4

IN-3
Index

symbols to use...................................... 10-2 Plan pilot data dialog box ........................16-7

true symbols and manual Planning mode
update editor .................................. 10-13 pilot data ..............................................16-6
Mariner page user charts............................................15-7
raster charts......................................... 9-46 Point page ................................................15-9
vector charts......................................... 8-76 Position
Menu overview ..................................... AP-77 alignment by ARPA radar ..................19-22
Messages alignment by ECDIS ..........................19-20
vector chart loading ............................. 8-15 alignment resetting ............................19-21
MOB ........................................................ 23-1 indication of source...............................19-6
Monitor pilot data dialog box primary and secondary.........................19-7
current page......................................... 16-5 recording...............................................23-5
view page ............................................. 16-5 Position discrepancy alarm......................19-8
Monitoring mode Position page............................................19-3
pilot data .............................................. 16-4 Power On/Off..............................................1-4
user charts ........................................... 15-6 Power switch
Mouse functions area ................................ 3-1 Control unit RCU-018, RCU-015............1-4
Mouse operations Processor unit.........................................1-4
alphanumeric data entry ....................... 4-6 Predictor.................................................28-42
menu and function activation ................ 4-9 Presentation library.................................8-90
parts of mouse........................................ 4-5 Printing
thumbwheel ........................................... 4-9 CD ROM contents (A57) .......................8-12
font size for logs, choosing ....................23-9
N
logs........................................................23-8
Navigation marks.................................... 12-2
navigation parameters .........................25-2
O Processor unit ............................................1-4
Optimization parameters ........................ 25-7
R
Orientation .............................................. 12-1
Radar overlay
Other page............................................... 19-5
activating..............................................22-2
raster charts......................................... 9-40
adjusting...............................................22-5
vector charts......................................... 8-72
alarms.................................................22-12
P bearing error compensation................22-11
Palette ....................................................... 3-4 echo averaging......................................22-6
Paper charts echo overload ........................................22-8
replacing with ECDIS charts................. 7-1 echo stretch...........................................22-6
Parallel index lines.................................. 12-3 error sources.......................................22-10
Parameters gain.......................................................22-5
installation ........................................... 25-3 interference rejector .............................22-6
menus for setting ................................. 25-1 introduction ..........................................22-1
navigation (route)................................. 25-5 modes....................................................22-4
navigation (ship) .................................. 25-4 position error compensation ...............22-11
printing ................................................ 25-2 rain clutter ...........................................22-6
set time ................................................ 25-2 sea clutter.............................................22-5
Parameters page...................................... 13-7 source...........................................22-3, 22-5
Permanent messages trails .....................................................22-7
raster charts (ARCS)............................ 9-10 transparency.........................................22-9
Permanent warnings Range in vector charts ....................8-68, 9-34
vector charts (S57) ................................. 8-5 Raster charts (ARCS)
Pilot data active group, choosing ..........................9-30
adding .................................................. 16-8 active group, updating by .....................9-21
creating ................................................ 16-8 ARCS catalogue....................................9-25
data record modification ...................... 16-9 ARCS chart addition to group ..............9-28
modes ................................................... 16-2 ARCS chart group, creating .................9-27
monitoring mode .................................. 16-4 ARCS chart loading by active group ....9-18
other data of, changing ...................... 16-10 ARCS chart removal from a group .......9-29
pilot data record position, changing..... 16-9 ARCS details page................................9-41
planning mode...................................... 16-6 ARCS license information ....................9-12
record deletion ................................... 16-10 ARCS navigator....................................9-12
record importation ............................. 16-10 ARCS navigator chart permit loading..9-14
using..................................................... 16-3 ARCS skipper .......................................9-12

IN-4
 Index

ARCS skipper chart permit loading..... 9-15 RENC

browsing charts.................................... 9-34 authentication ......................................8-42
chart activation by position.................. 9-37 base CD ROM .......................................8-54
chart center .......................................... 9-34 C-MAP CM-93/3.................................AP-25
chart choice, manual ............................ 9-36 CD ROM service ...................................8-43
chart datum, choosing.......................... 9-32 chart up-to-date status .........................8-46
chart display features .......................... 9-47 coverage of Base or Update CD ROM...8-62
chart display settings........................... 9-47 message loading....................................8-64
chart features, controlling.................... 9-38 messages in loading..............................8-66
chart group removal by active group ... 9-31 permit CD ROM or floppy disk, loading8-63
chart legend ........................................... 9-1 permits for vector chart........................8-42
chart load and update history.............. 9-23 permits management............................8-49
chart menu ........................................... 9-11 product list for vector chart ..................8-42
chart page ............................................ 9-38 product list up-to-date status ...............8-48
chart permits for ARCS navigator public key..............................................8-50
license, loading ................................. 9-14 public key for vector chart....................8-50
chart permits, removing....................... 9-16 security system.....................................8-65
chart removal from system, manual .... 9-30 services .................................................8-45
controlling navigation features............ 9-43 subscription warning............................8-49
cursor position in local datum................ 9-7 update CD ROM ...................................8-58
details..................................................... 9-2 ROT
displaying............................................. 9-32 alarm ..................................................19-12
group removal ...................................... 9-30 source....................................................19-9
loading update loading, manual........... 9-22 Route monitoring
manual loading .................................... 9-19 alarms.................................................14-11
manual updates, displaying................. 10-3 description ............................................14-7
mariner page........................................ 9-46 final waypoint.......................................14-3
new ARCS chart loading by route assistant ......................................14-5
chart permit...................................... 9-17 route to monitor, choosing ....................14-1
notes for.................................................. 9-4 route, displaying...................................14-4
other page ............................................ 9-40 TO waypoint .........................................14-2
permanent messages............................ 9-10 waypoint information ...........................14-3
range .................................................... 9-34 Route page
raster chart updating by permit .......... 9-20 raster charts .........................................9-43
route page ............................................ 9-43 vector charts .........................................8-73
SDD........................................................ 9-4 Route parameters.....................................25-5
ship offcenter........................................ 9-34 Route planning
standard page....................................... 9-40 alarms page ..........................................13-6
T&P notices............................................ 9-2 check page ............................................13-6
targets page.......................................... 9-45 choosing datum.....................................13-3
TM reset............................................... 9-34 geometry check ...................................13-15
tracking page ....................................... 9-44 main menu for ......................................13-2
update status ....................................... 9-24 new route..............................................13-4
WGS shift of current chart..................... 9-5 other waypoint data in existing route,
WGS shift value ..................................... 9-8 changing..........................................13-12
WGS shift, specifying amount................ 9-9 parameters page ...................................13-7
Recording passage plan report ............................13-20
chart usage log ..................................... 23-8 prepare page .........................................13-8
conditions for danger target logging .... 23-7 route optimization .....................13-7, 13-16
conditions for voyage logging ............... 23-4 waypoint addition at end of
danger target log.................................. 23-6 existing route ..................................13-12
details log ............................................. 23-2 waypoint deletion ...............................13-13
event..................................................... 23-1 waypoint import .................................13-13
MOB..................................................... 23-1 waypoint insertion in existing route ..13-12
position................................................. 23-5 waypoint position in existing route,
voyage log............................................. 23-3 changing............................................13-9
voyage log reset.................................... 23-4 waypoint processing .............................13-5
Reference point........................................ 12-5 WP report ...........................................13-19
Remove button......................................... 8-14 WP table report ..................................13-18
Route sidebar ............................................ 3-8

IN-5
Index

Routes Targets page

ASCII file, saving route as................... 17-6 raster charts .........................................9-45
exporting to Excel ............................. AP-72 Thumbwheel
former vector system format route, using .......................................................4-8
loading .............................................. 17-5 wheel incrementing direction .................4-9
former vector system format routes, Tidal page ..............................................15-12
saving ............................................... 17-5 Time setting .............................................25-2
importing from Excel ........................ AP-73 Tracking page
restoring............................................ AP-71 raster charts .........................................9-44
route restoration from ASCII file......... 17-6 vector charts .........................................8-74
Trackpilot
S
accuracy of automatic route steering .28-19
S57 chart description............................ AP-11
activating route steering ....................28-12
Safety message (AIS)
alarms.................................................28-36
creating .............................................. 21-11
alarms for non-acceptance of
reading ............................................... 21-12
route steering ..................................28-13
replying to .......................................... 21-13
alarms in program track mode.............28-6
SENC conversion
arriving to a waypoint ........................28-14
automatic ............................................. 8-19
automatic route steering ......................28-8
cell status window initiation.............. 8-100
collision avoidance in automatic route
failed conversion window in
steering ...........................................28-18
vector chart....................................... 8-22
control panel.........................................28-3
history log ............................................ 8-23
control strategy...................................28-35
history log for vector chart................... 8-23
curved EBL.........................................28-39
progress in vector charts...................... 8-21
errors ..................................................28-38
SENC convert window in vector charts8-25
expected steering performance
vector chart conversion, speeding up... 8-18
(critical failure) ...............................28-28
SENC convert settings dialog box ........... 8-19
expected steering performance
Sensor source for system ......................... 18-8
(going ahead)...................................28-23
Sensors for navigation............................. 19-1
expected steering performance (turns)28-26
Sensors dialog box
GOTO track mode...............................28-10
other page ............................................ 19-5
GOTO track mode preconditions........28-11
speed/course page........................ 19-1, 19-3
GOTO waypoint mode ..........................28-9
Ship and route parameters dialog box .. 19-24
GOTO waypoint mode preconditions..28-11
Ship offcenter
heading control.....................................28-5
raster charts......................................... 9-34
load conditions....................................28-35
vector charts......................................... 8-68
manual steering...........................28-2, 28-5
Sidebar
multiple control panels.......................28-20
autopilot sidebar .................................... 3-9
preconditions for route steering .........28-11
chart legend sidebar............................... 3-9
predictor .............................................28-42
content of................................................ 3-7
program heading change ......................28-5
description.............................................. 3-6
program track.......................................28-6
docking sidebar ...................................... 3-9
programmed turns..............................28-21
route sidebar .......................................... 3-8
radius control........................................28-5
Software version no. .................................. 1-4
route steering alarms .........................28-16
Source data diagram (SDD)....................... 9-4
speed used by......................................28-35
Speed
steering modes......................................28-1
alarm.................................................. 19-12
stopping or modifying pre-enabled
source ................................................... 19-9
route turn........................................28-18
Speed/course page ................................... 19-1
summary of manual steering modes ....28-7
Standard page ......................................... 8-72
track mode............................................28-2
raster charts......................................... 9-40
trackpilot steering ................................28-2
Standby mode............................................ 5-1
Trip counter ...........................................23-13
Symbol page .......................................... 15-10
Troubleshooting .......................................31-2
System configuration
multiple workstations ............................ 1-3 U
single workstation.................................. 1-2 Usage rights
master...................................................18-5
T
multi or slave........................................18-6
T&P notices ............................................... 9-2
plan.......................................................18-7
Target dialog box ..................................... 21-8

IN-6
 Index

User chart dialog box............................... 15-3 Conv. log button....................................8-22

area page............................................ 15-13 conversion to SENC, speeding up.........8-18
line page............................................. 15-11 Convert button.....................................8-26
point page............................................. 15-9 coverage area of base or update
symbol page........................................ 15-10 CD ROM from RENC ........................8-62
tidal page............................................ 15-12 coverage of RENC service, viewing ......8-45
User charts date dependency ...................................8-83
area deletion ...................................... 15-15 deleting group.......................................8-39
area import......................................... 15-16 display base ..........................................8-72
area modification ............................... 15-15 ENC coverage indication ....................... 7-4
changing objects................................. 15-17 introduction ........................................... 8-1
chart points .......................................... 15-4 linked objects ........................................8-94
creating ................................................ 15-8 load button.....................................8-8, 8-58
creating from a log ............................. 23-11 Load history button .....................8-13, 8-21
datum ................................................... 15-6 loading (flow chart)................................ 8-6
displaying........................................... 15-19 loading from CD, floppy disk or LAN .... 8-8
former vector system format charts, mariner page ........................................8-76
saving................................................ 17-5 messages in RENC loading ..................8-66
former vector system format files, message loading....................................8-14
loading .............................................. 17-5 non-compliant vector chart loading......8-17
joining ................................................ 15-18 objects and their information ...............8-89
modes ................................................... 15-2 other page.............................................8-72
monitoring mode .................................. 15-6 permanent warnings ............................. 8-5
new area, adding................................ 15-14 permit CD ROM or floppy disk,
object addition.................................... 15-16 loading...............................................8-63
object deletion .................................... 15-17 product list............................................8-48
object import ...................................... 15-18 publisher notes .....................................8-12
object modification ............................. 15-17 range.....................................................8-68
objects used in ...................................... 15-1 Remove button......................................8-14
planning mode...................................... 15-7 removing chart cell from system ..........8-41
position of corner point ...................... 15-15 removing unnecessary CD ROM
position of object................................. 15-17 catalogue ...........................................8-14
reports................................................ 15-21 RENC authentication ...........................8-42
user chart dialog box............................ 15-3 RENC chart up-to-date status..............8-46
RENC message, loading .......................8-64
V
RENC permits management ................8-49
Vector charts (S57)
RENC public key ..................................8-50
active group, viewing ........................... 8-39
RENC security system..........................8-65
approve until date................................ 8-82
RENC subscription type.......................8-43
base CD ROM from RENC................... 8-54
RENC subscription warning.................8-49
Cancel conv. button.............................. 8-21
route page.............................................8-73
catalogue of cells .................................. 8-29
sailing directions ..................................8-79
CD history button ................................ 8-21
seasonal feature coding ........................8-85
CD ROM dialog box.............................. 8-11
seasonal features ..................................8-80
cell details ............................................ 8-99
SENC conversion..................................8-18
cell status ............................................. 8-98
SENC conversion failed window...........8-22
Cell status button................................. 8-22
SENC conversion history log ................8-23
cell status window to initiate SENC
SENC conversion progress ...................8-21
conversion ....................................... 8-100
SENC conversion, automatic................8-19
Cells button.......................................... 8-26
SENC convert settings dialog box ........8-19
cells from a group, deleting.................. 8-38
SENC convert window..........................8-25
chart center .......................................... 8-68
ship offcenter ........................................8-68
chart choosing by name on display ...... 8-69
standard page .......................................8-72
chart coding.......................................... 8-92
status and viewing dates of chart cells.8-40
chart display settings........................... 8-77
symbology .............................................8-89
chart features, controlling.................... 8-70
tidal tables ............................................8-79
chart legend ........................................... 8-3
TM reset ...............................................8-68
chart material, choosing ...................... 8-68
Tracking page .......................................8-74
chart menu ........................................... 8-27
update CD ROM from RENC ...............8-58
chart service (RENC) ........................... 8-42
vector chart updates .............................8-80
Conv. history button ................... 8-13, 8-21

IN-7
Index

viewing dates .............................. 8-41, 8-80

viewing properties of chart object ........ 8-91
Vector charts (S57) visible navigation
features, controlling ............................ 8-73
View CD ROM content summary button. 8-12
View page ................................................ 16-5
Voyage log
backup copy........................................ 23-10
conditions for........................................ 23-4
creating a user chart from ................. 23-11
resetting .................................... 23-4, 23-11
viewing................................................. 23-3
VRM operation ........................................ 12-3
W
WGS shift
raster charts........................................... 9-5
specifying ............................................... 9-9
value....................................................... 9-8
Wind sensor ........................................... 19-25
Workstations
harmonizing ......................................... 18-4
mode..................................................... 18-9
right as master..................................... 18-5
right as multi or slave.......................... 18-6
usage rights.......................................... 18-5
Y
Yokogawa PT-500
alarms ................................................ 29-11
arrival to waypoint............................... 29-6
automatic route steering...................... 29-3
collision avoidance in automatic
steering............................................. 29-8
control strategy .................................. 29-10
curved EBL ........................................ 29-24
enabled turn, stop or modification ....... 29-9
load conditions ................................... 29-10
predictor............................................. 29-25
route steering activation...................... 29-5
route steering alarms........................... 29-7
speed used by ..................................... 29-10
steering control unit............................. 29-1
steering modes ..................................... 29-2
steering performance, critical failure 29-14
steering performance, various
conditions........................................ 29-12

IN-8